Transcriber’s Note: German words and phrases in the original were set
in Fraktur, also known as Gothic or blackletter typeface. This HTML
version will use the following fonts to approximate this, if you have
them installed:
Textura
Schwabacher
Kabinett-Fraktur
Breitkopf Fraktur
If you prefer not to or are unable to install one of these fonts, the
German words will display in cursive instead.
Clarendon Press Series
LANGE’S GERMAN COURSE
COMPOSITION
HENRY FROWDE, M.A. PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD
LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK
Clarendon Press Series
GERMAN COMPOSITION
A THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL GUIDE
TO THE ART OF TRANSLATING ENGLISH PROSE
INTO GERMAN
BY
HERMANN LANGE LECTURER ON FRENCH AND GERMAN AT THE MANCHESTER TECHNICAL SCHOOL
AND LECTURER ON GERMAN AT THE MANCHESTER ATHENÆUM
THIRD EDITION
With the German Spelling revised to meet the requirements of the
Government Regulations of 1880
Oxford
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS M DCCCC
Oxford
PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS BY HORACE HART, M.A.
PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY
PREFACE.
‘German Composition’ is intended to be a Theoretical and Practical
Guide to the Art of Translating English Prose into good and idiomatic
German. It is arranged in such a manner that students who have
reached the fiftieth Lesson of the ‘German Manual’ may commence and
advantageously use it conjointly with that book. Being complete in
itself, it is likewise adapted for the use of any other students who,
possessing a knowledge of German Accidence and having had some
practice in reading German Prose, wish to acquire the Art of Translating
English Prose into German.
The book is calculated to serve the requirements of the B.A. Examinations
of the London and Victoria Universities, the Competitive
Examinations for the Civil and Military Service, the Oxford and Cambridge
Local Examinations for Senior Students, the Examination of the
College of Preceptors for First Class Candidates, and of similar Public
Examinations—all of which require the candidates to translate English
Prose into German.
I may conscientiously say that I have done all I could to make the
book attractive and useful. The selection of the Extracts has been made
with the greatest care directly from the works of the various authors, and
is the result of many years’ attentive reading and research. The pieces
have been almost exclusively chosen from the works of the best modern
English and American writers, and, it is hoped, will be found as interesting
and instructive as they are well adapted for translation into
German. They represent all the various styles of English Prose Composition,
and contain a great variety of subjects, as a glance at the
various pages will show; whilst the fact that the specimens, with only one
or two exceptions, are no mere fragments, but complete pieces in themselves,
must necessarily add to their value.
The Biographical Sketches of famous men and women, which at
intervals appear in the Notes and are always given in German, form a
special feature of the book. (Comp. S. 127, N. 1; S. 138, N. 12; and
S. 156, N. 1.) They are of various lengths, according to their importance,
and have been written to add to the interest of the work and at the
same time to offer the student some useful material for reading German.
With respect to the help given in the Notes, I may state that I have
proceeded with the utmost consideration and care. The great object
I placed before me was to show, by precept and example, that a good
translation cannot be produced by the mere mechanical process of joining
together a number of words, as the dictionary may offer them at
first sight: but that it requires great thought and analytic power; that
every sentence, nay, almost every word, has to be weighed and considered
with respect to its true bearing upon the text; and that a good
rendering is only possible when the translator has grasped the true
meaning of the passage before him.
I have endeavoured to give neither too little nor too much help, but
whenever I found a difficulty which a student of average ability could
not fairly be expected to overcome, I have stepped in to solve it. For
this purpose I have made use of English equivalents and periphrases and
of Rules and Examples, and in cases where neither of these helps was
considered practicable I have not hesitated to give the German rendering
of the word or passage to be translated. The last mode of procedure,
however, I have adopted only when I found that the dictionaries in
ordinary use were insufficient, as is so frequently the case, and more
especially with respect to idiomatic passages, which it is impossible to
render successfully unless the translator is well versed in both languages,
and at the same time has undergone a thorough training in the Art of
Translating English into German, which the present volume professes to
teach. The plan of indicating the rendering of words and phrases by
means of English equivalents and periphrases must be of evident advantage
to the learner, for it teaches him how to think and analyse, whilst
it leads him to render the word or phrase correctly without giving him
the translation itself.
The Notes of Sections 1 to 150 and the Appendix contain in a concise
and lucid form almost all the rules relating to the German Syntax,
and in most instances these rules have been illustrated by practical
examples and models. The Appendix gives in thirty-seven paragraphs
the Rules referring to the Construction, the use of the Indicative, Subjunctive
(or Conjunctive), and Conditional Moods, which for convenient
reference have been reprinted from my ‘German Grammar,’ and to facilitate
the student’s work I have added an Index to the Grammatical
Rules and Idiomatic Renderings.
In a work containing such a great number of Extracts as the present,
there are, of course, many idioms and passages which may be correctly
translated in various ways, and I can therefore scarcely hope that all
my renderings will meet with the approval of every German scholar.
I may, however, confidently affirm here that I have devoted much thought
and labour to this publication, and that I have tried with all my heart to
make it acceptable to teachers and students alike.
In conclusion I respectfully tender my best thanks to the publishers—
Messrs. W. and R. Chambers,
Edinburgh,
” Chapman and Hall,
}
London,
” Longmans and Co.,
}
” Sampson Low and Co.,
}
” Macmillan and Co.,
}
Mr. Murray,
}
Messrs. T. Nelson and Sons,
}
” Smith, Elder, and Co., and
}
” Stanford and Co.,
}
and to the Editors of—
The Daily News,
}
London,
” Daily Telegraph,
}
” Globe,
}
” Standard, and
}
” Times,
}
for their very kind permission to make use of the Copyright Extracts
in this publication, and for the cordial manner in which they granted
my request.
Page ix contains a few Hints and Directions for using the Book which
I consider of great importance, and to which I beg to draw attention.
A second edition of this volume having been called for, I wish to
express my cordial thanks to the numerous colleagues and friends who
adopted it as a text-book for their classes.
As I am engaged in preparing, besides this book, a third edition
of two other volumes of my ‘German Course,’ and, at the request
of the Delegates of the University Press, also a Key to this volume,
‘German Composition,’ I think the present moment opportune
for introducing the reformed German spelling which, by Government
regulations, has been taught in German schools for the last five or
six years, and is becoming more generally used from year to year
in friendly intercourse, papers, periodicals, literature, and commercial
correspondence. It is but fair that the students of German in this
country should be taught to spell in the simplified way now
universally practised by their German contemporaries. They will at
least have nothing to unlearn then; and, although the present spelling-reform
may be considered but a compromise between the older and the
younger schools, there being a tendency in the younger men to go even
further than their older colleagues in the simplification of our orthography
and to make it still more phonetic and uniform in principle, it will take
a long time before the Government will be moved to make modifications
of any importance in their regulations. I confidently trust that the
great trouble I have bestowed upon the revision of the present edition
will be appreciated by teachers and students alike. It will easily be seen
that the alterations of the orthography in the various books forming this
‘German Course’ must have necessarily entailed a very considerable
additional expense; but the publication having met with much approval
on the part of the public, I was anxious to leave nothing undone in
order to adapt it in every respect to the requirements of the times and to
make it still more useful.
On examination it will be seen that the changes made are not so many
as may be supposed, and that the principles underlying the German
spelling-reform are simple and easy to understand.
At the end of the Appendix will be found a Synopsis of the
principal changes the German spelling has undergone, accompanied
by Examples and a few Exceptions to the general rules.
DIRECTIONS FOR USING THE BOOK. — PLAN OF WORKING. — First Lesson. — Second Lesson. — Third Lesson. — Fourth Lesson.
Each Section should first be prepared for viva voce translation, with the
assistance of the Notes in class; then translated in writing; carefully corrected;
and finally practised, by comparing the English text with the corrected
German version, for a secondviva vocetranslationuntil the student
is able to translate the English text, without the assistance of the
Notes in class, just as readily into correct German as if he were
reading from a German book.
The Grammatical Rules given in the Notes should always be carefully
studied, and the reading of previously given Rules and the various paragraphs
of the Appendix referred to in the text should never be omitted.
The strict and conscientious observance of these directions is
earnestly requested.
The secondviva vocetranslationwithout the assistance of the Notes
in class, as explained above, is especially of the greatest importance to the
student’s progress in the Art of Translating English into German, and is the
only way of mastering all the idiomatic and syntactic difficulties contained in
the Lessons and explained in the foot-notes. It commends itself likewise as
the best way of committing to memory the great number of words and the
various forms of construction occurring in the text, and will gradually, but
surely, lead to the acquisition of a good and thorough German style of
writing.
To be quite clear the Author ventures to propose the following
Prepare for viva voce translation Sections 1 and 2, with the assistance
of the Notes in class.
Translate in Writing Sections 1 and 2; and prepare for viva voce translation
Sections 3 and 4, with the assistance of the Notes in class.
Prepare for fluent and correctviva vocetranslation Sections 1
and 2, without the assistance of the Notes in class, by comparing the English
text with the corrected German version; translate in Writing Sections 3
and 4; and prepare for viva voce translations Sections 5 and 6, with the
assistance of the Notes in class.
Prepare for fluent and correctviva vocetranslation Sections
3 and 4, without the assistance of the Notes in class, by comparing the
English text with the corrected version; translate in Writing Sections 5 and
6; and prepare for viva voce translation Sections 7 and 8, with the assistance
of the Notes in class;
Then proceed in the same way throughout the book.
It need scarcely be added that the quantity of work pointed out
here may be diminished or increased according to circumstances,
and that the longer sections towards the end of the book will in
most cases require the former course.
The frequent attentive study of German literature will be a powerful
auxiliary to this book in imparting the Art of Translating English Prose
into German.
1. Words which, in the English text and in the periphrases of the English text, are
printed in Italics, must not be translated.
2. When two words are separated by a dash (—) in the Notes, they represent the first
and last word of a whole clause in the English text, and the rendering refers to
the clause thus indicated.
3. When two or more words are separated by dots (...) in the Notes, the rendering
refers to those words only.
4. The sign = is used in the meaning of: ‘is equivalent to’.
5. As a rule, the periphrases are given in correct English construction.
Section 1. A GOOD MAXIM [1] .
My maxim is: never to begin[2] a book without finishing[3]
it, never to
consider[4] it finished without[5]
knowing it, and to study[6] it with[7] a whole
mind.—Sir Thomas Buxton.
[2] to begin, an´fangen. When the Infinitive is used
either subjectively or objectively, it is generally preceded by the preposition zu,
and is called Supine. Comp. S. 78, N. 14, 1. To form the Supine Present
of compound separable verbs, like an´fangen, we must place the preposition zu
between the separable prefix and the verb. The Supine must be used here.
See App. § 1.
[3] to finish, beendigen. The Supine is generally used for
rendering the English Gerund (i.e. the verbal in -ing) when the latter is
governed by a preposition, though, sometimes, this form may be rendered by
the help of the subordinative conjunction daß and a finite verb (i.e. one with
a personal termination); as—
He judges without understanding anything
about the matter.
Er urteilt, ohne
etwas von der Sache zu verstehen,
orohne daß er
etwas von der Sache versteht.
Use the Supine, which is always to be placed at the end of the clause.
[4] To consider a thing finished, eine Sache als
beendigt betrachten. The pronoun ‘it’
should begin the clause. See App. § 2.
[5] without — it, ohne mit dem
Inhalt desselben vertraut zu sein.
The following question was[1] put in writing[2]
to a boy[3] in the deaf-and-dumb
school[4] at Paris: “What is eternity?” “It is the life-time
of the Almighty,” was the answer.—Rev. R. K. Arvine.
[1] Here the verb is in the Passive Voice. Remember that the German
Passive Voice is formed by the auxiliary werden. The verb is in the
Passive Voice whenever the subject is suffering the action expressed
by the verb; as—
The castle was built in the year 1609.
Das Schloß wurde
im Jahre 1609 erbaut.
To put a question to a person, einem eine Frage vor´legen.
[2] in writing,
schriftlich, which place before the p. p. (App. § 1).
[4]Taubstummenanstalt,
f.; render ‘in the’ by the gen. of the def. art.; at = in.
Section 3. THE ACTION [1] OF [2] WATER.
The action of water on[3] our food[4]
is very important. There[5] would
be no carrying of food into the system but for the agency of water. It
dissolves everything[6] that[7]
we take[8], and nothing[9] that we take as food
can[10] become nutriment that[11]
is not dissolved in water.—Dr. Lankester.
[2] Use the gen. of the def. art.
The definite article is always required before nouns representing the whole of
a given class, and before abstract nouns taken in a general sense.
[5] This sentence must be construed
in a somewhat different way; say: ‘Without the agency (Vermittelung, f.) of
water, no food (Nahrung, f.) would be conveyed into the body,’ würde dem
Körper keine Nahrung zu´geführt werden.
[7] ‘that’,
here was. The indefinite relative pronoun was is the pronoun generally
required after the indefinite numerals alles, etwas, manches, nichts,
viel, and wenig,
after the indefinite demonstrative pronoun das, and also after a superlative
used substantively; as Das Schönste, was ich habe.
[8] ‘To take’, when used
of food, may be rendered by essen, trinken, or genießen, which latter verb should
be used here.
[9] ‘nothing — food’, may be briefly rendered by ‘keine
genossene Speise‘.
[10] can — nutriment = can serve as nutriment (Ernährung,
f.). The verb dienen requires the prep. zu, which governs the dat. and
must here be contracted with the def. art. into zur: see N. 2.
[11] that — water = before (ehe,
see App. § 17) the same (f.) is dissolved in water.
Section 4. OF [1] WHAT USE IS IT?
When[2] Franklin made his discovery of the identity[3]
of lightning[4] and
electricity[4], it[4] was sneered at[5], and people asked: “Of what use is it?”
To[6]
which his apt reply was: “What is the use of a child?—It may[7]
become a man!”—S. Smiles.
[2] ‘When’, referring to definite time of the
Past, must always be rendered by ‘als’.
[3] of the identity, von der Identität, f.; see S. 3, N. 2.
[4] When the agent from which the action
proceeds is not mentioned, the English Passive Voice is often rendered
by a reflective verb, or by the indefinite pronoun man and a verb in the
Active Voice; as—
At last the book was found.
Endlich {fand sich} das Buch.
{fand man}
Say ‘people (man) sneered at it.’
[5]A. To sneer at something, über etwas
spotten; B. ‘at it’ = there at, darüber. The English pronouns ‘it’, ‘them’,
‘that’, and ‘those’, dependent on a preposition governing in German the
dative or accusative, are generally to be rendered by the pronominal adverb
‘da’ in combination with a corresponding preposition. This is always the
case when ‘it’ and ‘that’, in connection with a preposition are used indefinitely,
and frequently when either of these pronouns refers to a noun
representing an inanimate object or an abstract idea. The letter r is inserted
between the adverb da and the preposition, whenever the latter begins with
a vowel.
[6] To — was = Upon this (Hierauf) he (inverted constr., see
App. § 14) gave the following striking (treffend) answer.
Wealth, after all[2], is[3]
but a relative thing: for he who has[4] little,
and wants[5] still less, is richer than he who has much, and wants still
more.—Rev. C. Cotton.
[2] after all ... but, doch immer nur;
a — thing, etwas Relatives.
[3]When the subject, which
may be preceded by its attributes, occupies the first place in a
principal clause, either the copula or the verb must follow immediately.
When[1] Mendelssohn, on[2]
the first performance of his[3] ‘Elijah’ in
Birmingham, was about[4] to enter[5]
the orchestra, he[6] said laughingly to
one of his friends and critics[7]: “Stick[8]
your claws into me! Don’t
tell[9] me what you like, but[10]
what you don’t like!”—Athenæum.
[6] Since the subordinate clause
precedes the principal clause, the construction of the principal clause must be
inverted, see App. § 15.
[7] to — critics, say ‘to a friend and critic’,
Rezensent, m.
[8] ‘Stick — me!’ This metaphor must be rendered freely
by: Packen Sie mich nur tüchtig an!
[9] tell = say; to like = to please, with
the dat. of the person.
[10] The co-ordinative conjunction ‘but’ must be
rendered by ‘sondern’, when, after a negative statement, the subsequent
clause expresses an idea altogether contrary to that of its antecedent.
Section 7. TO FORGIVE IS [1] TO FORGET.
“I can forgive, but I cannot forget,” is[2] only another way of saying:
“I will not forgive.” A wrong once forgiven[3]
ought[4] to be like[5] a
cancelled note[6],
torn in two and burned up, so[7] that it never can be
shown against the man.—Rev. H. W. Beecher.
[2] is — saying = signifies only in
(mit) other words. ‘Das Wort’ has two plural forms with a different meaning
to each: die Wörter, single, unconnected words; die Worte, words connected
into speech.
[3]A. Whilst the English Perfect Participle (commonly
called Past Participle) is placed both before and after the noun it qualifies,
the German Past Participle used attributively, as a rule, precedes
the qualified noun; as—
We met with a ship bound for Bremen.
Wir trafen ein nach Bremen bestimmtes
Schiff.
B. Clauses containing a Perfect Participle, however, may also be rendered by
the help of a relative pronoun. Thus rendered, the preceding sentence
would read:
Wir trafen ein Schiff, welches nach Bremen bestimmt war;
but the first rendering is certainly more concise than the second, and it is to
be preferred in all cases where the attributive construction would not be too
lengthy. ‘A wrong once forgiven’, say ‘A forgiven wrong’, and mark that:
When Participles are used attributively, and precede the noun they
qualify, they must be inflected like adjectives.
[6] note, Schuldschein, m.; to tear
in two, zerrei´ßen; to burn up, verbren´nen. According to the rule given in N. 3,
the participles of these two verbs have to be placed before the noun ‘note’,
which they qualify.
[7] ‘so — man’, say ‘which never again can be used
against the debtor’. According to the hint given in S. 2, N. 1, the verb is
in the passive voice, and since the clause is a subordinate one, the verbs must
stand at the end of the clause. Place the p. p. first, and the copula (can) last.
Section 8. WHAT IS CAPITAL?
What is capital? Is[1] it what a man has? Is[2]
it counted (App. § 31)
by[3] pounds and pence, stocks[4]
and shares[5], by houses and lands[6]?
No! Capital[7]
is not what a man has, but what a man is. Character[8]
is[9] capital; honour[10]
is capital.—Rev. Dr. Macduff.
[1] ‘Is — has?’ say ‘Does it consist in that which (see S. 3, N. 7) we possess?’
The prep. ‘in’ here governs the dat. Read again S. 4, N. 5, B, and notice
that, when the demonstrative pronouns ‘that’ and ‘those’ are followed
by a relative pronoun, they cannot be rendered by the adverb ‘da’ in combination
with a preceding preposition; as—
We laughed at that which (or at what)
you told us.
[7] ‘Capital — is’. The literal
translation of this sentence would read very awkwardly in German, say ‘Our
capital does not consist in that which we possess, but (S. 6, N. 10) in that
which we are.’
A French minister, who was alike[2] remarkable[3]
for his[4] despatch of
business and his constant[5] attendance at places of public amusement,
being[6] asked how he contrived to combine both objects,
replied: “Simply[7]
by never postponing till to-morrow what should be done[8] to-day.”—S. Smiles.
[3] to be
remarkable for something, sich durch etwas aus´zeichnen.
[4] his — business,
schnelle Erledigung seiner Amtsgeschäfte.
[5] constant — amusement, regelmäßiger
Besuch öffentlicher Vergnügungsorte. The prep. durch, which requires the acc.,
must be repeated at the beginning of this clause.
[6] ‘being — replied’;
this sentence requires an entirely different construction in German, say ‘answered
upon the question, how (App. § 16) he made it possible to combine
both (neuter sing.)’. To combine, vereinigen. The verb ‘to make’ must be
placed in the Present Subjunctive, since the clause contains an indirect question.
Read carefully App. §§ 28 and 30.
[7] Simply — to-morrow, Einfach
dadurch, daß ich nie auf morgen verschiebe.
[8] ‘to do’, here erledigen. See
S. 2, N. 1, and place the verbs in the order pointed out in S. 7, N. 7.
Section 10. ENGLAND UNDER THE RULE [1] OF [2] QUEEN VICTORIA.
The peace, the freedom, the happiness[3], and the order which Victoria’s
rule guarantees[4], are[5]
part of my birthright as an Englishman, and I
bless[6] God for my share[7]!
Where else shall[8] I find such liberty[9] of
action, thought, speech[10], or[11]
laws which protect me so well[12]?—W.
M. Thackeray.
[9]Freiheit
des Handelns. Repeat the article before the two following nouns. In German
the articles, possessive adjective pronouns, and other determinative
words must be repeated when they are used in reference to several nouns
of different gender or number, whilst in English they are only required before
the first noun.
[10] Insert ‘and’ before ‘speech’, Rede, f., and place the
verb finden immediately after that noun.
[11] Substitute the words ‘and
where’ for the word ‘or’.
The weakest living creature[1], by[2]
concentrating his powers on a single
object, can[3] accomplish something. The strongest[4],
by dispersing his
over many, may fail to accomplish anything[5].
The drop, by continually[6]
falling[7], bores[8]
its passage through the hardest rock. The hasty[9]
torrent rushes[10] over it with hideous uproar, and leaves no trace behind.—T.
Carlyle.
[1] creature, Wesen, n.; strengthen the superlative of the adjective by placing
‘aller’ before it, forming one compound expression, analogous to: Die aller
schönste Blume, the finest flower (of all).
[2] ‘by concentrating his powers’, durch Konzentration seiner Kräfte;
to accomplish something, etwas zustande bringen. Use the adverbial expression
‘at least’ before ‘something’, which will give more force to the German
rendering.
[3] The copula ‘can’ must be placed
immediately after the subject and its attributes, as has been pointed out in
S. 5, N. 2.
[4] The strongest — fail, Dem Stärksten hingegen wird es durch
Zersplitterung seiner Kräfte nicht gelingen.
[7] To render ‘falling’, form a noun of the verb ‘fallen’. The German
language makes frequent use of the Infinitive Present of verbs to form
abstract nouns, whilst the English language uses the Verbal in -ing for that
purpose. Such nouns are always of the neuter gender; as das Gehen, going;
das Essen und Trinken, eating and drinking.
[8] to bore one’s passage, sich einen Weg bohren. Place the verb according
to S. 5, N. 2; the adverbial clause ‘by continually falling’ must follow it.
[10] to rush over something, über
etwas hinweg´stürzen; ‘rushes — uproar’, say ‘rushes with hideous (entsetzlich) uproar
(Getöse) over the same.’
Section 12. COOLNESS [1] .
Of the Duke of Wellington’s[2] perfect coolness on[3]
the most trying
occasions. Colonel Gurwood gives[4]
this instance. He was[5] once in
great danger of suffering[6]
ship-wreck. It was bed-time[7] when (S. 4, N. 2)
the captain of the vessel came to him, and said: “It will soon be
all over[8] with us!” “Very well,” answered the Duke, “then I (App. § 14)
need not (App. § 12) take off[9] my boots!”—W. C. Hazlitt.
When[2] certain persons attempted[3]
to persuade Stephen[4], King of
Poland, to constrain[5] some of his subjects, who[6]
were of a different
religion, to embrace[7] his, he said[8]
to them: “I[9] am king of men, and
not of[10] consciences[11].
The[12] dominion of conscience belongs exclusively
to God.”—Rev. R. K. Arvine.
[11] This noun is not used in the plural in German. See S. 3, N. 2.
[12] ‘The — God’, say ‘God alone rules over consciences (sing.)’.
Section 14. HOW HUGH MILLER [1] BECAME A [2] GEOLOGIST.
Hugh Miller’s[3] curiosity[4]
was[5] excited by the remarkable traces of
extinct[6] sea-animals in[7]
the Old Red Sandstone, on which he worked as
a quarryman. He inquired[8], observed, studied, and became a geologist.
“It was the necessity”, said he, “which made[9] me a quarrier, that taught
me to be a geologist.”—S. Smiles.
[1]Hugh Miller wurde am 10ᵗᵉⁿ Oktober 1802 von armen Eltern zu Cromarty in
Schottland geboren. Er arbeitete 15 Jahre als gemeiner Steinbrecher, beschäftigte sich
jedoch während jener Zeit mit litterarischen und wissenschaftlichen Arbeiten, besonders mit
der Geologie, der er ganz neue Bahnen eröffnete. Durch seine Werke hat er sich in der
Wissenschaft einen unsterblichen Namen erworben, und als er am 24ˢᵗᵉⁿ Dezember 1856
starb, verlor Schottland in ihm einen seiner besten Söhne, und die Geologie einen ihrer
beredtesten und ergebensten Lehrer.
[2] Contrary to English construction, the
indefinite article is not used in German in stating the business or
profession of a person; as—
He wants to be a soldier.
Er will Soldat werden.
Exception: When the noun denoting the business or profession is preceded
by an adjective, the indefinite article is used in German, as in English:
His father was a clever physician.
Sein Vater war ein geschickter Arzt.
[3] When a Proper Name is used in the Genitive Case, it is generally
placed before the governing noun, as in English: Schiller’s poems, Schillers
Gedichte.
[9] ‘to
make’ requires here the prep. zu contracted with the def. art.; ‘that — geologist’,
machte mich schließlich auch zum Geologen.
Section 15. EXTREMES MEET [1] .
When Diogenes, during the famous festival[2]
at Olympia[3], saw[4] some
young men of Rhodes arrayed[5] most magnificently, he (App. § 15) exclaimed
smiling: “This is pride!” And when, afterwards[3], he met[6] with
some Lacedæmonians in a mean[7]
and sordid[8] dress, he said: “And this
is also pride!”—Rev. R. K. Arvine.
[2] the festival at Olympia, die Olympischen
Feste. Diese berühmten Feste, auch Olympische Spiele genannt, wurden in jedem fünften
Jahre am ersten Vollmond nach der Sonnenwende (Anfang Juli) bei Olympia zu Ehren
des Zeus gefeiert. Sie dauerten fünf Tage und bestanden in Wettrennen (zu Wagen,
zu Pferd und zu Fuß) und in gymnastischen Spielen aller Art.
[3] Contrary
to English practice, the comma is, as a rule, not used in German
to enclose adverbs or adverbial clauses of time, manner, and place.
[4] ‘to see’, here erblicken, which place after ‘Rhodes’; young men = youths;
‘of’, here aus; Rhodes, Rhodus.
[5] ‘arrayed — magnificently’. Turn
these words into a relative clause, and say: ‘which were most magnificently
(aufs prächtigste) arrayed (schmücken)’, according to the rule given in S. 7, N. 3, B.
[6] to meet with a person, einem begegnen. Place the subject immediately after
‘when’. The Lacedæmonian, der Lazedämonier.
When the Duke of Marlborough, immediately after the battle of Blenheim[2],
observed[3] a soldier leaning[4]
pensively on the butt-end of his
musket, he accosted[5] him thus: “Why so pensive[6],
my friend, after so[7]
glorious a victory?” “It may be glorious[8],” replied the brave fellow,
“but[9] I am thinking that all the
human blood I[10]
have spilled this day[11]
has only[12] earned me fourpence.”—Rev. R. K. Arvine.
[2]Die Schlacht bei Blindheim (Engl. ‘Blenheim’)
wurde am 13ᵗᵉⁿ August 1704 von dem Herzog von Marlborough in Verbindung mit dem
östereichischen Prinzen Eugen gegen die Franzosen gefochten. Blindheim ist ein kleines
bayerisches Dorf bei Höchstädt, an der Donau. Die Schlacht wurde zu gunsten der Verbündeten
entschieden, und der Herzog von Marlborough erhielt für diesen glänzenden Sieg
von der Königin Anna ein prachtvolles Schloß (Blenheim House) bei Woodstock in
Oxfordshire zum Geschenk.
[3] Place the verb ‘observed’ after the noun
‘soldier’.
[4] ‘leaning — musket’. This passage must be changed into
a relative clause, thus: ‘who leant (sich stützen) pensively (gedankenvoll) upon the
butt-end (Kolben, m.) of his musket’, for: Sentences containing a Present
Participle which qualifies a preceding noun or pronoun, are generally
turned into relative clauses; as—
The teacher, noticing the boy’s talent,
applied to the prince on his behalf.
Der Lehrer, welcher
das Talent des Knaben bemerkte, verwendete
sich für ihn bei dem Fürsten.
[8] Make
the word ‘glorious’ emphatic by placing it at the head of the clause, and see
App. § 14. Insert the adverb ‘wohl’ between the subject and the verb ‘be’,
which will render the sentence more idiomatic.
[12] This work has only earned me a shilling, diese Arbeit hat
mir nur einen Schilling eingebracht.
Section 17. THE WORLD IS A LOOKING-GLASS.
We[1] may be pretty certain that persons[2]
whom all the world treat ill,
deserve entirely[3] the treatment they[4]
get. The world is a looking-glass,
and gives[5] back to every man the reflection
of his own face. Frown[6] at
it, and[7]
it will in turn look sourly upon you; laugh[8] at it and with it,
and[9]
it is a jolly, kind companion[10].—W. M. Thackeray.
[1] We — certain. Wir können uns ziemlich sicher darauf verlassen.
[2] persons
— ill = those who have to suffer from everybody.
[5] to give back the reflection = to
reflect, zurück´werfen; every man, jeder; face = image.
[6] to frown at a
person, here ‘einen mürrisch an´blicken’; use the second pers. sing.
[7] and
— you, und sie wird auch auf dich verdrießlich hernie´derschauen.
[8] ‘Laugh at it’
seems to be used here in the sense of: ‘Smile at it’. Say: ‘Smile at it,
laugh with it’, etc. ‘To smile at a person’, here ‘einen freundlich an´blicken’.
[9] ‘and — is’, say: ‘and it will be for thee (dir)’.
A lady applied[2] to the worthy philanthropist[3]
Richard Reynolds on
behalf of a little orphan boy. After he[4]
had (App. § 17) given liberally[5],
she said: “When[6]
he is old enough, I (App. § 15) will teach[7] him to
thank his benefactor.” “Stop[8],”
said the good man, “thou art mistaken[9].
We do not thank the clouds for rain (S. 3, N. 2). Teach[10] him to look
higher, and thank Him[11] who giveth both the clouds and the rain.”—Rev.
R. K. Arvine.
[6] The conjunction ‘when’, used in the sense of ‘whenever’,
and referring to indefinite time, must be rendered by ‘wenn’ (compare
S. 4, N. 2); as—
When (whenever) my old teacher came to Hamburg, he always
stayed with me.
Wenn mein alter
Lehrer nach Hamburg kam, wohnte er stets bei mir.
[7] The verb ‘lehren’, to teach, requires the accusative of the person. Render
the sentence ‘I — benefactor’ by ‘I will teach him to be thankful to his benefactor’.
[11] The pronoun ‘Him’ is here used as a
demonstr. pron.; ‘both ... and’, sowohl ... wie auch; ‘to give’, here = to send.
Section 19. HOW DID CUVIER [1] BECOME A NATURALIST?
When young (S. 10, N. 2) Cuvier was one day[2]
strolling[3] along the
sands near Fiquainville, in Normandy[4],
he observed a cuttle-fish lying[5]
stranded on the beach. He was attracted[6] by the curious object, took
it home to[7] dissect, and[8]
began the study of the mollusca, which ended
in his becoming one of the greatest among natural historians.—S. Smiles.
[1]G. D. Cüvier, berühmter französischer Naturforscher (1769-1832), erhob die vergleichende
Anatomie zuerst zur Wissenschaft.
[2] one day, eines Tages; one
morning, eines Morgens; one evening, eines Abends, etc.
[3] to stroll along
the sands, an der Küste umher´schlendern, ‘near’, here von.
[5] ‘lying — beach’, say ‘which the sea
had washed (spülen) upon the beach’. (See App. § 17.)
[6] to be attracted
by something, sich durch etwas an´gezogen fühlen; ‘object’, here ‘creature’.
[7] The Supine is used to express purpose, and must be employed whenever
the English ‘to’ is used in the meaning of ‘in order to’, or ‘for the purpose
of’; clauses of this sort are generally introduced by the conjunction
‘um’; as—
I will take this animal home to dissect.
Ich will dies Tier mit nach Hause nehmen,
um es zu sezieren.
[8] ‘and — historian’, say ‘began (an´fangen) to study the mollusca, and became
finally (schließlich) one of the greatest natural historians’. Mollusca, Mollusken
or Weichtiere.
Section 20. ON THE CHOICE OF BOOKS [1] .
In literature (S. 3, N. 2) I am fond[2] of confining myself to the best
company, which consists chiefly of old acquaintances[3] with whom I am
desirous of becoming more intimate, and I suspect[4]
that, nine[5] times out
of ten, it is more profitable[6], if not more agreeable, to read an old book
over again, than[7] to read a new one for the first time.—Lord Dudley.
[2]A. The verbs ‘to be fond of’ and
‘to like’ are often rendered by the auxiliary verb of mood ‘mögen’, either
with or without the adverb ‘gerne’ or ‘gern’ (willingly), which is used to intensify
its signification; as—
I am very fond of the German language.
Ich mag die
deutsche Sprache sehr gern.
Are you fond of walking?
Mögen Sie
gerne spazieren gehen?
I don’t like this child.
Ich mag dies
Kind nicht.
B. But the adverb gerne or gern
in itself denotes liking and fondness,
and is therefore the general translation of the verbs ‘to be fond of’ or ‘to
like’ when used with the infinitive of other verbs; as—
I like to dance.
Ich tanze gern.
We are fond of confining ourselves to a few old books.
Wir beschränken uns gern
auf einige wenige alte Bücher.
Construe the above clause accord. to the last example given.
[3] acquaintances
= friends; I am desirous of becoming = I wish to become (App. § 19). The
insertion of the adverb ‘noch’ before the comparative will greatly improve the
rendering of this clause.
[5] ‘nine times
out of ten’ may be briefly rendered by the adverbial expression meistenteils,
which place immediately after the subject of the subordinate clause.
[6] profitable,
nützlich; ‘if — agreeable’, say ‘if not even (gar) more agreeable’; ‘over
again’, here noch einmal.
[7] ‘than — time’, say ‘than to occupy oneself
(sich beschäftigen) with a new one’. This periphrase is necessary to avoid a
monotonous repetition in German.
Section 21. AN APPARENTLY INSIGNIFICANT FACT [1] OFTEN [2] LEADS TO GREAT RESULTS.
When Galvani[3] discovered that a frog’s leg[4]
twitched when placed in
contact with different metals, it[5] could scarcely have been imagined that
so apparently insignificant a fact would ever lead (App. § 17) to important
results. Yet therein lay the germ of[6]
the Electric Telegraph, which[7] binds
the intelligence of continents together, and probably before many years
elapse will[8] “put[9]
a girdle round the globe.”—S. Smiles.
[9] to
put a girdle round the globe, einen Gürtel rings um die Erde ziehen. ‘Rings um
die Erde zieh’ ich einen Gürtel in viermal zehn Minuten.’ Puck, Sommernachtstraum.
Section 22. OATS [1] .
Oats are (S. 2, N. 1) chiefly used whole[2]
as food for horses. Ground[3]
into meal, they are used in some countries (especially in Scotland) for[4]
making porridge and cakes. As[5] a plant, it is extremely hardy, and
grows where neither wheat nor barley could[6]
be made productive. For[7]
this reason it is a favourite crop in mountainous countries and moist
climates—for example in Scotland and Wales. It (S. 5, N. 2) also
grows luxuriantly in Australia, Northern[8] and Central Asia, and in
North America.—Nelson’s Readers.
[1]Der Hafer, which noun is never used in the plural.
[2] whole, ungemahlen;
to use, benutzen; food for horses, Pferdefutter, n.
[3] Ground — meal,
zu Mehl vermahlen; they — used = one uses (gebrauchen) it (m.). see S. 4, N. 4;
‘country’, here Gegend.
[4] for — cakes, um Mehlsuppe und Kuchen
daraus zu machen.
[5] ‘As — hardy’, say ‘The plant is extremely hardy
(kräftig)’.
The blossoms of Spring are as brief[2] as they are
beautiful. For[3]a
short time they embellish the country, spreading[4], as it were, a bridal veil
over every[5] tree and hedge. It seems, indeed[6],
as if Nature had given
them existence only to (S. 19, N. 7) show their worth, and then to destroy
them. Yet[7] they are “fair pledges of a fruitful tree,” and teach us
the solemn[8] lesson—that[9]
everything lovely on earth is destined soon to
perish, and[10] like them to glide into the grave.—Rev. E. M. Davies.
[9] that — perish, daß alles Schöne auf Erden der Vergänglichkeit
geweiht ist.
[10] ‘and — grave’, say ‘and like the blossoms must (App. § 18)
glide (sinken) into an early grave’.
Section 24. THE WINKING [1] EYELID.
The[2]
object of winking is a very important one. An outside[3] window
soon (S. 5, N. 2) gets soiled[4]
and dirty, and a careful shopkeeper[5] cleans
his windows every morning. But our eye-windows must[6] never have so
much as a speck or spot upon them; and the winking eyelid[7] is the busy
apprentice who, not once a day, but[8]
all the day, keeps the living glass[9]
clean; so that, after all[10],
we are little worse off than the fishes, who[11]
bathe their eyes and wash their faces every moment.—Prof. G. Wilson.
[10]genau betrachtet; the subject should
be placed immediately after the conjunction ‘that’; little = not much; to be
badly off, schlimm daran sein.
[11] who — moment, welche Augen und Gesicht jeden
Augenblick baden und waschen.
Section 25. A GOOD EXAMPLE.
It is reported that, one day (S. 19, N. 2), the[1] two great philosophers
Aristippus[2] and Æschines had fallen at variance[3].
The[4] following day,
however, Aristippus came to[5]
Æschines, and said: “Shall[6] we be friends?”
“Yes, with[7]
all my heart!” answered Æschines. “Remember[8],” continued
Aristippus, that[9] though I am your elder, yet I sought for peace.
“True[10],” replied Æschines, “and for this[11]
I will always acknowledge
you to be the more worthy man, for[12] I began the strife, and you the
peace.”—Rev. J. Burroughs.
[1] Place the subject immediately after the conj. ‘that’.
[2]Aristippus
aus Cyrene wurde (380 v. Chr.) Stifter der cyrenaischen Philosophenschule, welche die
Lehre aufstellte, daß das höchste Glück des Menschen im sinnlichen und geistigen Vergnügen
zu suchen sei. Aristippus war ein Zeitgenosse des Socrates und der einzige Philosoph
seiner Zeit, der sich seine Vorträge mit Geld bezahlen ließ. Äschines war ein Nebenbuhler
und Gegner des Demostenes, wurde (389 v. Chr.) zu Athen geboren, lebte später zu
Rhodus und siedelte endlich nach Samos über, wo er (314 v. Chr.) starb.
[11]deshalb, adv. (App. § 14). He acknowledged
you to be the more worthy man (of us two), Er erkannte dich als den Würdigeren
von uns beiden an; construe according to this example, and supply the expletive
‘auch’ after the object ‘you’.
[12]denn ich war der erste zum Streit, und du
zum Frieden.
Section 26. DESCRIPTION OF A GLACIER.
I must now explain to you[1]
what a glacier is. You see before you[2]
thirty or forty mountain-peaks, and between these peaks what[3] seem to
you frozen rivers. The snow, from[4] time to time melting and dripping
down the sides of the mountain, and congealing in the elevated hollows
between the peaks, forms a half-fluid mass, a river of ice[5], which is called
(S. 4, N. 4) a glacier. As[6] the whole mass lies upon a slanting surface,
and is not entirely solid throughout, it[7] is continually pushing, with a
gradual but imperceptible motion, down[8] into the valley below.—Mrs.
Beecher Stowe.
[2] Place the words ‘before you’ after the
object.
[3]glaubst du zu Eis erstarrte Flüsse zu erblicken.
[4] which
(App. § 16) from time to time melts, drips down on the mountain-sides (Bergabhänge),
and congeals (gefrieren), etc., see S. 16, N. 4. Supply the adverb
wieder before the verb ‘congeals’. The elevated hollow, die höher gelegene Felsspalte.
[6] As = Since, da (App. § 16); to be entirely
solid throughout, durch und durch fest sein.
[7] it — pushing, so senkt sie sich
fortwährend; with a ... but, mit einer zwar ... doch.
[8] down — below, in
das unten liegende Thal hinab.
Section 27. WITHOUT [1] PAINS NO GAINS.
It was one of the characteristic qualities of Charles James Fox[2],
that[3]
he was thoroughly pains-taking in all that he did. When[4] appointed
Secretary of State, being[5] piqued at some observation as to his bad
writing, he actually took[6] a writing-master, and wrote copies like a
schoolboy until he had sufficiently improved himself. Though[7] a corpulent
man, he[8]
was wonderfully active at picking up tennis-balls, and[9]
when asked how he contrived to do so, he playfully replied: “Because[10]
I am a very pains-taking man.” The same accuracy which he bestowed
upon trifling matters[11], was displayed by him in things of greater importance;
and[12] he acquired his reputation by “neglecting nothing.”—S. Smiles.
[2]Ich möchte vorschlagen zu übersetzen: ‘of
the famous Ch. J. Fox’, weil dadurch das Verhältnis des Genitivs ganz klar ausgedrückt
wird. Charles James Fox (1749-1806) ward schon 1768 Mitglied des
Unterhauses, 1772 Lord des Schatzes, und bildete 1783 mit North und Portland ein
Ministerium, welches jedoch bald dem Ministerium Pitt weichen mußte. Er begann
darauf mit Burke und andern eine großartige parlamentarische Opposition gegen Pitt
und kämpfte von 1792-97 fast allein gegen eine starke Majorität. Im Jahre 1806,
kurz vor seinem Tode, wurde er mit Granville nochmals ans Staatsruder berufen.
[3]daß er sich in allem, was er that, die größte Mühe gab.
[4] When he was
appointed (see N. 7). The verbs machen (to make), ernennen (to appoint),
and erwählen (to choose, to elect), and other verbs denoting choosing or
appointing, require in German the prep. zu contracted with the def. art.,
whilst in English they govern two Nominatives in the Passive Voice; as—
Der Freund meines Vaters ist zum
Abgeordneten erwählt worden.
My father’s friend has been elected a member of Parliament.
[5] being — writing. This clause must be rendered in an altogether different
form; let us say ‘and felt hurt by an observation as to (über) his bad hand-writing’.
To feel hurt by something, sich durch etwas verletzt fühlen. The p. p.
must be placed?
[6] ‘to take’, here engagie´ren;
‘actually’, here faktisch
(see App. § 15); to write copies, sich im Schönschreiben üben; improved himself
= improved his hand-writing.
[7] Though he was. Grammatical distinctness,
as a rule, requires that the subject and copula, which after certain
conjunctions are so frequently omitted in English, should be clearly expressed
in German.
[8] When a subordinate clause, beginning with
one of the conjunctions da, obgleich,
weil, and wenn, precedes a principal
clause, which is often done for the sake of emphasis, the principal clause is
generally introduced by the adverbial conjunction so (so, thus, therefore); as—
Da es regnet,
so können (App.
§ 15) wir nicht ausgehen.
As it is raining, we cannot go out.
‘He — balls’, so war er im Auffangen der Bälle beim Tennisspiele doch merkwürdig
gewandt.
[9] ‘and — so’, say ‘and when (S. 18, N. 6) one asked him how
he did (machen) it’. The verb machen should be used in the Pres. Subj., since
the clause contains an indirect question (App. §§ 28 and 30). Playfully,
scherzend.
[11] trifling matters,
Kleinigkeiten; ‘was — importance’, say ‘he showed also in more important
matters’ (Angelegenheiten).
[12] and — nothing, und er erwarb sich seinen Ruf
dadurch, daß er nichts für zu gering erachtete.
Section 28. THE MAGNA CHARTA [1] .
The great-grandsons of[2] those who had fought under William, and
the great-grandsons of those who had fought under Harold, began to[3]
draw near to each other in friendship, and the first pledge of their reconciliation
was the[4] Great Charter, won[5]
by their united exertions, and
framed for their common benefit. Here commences the history of the
English nation. The history of the preceding events[6] is the history of
wrongs inflicted[7]
and sustained by various tribes, which, indeed[8], all
dwelt on English ground, but[9] which regarded each other with aversion
such as[10]
has scarcely ever existed between communities separated[11] by
physical barriers.—Macaulay, History of England.
[1]Die ‘Magna Charta’ ist der am 19ᵗᵉⁿ Juni 1215 dem König Johann ohne Land
abgerungene Staatsgrundvertrag, welcher als Grundlage der englischen Verfassung gilt.
[2] ‘of those — Harold’. These two clauses are best rendered in a contracted
form, thus: ‘of the men who had fought under W. and H.’
[3] to draw
near to each other, sich einander nähern; in friendship, freundschaftlich, adv.
[5] The two clauses containing the two p. ps. must
be turned into one contracted relative clause, as explained in S. 7, N. 3, B.
Use the verbs in the Impf. of the Passive Voice. To frame, entwerfen.
[7] The two p. ps. qualifying ‘wrongs’ (Unbilden) should be
placed before that noun, as explained in S. 7, N. 3, A; of, von; to inflict, verüben;
to sustain, erleiden; by — tribes, verschiedener Volksstämme.
[9] but — aversion = but (jedoch) showed such an
aversion against one another. The Article, when used in connection with
adjectives and adverbs, stands in German generally before those words: such
an aversion, einen solchen Widerwillen. Since the clause to be translated
is in reality but a part of the preceding relative clause, which it completes, the
verb must be placed?
[10] such as, wie, after which supply the pron. er,
to
give more distinctness to the rendering; to exist, bestehen; communities =
nations.
[11]welche durch natürliche Grenzen von einander getrennt sind.
Section 29. HONESTY.
Mr.[1]
Denham had been in business at Bristol, had failed[2], compounded,
and gone[3] to America. There[4],
by a close application to business as
a merchant, he acquired a plentiful[5] fortune in a
few years. Returned[6]
to England, he invited his old creditors to an entertainment, at which he
thanked them for the easy[7]
terms (S. 16, N. 10) they had favoured[8] him
with, and, though the guests had expected nothing but a good treat,
every[9] man, at the first remove, found to his astonishment a cheque
under his plate for[10] the full amount of the unpaid remainder, with
interest.—Dr. B. Franklin.
[1] ‘Mr. — Bristol’, translate ‘Mr. D. had had a business at (in) B.’, and
place the object after the adverbial circumstance of place.
[2] to fail (in
business) fallieren; to compound, accordieren. Verbs from the Latin with the
termination ieren do not admit of the prefix or augment ge in the Past Participle,
but follow in all other respects the weak or modern form of conjugation.
[3] Say ‘and was gone to America’. The verb gehen
is always construed with
sein, which auxiliary is especially used with Intransitive Verbs denoting
a Passive State of the subject, a change from one State into another, or a
Motion, if the place to which the motion is directed, or from which it proceeds,
is either expressed or understood.
[4] The words ‘he acquired’ (erlangen)
should, in an inverted form (App. § 14), follow the adverb ‘There’; ‘by —
merchant’, durch unablässige kaufmännische Thätigkeit.
[5] plentiful = great.
For the position of the object see App. § 9.
[6]Nach England zurückgekehrt;
entertainment = meal; at which, wobei.
[8] to favour a person with something, einem etwas gewähren (v. tr.); nothing
but, nur; treat, Schmaus, m.
[9] every — plate, fand doch ein jeder nach dem
ersten Gange zu seinem Erstaunen unter dem Teller einen Wechsel vor.
[10] for — interest
= which was issued (ausstellen) for (auf) the full amount of the remaining
(rückständig) debt with (nebst) interest.
Section 30. FORMATION OF A CORAL-ISLAND. I.
It seems to me, that[1] when the animalcules, which form the corals at
the bottom[2] of the ocean, cease to live, their[3]
structures adhere to each
other, by virtue either of the glutinous remains within, or of some property
in salt-water. The interstices being[4] gradually filled up with sand
and[5] broken pieces of coral washed by the sea, which also adhere, a mass
of rock is at length formed. Future[6] races of these animalcules erect
their habitations upon the rising[7] bank, and[8]
die, in their turn to elevate
this monument of their wonderful labours.
[1] ‘that when the animalcules ... cease to live’. This clause may be briefly
rendered by saying: ‘that after the death (Absterben, n.) of the animalcules’.
To translate the last noun, form a diminutive of Tier.
[3] ‘their — salt-water’. Use the following order of words for rendering this
passage: ‘their little houses (dim. of Haus) either through the in them contained
glutinous remains (Überreste) or through some (irgend eine) property
of the salt-water held together are (Pres. of the Passive Voice)’.
[4] When
the Present Participle is used to denote a logical cause from which we
may draw an inference, it must, by the help of the conjunction ‘da’, be
changed into a finite verb, i.e. one with a personal termination, thus:—
The interstices being gradually filled up with sand,
a mass of rock is at length formed.
Da nun die Zwischenräume allmählich mit
Sand ausgefüllt werden, so wird
aus dem Ganzen endlich eine Felsenmasse gebildet.
The tense in which the verb is to be used, must always be determined by the
context.
[5] and — sea, und mit vom Meere herangespülten zerbröckelten Korallen;
it is a matter of course that the verbs must follow this passage.
[7] ‘to rise’, here sich erheben. Present Participles
used attributively are inflected like adjectives. Bank = reef.
[8] ‘and
die — labours’, translate ‘and die to (S. 19, N. 7) contribute also in their turn
(ihrerseits) to the elevation (Erhöhung, f.) of this monument of their admirable
work (Arbeit, f.)’.
Section 31. FORMATION OF A CORAL-ISLAND. II.
The[1]
new bank is not long in being visited by sea-birds. Salt-plants[2]
take root upon it (S. 4, N. 5, B), and[3] a soil is being formed. A cocoa-nut,
or the[4] drupe of a pandanus is thrown on[5]
shore. Land-birds
visit it[6] and deposit the seeds of shrubs and trees. Every high tide,
and still more[7]
every gale, adds something to the bank. The[8] form of
an island is gradually assumed, and last of all[9] comes man (S. 3, N. 2)
to (S. 19, N. 7) take possession.—M. Flinders.
[1] The new coral-reef is (S. 2, N. 1) now soon visited by (von)
sea-birds.
[6] it = the same, to agree with its antecedent ‘shore’; to deposit,
zurück´lassen; seeds, Same, m., used in the sing.
[7] still more =
especially; adds — bank, trägt etwas zur Vergrößerung des Riffs bei.
[8] The
latter (dieses) gradually assumes (an´nehmen) the form of an island. The adv.
‘gradually’ may be made emphatic; see App. § 14.
[9]zuletzt; ‘to — possession’
= to take possession of the same.
Section 32. REYNARD [1] CAUGHT.
A fox observed[2]
some fowls at roost, and wished to[3] gain access to
them by smooth speeches. “I have charming news[4]
to tell you,” he[5]
said. “The animals have concluded[6] an agreement of universal peace
with one another. Come down and celebrate[7]
with me this decree[8].”
An old cock, who was well on his guard, looked[9] cautiously all around,
and the fox, perceiving (S. 16, N. 4) this, inquired[10] the reason. “I was
only observing[11]
those two dogs which are coming this way[12],” replied
the cock. Reynard prepared[13]
to set off. “What[14],” cried the cock,
“have not the animals concluded an agreement of universal peace?”
“Yes,” returned the fox, “but those dogs (S. 5, N. 2) perhaps have not
yet[15] heard of it (S. 4, N. 5, B).”—Anonymous.
[2] to observe = to see; at roost,
auf ihrer Stange sitzen.
[3] to — speeches, durch glatte Worte ihrer habhaft zu
werden.
[4] charming news = something pleasant. To render ‘you’ use
the dat. of the persnl. pron. of the 2nd pers. pl. For the construction see
App. § 7.
[5] The words indicating the speaker, after a quotation, must
be rendered in an inverted form (see App. § 13).
[6] to conclude,
ab´schließen, str. v. tr.; the agreement of universal peace, der allgemeine Friedensvertrag;
to come down, herun´terkommen; supply the adv. also between the verb
and the separable particle.
[9] to look
all around, sich nach allen Seiten um´sehen.
[10] to inquire the reason, sich nach
der Ursache erkundigen.
[11]I was observing = I observed (beobachten).
Which are coming = which come. The English compound forms of the
verb with the auxiliary and the present participle, and of the verb ‘to do’
with the infinitive (I do come = I come. I did come = I came), must be
rendered by the corresponding simple forms.
Section 33. THE [1] MEANS OF CONVEYANCE IN THE TIME OF CHARLES II. I.
Heavy articles[2] were (S. 2, N. 1) in the time of Charles II generally
conveyed from place to place by waggons[3]. The[4]
expense of transmitting
them was[5] enormous. From London to[6]
Birmingham the charge
was £7 a[7]
ton, and from London to Exeter £12, which[8] is a third more
than was afterwards charged[9] on turnpike-roads, and fifteen times more
than is now demanded by[10]
railway companies. Coal[11] was seen only
in districts where it was produced[12], or[13]
to which it could be carried by
sea, and[14] was, indeed, always known in the South of England by the
name of sea-coal.
[1]Die Beförderungsmittel zur Zeit Karls des Zweiten.
[4] ‘The — them’, may be briefly
rendered by the compound noun ‘Die Transportkosten’. It may here be pointed
out that the German language lends itself more easily than any other living
language to the formation of compound expressions. Many advantages
result from this adaptability of the language to express in one single term
which, otherwise, would require a number of words; but the greatest of these
advantages seems to me to lie in the power it gives us to avoid the too frequent
use of the Genitive, a power which, if rightly wielded, will impart great vigour,
conciseness, and elegance to the student’s style of writing.
[13] or — sea,
oder wohin sie verschifft werden konnten.
[14] Say ‘and it was (sie wurden) in the
South of England therefore (daher auch) only called sea-coal (Schiffskohlen)’.
Section 34. THE [1] MEANS OF CONVEYANCE IN THE TIME OF CHARLES II. II.
The rich[1] (S. 5, N. 2) commonly travelled in[2] their own iron carriages
with at least four horses. A[3] coach and six is in our time never seen,
except as part of some procession. The frequent mention, therefore, of
such equipages[4]
in old books is likely to mislead us. We[5] attribute to
magnificence what was really[6] the effect of[7]
disagreeable necessity.
People[8]
in the time of Charles II travelled with six horses, because[9]
with a smaller number there was danger of sticking[10] fast in the mire.—Abridged
fromMacaulay’s History of England.
[1]Adjectives used as nouns are declined as they would be if the noun,
which is understood, were to follow them. They are always written with a
capital initial.
[2]in ihren eigenen mit wenigstens vier Pferden bespannten eisernen
Kutschen.
[3] ‘A — seen’. This clause must be construed thus: ‘Except
(Außer) in processions a coach and six (eine sechsspännige Kutsche, see App. § 14)
is now never seen’. Supply the words ‘bei uns’ before the p. p.
[4]Staatsfuhrwerke;
therefore ... is likely to mislead us = can therefore easily mislead
(irre führen) us. The object ‘us’ must be placed immediately after the copula
‘can’.
[9] because
... there was danger, weil man ... Gefahr lief; ‘small’, here gering.
[10] to
stick fast, stecken bleiben. Use the Supine, for: When the English Gerund
(i.e. the verbal in -ing) is governed by a noun, a verb, or an adjective, it is
generally rendered by the Supine. Comp. S. 78, N. 14. Examples:
He possesses the gift of speaking well.
Er besitzt die Gabe gut
zu sprechen.
Do not begin talking!
Fangen Sie nicht an zu
sprechen!
Section 35. SIR [1] WILLIAM HERSCHEL.
When[2] pursuing his musical avocations in the pump-room at Bath,
Sir William Herschel had a small workshop close[3] at hand, and when
(S. 18, N. 6) the[4] exacting loungers in the pump-room admitted of a
pause in the music, he slipped off[5] to (S. 19, N. 7) complete the polishing
of a speculum[6], or the grinding[7]
of a lens. Scarcely, however, had he
heard the signal[8], when[9]
he was ready to snatch up his instrument and[10]
to be the first in the orchestra. Thus[11] he gathered up the fragments of
time, and this made (S. 27, N. 4) him at last the friend of monarchs[12],
and the first[13] of astronomers.—Rev. Dr. Leitch.
[1]Friedrich Wilhelm Herschel (später Sir William Herschel)
wurde
am 15ᵗᵉⁿ Nov. 1738 in Hannover geboren. Er kam als Musiker nach England, beschäftigte
sich jedoch in seinen Mußestunden eingehend mit der Astronomie, welcher er sich
endlich ganz widmete. Er entdeckte mit selbst verfertigten Spiegelteleskopen von bis dahin
unbekannter Größe den Uranus, zwei Saturnsmonde, zahlreiche Doppelsterne, Sternhaufen
und Nebelflecken, und lieferte höchst wichtige Beobachtungen über die Planeten. Diese
Entdeckungen, welche der Welt durch die von der königlichen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften
veröffentlichten Journale mitgetheilt wurden, machten ihn bald zum berühmten Manne.
Er wurde von dem Könige Georg III zum königlichen Astronomen ernannt und genoß
Ehre, Ruhm und Wohlstand, als er am 25ˢᵗᵉⁿ Aug. 1822 zu Slough bei Windsor starb.
Es ist unmöglich, hier nicht auch zugleich seiner geliebten Schwester Karoline zu
gedenken, welche mit seltener Hingebung sich den Bestrebungen und Arbeiten des älteren
Bruders anschloß und so nicht wenig zu den glänzenden Erfolgen dieses großen und höchst
merkwürdigen Mannes beitrug. Sie starb im Jahre 1848 in ihrer Vaterstadt Hannover.
Ihre unlängst veröffentlichten Memoiren und Briefe verdienen im höchsten Grade das
allgemeine Interesse, welches sie nicht allein in Deutschland, sondern auch in England
hervorgerufen haben.
[2] This passage requires a different construction in
German, thus: ‘When Sir W. H. was still officiating (fungie´ren, see S. 32, N. 11)
in the pump-room (Trinkhalle) at Bath as a member of the band (Kapelle), he
had’, etc.
[3] close at hand, ganz in der Nähe, which place before the
object.
[4]die vielbegehrenden Müßiggänger;
to admit of something, etwas
gestatten, w. v. tr.
Enveloping[2]
this solid globe of ours are two oceans, one[3] partial, and
the other universal. There is the[4]
ocean of water, which has[5] settled
down into all the depressions[6]
of the earth’s surface[7], leaving[8]
dry above
it all the high lands, as mountain-ranges, continents, and islands; and[9]there is an ocean of air, which enwraps[10] the whole in one transparent
mantle.
Through[11] the bosom of that ocean, like fishes with their fins (App.
§ 14), birds[12]
and other winged creatures swim; whilst man[13] and other
mammalia creep like[14]
crabs at the bottom of this aerial sea[15].
[2] Say ‘Two oceans envelop (umgeben) our solid globe
(Erdkugel).
[3] the one partial (teilweise)
and the other universal (ganz).
The subsequent sentence is best introduced by a colon (:), which we use to
direct attention to what is following. The words ‘There is’ must then be
omitted.
[7] To render ‘of the earth’s surface’, form a
compound noun by combining the corresponding German terms of the nouns
‘earth’ and ‘surface’.
A. When the component parts of Compound Nouns are substantives, we
combine them often without any connecting link; as—das Lasttier, beast of
burden; das Stadtviertel, the quarter of a town, ward.
B. Neither do we require a connecting link for the formation of Compound
Nouns the first component of which is an adjective or a particle;
as—die Großmutter, grandmother; das Unglück, misfortune; der Urquell, fountain-head.
C. The Gender of Compound Nouns (with the exception of a few compounds
with Mut, m.) is determined by the last component, which is always
a noun.
[8] ‘leaving — islands’. This passage may be rendered thus: ‘so that all the
high lands (Erhöhungen), as (wie) mountain-ranges, etc. ... rise dry above the
same; to rise, sich erheben.
The air-ocean, which everywhere[1] surrounds the earth, and feeds and
maintains it, is even[2] more simple, more grand, and more majestic than
the[3] ‘world of waters’; more[4]
varied and changeful in its moods of
storm and calm, of ebb and flow, of brightness and gloom. The[5] atmosphere
is, indeed, a wonderful thing, a most perfect example of the
economy of nature. Deprived of[6] air, no animal would live, no plant
would grow, no flame would burn, no[7] light would
be diffused. The[8]
air, too, is the sole medium of sound. Without it, mountains might[9] fall,
but[10]
it would be in perfect silence. Neither whisper[11]
nor thunders[12]
would[13] ever be heard.—Maury, Physical Geography of the Sea.
[3]jene mächtige
Wasserwelt, after which put a full stop and begin a new sentence.
[4] This
passage may be construed thus: ‘It offers a greater variety (Mannigfaltigkeit)
and changeableness in the transitions from storm to (zu) calm, from ebb to
flow, and from light to gloom (Dunkel, n.)’. The article (which, if practicable,
should be contracted with the preceding preposition) must be used with the
last six nouns, see S. 3, N. 2.
[5]Der Luftkreis ist in der That höchst wunderbar
und gewährt ein vollendetes Beispiel von dem haushälterischen Wesen der Natur.
[6] Without (App. § 14); would = could, Impf. Subj.
[13] ‘would — heard’, use the active
voice with the indef. pron. man.
Section 38. CHEERFUL [1] CHURCH-MUSIC.
When the poet Carpani inquired[2]
of his friend Haydn[3] how it happened[4]
that his church-music was[5] always so cheerful, the great composer
made[6]the following beautiful reply:
“I cannot make it otherwise[7],” said he, “I[8]
write according to the
thoughts I feel. When[9] I think of God, my heart is so full of joy that
(App. § 16) the[10] notes dance and leap, as it were, from my pen; and
since God has given me a cheerful heart, it[11]
will be pardoned me that[12]
I serve him with a cheerful spirit.”—Rev. R. K. Arvine.
[3]Joseph Haydn (geb. den 31ˢᵗᵉⁿ
März 1732 zu Rohrau in Östreich, † den 31ˢᵗᵉⁿ Mai 1809 in Wien) bildete sich durch
eigenes Studium in der Musik aus und lebte dann namentlich als Kapellmeister des
Fürsten Esterhazy in Wien. Er ist der Schöpfer der Symphonie und des Streichquartetts;
auch hat er sich durch die Begründung der neueren Instrumentationskunst ein
besonderes Verdienst erworben. Seine Werke sind ebenso zahlreich, wie mannigfaltig;
durch die beiden Oratorien: ‘Die Schöpfung’ (1799) und ‘die Jahreszeiten’ (1801)
hat er jedoch seinen Namen mit ehernen Lettern in die Geschichte der Kunst eingetragen.
[4] Use the Pres. Subj. of kommen,
since the clause contains an indirect question;
see App. §§ 28 and 30.
[5] was — cheerful, stets einen so fröhlichen
Charakter trage.
[6] to make a reply, eine Antwort geben; ‘beautiful’, here
sinnig; for the construction see App. § 15.
[7]anders; for the place of the
negation see App. § 12.
[8] Translate the passage ‘I write — feel’ briefly
by saying: ‘I write just as (so wie) I feel’, since it would not be in accordance
with the genius of the German language to render the sentence in a literal
way. (Gedanken kann man nicht fühlen.)
[9]Denke ich an Gott, so ist, etc.;
full of, voller.
[10] Construe this clause after the following model:
The notes danced and leapt, as it were, from his pen.
Die Noten tanzten und hüpften
ihm gleichsam aus
der Feder.
Section 39. OUR INDUSTRIAL [1] INDEPENDENCE DEPENDS UPON OURSELVES.
Truer[2] words were never uttered than those spoken by Mr. Dargan,
the Irish railway-contractor, at a public meeting in Dublin.
“I have[3] heard a great deal[4],”
he said, “about the independence that
we are[5] to get from this or that source, yet[6]
I have always been deeply
impressed with the conviction, that our industrial independence depends
upon ourselves. Simple[7]
industry and careful exactness would[8] be the
making of Ireland. We have, it[9] is true, made a step in advance, but perseverance
is[10] indispensably necessary for eventual success.”—S. Smiles.
[2] A greater truth than that which Mr. D., the Irish
railway-contractor (Eisenbahn-Unternehmer), spoke (aus´sprechen) at (in) a public
meeting in (zu) Dublin, has never been uttered.
[3] The words ‘he said’
should follow here; see S. 32, N. 5.
[5] are
to get, erlangen sollen; for the construction see App. § 16; from, aus.
[6] yet
I have always had the firm conviction. Render ‘to have’ here by hegen.
[7]schlicht; ‘industry’, here Fleiß,
m.; careful, streng; exactness, Pflichterfüllung, f.
[8] would establish (begründen)
Ireland’s prosperity (Wohlstand, m.).
[9] it is
true, zwar; see S. 15, N. 3; ‘to make’, here thun; in advance, vorwärts.
[10] Here follow the words ‘for (zu, contracted with the def. art.) eventual
(eventuell) success’.
Section 40. ENGLAND’S [1] TREES.
The principal native[2] trees are the[3]
oak, ash, elm, poplar, aspen,
birch, larch, alder, hawthorn, hazel, and willow. The beech, maple,
horse-chestnut[4], Spanish chestnut[5],
walnut[6], sycamore, acacia, weeping
willow, cedar, and Lombardy poplar have been introduced.
The moist climate of[7] England is[8]
eminently suited to the growth of[9]
forest-trees, and we find that in ancient times the larger part of the
country presented one[10]
vast scene of forest, as[11] the[12]
uncleared districts
of America do now. The[13] few scattered patches of natural wood
which remain, show[14] what was once the character of nearly the whole
country.—Hewitt, Physical Geography of England and Wales.
[8] to be suited to a thing, einer Sache zu´träglich sein;
eminently, außerordentlich, which place
before ‘zuträglich’.
[9] Use the gen. of the def. art. The definite article
should be used in all cases where an object is individualised or singled out from
other objects.
[10] one — forest = an almost uninterrupted scene of forest,
Waldlandschaft, f.
[13] The — remain, Die wenigen zerstreut liegenden Überreste
natürlicher Gehölze.
[14] Say ‘show the character which formerly belonged
almost to the whole country’.
Section 41. THE INDIAN CHIEF [1] . I.
During the war in America, a company[2]of Indians attacked a small
body[3] of British troops[4],
and defeated[5] them. As[6]
the Indians had[7]
greatly the advantage in swiftness of foot, and were eager in the pursuit,
very few of the English escaped; and those who[8] fell into their hands,
were treated with a cruelty of which there[9] are not many examples, even
in that country.
Two of the Indians came up[10] to a young officer, and attacked him
with great fury. As[6] they were armed with battle-axes, he had no hope
of[11] escape. But, just at[12]
this crisis, another Indian came up[13], who
was advanced in years, and was armed with a bow and arrows. The[14]
old man instantly drew his bow; but, after[15] having taken his aim at the
officer, he suddenly dropped his arrow, and[16] interposed between the
young soldier and his pursuers, who were about[17] to cut him to pieces.
The two Indians retired with respect.
[6] When the conjunction
‘as’ stands for ‘since’, it must be rendered by ‘da’.
[7] had — foot, den
Britten im Laufen bedeutend überlegen waren; and — pursuit = and eagerly pursued
the same. For the following clause see S. 27, N. 8, and say ‘only few of
the Britons succeeded to escape (davon´kommen)’. I succeed, es gelingt mir.
[9] there are, es giebt. The subject
‘es’, which must be placed immediately after the relative pronoun, should
be followed by the adverbial clause ‘even in that country’.
[17] to be about, im Begriff sein; to cut
to pieces, zerstückeln; with respect = respectfully.
Section 42. THE INDIAN CHIEF. II.
The[1] old man then took the officer by the hand, soothed him into
confidence by caresses, and, having conducted him to his hut, treated him
with a kindness which did honour to his professions[2]. He made
(S. 27, N. 4) him less a[3]
slave than a[3] companion, taught[4] him the language of
the country, and instructed him in[5] the rude arts that were practised by
the inhabitants. They[6] lived together in the most perfect harmony, and
the young officer, in[7] the treatment he met with, found nothing to regret,
but[8] that (App. § 16) sometimes the old man fixed his eyes upon him,
regarded[9] him for some minutes with steady and silent attention, and
then burst into tears.
[1] Say ‘Hereupon the old man seized the hand of the officer, sought by
caresses to gain his (dessen) confidence, conducted him to (in) his hut, and
treated’, etc.
[4] The verb lehren,
to teach (old German lêran, Gothic laisjan), etymologically signifies ‘to cause
a person to know a thing’. This is the reason that it is in German most
generally used with two accusatives: that of the person and that of the thing;
as—Er lehrt mich die Landessprache, he teaches me the language of the
country. Lehre mich Deine Rechte! (Luther.) Wer hat dich solche Streiche
gelehrt? (Uhland.)
[5] in — arts, in den geringen Geschicklichkeiten; to practise,
üben; by, von; ‘inhabitants’, here Eingebornen.
[6] They = both; together
= with one another, which place after ‘harmony’ (Eintracht, f.).
[7] in —
with, in der ihm zuteil werdenden Behandlung. Where must the verb be placed?
Supply the word ‘anderes’ after ‘nothing’; ‘to regret’, here beklagen.
[9] Say ‘regarded him silently for
a while (App. § 9, A) with steady (unverwandt)
attention’.
Section 43. THE INDIAN CHIEF. III.
In[1] the meantime the spring returned, and the Indians again took
the field. The old man, who was still vigorous, and able to bear the
fatigues of war[2], set out with them, and was accompanied by his prisoner.
They marched above[3] two hundred leagues across the forests, and came
at length to[4] a plain, where the British forces[5]
were encamped. The old
man showed his prisoner the tents at a distance[6]: “There,” said he, “are
thy countrymen. There is the enemy who[7]
waits to give us battle. Remember[8]
that I have saved thy[9]
life, that I have taught[10] thee to conduct
a canoe, to arm thyself with[11]
bow and arrows, and to surprise[12] the
beaver in the forest. What wast thou when I first took thee to my hut?
Thy hands were those of an infant. They could neither procure[13] thee
sustenance nor safety. Thy soul was[14] in utter darkness. Thou wast
ignorant of everything. Thou owest all things to me. Wilt thou, then[15],
go over to thy nation, and take up the hatchet against us?”
[1]
Say ‘Meanwhile it became spring’; to take the field, ins Feld ziehen.
[2]die Kriegsbeschwerden;
‘to set out’, here ziehen.
[9]A.The definite article
is often used instead of the possessive adjective pronoun in cases where
the possessor is clearly seen from the context; as—
Ich habe die Feder in
der Hand.
I have the pen in my hand.
B.The possessor is often indicated by a personal pronoun in the
dative case; as—
Ich will mir die
Hände waschen.
I will wash my hands.
The latter mode of construction must be applied in this case.
[10] ‘I have
taught thee to conduct a canoe.’ Read once more S. 42, N. 4, and mark
further that: that which is taught is often expressed in the form of
a Supine, as in this instance.
The officer replied that[1] he would rather lose his own life than take
away that of his deliverer. The Indian, bending[2] down his (S. 43, N. 9, A)
head, and covering his face with both his hands, stood[3] some
time silent. Then, looking[4]
earnestly at his prisoner, he[5] said, in a
voice that was at once softened by tenderness and grief: “Hast thou
a father?” “My father,” said the young man, “was[6] alive when I left
my country[7].” “Alas!” said[8]
the Indian, “how wretched[9] must he be!”
He paused[10]
a moment, and then added: “Dost thou know that[11] I have
been a father? I[12]
am a father no more. I saw my son fall in[13] battle.
He fought at my side. I saw him expire. He was covered with wounds,
when he fell[14] dead at my feet.”
[1] that — deliverer = that he would rather die than kill his deliverer. See
App. §§ 28 and 30.
[2] The two Participles in -ing are best rendered by
using the Imperfect.
[3] stood — silent, und stand so eine Weile schweigend da.
He pronounced[1]
these words with the utmost vehemence. His[2] body
shook with a universal tremour. He[3] was almost stifled with sighs,
which[4] he would not suffer to escape him. There[5]
was a keen restlessness
in the eye, but no tears flowed to[6]
his relief. At[7] length he
became calm by degrees: and, turning towards the east, where the sun
had just risen, “Dost thou see,” said he to the young officer, “the beauty
of that sky, which sparkles with prevailing day? and hast thou pleasure
in the sight?” “Yes,” replied the[8] young officer, “I have pleasure in
the beauty of[9]
so fine a sky.” “I have none!” said the Indian, and[10]
his tears then found their way.
A few minutes after, he showed the young man a[11] magnolia, in full
bloom. “Dost thou see that beautiful tree?” said he, “and dost thou
look[12]
upon it with pleasure?” “Yes,” replied the officer, “I[13] look
with pleasure upon that beautiful tree.” “I have no longer any pleasure
in[14]
looking upon it!” said the Indian hastily[15],
and[16] immediately
added: “Go, return to thy father, that[17] he may still have pleasure,
when (S. 18, N. 6) he sees the sun rise in[18] the morning, and the trees
blossom in the spring!”—Washington Irving.
[1] spoke. Begin the clause with ‘These words’ (S. 7, N. 2).
[2] Say
‘A universal tremour shook (erschüttern) his body’.
[7] Say ‘Gradually he became calmer’. The following passage requires altogether
a different structure in German. Say ‘He turned towards the east (sich
gen Osten wenden), where the sun had just risen. “Dost thou see the beauty
of the sky, which sparkles (erglänzen) with (von) the breaking (an´brechen) day
(Tageslicht, n.)? and hast thou pleasure (Freude, f.) in (an) the sight (Anblick,
m.)?”
he asked the young officer’.
[8] the — officer, dieser, to avoid a useless repetition.
[16] ‘and —
Go’. Begin a new clause here, and say: ‘“Go,” he added (fügte er dann hinzu)’.
[17]auf daß
(followed by the Pres. Subj. of haben).
[18]des Morgens, App. § 9.
The verb ‘sees’, being the governing verb in both clauses, takes the last place.
See App. § 19.
Section 46. RICE.
Rice forms the[1]
chief subsistance of the people[2] in India, China, Japan,
and other eastern[3]
countries. Indeed, it supports[4] more persons than
any other article of food[5]. In Asia it (S. 2, N. 1) is chiefly cultivated in
India, China, and[6]
Ceylon; in Europe: in Lombardy[7] (Italy) and Spain;
in Africa: in Egypt; in South America: in Brazil; and in North America:
in[8] the Carolines and[9]
Louisiana. Its[10]
cultivation requires an[11] immense
quantity of moisture. It[12] grows best in[13]
fields which can be inundated.
Indeed[14], the fact that it is usually sown upon watery soil makes it probable
that the first Verse of the eleventh Chapter in[15] Ecclesiastes refers
to Rice. In Egypt, for example, it is always sown while[16] the waters of
the Nile cover the land, and when the floods subside[17], (S. 27, N. 8) it is
deposited[18] in the mud. A strong spirit[19],
called arrack, is distilled
from[20] rice, and[21]
the straw is used for making plait for hats and
bonnets.—Nelson’s Readers.
[15]im Prediger Salomonis; to refer to something,
sich auf etwas beziehen. The above mentioned passage reads as follows:
‘Cast thy bread upon the waters: for thou shalt find it after many days’.
[16] Say ‘when the land is still covered by (von)
the waters of the Nile’.
[21] and — bonnets,
und das Stroh gebraucht man zur Anfertigung von Männer- und Frauenhüten.
Section 47. THE WHITE SHIP. (A.D. 1120.) I.
King Henry I went[1] over to Normandy with his son Prince
(S. 10, N. 2) William and a great retinue, to have the prince acknowledged[2] as
his successor by the Norman nobles, and to contract[3] the promised
marriage between him and the daughter of the count of Anjou. When
both[4] these things had been done with great show[5]
and rejoicing, the
whole retinue prepared[6]to embark for the voyage home.
When[7] all was ready, there
came to the king Fitz-Stephen[8], a sea-captain,
and said: “My[9] liege, my father served your father all his life,
upon the sea. He steered[10] the ship[11]
with the gold boy upon the prow,
in[12] which your father sailed[13]
to conquer England. I beseech you to
grant[14] me the same office. I[15]
have a fair vessel in the harbour here,
called the White Ship, manned by fifty sailors of renown. I pray you,
Sire[16], to[17]
let your servant have the honour of steering[18] you in the
White Ship to England.”
[1] to go over, sich begeben. The words ‘to Normandy’ (S. 19, N. 4) must be
placed after ‘retinue’.
[2] to have acknowledged, huldigen lassen. See
S. 19, N. 7. The words ‘by (von) the Norman nobles’ must be placed after ‘prince’.
The nobles, der Adel.
[3] to contract a promised marriage, einen verabredeten
Heiratsvertrag ab´schließen. The pron. ‘him’ should be turned by ‘the prince’,
to avoid ambiguity.
[8] The subject and apposition
must be placed immediately after the predicate. Comp. App. § 15.
[9] Say
‘My father, O prince (Fürst), served yours (use the second pers. sing. of the
posses. pron., and continue the address in the same person) his whole life long
at (zur) sea’.
[15] Say ‘I possess
in this (hiesig) harbour a fair with fifty renowned (bewährt) sailors (Seeleute)
manned vessel (Fahrzeug), called (App. § 1) the White Ship’. Comp. S. 7, N. 3.
[18] ‘to
steer’, here = to conduct, geleiten. See S. 1, N. 3.
Section 48. THE WHITE SHIP. II.
“I am sorry,” replied the king, “that[1] my vessel is already chosen,
and that I cannot therefore sail with the son of the man who served[2] my
father. But[3] the prince, with all his company, shall go along with you
in the fair White Ship manned by fifty sailors of renown.”
An[4]
hour or two afterwards, the king (App. § 15) set sail[5]
in[6] the
vessel he had chosen, accompanied by other vessels, and[7], sailing all
night with a fair and gentle wind, arrived upon the coast of England in
the morning. While[8] it was yet night, the[9]
people in some of the ships
heard a faint wild cry come[10]
over the sea, and wondered what[11] it was.
[1] Say ‘that I have already chartered (bedingen) a ship’.
[2] Use the
Perfect, which is used in German to express an action or occurrence both
perfect and past, without reference to any other action or occurrence.
[3] Render ‘but’ by jedoch,
which place after ‘shall’; with — company, samt
seinem ganzen Gefolge; ‘to go along’, here fahren, to be placed at the end of the
whole clause, which construe accord. to S. 48, N. 6.
[6]To place the qualifying
parts before the word qualified is one of the most striking peculiarities
of German Grammar. This construction, called attributive
constriction, has been explained in section 7, Note 3 with respect to the
rendering of the Perfect (or Past) Participle qualifying a preceding noun; but
it must here be pointed out that it may likewise be used for rendering the
Present Participle qualifying a preceding noun (comp. S. 16, N. 4), and that
it is sometimes even suitable for translating short relative clauses. This, as
long as it is not too much indulged in, imparts to the construction great conciseness
and vigour, and avoids the too frequent use of relative pronouns,
which, contrary to English construction, cannot be omitted in German.
(Comp. S. 16, N. 10.)
Examples.
When the fleet, favoured by the finest weather, was about
to set sail, there arose a shout of joy, proceeding from many
thousands of voices, and resounding mightily from the shore.
Als die von dem
schönsten Wetter begünstigte Flotte im Begriff war abzusegeln,
erhob sich ein von vielen tausend Stimmen
erschallender Jubelruf, von dem das Ufer mächtig wiederhallte.
The child, gently sleeping in his mother’s arms, was suddenly
roused by his father’s noisy entrance.
Das in den Armen der Mutter
sanft schlafende Kind wurde plötzlich durch den lärmenden Eintritt des
Vaters aufgeweckt.
The church, which was damaged by the siege, is now being
restored.
Die durch die Belagerung
beschädigte Kirche wird jetzt wiederhergestellt.
The clause ‘in — vessels’ requires the attributive construction, since the two
relative clauses, otherwise required, would make the rendering very lengthy
and monotonous. To avoid a useless repetition, translate the first noun ‘vessel’
by Schiff and the second by Fahrzeug, and connect the two clauses by the conjunction
und.
[7] The passage ‘and — morning’ may be briefly rendered
thus: and arrived, favoured (begünstigt, App. § 1) by a gentle (mäßig) wind, the
(am) next morning in England.
The prince went[1] aboard the White Ship with one hundred and forty
youthful nobles, among whom were eighteen noble ladies of the highest
rank. All[2] this gay company, with their servants and the fifty sailors,
made three hundred souls aboard the White Ship.
“Give three[3] casks of wine, Fitz-Stephen,” said the prince, “to the
fifty sailors of renown. My[4] father the king has sailed out of the
harbour. What[5] time is there to make merry here, and yet reach England
with the rest?”
“Prince[6],” said Fitz-Stephen, “before morning my fifty and the White
Ship shall overtake the swiftest vessel in attendance on your father the
king, if we sail at midnight.”
[1] to go aboard ship, sich auf ein Schiff begeben;
the young noble, der junge
Adelige; ‘to be’, here sich befinden; eighteen — rank, achtzehn dem höchsten Range
angehörige Damen. The words ‘aboard the White Ship’ take the last place in
the clause.
[2] This clause requires the following construction: With the
servants (Dienerschaft, f.) and the fifty sailors consisted the whole gay company
upon the White Ship of (aus) three hundred persons.
[4] Say ‘My royal father’; has sailed out of = has
left. Supply the adverb soeben after the auxiliary. This will greatly improve
the rendering.
[5] Also the two following passages require a different
construction; say ‘How long can we still make merry (sich gütlich thun) here
(to be placed before ‘still’), if we will arrive in England at the same time
(zugleich) with the others?’ The words ‘in England’ should stand before the
verbs, which arrange according to App. § 18.
[6] Say ‘“If we sail at (um)
midnight, O prince (see S. 27, N. 8), my fifty men (Leute) and the White Ship
shall nevertheless (dennoch) before the coming morning overtake the swiftest
ship in the service of thy royal father,” replied Fitz-Stephen’.—‘The swiftest
— father’ = the swiftest in the service of thy royal father standing ship.
(Comp. S. 48, N. 6.)
Section 50. THE WHITE SHIP. IV.
Then[1] the prince commanded to[2]
make merry; and the sailors drank
out the three casks of wine, and the prince and[3]
all the noble[4] company
danced in the moonlight on the deck of the White Ship.
When at last she[5] shot[6]
out of the harbour of Barfleur, there[7]
was not[8]
a sober seaman on[9]
board. But the sails were all set[10] and[11]
the oars all
going merrily, Fitz-Stephen at the helm.
The gay young nobles and the beautiful ladies talked, laughed, and
sang. The prince encouraged[12]
the fifty sailors to row harder[13]
yet, for[14]
the honour of the White Ship.
Crash[1]!—a terrific cry broke from three hundred hearts. It was the
cry (S. 16, N. 10) the people[2] in the distant vessels of the king had
faintly[3] heard on the water. The White Ship had struck upon a rock,
and[4] was going down!
Fitz-Stephen hurried[5] the prince into a boat with some few nobles.
“Push off,” he whispered, “and row to[6] the land. It is not far, and the
sea is smooth[7]. The[8]
rest of us must die.”
But[9], as they rowed away fast from the sinking ship, the prince heard
the voice of his sister Mary calling[10] for help. He (S. 5, N. 2) never in
his life had been so good as[11]
he was then. He[12] cried, in an agony:
“Row back at any risk! I cannot bear[13] to leave her!”
[1]Krach!—es erhob sich ein aus drei hundert Kehlen erschallender fürchterlicher Angstschrei.
[12] The remaining passage will greatly improve by placing the clause ‘Row —
risk’ before the words ‘He — agony’. In an agony, voll Seelenangst; at any
risk, koste es, was es wolle.
[13] When there is in a principal clause a transitive
verb, the object of which is contained in a following objective clause, which
often assumes the form of a supine (i.e. an infinitive with zu, see S. 1, N. 2),
the object in the principal clause is frequently supplied by the pronoun
es, which then may be called the grammatical object. This is
more particularly the case when special emphasis is given to the verb contained
in the principal clause; as—
He liked to hear good music.
Er liebte es, gute
Musik zu hören.
The deed proves, that she speaks the truth.
Die That beweist es,
daß sie die Wahrheit spricht.
Section 52. THE WHITE SHIP. VI.
They rowed back. When[1]
the prince held out his arms to catch[2] his
sister, such[3] numbers lept in, that the boat was overset; and in the same
instant the White Ship went[4] down.
Only two men floated[5]: a nobleman, Godfrey by name, and a poor
butcher of Rouen. By and by[6] another man came swimming towards
them, whom[7] they knew, when he had pushed aside his long wet hair, to
be Fitz-Stephen.
When he heard that the prince and all his retinue had[8] gone down,
Fitz-Stephen, with a ghastly face[9],
cried: “Woe, woe to me!” and sank[10]
to the bottom.
[5] to float, auf dem Wasser schwimmen; of Rouen, aus
Rouen.
[6]Kurz darauf; supply the adverb noch
before ‘another’. He
comes swimming towards me, er kommt auf mich zu´geschwommen.
[7] Say
‘in whom they recognised Fitz-Stephen, when he’, etc.; to push aside = to
throw back.
[8] had gone down, den Tod erlitten. The auxiliary verb (had)
may here be omitted, for: In subordinate clauses, the auxiliary verbs
(haben, sein, and werden) are often omitted for the sake of conciseness
and elegance; as—
Daß sie mir genommen
(wurde), ist mein größtes Leid.
That she was taken from me is my greatest sorrow.
[9] with — face, totenbleich, adv. How must the words be arranged here?
[10] to sink to the bottom, in die Tiefe hinab´sinken.
Supply the adv. dann after
the verb, which will establish a closer connection between this clause and the
preceding one.
Section 53. THE WHITE SHIP. VII.
The other two clung[1] to the yard for some hours. At length (App.
§ 14) the young noble said faintly[2]: “I am exhausted, and
benumbed[3]
with cold, and can hold[4] no longer. Farewell, good friend. God preserve
(App. § 34) you!”
So[5]
he dropped and sank, and of all the brilliant crowd[6], the poor
butcher of Rouen alone was saved. In[7] the morning, some fishermen
saw him floating in his sheep-skin coat[8],
and got[9] him into their boat,—the
sole relater of the dismal tale.
For[1] three days no one dared to carry[10] the intelligence to the king; at
length they[11]
sent into his presence a little boy, who, weeping[12] bitterly,
and kneeling at his feet, told him that the White Ship was[13] lost, with all
on board.
The king fell to the ground like[14]
a dead man, and[15] never afterwards
was seen to smile.—C. Dickens, A Child’s History of England.
[1] to cling to the yard, sich an eine Segelstange an´klammern; for some hours,
einige Stunden lang, for three days, drei Tage lang.
[9]nehmen; the appositional clause ‘the sole relater
(Überbringer) of the dismal (traurig) tale (Kunde)’ must be placed immediately
after the pronoun ‘him’, to which it belongs; and mark that: The apposition
must always agree in number, gender, and case with the noun or pronoun
to which it belongs.
[10] to carry an intelligence to a person,
Einem eine Botschaft verkünden. See App. § 5.
[11]man; into his presence
= to (zu) him, which place after ‘boy’.
[12]The Present Participle
may be used adverbially, as in English, to denote manner or state.
Say ‘who told him kneeling and weeping bitterly, that’, etc.
[14] like — man = as if dead
(wie tot), which place after ‘fell.’
[15] Say ‘and never has one seen him
smile again’.
Section 54. BARLEY ( S. 3, N. 2 ).
Barley is (S. 2, N. 1) now principally used[6] to make[1]
malt for[2] brewing
beer and distilling spirits. It serves, however[3],
as food[4] in the form of
pearl barley, used[5]
for thickening soups. It is also used[6] as food for
poultry. Barley[7] meal is used for fattening pigs and turkeys. Barley
straw furnishes us fodder[8]
for cattle and horses. Barley is chiefly produced[9]
in the northern regions of Europe, in Central Asia, and in North
America. It is much hardier[10]
than wheat, resists[11]both heat and drought
better, and[12]
may therefore be raised from poorer soils. It[13] is said to be
the most ancient food[4] of (S. 3, N. 2) man.—Nelson’s Readers.
[11] ‘to resist’ here = to
bear, vertragen. Use the def. art. before the first noun.
[12] Say ‘and can
therefore be cultivated (an´bauen) upon poorer soil’. Supply the adverb auch
after ‘therefore’.
[13] It is said to be, sie soll ... sein.
The verb sollen
is frequently used to express an assertion of another person, when
it answers to the English ‘it is said’, ‘it is reported’, ‘they say’.
Section 55. THE SOLDIER AND HIS FLAG ( Fahne ).
On seeing[1] a young Prussian soldier who was pressing his flag to his
bosom in the agonies of death, Napoleon said to his officers: “Gentlemen[2],
you see that a soldier has for his flag a sentiment almost approaching[3]
idolatry. Render[4] funeral honours at once to this young
man. I regret that I do not know his name, that[5] I might write to
his family. Do not take[6]away his flag; its silken folds will be an
honourable shroud[7]
for him.”—General Bourrienne[8].
[1] When the Present Participle is used in adverbial clauses of
time, it must generally, by the help of one of the conjunctions als (when),
nachdem (after), indem (while, whilst), and während (while, whilst), be changed
into a finite verb, i.e. one with a personal termination; thus—
Hearing his opponent speak in this way, his features assumed
an expression of contempt.
Als er seinen
Gegner so sprechen hörte, nahmen seine Züge
den Ausdruck der Verachtung an.
Having given his orders, the officer rode quickly away.
Nachdem er seine
Befehle erteilt hatte, ritt der Offizier
schnell von dannen.
Looking at me in a suppliant manner, a tear glittered in her eye.
Indem sie mich
bittend ansah, glänzte eine Thräne in
ihrem Auge.
I saw it when passing the house this morning.
Ich sah es, als ich
heute Morgen beim Hause vorüberging.
Consequently, the above passage must be rendered thus: ‘When Napoleon
saw (bemerken) a young Prussian soldier who was pressing his flag to (an) his
(S. 43, N. 9, A) bosom (Herz) in the agonies of death (im Todeskampfe, which
place after ‘flag’), he said to his officers’: etc.
Most[3] of the fruits which grow on trees, such as our apples and pears,
have[4] been greatly[5]
improved and raised[6] above their natural state by
grafting and other artificial means.
Of[7]
cultivated native plants, the chief are celery[8], parsley, the cabbage,
turnip, carrot, parsnips, and the hop. The onion is[9] a native of South
France, the lettuce of Greece, the radish of China, and the rhubarb,
now[10] so largely used in pies and puddings, of Russia. Cress comes
from[11] Persia, spinach from some[12]
part of Asia, and the Jerusalem
artichoke[13] from Brazil.—Hewitt, Physical Geography of England
and Wales.
An old avaricious English gentleman[2]
had three sons, of whom one[3]
was a good-natured but light-minded fellow. Whenever (S. 18, N. 6) he
fell[4] into any trouble, he excused himself on[5]
the ground that[6] he was
seeing life. His prodigality, however, annoyed[7]
his father so much[8], that
he resolved to disinherit (S. 1, N. 2) him. His friends interceded[9] in his
favour, but their efforts were in vain.
When the old gentleman[10] felt his end approaching, he called his sons
together[11], and said to them: “I leave[12]
to my son John my whole
estate[13], and desire him[14]
to be frugal.” John[15], in a sorrowful tone, as
is usual on such occasions, prayed heaven to prolong his father’s life, and
give him health to enjoy the gift[16] himself.
[9] to intercede in a person’s favour, zu gunsten
einer Person sprechen. He interceded in my favour, er sprach zu meinen gunsten.
Supply the adverb zwar (it is true) after the verb.
[10]Herr; to feel one’s
end approaching, sein Ende heran´nahen fühlen.
[14] The construction of the Infinitive with an Accusative, so frequently employed in
English as an imitation of the Latin and Greek, is unknown in German.
Such constructions must be rendered by a subordinate clause introduced by
the conjunction daß; as—
I know him to be an industrious man.
Ich weiß, daß er ein fleißiger Mann ist.
See also App. § 34, and say ‘and wish that he may be frugal (sparsam)’.
[15] This passage requires the following construction: ‘As (wie) it is usual
(üblich) on (bei) such occasions, John (App. § 15) implored heaven in (mit)
a sorrowful tone to prolong’, etc. The noun Himmel is always used with the
article.
The father continued: “I leave to my son James my money[1],
amounting[2] to four thousand pounds[3].”
“Ah, father,” said[4] James, of
course in[4] great affliction, “may (App. § 34) heaven give you life and
health to enjoy the gift yourself.” The[5] father, then addressing the
spendthrift, said: “As[6] for you, Dick, you[7]
will never come to good;
you will never be rich. I leave you a shilling to (S. 19, N. 7) buy[8] a
halter.” “Ah, father,” said Dick in a most[9] melancholy voice, “may
heaven give you life and health to enjoy the gift yourself!”—Anonymous.
[2] to amount to something,
sich auf etwas belaufen. See S. 16, N. 4.
[3]Das Pfund, one pound
English money, never takes the sign of the Plural in German, and the same
refers to ‘die Mark’, a German coin corresponding to one shilling English.
[7] Introduce this clause by the adverbial conjunction
so, and see App. § 15; to come to good, zu etwas Rechtem kommen.
[8]The
German language, as a rule, requires that the person for whose
benefit an action is performed, is clearly indicated. When this is
not done by a noun in the dative case, it is generally done by means
of the dative of a personal pronoun; as—
I will buy a hat.
Ich will mir
einen Hut kaufen.
We have built a house.
Wir haben uns
ein Haus gebaut.
Supply, therefore, the necessary pronoun after the conjunction um; a halter = a
rope, Strick, m.
Wheat is the most valuable[1]
of all grains, because[2] from it, chiefly, we
obtain the flour of which bread is made. In order to make[3] flour, the
grains of wheat[4] are crushed[5]
between stones in a mill. The crushed
mass is then separated[6] into two parts,—bran[7]
and flour. Bran is the
outer husk of the grain, which is used (S. 4, N. 4) for[8] fattening cattle,
etc.[9] It[10]
does no harm, however, to mix the bran with the flour; the
mixture is more nourishing than the pure flour. The bran makes the
flour and the bread darker in colour; but this is no disadvantage, for
brown bread is both[11] cheaper and more nourishing than white bread.
Bread[12] is often artificially whitened by[13]
the addition of alum and other
injurious substances. Wheat is[14] chiefly grown in France, Germany,
Austria, Southern Russia, (S. 46, N. 6) the British Isles, Australia, the
United States, Canada, Egypt, and Northern Africa.—Nelson’s Readers.
[12] Say ‘Bread receives (erhalten) often an artificial whiteness through an
addition’, etc.
[13] When ‘by’ is equivalent to ‘through’, it must be
rendered by durch.
[14] Say ‘grows chiefly’, in order to make the construction
more concise than it would be by using a p. p., which would have its
place at the end of the whole clause, and would thus make the construction
too lengthy.
Section 60. OCCUPATION OF THE ANGLO-SAXONS.
Fishing (S. 40, N. 9) was a principal occupation, owing[1] to the frequent
abstinences from flesh-meat, enjoined[2] by (S. 59, N. 13) a superstitious
ritual[3]. Eels were taken[4]
in immense numbers in the marsh lands of
the Eastern counties; salmon in the river Dee; herrings along the shores
of Suffolk, Kent, and Sussex, in[5] their annual migration; while larger
species, as[6] the whale and grampus[7],
were captured in the open sea.
Hunting and falconry were the field-sports[8] of the great. The beasts of
the forest or chase, which were protected by fines, and reserved[9] for
privileged persons, were the[10] stag, roebuck, hare, and rabbit. The wolf,
fox, and boar might[11] be killed by[12]
any one with impunity, if
(S. 27, N. 7) found without[13] the limits of the chase or forest. The wild duck
and heron were the[14] common quarry.—Milner, History of England.
(Extract from a sermon preached to a congregation of
children at Chicago.)
When[2]
I was in the Sunday-school, and had just begun to read about[3]
David, I[4] did not feel sure he ever was a real baby, and had to be fed
with a teaspoon; or that he ever was a real little boy[5]
that[6] went to
school as I did, and played marbles[7],
and had a peg-top[8], a jack-knife[9],
some slate pencils, ever[10]
so many buttons, and a piece of string[11], all
in one pocket; that[12] he ever had to try hard not to cry when he went
to school very cold[13] mornings; or[14]
that the teacher spoke sharp to him,
when the little chap had tried[15]
his best to get[16] his lesson, and[17]
did not
get it very well.
[4] Say
‘I could scarcely imagine, that he ever really had been a little child and had
to be fed with a teaspoon (und mit einem Theelöffel habe gefüttert werden müssen)’.
By carefully reading §§ 29 and 30 of the Appendix, the student will see that
the verbs depending on the governing verb ‘imagine’ must stand in the Perfect
of the Subjunctive Mood. According to S. 52, N. 8, however, the auxiliary
‘sei’ may be omitted in the clause ‘that he ever really had been a little child’.
[5]Junge. The auxiliary ‘sei’
may again be omitted here.
[6] that = who;
as I did = ‘like myself’, which place immediately after the relat. pron.
[7]Schusser. Remember that both this and the next clause are depending on the
relative clause ‘that — did’; place, therefore, the verb ‘played’ after ‘marbles’,
and the verb ‘had’ after ‘peg-top’.
[16] to get one’s lesson = to learn one’s lesson,
seine Lektion erlernen.
[17] Say ‘and had not learnt it well’, and supply
the adverb doch (nevertheless) after the objective pronoun ‘it’. For the
position of the verb see App. § 17.
Section 62. TENDER, TRUSTY, AND TRUE. II.
But you[1] know, ministers[2]
have to find out all about such men as
David; and I have found out enough to[3] make me feel sure he was
once a little boy, just like one of you; that he had[4] to learn verses, like
you; and didn’t like (S. 20, N. 2, A) it, like you; and that he did not
like to go to bed early, or to get up early, like you.
I rather[5] fear that, in the summer, he[6]
ate green apples, unripe melons,
hard peaches, and sour plums, as[7] you do;
and[8] got sick, and was very
sorry, and had to take[9] medicine, as you do; that he said he would
(App. § 28) never do it again, and that he[10] then never did do it again,
as[11] I hope you will neither.
[1] Use the 2nd pers. pl., and after the verb supply the adverb ‘ja’, which
will be equivalent to the English ‘I am sure’.
[2]die Pfarrer, before which
supply the conj. daß. Have to = must; to find out, aus´findig machen; all —
David = all (S. 3, N. 7) that relates (sich beziehen) to (auf) such men as David.
[3]
Say ‘to (S. 19, N. 7) be convinced, that’, etc. Just — you, wie ihr.
[4] The
auxiliaries ‘to have’ and ‘to be’ followed by the infinitive of another verb,
must generally be rendered by the auxiliary verb of mood ‘müssen’; as—I
have to do it, Ich muß es thun.
[11]wie ihr es hoffentlich auch nicht wieder thun werdet.
Section 63. TENDER, TRUSTY, AND TRUE. III.
Now[1], just here I was trying to see what[2]
sort of boy David was when
he grew[3] bigger; and, when I shut my eyes, and so
tried[4] to see it all
clearly, I heard a noise right[5]
under my study window. This was[6]
about[7] four o’clock, Friday afternoon; the schools were out, and the
children running home[8].
I turned my head to see what was the matter[9],
and then (App. § 14) I saw what I want[10] to tell you. About ten boys
were standing together[11].
All at once a big boy knocked[12]
a little boy[13]
down, and rolled him in the snow[14].
The little boy got up[15], and said:
“What[16] did you do that for?” Then[17]
the big boy again approached
the little boy[13], and I believe[18]
he would have knocked him down again[19],
had not the little boy[13] walked sobbing away[20] towards home.
[18] Supply here
the conj. daß. Read carefully § 36 of the App., and construe accordingly.
Use the Pluperfect Subj. in both clauses, and observe that the verb gehen
always requires the auxiliary sein. See S. 29, N. 3.
“There,” I said, when I had seen that, “I know what David never
did do: he (S. 5, N. 2) never struck a boy that[1] was no match for him;
he never was a coward like that big boy; for he[2]
is a coward to[3] strike
a small boy so; and those[4] others are not the boys (S. 16, N. 10) they
ought[5] to be, to[6]
stand by and see it done.” I saw such[7] a thing in
a picture once, which was called the Wolf and the Lamb. A great, cruel
boy[8] meets a small, delicate lad[9]
who has lost his father, and stands over
him with[10] his fist doubled, just as I saw that boy stand under my study
window. I think[11] if[12]
any[13] boy in this church were[14]
to see that
picture, he would instantly say[15]:
“What a shame to use[16] a boy so
who is not your match!”
[11] When the verb
‘to think’ is used in the meaning of ‘to be of opinion’, it must be rendered
by ‘glauben’, and when it is used in the meaning of ‘to be engaged in
thinking’, by ‘denken’.
[12] The conj. ‘if’ must always be rendered
by ‘wenn’.
Once I read in the Life[1] of Dr. Channing, who was one of the best
men that ever (je) lived[2]
(a[3] great deal better than David, because he
lived[4]
in a better time), what he once did, when he was a[5] boy and saw
a[6]
thing like that. Little Channing was one of the kindest[7] and most
tender-hearted boys I[8] ever heard of. I will tell you a story to show
you how[9] kind he was, and tender, and true. One day he found in a
bush a nest full[10]
of young birds just out of the shell. Children, did[11]
you ever see a[12]
nest full of birds just out of the shell?—little tiny[13],
downy things[14], with[15]
hardly more feathers than an oyster? The birds
which William Channing found, were just of that kind; and when he
touched them with his fingers, and felt how soft and warm they were,
they all began to gape[16], very[17]
much as you do when I preach[18] a very
long sermon.
[1]Lebensbeschreibung, f. The Genitive relation must be expressed by the
Gen. of the def. art. See S. 10, N. 2. Proper names are not inflected
when they are preceded by an article and a common name.—Dr.
William Ellery Channing, berühmter amerikanischer Geistlicher und Schriftsteller,
wurde im Jahre 1780 zu Newport auf Rhode-Island geboren und starb im Jahre 1842
zu Bennington in Vermont. Seine zahlreichen ausgezeichneten Schriften haben seinen
Namen auch in europäischen Kreisen berühmt gemacht. Coleridge, dessen Bekanntschaft er
machte, als er im Jahre 1822 England besuchte, war so sehr von ihm eingenommen, daß
er ausrief: ‘He has the love of wisdom, and the wisdom of love!’
Well, little (S. 10, N. 2) Channing knew[1] the birds did not gape because
he preached a long sermon, but (S. 6, N. 10) because they were hungry.
So[2] what did he do? He ran straight[3]
home (S. 63, N. 8), got[4] some
nice soft crumbs of bread, and fed the little birds with them (S. 4, N. 5, B);
and[5]
after that he fed them regularly every day after[6] having come home
from school. But[7]
one day (S. 19, N. 2), when he went to[8] the nest,
there it lay on the ground, torn and bloody, and the little birds all dead;
and the father-bird[9] was crying[10]
on a wall, and the mother-bird[11] was
crying on a tree. Then little Channing tried[12] to tell them that he did
not kill[13] their poor young brood; that[14]
he never could do such a mean,
cruel thing as that, and that[15],
on the contrary[16], he had tried to feed
them. But it was no use; the little birds could not understand him,
and[17] kept on crying; and at last he sat down, and wept bitterly.
[6]so bald
er von der Schule nach Hause gekommen war.
[7] This passage will read more
elegantly by beginning with the conj. ‘when’, which must be followed by the
subject ‘he’. ‘But’ should then be rendered by jedoch, which takes the third
place.
Now[1]
this was the sort of boy Channing was; and I was going[2] to
tell you that (S. 66, N. 15) one day he heard of a big boy beating
(S. 16, N. 4) a little one[3], like that bad boy[4]
under my window. Channing was
a little boy; he was a little man when he was full grown[5]; but then he
had a big soul. I was going[2] to say he had a soul as big as a church;
but indeed[6] his soul was bigger than all the
churches in[7] the world;—and
when he heard of that[8] cruel boy, who was ever[9]
so much larger than
himself, he went right up to him, and said: “Did[10] you strike that little
boy?” “Yes, I did[11]; and what then?”—“Then,” said Channing, “you
are a coward, because he was no match for you; and now I am going[2]
to whip[12] you for doing it.” Because he had a big soul, and though he
was a small boy, he[13] went in, and fought for the right. That was the
only time he[14] ever fought in his life. But[15]
I, standing in[16] this pulpit,
honour him more for it than if he had (App. § 36) never[17] fought
at all.
[1] Say ‘This was (supply here the adv. also = now) little Channing’s character’.
Comp. S. 12, N. 2.
[2] The auxiliary verb of mood ‘wollen’
corresponds to the English ‘to be going’ or ‘to be on the point’, followed
by the infinitive of another verb. Comp. S. 6, N. 4.
[3] ‘One’ following
an adjective or a pronoun, and representing a noun understood, is not to be
translated; as—Which pen shall I give you,—this one or that one? Welche
Feder soll ich Ihnen geben,—diese oder jene?
[14] he — life,
in seinem Leben, daß er sich schlug.
[15] Place the conj. ‘but’ after the subject,
and, for the sake of emphasis, repeat the pron. ‘I’ after the rel. pron. ‘der’,
which must introduce the next clause.
Boys, I like peace; I like (S. 51, N. 13) to see you play like good,
true-hearted little men[1]. Never[2]
fight if you can help[3] it; but[4] never
strike a boy who is no match for you, and never stand[5] by quietly whilst
another boy is doing (S. 32, N. 11) it. Tender, trusty, and true, boys;
tender and true. King David, King Alfred, George Washington, William
Channing, Theodore Parker[6], more great men than I can name, were all
of that sort; and[7] they came out right, because they went in right. Brave
as lions[8], true as steel, with kind[9]
hearts for doves, ravens, and sparrows,
they (App. § 14) would never tear[10]
birds’ nests, or sling stones to[11] kill
birds, because they felt as Jesus did when he said: “Blessed are the
merciful.”—Rev. Robert Collyer, The Life that now is.
[6]Theodore Parker, berühmter
amerikanischer Geistlicher und Gelehrter, wurde im Jahre 1810 zu Lexington in Massachusetts
geboren und starb im Jahre 1860 zu Florenz, wo er sich seiner Gesundheit wegen
aufhielt. Durch seine ausgezeichnete Gelehrsamkeit, große Willenskraft und seltene Menschenliebe
übte er auf seine Zeitgenossen einen bedeutenden Einfluß aus, namentlich aber in
Bezug auf die Befreiung der Sklaven, deren Sache er oft mit Gefahr seines Lebens und
seiner Freiheit verteidigte.
[7] and — right, und sie traten als Sieger aus dem
Kampfe hervor, weil sie für das Recht in den Kampf traten.
[8] Use the noun
‘lions’ with the def. art., but not the noun ‘steel’.
[11] See S. 19, N. 7, and supply the prepositional adverb
damit before the object.
Section 69. DESPATCH OF BUSINESS [1] .
You[2] must beware[3]
of stumbling over a propensity, which easily besets[4]
you from[5]
the habit of not having your time fully employed[6]. I
mean[7] what the women very expressively[8]
call dawdling[9]. Your motto
must be “Hoc age.” Do instantly whatever[10]
is[11] to be done, and take[12]
the hours of recreation after business[13],
and not before it[14]. When a
regiment is[15]
under march, (S. 27, N. 8) the rear is[16] often thrown into
confusion, because the front do[17] not move[18]
steadily[19] and without interruption.
It[20] is the same thing with business. If[21]
that which is first in
hand is not instantly, steadily[22],
and regularly despatched[23], other[24]
things
accumulate, till affairs[25] begin to press all at once, and no human being
can[26] stand the confusion.—Sir Walter Scott, Letters to his son.
[2] Use the 2nd pers. sing. Personal
and Possessive Pronouns used in letters, and referring to the person
addressed, require a capital initial in German.
[3] to beware of
stumbling over a propensity, sich hüten, einem Hange zu verfallen. See S. 1, N. 3,
and S. 34, N. 10.
[24] other — accumulate, so häufen sich inzwischen andere Sachen an.
[25]die
Arbeiten, after which place the words ‘all at once’, alle auf einmal. For the
place of the verbs see App. § 19.
[26] can — confusion, der Verwirrung
gewachsen ist.
Section 70. ON PERFUMERY [1] . I.
The[2]
exquisite pleasure we enjoy from the smell of sweet flowers is[3]
alone sufficient to account for the love of perfumery. Flowers pass
away[4]
so quickly that we naturally desire to preserve their sweetness[5]
as[6]
long as we can, and in this our perfumers succeed[7] admirably. The
perfume[8]
of most flowers depends upon an oil, which[9] is peculiar to the
plant, almost every sweet-scented[10] plant having its own peculiar oil;
and, what is of[11]
more importance: these oils belong to a class called[12]
essential or volatile, because they become[13]
volatile when[14] heated.
[2] Say ‘the great enjoyment which the smell
(Duft, m.) of sweet (wohlriechend) flowers affords (gewähren) us’. Place the
pron. ‘us’ immediately after the rel. pron.
[3] is — perfumery = explains
sufficiently (zur Genüge) our love for perfumery.
[14] when heated = when they are heated
(erwärmen). Comp. S. 27, N. 7.
Section 71. ON PERFUMERY. II.
The common or fixed[1] oils, on the contrary, such
as olive[2] or linseed-oil,
do not evaporate. This[3] may be easily illustrated, thus: If a piece
of writing-paper be touched[4] with a fixed oil or grease, (S. 27, N. 8) it
leaves[5] a stain, which[6],
upon being held before the fire, will not disappear.
Now[7], if any[8]
plant has a peculiar smell or taste, it is[4] generally found
that its essential oil is the cause of this (S. 4, N. 5, B). Consequently[9],
if we extract this, we really obtain[10] the essence.—Prof. Ascher.
[2] as olive or linseed-oil,
wie das Oliven- oder Leinsamenöl. When two compound nouns which have
the last component in common follow each other, the last component is
generally omitted in the first noun, which is connected with the next one by
means of hyphens.—To evaporate, sich verflüchtigen.
[3]Dies läßt sich
auf folgende Weise leicht beweisen.
[4] Turn the Passive Voice here into the
Active Voice by means of the pron. man, as explained in S. 4, N. 4.
[5] ‘to
leave’, here = to leave behind; it = this.
[6] The passage ‘which — disappear’
may be briefly rendered, thus: ‘which does not disappear before the
fire’. See S. 32, N. 11.
[7] Reverse the order of the first two words in
this clause.
[9] Consequently = therefore, also, which
place after the subject ‘we’.
[10] to obtain, gewinnen; the essence (as a
Nom.), der der Pflanze eigentümliche Wohlgeruch.
Section 72. ON INSTINCT [1] .
The[2] following most curious instance of a change of instinct is
mentioned by Darwin. The bees carried[3] over to[4]
Barbadoes and the
Western Isles ceased[5]
to lay up any honey after the first year, as[6] they
found it not useful to them. They found the weather so fine, and the
materials[7]
for making honey so plentiful, that they quitted[8] their grave,
prudent[9], and mercantile[10]
character, became exceedingly profligate and
debauched[11], ate[12]
up their capital, resolved to work no more, and[13]
amused themselves by flying about the sugar-houses and stinging the
blacks. The[14] fact is, that[15],
by[16]
putting animals in different situations[17],
you may[18] change, and even reverse, any of their original propensities.
Spallanzani[19] brought[20]
up an eagle upon[21] bread and milk, and fed a
dove on[22] raw beef.—Rev. S. Smith.
[2] This clause requires a different rendering;
let us say ‘Darwin gives the following most (höchst) curious example of a
change of the animal instinct’. The last noun requires the def. art., as explained
in S. 3, N. 2.
[3] to carry over, hinü´berbringen. The Perfect Participle
qualifies the noun ‘bees’. According to S. 7, N. 3, the words ‘carried — Isles’
may be rendered either by the attributive construction or by forming of them
a relative clause. I venture to propose the use of the attributive construction
as the more elegant of the two modes of rendering, and more especially in
order to avoid a repetition of subordinate clauses.
[4] When the preposition
‘to’, in connection with a verb denoting motion, stands before the
names of countries, towns, islands, etc., it must be rendered by ‘nach’.
[5] Here follow the words ‘after — year’, to lay up honey, einen Vorrat von
Honig an´sammeln.
[6] See S. 41, N. 6; it = this; not useful, nicht mehr von
Nutzen.
[7] materials — plentiful, Materialien zur Honigbereitung in solchem
Überflusse vorhanden.
Peter the Great ordered[1] many foreign books to be translated into the
Russian language, and among others[2]
“Puffendorf’s[3] Introduction to
the Knowledge of the States of Europe.” A monk, to whom the
translation of this book was committed[4],
presented[5] it some time after[6]
to the Emperor. The monarch examined[7]
the translation; at[8] a certain
chapter, however, he suddenly changed[9] countenance, turned indignantly
to the monk, and said: “Fool, what did I order[10] thee to do? Is this
a translation?” He[11] then referred to the original and showed the poor
monk a paragraph in which the author had spoken with great asperity[12]
of the Russians, but which had not been translated. “Go,” resumed the
monarch, “and instantly carry out[13] what I have bidden thee to do. It is
not to (S. 19, N. 7) flatter my subjects that I[14] have ordered this book
to be translated, but (S. 6, N. 10) to instruct[15]
and reform[16] them!”—Anonymous.
[1] Use the auxiliary verb of mood ‘lassen’
as a translation of ‘to order’,
‘to command’, and ‘to cause’, when these verbs are connected with the
auxiliary ‘to be’ and the Past Participle of another verb; as—
The emperor ordered the ringleaders to be shot.
Der Kaiser ließ die
Anführer erschießen.
The admiral commanded the ships to be drawn up in
order of battle.
Der Admiral ließ
die Schiffe in Schlachtordnung aufstellen.
[16]reformieren; the prep. zu
must be repeated before this verb.
Section 74. THE BEAUTY OF THE EYE. I.
Look[1]
how beautiful the human eye is, excelling[2] in beauty the eye
of every creature! The eyes of many of the lower animals are doubtless
very beautiful. All[3] of us must have admired the bold, fierce, bright eye
of the eagle; the large, gentle, brown eye of the ox; the treacherous
green eye of the cat, waxing[4] and waning[5]
like the moon, as[6] the sun
shines upon it (S. 4, N. 5) or[7] deserts it; the pert eye of the sparrow;
the sly eye of the fox; the peering[8] little bead[9]
of black enamel in[10] the
mouse’s head; the[11] gem-like eye which[12]
redeems the toad from ugliness;
and the intelligent, affectionate expression, which[13] looks out from the
human-like eye of the horse and dog. There[14] are these and the eyes
of many other animals full of beauty; but[15] there is a glory which excelleth
in the eye of man.
[2] Say ‘and how it excelleth in (an) beauty
the eye of every other creature!’ The words ‘in beauty’ should be placed
before the verb.
[3] All of us, wir alle; all of them, sie alle;
all of you,
ihr (or Sie) alle. Render the words ‘must have’ by ‘have certainly’. The
p. p. should be placed after ‘eagle’.
[14] There are these ... full =
These ... are full. Full of, voller.
[15]im Auge des Menschen jedoch liegt eine
alles übertreffende Pracht.
Section 75. THE BEAUTY OF THE EYE. II.
We realise[1] this fully only when[2]
we gaze into the faces of those we
love. It[3]
is their eyes (S. 16, N. 10) we look at[4] when we are near them,
and[5] recall when we are[6]
far away. The face is a[7] blank without the
eye, and the eye seems to concentrate every[8] feature in itself. It is the
eye that smiles, not the lips; it is the eye that listens[9],
not the ear; it[10]
that frowns, not the brow; it[11] that mourns, not the voice. Every sense
and every faculty[12] seems to[13]
flow toward it, and find expression through
it[14], nay[15],
to be lost in it; for all must have felt at times as[16] if a man’s
eye was not a part of him, but (S. 6, N. 10) the man himself; as[17] if it
had not merely life, but also a[18]
personality of its own;—as[19] if it was
not only a living, but also a thinking being.—Prof. G. Wilson.
[1] ‘to realise’, here = to comprehend, begreifen. The object ‘this’ may be
emphasized by being placed at the head of the clause. Fully only, erst ganz.
[2] Say ‘when we look upon (betrachten) the face (Antlitz,
n.) of our loved ones
(unserer Lieben)’.
Drums were beating[2], horns blowing[3],
and[4] people were seen all
running in one direction. The cause was a funeral dance. I joined[5]
the crowd, and soon found myself in[6]
the midst of the entertainment[7].
The dancers were most (höchst) grotesquely[8]
got up[9]. About a dozen
huge ostrich feathers adorned their helmets. Leopard or black and white
monkey-skins[10] were suspended[11]
from their shoulders, and a leather,
tied (S. 7, N. 3, A) round the waist, covered a large iron bell which was
strapped[12]
upon the loins of each dancer; this they rang[13] to the time of
the dance. A large crowd got up in[14]
this style[15] created[16]
an indescribable
hubbub, heightened[17] by the blowing of[18]
horns and the beating
of seven nogaras[19] of various notes[20].
Every dancer wore[21] an antelope’s
horn[22]
suspended round the neck, which he blew occasionally in[23] the
height of his excitement.—Sir S. Baker, the Albert N’yanza.
[21] wore ... suspended
= had ... hanging; ‘round’, here an.
[22] To render ‘antelope’s
horn’ form a compound noun of the pl. of the noun ‘antelope’ and the singl. of
the noun ‘horn’. Comp. S. 36, N. 7, A, B, and C, and mark further:
A. Although the first component of Compound Nouns is generally in the
singular, some require the plural; as—Kinderstube, f., nursery; Bildergallerie, f.,
picture-gallery.
B, 1. The first component takes sometimes one of the genitive inflections
s, es, n, en, or ens,
according to the declension it belongs to; as—Königsmantel,
m., royal mantel; Tageslicht, n., day-light; Heldenmut, m., heroism;
Friedensliebe, f., love of peace.
2. We find, however, the terminations s or es used as a connecting
link between the two components for the mere sake of euphony, even
in cases where the first component is a feminine noun; this is more especially
the case when the first component is in itself a compound expression, when it
has one of the derivative suffixes heit, ing, ling, keit,
schaft, tum, ung, or when it is
a noun of foreign origin terminating in ion, at, and ät; as—Geburtstag, m.,
birthday; Hochzeitsgeschenk, n., wedding present; Weisheitslehre, f., philosophy;
Religionsduldung, f., toleration; Universitätsgericht, n., university court.
C. In a few compound nouns we find one of the euphonic terminations e, er,
and l used as a connecting link between the two components; as—Tagewerk,
n., day’s work; Aschermittwoch, m., Ash-Wednesday; Heidelbeere, bilberry.
D, 1. When the first component consists of the stem of a verb, it is
often joined to the second component without a connecting link; as—Schreibbuch,
n., copy-book.
2. Sometimes a euphonic e is used as a connection link; as—Zeigefinger,
m., forefinger; Haltepunkt, m., place of stopping.
When Tezel[2] was at Leipzig, in the sixteenth century (App. § 9),
and had collected[3]
a great deal of money from all ranks[4] of people, a
nobleman, who suspected imposition, put[5] the question to him: “Can
you[6] grant absolution for a sin which a man[7]
shall intend to commit in
future?” “Yes,” replied the frontless commissioner, “but on[8] condition
that a proper[9] sum of money be actually[10]
paid down.” The noble
(S. 5, N. 2) instantly produced the sum demanded, and in return[11] received
a diploma[12],
sealed and signed by Tezel, absolving[13] him from the
unexplained crime which he intended to commit. Not[14] long after, when
Tezel was about (S. 6, N. 4) to leave Leipzig, the nobleman made[15] inquiry
respecting the road he would probably travel[16],
waited[17] for him in
ambush at a convenient place, attacked and robbed him, then[18] beat him
soundly with a stick, sent him back to Leipzig with[19] his chest empty,
and[20] at parting said: “This is the fault[21]
I intended to commit, and for
which I have your absolution[22].”—Rev. R. K. Arvine.
[2]Johann Tezel (eigentlich Diezel) wurde
um 1460 zu Leipzig geboren, trat 1489 in den Dominikanerorden, ward 1502 vom Papst
zum Ablaßprediger bestellt, später zum apostolischen Kommissar ernannt und mit dem
Ablaßhandel in Sachsen betraut, zog sich jedoch, von Luther seit dem 31ˢᵗᵉⁿ Oktober 1517
wegen seiner unverschämten Anmaßungen bekämpft, in das Paulinerkloster zu Leipzig
zurück, wo er im Jahre 1519 verstarb.
[3]ein´nehmen; a great deal of, eine Masse.
Construe accord. to App. § 5.
[4] ranks = classes; people, Bevölkerung, f.,
see S. 3, N. 2.
[5] ‘to put a question to somebody’ here = to ask somebody.
[6] I propose to use the 2nd pers. pl. in this case, and to supply
the adverb auch after the pron.
[7] a — future = which one only (erst)
intends to commit. See App. § 19.
Section 78. STAND UP [1] FOR WHATEVER IS TRUE, MANLY, AND LOVELY [2] . I.
In[3]
no place in the world has individual character more[4] weight than
at a public school. Remember[5] this, I beseech[6]
you, all you boys who[7]
are getting into the upper forms. Now[8]
is the time when you may[9] have
more[10] influence for good or evil in the society you live in than you ever
can have[11] again. Quit[12]
yourselves like men, then; speak out[13] and
stand up for whatever is true, manly, and lovely. Never (S. 68, N. 2)
try to be popular[13], but only do your duty, and help[14] others to do theirs;
and when you leave the school (S. 27, N. 8), the[15] tone of feeling in it
will be higher than you found it, and so you[16]
will do good to[17] generations
of your countrymen yet unborn. For boys follow one another in
herds like sheep, for[18] good or evil; they[19]
hate thinking, and[20] have
rarely any settled[21] principles.
[1] Use the 2nd pers. pl.; whatever = all that; see S. 3, N. 7.
[7]Der (m. sing.), die
(f. sing.), and die (pl.) must be used as relative pronouns
in reference to a personal pronoun of the first or second person of
either number, and also in reference to the personal pronoun of the third
person plural (Sie) used instead of the second person plural. For the sake of
emphasis the personal pronoun is frequently repeated after the relative pronoun,
and the verb must then agree with the personal pronoun, as the following
examples will show.
Verschmähst du mich,
die ich deine Freundin bin?
Dost thou disdain me, who am your friend?
Ich,
der ich dich von deinen Feinden befreite.
I, who delivered thee from thy enemies.
Construe the clauses ‘who — forms’ accordingly; to get into the upper forms,
in die obern Klassen versetzt werden.
[13] ‘to speak
out’, here gerade und frei heraus´sprechen; ‘to be popular’, here sich beliebt machen.
[14] When the following verbs are used in connection with another verb
governed by them, that verb stands in the Infinitive without the preposition
zu (Comp. S. 34, N. 10):
A. The auxiliary verbs of mood: dürfen, können, mögen, müssen,
sollen, wollen, and
lassen. (see Expl. 1.)
B. The verbs: bleiben, fahren, gehen, finden,
fühlen, heißen (to bid, to command),
helfen, hören, lehren (also with zu,
Comp. S. 43, N. 10), lernen, machen, sehen,
and reiten. (See Expl. 2.)
C. The verb haben in phrases like Expl. 3.
D. The verb thun followed by nichts. (See Expl. 4.)
Examples.
1. Ich mag
gern schreiben.
I am very fond of writing; I like to write.
2. Der Diener fand
seinen Herrn tot am Boden liegen.
The servant found his master lying dead on the floor.
3. Er hat gut
reden.
It is all very well for him to talk.
4. Er thut nichts
als essen und trinken.
He does nothing but eat and drink.
[15] the — higher = the moral tone of the same (gen.) will be a higher one
(S. 67, N. 3).
Section 79. STAND UP FOR WHATEVER IS TRUE, MANLY, AND LOVELY. II.
Every school (S. 5, N. 2), indeed, has its own traditionary standard[1] of
right and wrong, which cannot be transgressed with impunity, marking[2]
certain things as low[3] and blackguard, and certain others as lawful and
right. This standard is ever[4] varying, though it changes only slowly and
little by little. It[5] is the leading[6]
boys only, who (S. 15, N. 3), subject[7]
to such standard, give, for[8] the time being, the tone to[9]
all the rest,
and[10]
make the school either a noble institution for[11] the training of
Christian Englishmen, or a place[12] where a young
boy will get[13] more
evil than if he were turned out[14]
to make his[15] own way in London
streets.—Thos. Hughes, Tom Brown’s School Days.
[15] his — streets = his fortune in (auf) the streets
of London.
Section 80. WORK [1] IS A GREAT COMFORTER.
Two neighbouring gardeners had the misfortune of[2] having their crop
of early peas killed by frost. The one called[3]
upon the other to condole[4]
with him. “Ah,” cried he, “how unfortunate[5] we have been, neighbour!
Do you[6]
know? I have done nothing but fret ever since[7]. But it seems
you have there a fine healthy[8] crop[9]
coming[10] up already; what[11]
is it?”
“This?” cried the other gardener, “why[12], it is a crop of peas
(S. 16, N. 10) I sowed (S. 48, N. 2) immediately after my loss.” “What[13],
coming up already?” replied the fretter[14]. “Yes, while you were
fretting[15], I[16]
was working.” “What! don’t you fret when you have
a loss?” “Yes, but I always put it off[17] until after
I have repaired[18] the
mischief[19].”
“Why, then you have no need to fret at all.” “True[20],”
replied the industrious gardener, “I[21] find working better than fretting.”—Anonymous.
Robert Bruce, restorer[1]
of the Scottish monarchy, being[2] pursued one
day by the enemy, was[3] obliged[4]
to seek refuge in a barn and to spend[5]
the night there. In[6] the morning, when he awoke, he saw a spider
climbing up[7] the[8]
beam of the roof. The spider fell[9]down to the
ground, but immediately tried to climb up again, when it a[10] second
time fell to the ground[11]. It made a third attempt, which also failed.
Twelve times did (S. 32, N. 11) the little spider try to climb up the
beam, and twelve times it fell down again, but the[10] thirteenth time it
succeeded[12] and[13]
gained the top[14] of the beam. The king (S. 5, N. 2)
immediately got up[15] from his lowly[16]
couch, and said: “This little
spider has taught (S. 42, N. 4) me perseverance; I will follow its example.
Twelve times have[17] I been beaten by the enemy. I will try
my fortune once more!” He did so[18], and won the next battle. The
king became the spider’s scholar.—N. Goodrich.
The[2] remarkable proofs which modern geology has presented of vast
accumulations of heated[3] and melted matter[4]
beneath the earth’s crust[5],
make it evident that (S. 3, N. 2) volcanoes are essential[6] to the preservation
of the globe. If (App. § 36) there[7]
were no safety-valves through[8] the
crust, such vast accumulations of heat would rend asunder[9]
even[10] a
whole continent. Volcanoes are[11]
those safety-valves[12], more than two
hundred of which are scattered[13] over the earth’s surface. But if no such
passages[14]
existed (see S. 27, N. 8), nothing could prevent the[15] pent-up
gases from accumulating till they had (Impf. Subj.) gained strength[16]
enough to rend a whole continent, and[17] perhaps the whole globe, into
fragments.—Rev. Prof. Hitchcock.
[2] Use the attributive construction
explained in S. 48, N. 6, and say ‘The by (von, followed by the def. art.)
modern geology presented (auf´stellen) remarkable proofs of (von) a vast accumulation’,
etc.
[15] the — accumulating = the accumulation of
the pent-up (ein´sperren) gases.
[16]Kraft, f.; enough, hinreichend, adj., to be
placed before the noun ‘strength’.
[17] ‘and’ here ja. The verb ‘to
rend into fragments’ (auseinan´derreißen, of which form the Supine, S. 1, N. 2)
must of course be placed at the end of the whole passage.
Section 83. THE POWER OF BEAUTY.
In one of the worst parts of London there is[1]
an institution[2] which
I visited. In one room I found about[3] thirty-five men listening
(S. 16, N. 4) to the teaching[4]
of the daughter of a small shopkeeper[5]
in[6] the
neighbourhood. She was one of the prettiest women (S. 16, N. 10) I
ever saw[7] in my life. I noticed that the young girl was quite alone with
those rough[8]
men, and said to the superintendent[9]:
“Are[10] you not
afraid to leave the pretty young girl alone with all those men?” He
replied: “I[11]
am.” “Then, why don’t you go to her?” “You mistake[12]
my fear. I[13] am not afraid of their doing her any harm. They love her
so much that they would lick[14]
the ground on which[15] she walks, but I
am afraid[16] that some[17]
person may step in, who, not[18] knowing the
manner of the place, may[19]
say something impertinent[20] to her; and if
he[21] did, he would not leave the place[22]
alive[23].”—Lord Shaftesbury.
[23]lebendig, before which
supply the adverb ‘wieder’.
Section 84. THE ENGLISH CLIMATE.
The air is generally very moist, most[1] so near the western coast, and
less so[2] as[3] we go eastward.
It[4] is to the abundant moisture of the air that the beautiful foliage of
our trees and the rich verdure of our fields and gardens, so much praised
by foreigners who visit England, are chiefly owing. Moisture is one of
the two things[5] most necessary to[6]
vegetation, and hence[7] our fields,
trees, and woods possess during the greater part of the year a continuous
richness of[8] verdure, which[9]
cannot be found under[10] the sunny skies of
the shores of the Mediterranean.
The weather is at[11] times liable to very sudden changes, depending
(S. 16, N. 4) mainly on the changes of the wind[12].—Hewitt, Physical
Geography of England and Wales.
[4] Say ‘To the great moisture of the air owe (verdanken) our trees chiefly
their beautiful foliage and our fields and gardens their rich verdure, which by
foreigners, who visit England, is praised so much’.
[5] The words ‘most
(höchst) necessary’, qualifying the noun ‘things’, must precede it. Things =
conditions.
Seemingly[1] boundless is the region of the docks, and the visitor who
sets out with ever so definite an idea of the course he intends to pursue,
will constantly find himself allured from the path. He passes[2] a door
from[3]
which issues a delicious fragrance of spice, and he turns in[4] to
(S. 19, N. 7) explore[5] it. At[6]
the top of a stone staircase he finds an
enormous floor[7] piled[8]
with bales of cinnamon and boxes of nutmeg.
Here and there are great heaps which, on[9]
close inspection, prove[10] to
be cloves. Others, of[11]a
brilliant sienna colour, he[12] finds to be heaps
of mace. The[13]
floor above this is stored[14]
with Peruvian bark[15]. This
article is used for the preparation[16]
of quinine, but[17] it is imported in
such quantities[18]
as[19]
to render it difficult to believe that[20] it can all be
used medicinally.
[1] Say ‘The region (Bereich,
m.) of the docks seems (erscheinen) almost boundless
(unbegrenzt), and even when the visitor begins his course (Wanderung, f.)
with ever so (mit einem noch so) definite a plan about (über) the direction he
intends to pursue (die einzuschlagende Richtung, Comp. S. 48, N. 6), (so) he will
constantly find himself allured (ab´lenken) from his path’. Supply the adverb
doch before the adv. ‘constantly’.
[20] that — medicinally = it (to agree with Artikel) could (Pres. Subj.)
only be used (benutzen) for (zu) medical purposes (Zweck, m.).
Section 86. THE LONDON DOCKS. II.
On[1]
another floor of the same building may[2] be found bundles of
Pimento[3] sticks and Malacca[4]
canes, a great store of mother-of-pearl,
a heap of delicate[5],
richly-tinted ear-shells[6], and a quantity of ivory.
Here are elephants’ teeth, some[7] of which are larger than bricks and
weigh fourteen pounds. Passing[8]
out of this building, we find[9] ourselves
in an enormous shed with little black boards, hung[10] at intervals, and
bearing the names of vessels. Beneath these boards are[11] goods lying
ready for shipment, and these are at least as varied[12]
as the imports[13].
Here are pickles[14], blacking, a[15]
cartload or so of bricks, and scores[16] of
anvils. There[17] are church-bells, a chest of drawers, a rocking-horse,
a mangle, and boxes, bales, and barrels innumerable[18].—‘The Globe’
Newspaper.
Dr. Johnson held[2] that[3]
debt is ruin. His[4] words on the subject are
weighty, and worthy of being held in remembrance. “Do not,” said[5] he,
“accustom[6] yourself to consider debt only as[7]
an inconvenience. You[8]
will find it a calamity. Poverty takes[9] away so many means of doing
good, and[10]
produces so much inability to resist evil, that it[11]
is by[12] all
virtuous means to be avoided. Let[13] it be your first care, then, not to be
in any man’s debt. Resolve[14] not[15]
to be poor. Whatever[16] you have,
spend less. Poverty[17] is a great enemy to human happiness. It destroys
liberty. It makes some[18]
virtues impracticable[19] and others[20]
extremely
difficult. Frugality[21]
is not only the basis of[22]
quiet, but[23] of beneficence[24].
No[25]
man can help others that wants himself. We must have[26]
enough, before[27] we have to spare.”—S. Smiles, Self-Help.
[2] ‘to hold’ here = to be of opinion, der
Ansicht sein.
[3] Say ‘that debt (das Schuldenmachen) leads (Pres. Subj.;
Comp. App. §§ 28 and 31) to ruin’.
[4] Say ‘What he says on (über) this
subject (Gegenstand, m.) is important and worthy of our notice (Beachtung, f.)’.
[5] Place the words ‘said he’ at the end of the whole clause.
[6]When
verbs and adjectives, governing a preposition, are used in a principal
clause and are followed by a subordinate clause, either in the form
of a supine (i.e. an infinitive with zu, see S. 1, N. 2) or beginning with a
subordinative conjunction, the adverb da, in connection with the preposition
required, is generally placed in the principal clause; as—
We will accustom ourselves to be thrifty.
Wir wollen uns daran gewöhnen, sparsam
zu sein.
Do not excuse yourself with having had no time.
Entschuldigen Sie sich nicht damit, daß
Sie keine Zeit gehabt haben.
The verb sich gewöhnen requires the prep. an. Construe accordingly, and use
the 2nd pers. sing.
[15] not — poor = not to get (geraten) into
poverty.
[16] Say ‘However little (Wie gering, after which supply the
adverb auch) thy income (Einnahme, f.) may be, lay up a part of the same
(so lege doch einen Teil derselben zurück)’.
[27] Say ‘before
(ehe) we can have to spare (etwas übrig haben)’.
Section 88. A CURIOUS [1] INSTRUMENT. I.
A gentleman[2], just returned[3]
from a journey to (S. 72, N. 4) London,
was surrounded by[4] his children, eager[5],
after the first salutation was
over, to hear the news, and still more eager to see the contents[6] of a
small portmanteau, which[7] were, one by one, carefully unfolded and
displayed to view. After[8] having distributed amongst the children a few
small presents, the[9]
father took his seat again, saying, that[10] he must
confess he[11] had brought from town[12],
for his own use, something far
more curious and valuable than any[13] of the little gifts (S. 16, N. 10) they
had received. It was, he said[14],
too good to[15] present to any of them;
but he would, if[16] they pleased, first give them a brief description of it
(S. 4, N. 5, B), and[17] then perhaps they might be allowed to inspect it.
[7] Since
the antecedent of the pron. which (i.e. Inhalt) has no plural in German, the
constr. of the passage ‘which — to view’ must be altered. Let us say ‘from
which (aus welcher, to agree with Reisetasche in the fem. sing.) then (supply the
adverb auch in this place) every piece was carefully unpacked (aus´packen) and
shown round (umher´zeigen)’.
[8] Construe accord. to S. 55, N. 1; to distribute,
vertei´len; amongst, unter, with the acc. The direct object must be placed
before the words ‘amongst the children’.
[17]und dann dürften
sie es sich vielleicht ansehen.
Section 89. A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT. II.
The children were accordingly[1]
all attention, while the father thus[2]
proceeded[3]: “This small instrument displays[4]
the most[5] perfect ingenuity
of[6] construction, and[7]
exquisite nicety and beauty of workmanship.
From[8] its extreme[9]
delicacy[10], however, it[11]
is so liable to injury, that it
is always protected by a[12]
sort of light curtain, adorned[13] with a beautiful
fringe, and[14] so placed as to fall in a moment on the approach of the
slightest danger. The[15] external appearance of the instrument is always
more or less beautiful, though in this respect there[16] is a great diversity
in the different sorts. The[17] internal contrivance, however, is the same
in all of them, and is so curious, and in its power[18] so astonishing, that
no one who knows it[19] can suppress his surprise and admiration.”
[16] Render
‘there is’ in this instance by ‘besteht (there exists)’, which must be placed at the
end of the passage, on account of the preceding subordinative conj. obgleich.
“By a slight and momentary movement, which the owner can easily
effect, he can[1] ascertain[2]
with considerable accuracy the size, colour,
shape, weight (S. 10, N. 9), and value of[3]
any article whatever. A[4]
person possessed of one is[5] thus saved from the necessity of asking a
thousand questions and[6] trying a variety of troublesome experiments,
which would otherwise be necessary; and such a slow and laborious
process[7] would, after[8]
all, not succeed[9] half so well as a single application
of this admirable instrument.”
George. “If it is such a very useful thing[10]
(S. 27, N. 8), I wonder[11]
that[12] everybody, that can at all afford it, does not have one.”
[1] To avoid repetition render the verb ‘can’ here by imstande sein.
[2]bestimmen, which use in the form of a Supine and place at the end of the
whole clause.
[11]I wonder,
es wundert mich; we wonder, es wundert uns; you wonder, es wundert Sie.
[12] that — one = that not everybody, who can at all (irgend)
make it possible,
possesses the same (to agree with ‘object’).
Section 91. A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT. IV.
Father. “These instruments are not so uncommon as you suppose;
I myself happen to know several individuals[1]
who[2] are possessed of one
or two of[3] them.”
Charles. “How large are they, father? Could I hold one in my
hand?”
Father. “You[4]
might; but[5]
I should be very sorry to trust[6] mine
to you.”
George. “You must take[7]
very great care of it, then[8]?”
Father. “Indeed[9]
I must. I intend every night to envelop[10]
it in[11]
the light curtain I mentioned; it must, besides, occasionally be washed
in[12] a certain colourless liquid kept[13]
for the purpose; but this is such a
delicate[14] operation, that[15]
persons, I find, are generally reluctant to perform
it. But notwithstanding the tenderness[16]
of this instrument, you[17]
will be surprised to hear that[18]
it may be darted to a great distance, without[19]
suffering the least injury, and without any danger of losing it.”
[9] The English ‘do’, in sentences of entreaty, may
colloquially be rendered by the adverb doch; as—
Do give me the book, my child!
Gieb mir doch das Buch, mein Kind!
Section 93. A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT. VI.
Father. “Its[1]
uses are so various that I know not which[2] to specify.
It[3] has been found very useful in deciphering (S. 1, N. 3) old manuscripts,
and[4],
indeed, has its use in modern prints. It[5] will assist us greatly in
acquiring[6]
all kinds of knowledge, and without it[7] some of the most
sublime parts[8] of[9]
creation would be matters[10]
of mere conjecture. It[11]
must be confessed, however, that very much depends on a[12] proper
application of it, being (S. 30, N. 4) possessed by many persons who
appear to have no[13]
adequate sense of its value, but[14] who employ it
only for the most low and common purposes, without even thinking,
apparently, of the noble uses[15]
for which it is designed, or of the exquisite[16]
gratification[17]
(S. 16, N. 10) it is capable of affording. It[18] is
indeed in order to excite in your minds some higher sense of its value
than you might otherwise have entertained, that I am giving you this
previous description.”
George. “Well then, tell us something more about it (S. 4, N. 5, B).”
Father. “It is also of[19] a very penetrating quality, and it can often
discover secrets which can be detected by no other means. It[20] must
be owned, however, that[21]
it is equally prone to reveal them[22].”
[1] Its — various = It serves for (zu) such (so)
various purposes (Zweck, m.).
[2] which — specify = which I shall specify (anführen).
[18] Say ‘Only to awaken
in you a higher idea of its value than you probably (vermutlich) otherwise (sonst)
would have had (Pluperfect Subj.), I give you this previous (vorläufig) description’.
[19] of — quality = very penetrative (scharfsichtig).
Father. “They vary[5] considerably in this respect.”
George. “Well, what colour is yours?”
Father. “I believe it is of a darkish colour; but if I shall confess
the truth (S. 27, N. 8), I must say that I never saw (S. 48, N. 2) it[6] in
my life.”
[21] Say ‘But father, tell us at last,’ and supply the
adverb ‘doch’ after the pron. ‘us’. Comp. Lange’s German Manual, p. 354,
L. 31, N. 4.
Section 95. ANGLO [1] -SAXON DRESS.
The dress of civilians in general consisted[2]
of a shirt and tunic descending[3]
to the knee, of linen or wool, according[4] to the season. A
belt was often worn round the waist[5], and a short cloak over the whole.
Drawers, leather shoes or short boots and hose, or sandals, completed
the ordinary costume. Labourers (S. 3, N. 2) are generally represented
with shoes, but without hose. Females[6]
of all ranks[7] wore long, loose
garments reaching[3] to the ground, completely hiding (S. 16, N. 4) all[8]
symmetry of[9] shape. Long hair, parted[10]
on the forehead, and falling[11]
naturally down the shoulders, with an ample[12] beard and moustache, distinguish
the Anglo-Saxons from the closely cropped[13] Normans. Planche
remarks that[14] the character of face, as delineated in illuminations, immediately
designates[15] the age[16]
wherein[17] the early[18]
portraits of our
Lord[19], which have[20]
been reverently[21] copied to[22]
the present day,
were[23] originally fabricated.—Milner, History of England.
[23] Say ‘were first (zuerst)
made (an´fertigen)’.
Section 96. THE GLACIERS AT [1] SUNSET [2] . I.
At a distance these glaciers, as[3]
I have said before, look[4] like frozen
rivers (S. 26, N. 3); when[5]
one approaches nearer, or when they press[6]
downward[7] into the valley, they look[8]
like immense crystals and pillars[9]
of ice piled[10]
together in every conceivable form. The effect[11] of this
pile[12]
of ice, lying (S. 48, N. 6) directly[13]
in the lap of[14] green grass and
flowers, is quite singular. Before we had entered[15] the valley, the sun
had gone down; the sky behind the mountains was clear, and it[16] seemed
for a few moments as if darkness[17]
was rapidly coming on. But[18] in
a few moments commenced a scene[19]
of transfiguration, more[20] glorious
than anything I had witnessed yet. The cold, white, dismal fields[21] of
ice gradually changed[22] into hues[23]
of the most beautiful rose colour[24].
A[25] bank of white clouds, which rested[26]
above the mountains, kindled[27]
and glared[28], as[29]
if some spirit of light had entered into them.
[16] it seemed = it had the appearance. The adverbial
circumstance of time ‘for a few moments’ may be emphasized by being placed
immediately after the conj. ‘and’.
[17] Darkness is coming on, die Dunkelheit
bricht herein.
[29] as — them, wie von einem Lichtgeiste erfüllt.
Section 97. THE GLACIERS AT SUNSET. II.
You[1] did not lose your idea of the dazzling, spiritual whiteness of the
snow; yet you seemed to see it through a rosy veil, the sharp edges of
the glaciers and the hollows between the peaks reflecting wavering tints
of lilac and purple. The effect[2] was solemn and spiritual above everything
I have ever seen. These[3] words, which[4]
had often been in my
mind through the day, and[5] which occurred more often than any others
while I was travelling through the Alps, came into my mind with a pomp
and magnificence of meaning unknown before:—“For by (durch) Him
were all things created that are in[6] heaven and that are in earth, visible
and invisible, whether[7] they be thrones, or dominions, or principalities,
or powers[8]: all things were created by Him and for Him: and He is
before[9]
all things, and by Him all things consist[10] (Col. i. 16, 17).”—Mrs.
Beecher Stowe.
[1] Say ‘The idea (Bild,
n.) of the dazzling, spiritual (geisterhaft) whiteness of
the snow lost itself not; it seemed, however, as if one saw it (als sähe man es)
through a rosy veil, whilst the sharp edges (Zacke, f.) of the glaciers and the
hollows (Vertiefung, f.) between the peaks were beaming (erstrahlen) in wavering
(unbestimmt) colours of lilac and purple’.
[2] Say ‘The impression (Eindruck,
m.) of it (S. 4, N. 5, B) surpassed in (an) solemnity and sublimity everything
(alles, S. 3, N. 7) that I had (App. § 22) ever seen’.
[4] which — mind, die mir ... oft vor der Seele gestanden.
[5] and — before = and of (an) which I was most reminded during my Alpine
journey (Alpenreise), revealed themselves only (erst) now to my mind in their
whole splendour and magnificence.
A few years since, in the United States of America, a child was lost[2]
in the woods. Darkness (S. 3, N. 2) was rapidly coming on[3], and the
alarmed father, accompanied by some of his neighbours, hastened away
in[4] search of the lost child. The[5]
search continued in vain till nine
o’clock in the evening. Then the alarm bell was rung[6], and the cry of
fire[7]
soon resounded through the streets. It[8] was, however, ascertained
that[9]
it was not fire which caused the alarm, and that the bell tolled[10] to
spread the more[11] solemn tidings[12]
of a child lost[13].
Every heart sympathised[14]
in the sorrows of the distracted[15] parents,
and multitudes[16] of the people[17]
were seen (S. 4, N. 4) ascending the
hill upon the declivity of which the village was situated[18],
to[19] aid in the
search. The night passed away, the morning dawned, and yet no tidings
came. The sun arose. The whole landscape glittered in the rays of the
morning sun. But the village was deserted and still; the shops were
closed, and business was hushed[20].
Mothers[21] were walking[22]
the streets
with sympathising[23]
countenances and anxious[15] hearts. There[24] was
but one thought there:—What has become of[25] the lost[13] child?
[5] The —
evening = Till 9 o’clock in the evening (abends) their endeavours had remained
without success (erfolglos). Remember that the verbs sein, werden, and
bleiben are conjugated with the auxiliary sein.
About[1] nine in[2]
the morning the signal gun was fired, which announced
that the child was found (S. 4, N. 4), and for[3] some time the suspense
was dreadful. Was the child found a[4] mangled corpse, or was it alive and
well? Soon (App. § 14) a joyful shout[5] proclaimed the safety of the child.
A procession was formed[6] by those engaged[7]
in the search. The child
was placed upon a litter, hastily constructed[8] from the boughs of trees
(S. 36, N. 7, A), and borne[9]
in triumph at[10] the head[11]
of the procession.
When they arrived at the brow[12] of the hill, they stopped for a moment,
and proclaimed their success with three loud and animated[13]
cheers[14].
The mother could no longer restrain her feelings. She rushed into[15] the
street, clasped her[16]
child to her bosom, and wept aloud. Every[17] eye
was suffused with tears, and for a moment all was silent.
But suddenly some one gave a[18]
signal for[19] a shout. One long, loud,
and happy note of joy[20]
rose from[21] the assembled multitude[22],
who then
dispersed to (S. 19, N. 7) return home and to resume[23] their business.—Jacob
Abbott.
[23] to resume business, sich an sein Geschäft
begeben.
Section 100. PERSPIRATION.
Perspiration is the evacuation[1] of the juices of the body through the
pores of the skin. It has been calculated (S. 4, N. 4) that there are[2]
above three hundred millions of pores in the glands of the skin which
covers the body of a middle-sized man. Through these pores more than
one half[3]
of what we eat and drink passes off[4] by[5]
insensible[6] perspiration.
If we consume eight pounds of food in[7] a day (App. § 9;
S. 27, N. 8), five pounds of it (S. 4, N. 5, B) are insensibly discharged[8] by
perspiration. During[9] a night of seven hours’ sleep we perspire about
two[10]
pounds and a half. At an average we may[11] estimate the discharge[1]
by[12]
sensible and insensible perspiration at[13]from half an ounce
to[14] four ounces per hour. This (Dies)
is a most[15] wonderful part[16] of
the animal economy, and[17]
is absolutely necessary to[18] our health, and
even to our very existence.—The Rev. Dr. Dick.
[2] ‘(there) to be’, here sich befinden. Place the reflective
pron. after the conjunction daß. The words ‘above — pores’ come
after the relative clause ‘which — man’, after which place the verb befinden.
Section 101. THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH [1] REVOLUTION OF 1848. I.
Our first scene is a palace; the period[2]
winter; the time[3] morning,
and the weather cold and miserable[4]. It is ten o’clock, and the King
of France with his wife[5] and family are[6]
discovered at the breakfast table.
A splendid beginning! Calmness[7] is the prevailing expression of every
countenance save one—the king’s daughter-in-law[8], who looks anxious
and disturbed. Light[9] domestic talk, such
as[10] becomes princes and the
gilded roof that[11]
overhangs them, occupies[12]
the moments. Hush[13]!
Whilst the lacqueys, dressed (S. 7, N. 3, A) in gold and scarlet, move[14]
noiselessly about the room, a noise is heard without[15].
It[16] becomes
more[17]
audible by degrees. Suddenly the door flies open, and two[18] men
enter, pale as ghosts. They[19] are Ministers of State (S. 76, N. 22, A).
They have news to communicate. Discontent prevails in the city; the[20]
populace are out; the dragoons have surrendered their sabres, the soldiers
their arms, within[21] sight of the apartment in which the king had just now
enjoyed his meal, and his daughter-in-law had looked[22] so sad.
[1]National adjectives require a small initial in German.
[5] wife, consort,
Gemahlin, which term generally applies to the wife of a king, or to that of
persons of the upper ranks of society.—The possessive adj. pron. is best
repeated before the next noun.
[6] Since the subject begins the sentence,
the verb must be placed immediately after it. Say ‘The king of France
sits, etc.’, and transl. the words ‘at — table’ briefly thus: beim Frühstückstische.
[7] Calmness — disturbed. This period is best construed thus: With the exception
of the king’s daughter-in-law (i.e. the daughter-in-law of the king),
who looks anxious and disturbed, bear (App. § 14) all the faces the expression
of (S. 3, N. 2) calmness.—Der König war Ludwig Philipp, geb. den 6. Oktob. 1773
zu Paris, ältester Sohn des Herzogs Ludwig Philipp von Orléans. Nach der Julirevolution
von 1830 bestieg er kraft Kammerbeschlusses vom 7. Aug. als König der Franzosen
den Thron. Durch die Februarrevolution von 1848 gestürzt, floh er nach England, wo er
fortan in Claremont unter dem Titel eines Grafen von Neuilly lebte und im Jahre 1850
starb. Seine Gemahlin war Maria Amalie von Sicilien, welche ebenfalls in
England starb.
[8]Die Schwiegertochter des Königs war Helene, Herzogin von
Orléans, verwitwete Gemahlin des im Jahre 1842 infolge eines Sprunges aus dem
Wagen beim Durchgehen der Pferde verunglückten Herzogs Ferdinand von Orléans,
des ältesten Sohnes des Königs Ludwig Philipp, welcher acht Kinder hatte.
[9] Supply
the indef. art. before the adj. ‘light’; ‘domestic’, here = confidential;
talk = conversation.
[10] such as, wie, after which supply the pron. sie
to
agree with ‘conversation’. It becomes princes, es paßt sich für Fürsten.
[11] ‘that — them’, may be briefly turned by ‘over them’.
[12] occupies
— moments, läßt die Zeit schnell dahingehen.
[21] within — meal = and this almost (fast)
immediately in front of (vor) the
windows of the room in which the king had just now breakfasted.—Use the
verb in the Imperfect, and render just now by soeben.
[22] ‘to look sad’,
here trübe einher´blicken, which use likewise in the Imperfect.—The German
Imperfect is chiefly used as a historical tense and to express a past
action or occurrence with reference to another. It is, however, likewise
used to denote the continuance of an action, to describe a certain state,
and to express customary and habitual action. Comp. S. 48, N. 2, for the use
of the Perfect.
Section 102. THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. II.
What is to be done? The king is thunderstruck[1], hesitates for a
moment, and[2] then, urged[3]
by the queen, instantly leaves the room.
The[4] queen follows[5]
her husband with her (S. 43, N. 9, A) eyes from
the palace window. She sees[6]
him on horseback[7] reviewing[8]
the National
Guards[9]. She has no fear, neither[10]
has he. What[11] more? He returns,
accompanied[3] by[12] the man whom[13],
yesterday, to satisfy public
clamour, he created Prime Minister. Has the Minister power to save his
master? You (S. 92, N. 5) observe at[14]
a glance that[15] he is far more
anxious to save himself. He craves[16]
permission to resign. Permission[17]
is granted, when (S. 4, N. 2) a volley[18]
is (S. 4, N. 4) heard close[19] to
their ears. What does it mean? This[20] man will tell you who now
enters. The King has a pen in his hand, with which he is about
(S. 6, N. 4) to appoint his new Prime Minister. “Sign[21]
not,” shouts the[22] last
comer, a[23]
man of the press, with the face[24]
of a student, and the spirit[25]
of a soldier. “Sign rather[26] your own abdication.” The situation is
fine[27]. The pen drops[28]
from the King’s fingers; the speaker[29] takes it
up, and quietly[30] replaces[31]
it in the Monarch’s hand (see S. 43, N. 9).
[3]The
Past (Perfect) Participle is often used elliptically to denote an existing
state or condition; as—
Urged by his father, he instantly left the room.
Von seinem Vater gedrängt, verließ er
eiligst das Zimmer.
[4] Construe this period by beginning with the adverbial clause ‘from the
palace window’, von den Fenstern des Palastes aus. The verb must then follow
immediately. To denote a starting point with respect to place, the English
preposition ‘from’ is generally translated by von followed by the prepositional
adverb aus, or by aus ... hinaus when the verb indicates a motion from one
place to another. In relation to time we use von ... an, which often corresponds
to the English ‘beginning with’, or to ‘from’ followed by
‘forwards’; as—
Beginning with to-morrow (From to-morrow forwards) you
must take a walk every day.
Von morgen an müssen
Sie jeden Tag spazieren gehen.
[13] ‘whom — Minister’, construe ‘whom he only (erst)
yesterday appointed Prime Minister, to satisfy (genügen, with the dat.) the impetuous
(ungestüm) demands of the people’. To appoint, to create, ernennen.
Verbs denoting choosing and appointing, as ernennen, machen, and
erwählen, to choose, to elect, require in German an Accusative followed by
the prep. zu with the dative, when in English they govern two Accusatives
in the active voice; as—
The King appointed Prince Bismarck Prime Minister.
Der König ernannte
den Fürsten Bismarck zum Premierminister.
S. 27, N. 4 will show the construction in connection with the passive voice.
[19] close to their ears = in the
immediate neighbourhood.
[20] ‘This — enters’ may be briefly rendered:
Der soeben Eintretende wird es uns zu erkennen geben.
[21]unterschrei´ben, insep.
comp. str. v., which use in the 3rd pers. pl. of the Imperative mood. As a
mark of respect, the word ‘Sire’ may be inserted after this clause.
[29] Form a noun
of the present participle of the verb sprechen. The noun Sprecher applies, as
a rule, to the Speaker in the English House of Commons. The Speaker in
the Imperial German Reichstag is styled Präsident.
[30]In German,
when the subject stands before the verb, the adverb must never
precede the latter or, in compound forms, the copula (auxiliary
verb). Comp. App. § 9.
Section 103. THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. III.
The audience[1] is already touched[2].
The poor king looks around him
for[3] advice; no[4]
one offers it; even the Prime Minister of[5] yesterday
is dumb; and in[6] another instant the[7]
deed is done. The King has
abdicated in[8] favour of his grandson[9].
Behind the scenes[10] you
(S. 92, N. 5) hear sounds[11]
of tumult and disorder, and your[12] heart is already
beating for the issue. The King doffs[13]
his robes[14], places his sword
upon the table, and[15], dressed (S. 102, N. 3) as a
private gentleman[16], is
evidently anxious[17]
to depart. The Queen would[18] fain meet the coming
danger, but his[19] Majesty has already ordered the carriages. The horses
are put[20]
to, but horses and groom are shot[21]
by the multitude[22]. A broad
path leads from[23] the palace garden[24],
and at the end[25] of it a friendly
hand[26] has brought two hired coaches[27].
“Let[28] us go,” exclaims the
Monarch, and, leaning (S. 53, N. 12) heavily[29]
upon the Queen, whose[30]
head is high and erect, he hurries on. The coaches are[31] reached; the
fugitives escape[32].
They arrive at St. Cloud[33], at Versailles, but not to
(S. 19, N. 7. Supply the adv. dort) stay. On[34] they go, and at half-past
eleven o’clock at night they descend at Dreux[35].
[9]Der Enkel war
der älteste Sohn des verstorbenen Herzogs Ferdinand von Orléans und seiner Gemahlin
Helene. Dieser Sohn, welcher noch heute (Dez. 1886) in England lebt, trägt den
Namen Ludwig Philipp von Orléans und führt den Titel eines Grafen von Paris. Sein
jüngerer Bruder ist Robert Philipp von Orléans mit dem Titel Herzog von Chartres,
augenblicklich ebenfalls in England.
[33]Sanct Cloud bei Versailles
war zu jener Zeit eine beliebte Residenz der königlichen Familie. ‘Sanct’ (abbreviated
St.) comes from the Latin ‘sanctus’.
[35]Dreux
ist ein Städtchen im Departement Eure-Loire, an der Eure, mit 7000 Einwohnern und
enthält ein Schloß mit Grabkapelle des Hauses Orléans, welche von der Mutter des Königs
Ludwig Philipp gegründet wurde.
Section 104 . THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. IV.
At one in the morning they are joined[1] by (von) one of the King’s
sons, who informs the unhappy pair that the claims[2] of the grandson
had[3] been disregarded, and that the republic had been declared by the
people of Paris. It is enough. The King shaves off his whiskers, puts
on green spectacles, buries[4] his face in a handkerchief, speaks English,
and calls himself Smith. The wind is[5]
high, the coast[6]
dangerous, embarkation[7]
is out of question at the moment, and before an opportunity
offers, the rank of the runaways[8] is discovered. Fortune (S. 3, N. 2),
however, is[9] with them: they escape[10]
capture and put to sea. Protected
by Heaven, they reach in safety[11] the hospitable shores of England.
Meanwhile[12], what has happened in Paris? The whole city has given
way[13] to a handful of rioters—men (S. 53, N. 9) who meditated an
“emeute[14]”, and effected, to their astonishment, an actual revolution.
But[15]
two individuals upon the side of the King evinced a[16] particle of
courage, and these were women—his wife and his daughter-in-law
already[17] mentioned. The[18]
rest of the city were[19] faithless to themselves
as well as to the King.
[1] ‘to be joined’, here eingeholt werden (to be overtaken).
[3] According to the two rules in §§ 28 and 30 of the
Appendix, the Perfect of the Subjunctive Mood is to be used in this and the
following clause. The two clauses, however, can be joined by omitting the
second conjunction ‘that’ and the copula ‘had been’ of the first clause. Turn
‘to disregard’ by nicht anerkennen; the words ‘by — Paris’ may be briefly rendered
by von den Parisern, which place immediately after the conjunction ‘and’.
[4] ‘to bury’, here = to veil, umhüllen; the prep. ‘in’ must then be rendered
by mit.
[6] since the copula ‘is’ was
changed into another verb in the previous clause, it must be inserted here.
[7] The literal version of this clause would not read well. I propose to use
the following construction: it is (Comp. N. 19) for the moment impossible to
embark.
[19] were — King = ‘were just as faithless towards
themselves as they were towards the King’, and insert the grammatical subject
es after the pronoun ‘they’.—The grammatical subject es is frequently
employed for emphasizing the real subject or to give more tone and
like to the construction; as—Es sprach die Leidenschaft aus seinen Zügen. It is,
moreover, used with all impersonal verbs; as—es friert, es donnert, es giebt,
es ist.
Section 105. THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. V.
Princes, peers[1],
soldiers, and statesmen were all sneaking[2] in hiding
places whilst the capital was[3] made over to the mercy of a few dozen
incendiaries. The daughter-in-law, seeing (S. 55, N. 1) the King depart[4],
carries[5]
her child to the Chamber of Deputies[6],
and[7] there, with womanly
courage and queenly dignity, vindicates his rights. Her friends entreat
her to withdraw. Firm[8]
in her purpose, she does not move[9] an inch.
She attempts to speak, but is interrupted; and[10] he who interrupts is
himself silenced by an armed mob that pours[11]
into the hall[12]. The
Duchess is forced away[13], and in that terrible extremity is separated from
her son. The child is seized by (S. 106, N. 23) a rough hand, which[14]
is strong enough to strike[15], but[16]
generous enough to save. The boy
is brought[17]
to his mother, and mother and son pass[18] from asylum to
asylum, chased[19]
by scythes, sabres, muskets, and, worse[20]
than all, the[21]
bloody passions of an infuriated “canaille”. For[22]
four days they[23] creep
into hiding places; on the fifth day they are beyond the frontier.
[1] The Peers of France were called ‘Pairs’, which term is used in German,
the final s being pronounced.
[2] to sneak into hiding places, in den Winkel
kriechen.
[3] was made over = was left (überlas´sen), with the dat. Construe
the sentence after the following model:—Die Festung wurde einer kleinen Anzahl
Soldaten auf Gnade oder Ungnade überlassen.
[23] they —
places = they try to conceal themselves.
Section 106. THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. VI.
Everybody is escaping at[1] the same moment. There is the King’s
eldest son, pale and half-naked, throwing[2] aside his tinsel and putting on
fustian, looking[3]
less than a man in his fear, trembling with[4] emotion,
and finally running[5] like a madman for[6]
his life. There are your[7]
ministers, of[8]
European reputation and wisdom unapproachable, bounding[9]
like antelopes, northwards[10],
southwards, “anywhere, anywhere[11]
out of the city”, which they and all the rest give up[12] to indiscriminate
riot. And[13] now the crowning point of our first “tableau” is near.
The (S. 107, N. 13) mob, masters[14] of Paris, are sacking the Tuileries.
The choicest moveables[15]
are broken to atoms; a group[16]
takes[17] the
places which Royalty filled a moment ago at the breakfast table; others
are in the wine cellar drinking[18] themselves ten times drunk; others,
again[19],
are in the Queen’s apartments, defiling[20]
that[21] domestic sanctuary.
Outside the palace and on the top[22]
of it a flag is waved[23] by[24]
a dozen men, whose[25]
shouts and shrieks invite hundreds, whom[26] you
see crawling up with no earthly object but immediately to (S. 19, N. 7)
slide down again.
[2] ‘throwing — life’. The rendering of
this passage according to the rule of S. 16, N. 4 would be inelegant, since there
are a number of Present Participles following one another. I propose, therefore,
to begin a new period here, saying: He throws aside his tinsel (here
Flitterstaat, m.), puts on fustian, etc.; to put on fustian, sich in Barchent kleiden.
[3] to look less than a man, kaum einem Manne ähnlich sehen.
[8] of — unapproachable = incomparable in (an) European fame
and wisdom.
[9] Since a relative clause follows immediately, it would be
bad taste to render this clause, beginning with a Present Participle, in the same
form. It will be best to commence a new period. Comp. N. 2.
[13] And — near = And now we
approach (sich nähern, with Dat.) the end (Schluß, m.) of our first tableau. The
French ‘tableau’ is used with French pronunciation in the same sense in
German. It is of the neuter gender and takes the inflection of an s in the
Gen. Sing.
[14] masters of Paris = which rules in Paris; to rule, beherrschen
(v. tr.).
[17]ein´nehmen; Royalty = the Royal family; filled = occupied
(inne haben, treated like a comp. sep. v.). The adverbial clause ‘at the breakfast
table’ is best placed after the verb ‘takes’.
[24]The preposition ‘by’ in connection
with the passive voice and establishing a relation with the noun or
pronoun that denotes the doer of the action expressed by the verb,
is rendered by von.
[25] To avoid a
succession of relative clauses, which should always be avoided, begin again a
new period here and say: The shouts and shrieks of these men invite (herbei´locken),
etc.
[26] whom — but = who seem only to climb up (erklettern) the
roof. The adv. ‘immediately’ comes after the conjunction ‘to’.
Section 107. THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. VII.
There[1] is sentiment in all things. The apartments of the poor
daughter-in-law are reached (S. 4, N. 4, man), but, strange[2] to say, are
respected[3] in the midst of the work[4]
of general destruction. Her
children’s toys are[5] not even touched; the hat and (S. 10, N. 9) whip of
her dead[6] husband are[7]
still sacred; the books (S. 16, N. 10) she had
been reading lie still open[8]. It[9]
is an incident that cannot fail to[10] elicit
rounds of applause. And whilst[11] anarchy and destruction prevail here,
there[12] is equal confusion and danger in the Chamber of Deputies. We
have seen the[13] mob forcing their way into (zu) that deliberative assembly.
Everybody[14]
is now rushing to the tribune. Three[15] speakers become
marked from the rest; their[16] names are Lamartine[23], Crémieux[23], and
Ledru Rollin[23]; they[17] gain the popular ear, and undertake (S. 51, N. 13)
to establish[18] order—a superhuman responsibility! A Provisional Government
is announced, named[19], and approved on the spot. “To
(S. 72, N. 4) the Hôtel de Ville!” exclaims one[20]. “To the Hôtel de Ville!”
respond a hundred; and amidst[21]
yells and hootings, cries[22] of “Vive la
République!” “Vive Lamartine!” “A bas tout le monde!” Monsieur
Lamartine[23]
sets out for that celebrated building, followed by a train made[24]
up of the dregs of a seething metropolis. In the middle[25] of the shouting
the curtain falls, and[26]
the first act terminates. Search[27] the dramatic
annals of the world for such another.—Essays from “The Times”.
[1]Es findet sich jedoch überall noch eine Spur von Gefühl.
[10] to — applause, den allgemeinsten
Beifall hervorzurufen.—Dieser Vorfall erklärt sich durch die große Popularität des verstorbenen
Herzogs und seiner Gemahlin, der Herzogin Helene von Orléans.
[11] Place
the adv. ‘here’ after whilst, and use the adverb noch with it.
[12] ‘there
is’, here findet man, after which place ‘in — Deputies’.
[13] the — way =
how the mob forces its way (sich einen Weg bahnen). In German the verb
agrees in the Singular with a collective substantive in the Singular.
[23] ‘to set out’, here die Prozession
an´treten; for, nach. The verb must of course appear before the Subject
Lamartine. Louis Alphonse Lamartine erregte zunächst durch seine zarten
Jugenddichtungen in den zwanziger Jahren allgemeine Aufmerksamkeit. Nachdem er
durch den Tod eines Oheims ein bedeutendes Vermögen ererbt hatte, bereiste er 1832
den Orient, worauf er die politische Laufbahn betrat und einer der glänzendsten Redner der
Deputiertenkammer wurde. Nach der Februarrevolution von 1848 wurde er Mitglied
der provisorischen Regierung und Minister des Auswärtigen, zog sich jedoch 1851 unzufrieden
zurück und † am 1. März 1869 zu Passy, wo er in dürftigen Verhältnissen
gelebt hatte. Isaac Adolphe Crémieux, Israelit, wurde 1830 Advokat am
Kassationshofe zu Paris, bekämpfte, seit 1842 Mitglied der Kammer, heftig das Ministerium
Guizot und förderte die Reformbewegung. Nach der Februarrevolution von
1848 ward er Mitglied der provisorischen Regierung, in der er kurze Zeit das Justizministerium
bekleidete. Nach der Wahl des Prinzen Louis Napoléon zum Präsidenten trat
er zur Opposition über, ward beim Staatsstreich am 2. Dez. 1851 verhaftet, jedoch bald
wieder freigelassen, worauf er sich auf seine Praxis beschränkte. Im Jahre 1870, nach
dem Sturze des Kaiserreichs, nochmals zum Mitglied der provisorischen Regierung gewählt,
hielt er sich zu Gambetta und ward später Mitglied der Nationalversammlung.
Alexandre Auguste Ledru Rollin ward Advokat, und trat 1844 in die Kammer
der Deputierten, nachdem er als Advokat in vielen politischen Prozessen plaidiert hatte. Er
beteiligte sich lebhaft bei der Reformagitation von 1847, ward 1848 Mitglied der provisorischen
Regierung und Minister des Innern, trat jedoch schon im Juni desselben Jahres
von der Regierung zurück. Im Juni 1849 mußte er wegen politischer Intriguen nach
England fliehen, ward abwesend zur Deportation verurteilt und lebte seitdem als Mitglied
des dortigen Revolutionskomitees in London. Im Jahre 1857 wurde er mit Mazzini
eines Komplots gegen Napoleon III. eingeklagt und abermals verurteilt, und kehrte
endlich am 26. März 1870 infolge der Erklärung der Republik und der Amnestie nach
Paris zurück, ohne sich aber an den dortigen Ereignissen hervorragend zu beteiligen.
[24] made up of, welcher sich aus ... gebildet hat;
seething, gährend.
[26] After ‘and’ supply the adv. so, which
requires the constr. to be inverted.
[27] search — another. This passage
would not read well in a literal version, which may be altered thus:—Where
can we find in the dramatic annals of the history of the world (comp. n.) a
similar one (einen gleichen).
Section 108. EXPERIENCE IS THE BEST TEACHER [1] .
A French student of (S. 3, N. 2) medicine lodged[2] in the same
house in London with a man in a fever. This poor man was constantly
plagued by the nurse to drink, though[3] he nauseated the insipid
liquids that were presented to him. At last, when she[4] grew more
and more importunate, he whispered in her (S. 43, N. 9, B) ear:—“For[5]
God’s sake bring me a salt herring, and I will drink as much as
you please[6]!”
The woman indulged[7] him in his request; he devoured the
herring, drank plentifully, underwent[8] a copious perspiration, and
recovered[9].
The French student inserted this aphorism[10]
in his journal[11]:—“A salt
herring cures[12] an Englishman in a fever.”
On[13] his return to (S. 72, N. 4) France he prescribed the same remedy
to the first patient in a fever[2] to whom he was called.
The patient died; on which[14]
the student inserted[15] in his journal the
following note:—“N.B. Though a salt herring cures an Englishman,
it[16] kills a Frenchman.”—W. C. Hazlitt, Anecdotes.
[1]Lehrerin,
to agree with ‘experience’, which is feminine in German.
[2]
Here place the words ‘in London — fever’; a man in a fever, ein Fieberkranker.
[3] Construe the sentence ‘though — him’ after the following
model: Die mir gereichten geschmacklosen Getränke widern mich an.
[4] Here
place the adv. ‘at last’; more and more importunate, immer zudringlicher.
(From[2] an address delivered to an assemblage of young men at Edinburgh.)
I[3]
stand before you a self-educated man. My education was[4] that
which was supplied at the humble parish schools of Scotland; and it was
only[5] when I[6]
went to Edinburgh, a poor boy, that I devoted my
evenings, after the labours of the day, to the cultivation of[7] that intellect
which the Almighty has given me. From seven or eight in the morning
till nine or ten at night[8], was I at[9]my business as a bookseller’s apprentice[10],
and[11]it was only during hours after these, stolen from sleep,
that I could devote myself to study. I assure you that I did not read
novels[12]; my attention was devoted[13]
to physical science and other useful
matters[14]. During[15]
that period I taught myself French. I look back[16]
to that time with great pleasure, and am almost sorry I have not to go[17]
through the same troubles again. I[18] reaped more pleasure when I had
not a sixpence in my pocket, studying in a garret in Edinburgh, than I
now find when sitting amidst all the elegancies and comforts of a parlour.—William
Chambers.
[2]Aus; to deliver an address to an assemblage,
vor einer Versammlung eine Rede halten; young men, junge Leute.
[3] I — man.
This sentence does not allow of a literal rendering; say ‘You see before you
a man who has educated himself’ (sich selbst bilden or aus´bilden).
[4] was — Scotland
= was such as (it) (eine solche, wie sie) is given (erteilen) at (in) a simple
Scottish village-school.
[5]The adverb ‘only’, when used in reference
to time, is turned by ‘erst’, but in references to number by ‘nur’; as—
This man has only (but) one coat.
Dieser Mann hat nur
einen Rock.
It is only one o’clock.
Es ist erst
ein Uhr.
[6] when — boy = when I, a poor boy, came to (S. 72, N. 4) Ed.
[7] Construe
the clause ‘of — me’ according to S. 48, N. 6; intellect, Geist.
[8] ‘at
night’, here abends, since Nacht applies only to the hours between 11 P.M. and
5 A.M.
[9] at = in, contracted with the Dat. of the def. art.
[17] to go
through troubles, Beschwerden durch´machen; again, noch einmal. For the constr.
see App. § 19.
[18] Say ‘When (S. 4, N. 2) I had no sixpence (Sechspfennigstück,
n.) in my pocket and studied in a garret in E., I felt (sich fühlen) happier
than now, when (da) I sit in an elegant and comfortable (behaglich) parlour’.
Section 110. GOETHE’S [1] DEATH. I.
The[2]
following morning—it was the 22nd March 1832—he tried to[3]
walk a little up and down the room, but[4]
after a turn, he found[5] himself
too feeble to continue. Reseating[6] himself in the easy chair, he chatted
cheerfully with Ottilie [(S. 53, N. 9) his daughter-in-law] on[7]
the approaching
spring, which would[8]
be sure to restore him. He[9] had no
idea of his end being so near. The name of Ottilie was frequently on
his lips. She sat beside him, holding[10] his hand in both of hers. It was
now observed that his thoughts began to wander[11] incoherently. “See,”
he exclaimed, “the lovely woman’s head, with black curls, in splendid
colours—a[12] dark background!” Presently[13]
he saw a piece of paper
on the floor, and asked them how[14] they could leave Schiller’s letters so
carelessly lying about. Then[15]
he slept softly, and, on[16] awakening,
asked[17] for the sketches[18]
(S. 16, N. 10) he had just seen—the[19] sketches
of his dream.
[1]Johann Wolfgang von Göthe,
geboren den 22. August 1749 zu Frankfurt
a/M., gestorben den 22. März 1832 zu Weimar, kann wohl mit Recht der universalste
Genius seiner Zeit genannt werden, deren Litteratur er unbestritten beherrschte.
Er war Dichter, Biograph, Naturforscher, Altertumsforscher, Kritiker, Ästhetiker und
Staatsmann. In fast allen poetischen Gattungen zeigte er sich als vollendeter Künstler,
am bedeutendsten aber war er als Lyriker. Er hinterließ einen einzigen Sohn, dessen Frau
(Ottilie) unten erwähnt wird.
In silent anguish they[1] now awaited the close now so surely approaching
(S. 48, N. 6). His speech was becoming less and less distinct.
The last words audible[2]
were: “More Light!” The final[3]
darkness[4] grew apace, and he[5]
whose eternal longings had been for
more light, gave a parting cry for it as he was passing under the shadow
of death.
He continued to express himself by signs, drawing[6]
letters[7] with his
forefinger in the air, while he[8] had strength, and finally, as life (S. 3, N. 2)
ebbed[9], drawing[10]
figures slowly on the shawl which covered his legs.
At[11] half-past twelve he composed[12]
himself in the corner of the easy
chair. His faithful watcher[13] placed a finger on her lips to intimate that
he was asleep[14].
It was a sleep in which a life glided[15] from the world.
He[16] woke no more.—G. H. Lewes, Life of Goethe.
[5] he — death = he who had always longed (sich sehnen)
for (nach)
more light, cried still parting for it (danach) when the night of death overshadowed
him.
[6]The conjunction indem with a finite verb is
frequently employed for rendering the English Participle in -ing
used in adverbial clauses of manner; as—
Supporting himself on her arm he slowly ascended the stairs.
Indem er sich auf
ihren Arm stützte, stieg er langsam die
Treppe hinauf.
[16] Say ‘Goethe’
instead of ‘he’; woke = awoke; no more, nicht wieder.
Section 112. ON TRAVELLING ( S. 3, N. 2 ).
I[1] wish folks[2]
in general would keep their eyes a little more open
when they travel by rail[3]. When I see young people rolling along in
a luxurious[4]
carriage, absorbed (S. 102, N. 3) in a trashy[5]
shilling novel[6],
and[7]
never lifting up their eyes to look out of the window, unconscious[8]
of all that[9] they are passing;—of[10]
the reverend antiquities, the admirable[11]
agriculture, the rich and peaceful scenery[12],
the[13] like of which no other
country upon earth can show (App. § 18); unconscious[14], too, of how
much they might[15] learn of botany and
geology, by[16] simply watching
the flowers along the railway banks, and the sections[17]
in the cuttings[18];—then
it grieves me to see what[19] little use people make of the eyes and
the understanding which God has given them. They complain of[20] a
dull[21] journey: but[22]
it is not the journey which is dull; it[23] is they who
are dull. Eyes[24] have they, and see not; ears have they, and hear not;
mere[25] dolls in smart clothes, too many of them, like the idols of the
heathen.—Charles Kingsley, Town Geology.
[4] luxurious = splendid; for the rendering of the verbs
in this passage consult S. 78, N. 14, and for their position, App. § 19; to roll
along, dahin´rollen.
[24] The inverted constr. would not read well here; use therefore the ordinary
constr.
[25] are nothing but (als)
dolls in fine clothes, and like (gleich,
with Dat.) the idols (Götzenbilder) of the heathens are there too many of them
(sind ihrer zu viele).
Section 113. THE MANAGEMENT [1] OF THE BODY.
I have nothing new to say upon the management which the body
requires[2]. The common rules are the best:—exercise without fatigue;
generous[3] living without excess; early rising, and moderation in sleeping.
These are the apothegms[4] of old women; but if they are not attended
to[5], happiness[6]
becomes (App. § 15) so extremely difficult that[7] very few
persons can attain[8] to it. In[9]
this point of view, the care[10] of the body
becomes a[11] subject of elevation and importance. A walk in the fields,
an hour’s[12] less sleep, may[13]
remove all these bodily vexations[14] and
disquietudes which are such formidable enemies to[15] virtue; they may
enable[16] the mind[17]
to pursue[18] its own resolves without that constant
train[19] of temptations to resist, and[20]
obstacles to overcome, which[21] it
always experiences from the bad organisation of its companion.—Sidney
Smith.
[21] the acquaintance of which (deren) the soul always
owes (verdanken, govern. the Dat.) to the defective organisation of its companion.
Section 114. THE SOURCES [1] OF WATER.
There[2]
are many sources of water. The first great source[3] is the
ocean, which collects all the water from[4] the earth; this water contains
so large a quantity of salt, that none[5] of us can drink it. The sun,
however, bears[6]
down upon the ocean’s surface, and its heating[7] rays
penetrating[8] the water, combine, as[9]
it were, with it (S. 4, N. 5, B), and[10]
raise it up. The atmosphere (S. 5, N. 2), like[11]
a sponge, absorbs the[12]
vaporous water, carrying[13]
it from the Equator to[14] the Arctic and the
Antarctic regions; thus[15] distributing it north and south. It then condenses
in the form of rain and of snow. When it sinks into the earth
and pours down the[16] mountain sides, it forms springs and rivulets,
entering[17]
(S. 16, N. 4) the ocean again in[18] the form of rivers. Man
catches[19]
it in tubs and cisterns, draws[20]
it from[21] the rivers, or digs
down[22] into the earth, and catches[23]
it as it passes[24] along beneath his
feet. Thus[25] we have rain water, river water, and spring or well water.—Dr.
Lankester.
[14]nach den nördlichen und südlichen
Polargegenden.
[15] and distributes it north and southward. Comp.
S. 71, N. 2, the principle stated there applying likewise to other compound expressions
besides nouns.
I[1]
owe my success in life to one single fact[2],
namely:—At[3] the age of
twenty-seven[4] I commenced, and continued for years, the process of daily
speaking (S. 34, N. 10) upon the contents of some historical or scientific
book. These efforts[5]
were made sometimes in a corn-field[6],
at others[7]
in the forest, and not unfrequently in some distant[8]
barn, with[9]the horse
and ox for my auditors. It[10] is this early practice in the great art of all
arts that I am indebted for the primary and leading impulses that stimulated
me forward, and shaped and moulded my entire subsequent[11] destiny.
Improve[12],
then, the superior advantages (S. 16, N. 10) you here enjoy[13].
Let not[14] a day pass[15]
without exercising (S. 34, N. 10) your powers[16]
of speech. There is (S. 82, N. 7) no power like[17] that of oratory. Cæsar
controlled[18] men by[19]
exciting their fears; Cicero[20] by[21]
captivating their
affection and swaying their passions. The influence of the one perished[22]
with its author; that of the other continues[23]
to this day.—Henry Clay[24].
[1] To avoid beginning with the pronoun ‘I’, which seldom looks well in
German, and is considered bad style in letters, place the object first, and construe
according to App. § 14.
[2]fact = deed or action = That, f.;
fact = event (as in this instance) = Thatsache, f.; the Latin Factum, pl.
Facta or Facten is, however, used in both significations.
[4] Supply ‘years’, and construe thus: I began the process
(Verfahren, n.), which I continued for years (jahrelang) to speak daily about
(über, with Acc.), etc.; some = a.
[9] whereby horse and
ox formed my audience (Zuhörer).
[10] It — forward = To this early
practice ... I owe the first and leading impulses (Triebfedern) which urged me
forward (vor´wärtstreiben, sep. comp. str. v.).
[19]durch Erregung; render ‘their’ by the Gen. of the def. art.
[20] Supply
here ‘controlled them’ (beherrschte sie dadurch, daß er ...). Comp. and read
carefully S. 87, N. 6, and also S. 1, N. 3. The verb beherrschen requires the
preposition durch.
[21] by — passions = that he gained (sich gewinnen) their
love and guided (lenken) their passions.
[22]erstarb; its author = the author
of the same (to agree with ‘influence’).
[23]fort´dauern, sep. c. w. v.; to
this day, bis auf den heutigen Tag.
[24]Henry Clay (geb. 1777 in Virginien,
† 1852 in Washington) war ein amerikanischer Staatsmann, welcher sich als Sohn
eines einfachen Landmannes bis zu den höchsten Ämtern des Staats heraufarbeitete;
1824 ward er zum Staatssekretär des Auswärtigen ernannt und 1829 war er unter
Jacksons Präsidentschaft im Kongreß Führer der Opposition, als welcher er die Schutzzölle
und die Nationalbank verteidigte. Im Jahre 1849 brachte er den Kompromiß zustande,
wonach dem Süden das Recht der Verfolgung flüchtiger Sklaven durch das
Gebiet der Union eingeräumt ward.
Section 116. EARLY PRIVATIONS [1] .
Admiral Jervis, Earl of St. Vincent, tells us the[1] story of his early
struggles, and, among[2] other things, of his determination (S. 1, N. 2)
to[3] keep out of debt. “My father had a very large family,” said he,
“with limited means. He gave me twenty pounds (S. 58, N. 3) at[4]
starting, and that was all (S. 3, N. 7) he ever[5] gave me. After I had
been a considerable time at[6]
the station at sea I[7] drew for twenty more,
but the bill came[8] back protested. I[9]
was mortified[10] at this rebuke, and
made[11] a promise, which I have ever[12]
kept, that[13] I would never draw
another bill without[14] a certainty of its being paid. I immediately changed
my mode of living, quitted[15] my mess[16],
lived[17] alone, and[18] took up the
ship’s allowance, which I found quite sufficient; washed and mended[19]
my own clothes; made a pair of trousers out of the ticking of my bed[20],
and, having (S. 55, N. 1) by[21]
these means saved as much money as[22]
would redeem my honour, I took[23] up my bill. From (S. 102, N. 4)
that time to this I[24]
have taken care to[25] keep within my means.”
Jervis (S. 5, N. 2) for six years endured pinching[26] privation, but preserved
his integrity, studied his profession with success, and gradually
rose[27] by merit and bravery to the highest rank.—S. Smiles, Self-Help.
[1] Early Privations, Jugendentbehrungen; the story — struggles. This passage,
literally rendered, is not clear in German, and should be turned thus: of (von)
the struggles with privations, which he had to go through (bestehen), when he
was a youth (als Jüngling, which place after the subject ‘he’).
[13] that — bill. This clause is best changed into
a shortened subordinate clause in form of a supine: never to draw a bill again.
Place ‘again’ after ‘never’.
[14] without — paid, ohne auch sicher zu sein,
daß man ihn honorieren würde.
[25] to keep within one’s means, nicht über
seine Mittel hinaus leben; for six years, sechs Jahre lang.
[26] We would use
the superlative here; pinching, drückend.
[27] ‘to rise’, here empor´steigen;
to, bis zu, contracted with the Dat. of the def. art.
Section 117. THE BLESSEDNESS [1] OF FRIENDSHIP. I.
A[2] blessed thing it is for any[3]
man or (S. 10, N. 9) woman to have
a friend; one human soul whom we can trust utterly; a friend who
knows the best and the worst[4] of us, and who loves us, in spite of all
our faults; who will[5] speak the honest[6]
truth to us, while the world
flatters us to[7] our face, and laughs at us behind our backs; who will
give[8] us counsel and reproof in the days of (S. 3, N. 2) prosperity and
self-conceit; but[9] who, again, will comfort and encourage us in the days
of difficulty[10],
and sorrow, when the world leaves[11]
us alone to[12] fight our
own battle as we can.
If we have had the good fortune to win such a friend, let us do anything[13]
rather[14] than lose him. We must give and forgive; live and let
live. If our friend have[15]
faults, we must bear[16] with them (S. 4, N. 5, B).
We must hope all things, believe all things, endure all things, rather[17]
than lose that most precious of all earthly possessions—a trusty[18] friend.
[8] to
give counsel and reproof to a person, einem mit Rat und Tadel zur Seite stehen;
self-conceit, Selbsttäuschung, f.—The adverbial clause ‘in the days — conceit’
stands after the rel. pron. and the Dat. ‘us’ (App. § 9).
And a friend once won (S. 7, N. 3, A) need[1] never be lost, if we will
only be trusty and true ourselves. Friends may[2] part, not merely in body,
but in spirit, for a while. In the bustle of (S. 3, N. 2) business and the
accidents of life, they may lose[3] sight of each other for years
(S. 115, N. 4); and[4] more—they[5]
may begin to differ in their success in life, in
their opinions, in their habits, and there may be, for a time[6], coldness
and estrangement between them: but not for ever, if each will be but
trusty and true.
For then[7], according to[8]
the beautiful figure of the poet, they will be
like two ships which set sail[9] at morning from the same port, and
ere[10]
nightfall lose sight of each other, and[11] go each on its own course, and
at its own pace, for many days, through many storms and seas; and[12]
yet meet again, and[13] find themselves lying side by side in the same
haven, when the long voyage is past.—Charles Kingsley, “The Water
Of Life.”
[1] need — lost = we need (brauchen) never to lose.
[2] may = can, after
which place the adverbial clause ‘for a while’, auf kurze Zeit; the verb ‘part’,
which is equivalent to ‘be separated’ should stand at the end of the whole
passage; ‘in body’, körperlich; ‘in spirit’, geistig.
[3] to lose sight of each
other, sich aus dem Gesicht verlieren.
[11] Say ‘and of which each through many storms and
upon many seas (Meer, n.) for days pursues its own course (Richtung, f.) and its
own pace (Lauf, m.)’.
[12] and — again, welche aber dennoch wieder zusam´mentreffen.
[13] Say ‘and find that they lie after the long voyage (Seefahrt, f.)
side by side (neben einander) in the same haven’.
Section 119. DO GOOD IN YOUR OWN SPHERE OF ACTION [1] . I.
“I want to be at work[2] in the world,” said Tom, “and not dawdling
away[3] three years at Oxford.”
“What do you mean[4] by ‘at work in the world?’” said the master,
with[5] his lips close to his saucerful of tea, and peering at Tom over it.
“Well, I mean real work; one’s[6]
profession, whatever[7] one will really
have to do, and make one’s living by. I want to be doing some real
good, feeling (S. 30, N. 4) that I am not only at play[8] in the world,”
answered Tom, rather[9] puzzled to find out himself what he really
did mean.
“You are mixing up two very different things in your head, I[10] think,
Brown,” said the master, putting down[11] (S. 111, N. 6) the empty saucer,
“and you ought to get clear[12] about them (S. 4, N. 5, B).
You[13] talk of
‘working to get your living’ and ‘doing some real good in the world’
in the same breath.”
[12] to get
clear about a thing, sich über etwas klar werden. I cannot get clear about that,
ich kann mir darüber nicht klar werden;—ought = should.
[13] Use the 2nd
pers. sing., and read carefully S. 1, N. 3, and S. 87, N. 6, which will enable you
to construe this passage. The adverbial clause ‘in the same breath’ (= in one
breath) must be placed after the predicate ‘talk’; to talk of a thing, von etwas
sprechen.
Section 120. DO GOOD IN YOUR OWN SPHERE OF ACTION. II.
Now[1], you may be getting a good living in a profession, and yet
doing no good at all in the world, but (S. 6, N. 10) quite[2] the contrary.
Keep[3]
the latter before you as your one object, and you[4] will be right
whether you make a living[5] or not; but[6]
if you dwell on the other,
you’ll very likely drop[7]
into mere money-making, and let[8] the world
take care of itself, for good or evil. Don’t be in a hurry[9] about finding
your work in the world for yourself; you are not old enough to
(S. 19, N. 7) judge for yourself yet, but just[10] look about you in the place you
find yourself in, and try (S. 51, N. 13) to make things[11] a little better
and honester there. You’ll[12] find plenty to keep your hand in at Oxford,
or wherever else you [may] go. And[13] don’t be led away to think this
part of the world important, and that unimportant. Every corner of the
world is important. No man knows whether this part or that part is[14]
most so, but every man may[15] do some honest work in his own corner.—Thomas
Hughes, “Tom Brown’s School Days.”
[1] Now — getting, Du kannst dir nun aber vielleicht ... verdienen.
[6] Say ‘but if you have only
the other (to agree with ‘part’) before your eyes’.
[7] to drop into mere
money-making, in bloße Geldmacherei verfallen.
[8] to let the world take care
of itself for good or evil, die Welt im Guten und im Bösen sich selbst überlassen.
[9] to be in a hurry, sich beeilen;
about finding = to find (S. 1, N. 3).
[10] ‘just’, here nur, which place after verb and pronoun; in the place, an der
Stelle; to find oneself, sich befinden.
[11] ‘things’, here = life, with def. art.,
after which place the adv. ‘there’; honester = more virtuous.
[12] The
clause ‘at Oxford — go’ is best placed at the head of the whole passage; to
keep your hand in = to do.
[13] And — away, Laß dich auch nicht dazu
verleiten; to think a thing important, eine Sache für wichtig halten.
[14] is
most so = is most important.—When the superlative is used as a predicate,
it is generally preceded by am (the preposition an contracted with
the definite article, dative case singular, masculine), and takes the dative
termination en; as—This matter is not important, but that is most important,
diese Sache ist nicht wichtig, aber jene ist am wichtigsten.
[15] may — corner =
can in his own corner do something good.
Section 121. THE STATE [1] OF IRELAND. (Conclusion of a Speech delivered [2] in the House of Commons in March 1868.) I.
We must all endeavour to get[3]
rid of passion in[4] discussing this church
question, which[5], I am sorry to say, is, of all others, the most calculated
to create passion. We are[6] all, I believe, of one religion. I do not
know (S. 51, N. 13), but I suppose there[7] will come a time in the history
of the world, when men will be astonished[8]
that Catholic[9] and Protestant,
Churchman[10] and Nonconformist[11],
had[12] so much animosity and
suspicion against each other.
I[13]accept and
believe in a very grand passage which I once met[14] with
in the writings of the illustrious founder of the colony and (S. 10, N. 9)
state of Pennsylvania, that[15]
“the humble[16], meek, merciful, just, pious,
and devout souls are[6] everywhere of[6] one religion; and when death[17]
(S. 3, N. 2) has taken off the mask, they will know[18] one another, though
the diverse liveries[19] they wear make[20]
them strangers.”
[20] make them
strangers, sie hienieden unter einander entfremden.
Section 122. THE STATE OF IRELAND. II.
Let us act in this spirit, and our work is[1] easy. The noble lord (S. 5, N. 2),
towards[2] the conclusion of his speech, spoke of the cloud which is
at present hanging[3] over Ireland. It is a dark and heavy cloud, and
its darkness expands[4] over the feelings of men in all parts of the British
Empire. But[5] there is a consolation that we may all take to ourselves.
An inspired king, bard, and prophet has left[6]
us words which[7] are not
only the expression of a fact, but we may take them as the utterance
of a prophecy. He says: “To[8] the upright there arises light in the
darkness.”
Let us try in this matter to be upright[9]. Let us try to be just, and
that cloud will[10] be dispelled; the dangers which we see will vanish;
and we[11] may have the happiness of leaving[6] (S. 1, N. 3) to our children
the heritage of an honourable citizenship in a united and prosperous[12]
empire.—The Right Hon. John Bright.
[1] is easy = will be easy for us (Dat. of persn. pron.).
[7] Say
‘which not merely designate (bezeichnen) a fact (S. 115, N. 2), but (S. 6, N. 10)
which we may (= can) also take (hin´nehmen) as a prophecy (read App. § 18)’.
[8] “Für den Gerechten erhebt sich ein Licht in der Finsternis”.
[9] I think there
is but the adj. ‘gerecht’ to render both ‘upright’ and ‘just’ in the underlying
sense.
Section 123. DR. GUTHRIE ON RAGGED SCHOOLS [1] . I.
The[2] interest I have been led to take in the Ragged School movement
is an example of how, in Providence, a man’s destiny—his course
of life, like that of a river—may be determined and affected by very
trivial circumstances. It is rather[3] curious—at least it is interesting for
me to[4] remember—that (S. 66, N. 15) it was
by a picture I was first[5]
led to take an interest in ragged schools—by a picture in an old, obscure[6],
decaying burgh[7] that stands on the shores of the Frith of Forth,
the birth-place (S. 53, N. 9) of[8]
Thomas Chalmers. I went[9] to see
this place many years ago, and, going (S. 55, N. 1) into an inn for[10] refreshment,
I found the room covered (App. § 1) with pictures of shepherdesses
with their crooks, and sailors in[11]
holiday attire, not[12]
particularly interesting. But above the chimney-piece there[13] was a
large print[14], more[15]
respectable than its neighbours, which[16] represented
a cobbler’s room.
[1]Doktor Guthrie über die Schulen für verwahrloste Kinder.—Sogenannte ‘Ragged
Schools’ existieren in Deutschland wohl nicht, und zwar aus dem einfachen Grunde, weil
wir sie bisher nicht nötig hatten.
[2] This passage requires an altogether
different construction. Say ‘The circumstances which led me (welche mich
dahin führten) to interest myself for the establishment of schools for neglected
children, are an example of (davon) how through Providence (durch die Vorsehung)
the fate of a man (Mensch)—his course of life (S. 76, N. 22, B, 1) like
(gleich, with dat.) that of a river—can be determined and affected (beeinflußt)
by very trivial (geringfügig) circumstances’. For the position of the verbs read
App. §§ 16-20.
[7] ‘burgh’,
here Flecken, m.; the relat. clause ‘that — Forth’ may be elegantly rendered
attributively, thus: am Ufer des Frith of Forth belegen, which last word inflect
correctly and place before the qualified noun ‘burgh’.
[15] Supply
‘which was’; ‘respectable’, here = tolerable, erträglich.
[16] Since we
commenced the preceding clause with a relative pronoun, it need not be
repeated here. Substitute the conj. ‘and’ for ‘which’; a cobbler’s room = the
workshop of a cobbler.
Section 124. DR. GUTHRIE ON RAGGED SCHOOLS. II.
The[1]
cobbler was there himself, spectacles[2] on nose, an old shoe
between his (S. 43, N. 9) knees, the massive[3] forehead and firm mouth
indicating[4] great determination of character, and, beneath his bushy eyebrows,
benevolence[5] gleamed out on a number of poor ragged boys and
girls who stood at their lessons round the busy cobbler. My curiosity
was awakened; and in the inscription I read how this man, John Pounds,
a cobbler in Portsmouth, took[6]
pity on the multitude of[7] poor ragged
children left[8] by ministers and magistrates, and ladies and gentlemen, to
go to ruin in the streets—how[9], like a good shepherd, he gathered in
these wretched[10]
outcasts—how he had trained[11] them to God and the
world—and how[12],
while earning his daily bread by[13] the sweat of his
brow, he had rescued[14]
from misery and saved to[15] society not less than
five hundred of these gentlemen[16].
I felt[17] ashamed of myself. I[18]
felt
reproved for the little I had done. My feelings[19] were touched. I was
astonished at the man’s achievements; and I[20]
well remember, in[21] the
enthusiasm of the moment, saying to my companion (and I have seen in
my cooler and calmer moments no reason for[22] unsaying the saying):
“That man is[23] an honour to humanity, and deserves the greatest monument
ever[24] raised within the shores of Britain.”
[1] The — himself, Da saß der Schuhflicker, wie er leibte und lebte.
[2] spectacles,
die Brille; on, auf, with the def. art.
[5] benevolence — cobbler = shone forth (erglänzen)
a pair of benevolent eyes with which he looked (blicken) upon a number
(Anzahl, f.) of poor, ragged (zerlumpt) boys and girls who learned their lessons
(Aufgabe, f.) and stood around the busy (= industrious) cobbler. To stand
around a person, um einen herum´stehen.
[6] to take pity on a person, sich
jemandes erbarmen, with gen.
[8] left —
streets = which ministers (Geistliche) and magistrates (Obrigkeit, f.) had left
(überlas´sen) to their ruin in (auf) the streets. Read App. § 17.
[9] After
‘how’ follows the subject ‘he’ according to S. 66, N. 15.
[10] wretched =
unfortunate; gathered in = assembled around himself, um sich her versammelte.
[13] by — brow, im Schweiße seines Angesichtes,
which place after ‘daily bread’.
[14] to rescue from misery, aus dem Elend ziehen.
The auxiliary verb, which must
be used in the Subjunctive, according to App. §§ 28 and 30, may be omitted
in the intermediate clauses of this long period, and placed but once at the end
of the entire passage.
[24] = which ever (je) has been
raised within the British Isles.
Section 125. DR. GUTHRIE ON RAGGED SCHOOLS. III.
I[1] took up that man’s history, and I
found it animated by[2] the spirit
of[3] Him who[4]
had “compassion on the multitude.” John Pounds was
a clever man besides[5]; and, like[6]
Paul, if he could not win a poor boy
in (auf) any other way, he won him by art. He[7] would be seen chasing
a ragged boy along the quays, and compelling him to come to[8] school,
not by (durch) the power[9] of a policeman, but by the power of a hot
potato. He knew the love an[10]
Irishman has for a potato; and[11] John
Pounds might be seen holding under a boy’s nose a very hot potato,
and[12] wearing a coat as ragged as the boy himself wore. When the
day comes when[13]
honour shall be done to whom honour is due[14],
I[15]
can fancy the crowd of those whose fame poets (S. 3, N. 2) have sung[16],
and to whose memory monuments have been raised, dividing[17] like a
wave, and[18] passing the great, and the noble, and the mighty of the
land, this poor, obscure old man stepping forward and receiving the
especial notice of Him who said: “Inasmuch[19] as ye did it to one of
the least of those, ye did it also to me.”—Dr. Guthrie.
[1] I followed up (verfolgen) the life of this man.
[11] and one could often see how
J. P. held a hot potato under a boy’s nose.—To hold a potato under one’s
nose, einem eine Kartoffel unter die Nase halten.
[12] and (insert here dabei)
wore as ragged a coat as the boy himself.
[18]
and — said = see, how this poor, unknown old man steps forward (hervor´treten)
and passes by (an einem vorü´berschreiten) the great, noble and mighty of
the land, and is received (S. 2, N. 1) with especial attention by Him (von Ihm,
which place after the conj. ‘and’) who (insert da) said.
[19] Say ‘What
you (ihr) have done to the least (dem Geringsten) of (unter) these, that have you
done to me’.
Section 126. SHYLOCK [1] MEDITATING REVENGE.
If it will feed[2]
nothing else (S. 27, N. 8), it will[3] feed my revenge.
He has disgraced[4] me, and hindered[5]
me of half a million! laughed[6]
at my losses, mocked[7]
at my gains, scorned my nation, thwarted[8] my
bargains, cooled[9] my friends, heated[10]
my enemies! And[11] what’s his
reason? I am a Jew! Has[12] not a Jew eyes? Has not a Jew hands,
organs, senses, affections,[13]
passions? Is (S. 2, N. 1) he not fed with[14]
the same food, hurt with the same weapon, subject[15] to the same
diseases, healed[16]
by the same means, warmed[17] and cooled by the
same summer and winter, as a Christian is? If[18] you stab us, do we
not bleed? If you tickle us, do we not laugh? If you poison us, do we
not die? and[19]
if you wrong us, shall we not revenge? If we are like[20]
you in the rest (S. 27, N. 8), we will resemble you in that[21]! If a Jew
wrong a Christian, what[22]
is his humility? Revenge[23]. If a Christian
wrong a Jew, what[24] should his sufferance be by Christian example?
Why[25],
revenge! The villany you teach (S. 42, N. 4) me I[26] will execute;
and[27] it shall go hard but[28]
I will better the instruction.—William
Shakespeare, “The Merchant of Venice.”
[28] but — instruction = if I should not even (noch,
after ‘not’) excel (‘should excel’ Imperf. of the Subj. of übertreffen; App. § 33)
my teachers.
Section 127. CHARACTER [1] OF CHARLEMAGNE. I.
In[2] analyzing the character of heroes it is hardly possible to separate
altogether the[3]
share of fortune from their own[4].
The epoch made[5] by
Charlemagne in the history of the world, the illustrious families which[6]
prided themselves in him as their progenitor, the[7] very legends of
romance, which are full of his fabulous exploits, have[8] cast a lustre
around his head, and testify[9] the greatness that has embodied itself in
his name. None[10], indeed, of Charlemagne’s wars can be compared
with the Saracenic victories of Charles Martel; but[11] that was a contest
for freedom, his for conquest; and[12] fame is more partial to successful
aggression than to patriotic resistance.
[1]
Say ‘The character of Charles the Great (S. 53, N. 9)’. Karl der Große
König der Franken und später römischer Kaiser, wurde am 2. April 742, wahrscheinlich
zu Aachen, geboren und war der Sohn Pipins des Kleinen und der Enkel Karl
Martells, dessen Siege über die Sarazenen in dieser Lektion erwähnt werden. Nach
dem Tode seines königlichen Vaters (768) trat er gemeinschaftlich mit seinem Bruder
Karlmann die Regierung an, ward aber schon im Jahre 771, durch den Tod seines
Bruders und die Ausschließung der Söhne desselben vom Throne, Alleinherrscher über
alle Franken, von den Pyrenäen bis zum Niederrhein und zum Meere, auch in Deutschland
über die Bayern, Thüringer und Alamannen. Durch zahlreiche Kriege erweiterte er
jedoch die Grenzen seines Reiches sehr bald, und zwar nördlich bis zur Eider, südlich bis
zum Ebro und nach Unteritalien, und östlich bis zur Saale, dem Böhmerwalde und der
Theiß, bis er im Jahre 800 vom Papste Leo III. im St. Peters Dom zu Rom feierlich
als römischer Kaiser gekrönt wurde. Er starb am 28. Januar 814. In Karl dem Großen,
wie ihn die Geschichte mit Recht benannt hat, war der Begründer der staatlichen Ordnung
für die gesammte Germanenwelt erschienen. Seine Lebensaufgabe, die ihm von Anfang
an feststand, war, alle deutschen Stämme in den einen fränkischen Reichsverband und in
die eine christliche Kirche zusammenzufassen. Dem besten Teile nach ist sie ihm gelungen,
und so hat er der nachfolgenden Zeit, dem ganzen Mittelalter, das Gepräge seines Geistes
aufgedrückt. In niemand stellt sich die echt deutsche Art der alten Zeit so herrlich dar, als
in ihm. Als er die Krone erhielt, zählte er erst 26 Jahre, stand also in der Kraft und
Blüte der Jugend. Er war von gewaltiger Körpergröße, eine Heldengestalt, und von
nicht minder gewaltiger Körperkraft, so daß er beim fröhlichen Waidwerk den Kampf mit
dem wilden Auerochsen in den Ardennenwäldern wie ein Spiel aufnahm; überhaupt von
jener Lust an Krieg und Gefahr, wie sie den abenteuernden Heerkönigen der Völkerwanderung
eigen gewesen war; in den wichtigen Dingen der Welt von jener Härte und
Rücksichtslosigkeit, die noch keinem großen Manne gefehlt; und ebenso im kleinen Leben
des Hauses und des täglichen Verkehrs von jener Milde, Heiterkeit und Frische des
Gemütes, die so gerne Gefährten echter Größe sind. Alle diese Eigenschaften hatte er
mit seinem damaligen Volke gemein; was ihn aber über dasselbe erhob, das war der
weitschauende Geist, der dem alten Römertum das Vorbild eines weltumfassenden Staates
abgelernt hatte, und der dies Muster ohne knechtische Nachahmung dem so ganz andern
germanischen Wesen anzupassen wußte. Und zwar ist dieser Geist, der sich in ihm offenbarte,
um so wundervoller, weil niemand nachweisen kann, wie er sich gebildet, und wer
ihn so gelehrt und erzogen hat. Aus dem Dunkel seiner Zeit geht er, im eigenen Lichte
leuchtend, auf.
[10] Say ‘It is indeed (wohl)
true that none of Charles’s wars can be compared to (mit) the victories of
Charles Martel over the Saracens’.
[11] but — conquest = but these were
contests for freedom (Freiheitskämpfe), whilst his (to agree with ‘wars’) were
contests for conquest (Eroberungskämpfe).
[12] Say ‘and fame (S. 3, N. 2) has
more partiality (Vorliebe, f.) for successful aggression (Angriff, m.)’, etc.
Section 128. CHARACTER OF CHARLEMAGNE. II.
As a scholar[1], his acquisitions[2]
were little superior[3] to those of his
unrespected son; and in[4] several points of view the glory of Charlemagne
might be[5]
extenuated by an analytical dissection. But[6] rejecting
a mode of judging equally uncandid and fallacious, we shall find that he
possessed in everything that grandeur of[7] conception which distinguishes
extraordinary minds[8].
Like Alexander, he seemed born[9] for universal
innovation[10];
in a life restlessly active[11], we see him reforming
(S. 78, N. 14, B) the coinage[12],
and establishing the legal divisions of money[13];
gathering[14] about him the learned of every country, founding schools
and collecting libraries; interfering[15], but with the tone of a King, in
religious controversies; aiming[16], though prematurely, at the formation
of a naval force; attempting[17], for[18]
the sake of commerce, the magnificent[19]
enterprise of uniting (S. 1, N. 3) the Rhine and[20]
Danube; and[21]
meditating to mould the[22] discordant codes of Roman and barbarian
laws into one uniform system.—Hallam, “The Student’s Middle Ages.”
[1] Scholar = ‘pupil or schoolboy’ is rendered by Schüler; = ‘student’ by
Student, and = ‘learned man’ by Gelehrter. The last sense is applicable here.
[13] form a comp. n. according to S. 36, N. 7, A; both nouns are combined in
the sing.
[14] Complete the clause by saying: ‘we see him gathering’, etc.,—to
gather, versammeln; about, um; of every country = of all countries.
[15] interfering
in religious controversies, sich mit religiösen Streitigkeiten befassen; after
which place the clause ‘but — King’, and supply ‘always’ after ‘but’; ‘tone’,
here = dignity.
[16] This sentence should likewise be introduced by
supplying ‘We see him’, after which place ‘though prematurely’ (zu frühzeitig);
to aim, streben (nach).
[22] the — laws, die sich widersprechenden römischen und sonstigen Gesetze;
uniform, einheitlich; to mould, verschmelzen.
Section 129. GOETHE’S DAILY LIFE AT WEIMAR. I.
Passing through an ante-chamber, where, in cupboards, stand his
mineralogical collections, we enter (App. § 14) the study, a low-roofed,
narrow room (Gemach, n.), somewhat dark (S. 128, N. 11), for it is
(S. 2, N. 1) lighted only through two tiny windows, and[1] furnished
with a simplicity quite touching to behold.
In the centre[2]
stands a plain oval table of unpolished oak[3]. No arm-chair
is to be seen, no sofa, nothing which (S. 3, N. 7) speaks[4] of
comfort. A plain hard chair has[5] beside it the basket in which he
used[6] to place his handkerchief. Against[7]
the wall, on the right, is a[8]
long pear-tree table, with book-shelves, on which stand lexicons and
manuals. Here hangs a pincushion, venerable in[9] dust, with the visiting-cards,
and other trifles which[10]
death had made sacred. Here[11] also a
medallion of Napoleon, with this[12]
circumscription: “Scilicet[13] immenso
superest ex nomine multum.” On the side-wall again, a book-case,
with some works of poets. On the wall to the left is a long desk of
soft wood, at[14] which he was wont[6] to write. A sheet of paper with
notes of[15]
contemporary history is fastened near[16]
the door, and behind[17]
this door tables[18] of music and geology.
[1] and — behold = and is (ist)
furnished with an almost (fast) touching simplicity.
[6] used to place, zu
legen pflegte. ‘To use’, when employed transitively, is generally rendered by
brauchen, gebrauchen, benutzen, an´wenden, and verbrauchen,
whilst intransitively it is
rendered by pflegen or gewohnt sein, in the sense of ‘to be accustomed to’, ‘to
be in the habit of’, ‘to be wont to do’.
[7] Against = on; on (or to) the right,
rechts; on (or to) the left, links.
The same door leads into a bedroom; it is a[1] closet with a window.
A simple bed, an arm-chair by[2] its side, and a tiny washing-table, with
a small white basin on it and a sponge, is[3] all the furniture.
From the other side of the study we enter the library, which should[4]
rather be called a lumber-room of books. Rough[5] deal shelves hold the
books with[6] bits of paper, on which are written “philosophy,” “history,”
“poetry,” etc., to mark the classification. He rose at seven [o’clock],
sometimes[7] earlier, after a sound and
prolonged[8]
sleep; for like Thorwaldsen[9]
he had a “talent for sleeping,” only surpassed (S. 7, N. 3, B)
by[10] his talent for[11]
continuous work. Till eleven he worked without
any interruption. A cup of chocolate was then[12]
brought, and[13] he resumed
work till one. At two he dined. This[14] meal was the important
meal of the day. His appetite was immense. Even on the days
when[15] he complained of not being hungry, he ate much more than
most men. Puddings, sweets[16], and cakes were always welcome. He
sat[17]
a long while over his wine, chatting[18] gaily to some friend or
other—for he never dined alone—or to one of the actors, whom he had
often with[19]
him, after dinner, to read over their parts, and to take[20] his
instructions.
[3] is — furniture = form
(bilden) the whole furniture (Mobiliar, n.).
[4] should rather
be called = could (Impf. subj.) much rather (vielmehr) be called. The auxiliary
‘could’ stands last of all, whilst ‘called’ has the first place of the three verbs,
which are used in the Passive Voice.
[5] Say ‘Upon simple (schlicht) deal
boards stand the books’.
[6] The passage ‘with — classification’ may be
simplified by saying: ‘on (an) which (denen) bits of paper with the labels
(Aufschrift, f.) ... indicate (bezeichnen) a certain order’. The abbreviation ‘etc.’
corresponds to the German ‘u. s. w.’, which is the short for ‘und so weiter’, and
so on.
[9]Albert
Bertel Thorwaldsen, berühmter dänischer Bildhauer, wurde im Jahre 1770 auf der
See zwischen Island und Kopenhagen geboren, war ein Schüler der Kunstakademie zu
Kopenhagen und lebte von 1796 bis 1838 in Rom, kehrte aber dann nach seiner Heimat
zurück, wo er am 24. März 1844 starb. Thorwaldsen ist der Schöpfer zahlreicher idealer
Werke im echten klassischen Geiste altgriechischer Kunst, welche meistens der antiken
Mythologie, zum Teil aber auch der christlichen Religionsanschauung entlehnt sind.
Sein Name wird unsterblich sein, denn er lebt der Welt in seinen unvergleichlichen Werken
fort, die zu Kopenhagen von seinen begeisterten Landsleuten in einem besonders dazu gebauten
Museum, welches den Namen des weltberühmten Künstlers trägt, zur Bewunderung der
Nachwelt ausgestellt sind.
[12] Place
the adv. ‘then’ at the head of the sentence, and supply ‘for him’ (ihm) after
the auxiliary. As a rule the person or persons for whose benefit an
action is done must be indicated in German; as—I will buy a hat,
ich will mir einen Hut kaufen.
[13] and — one = whereupon he worked again
till one o’clock.
[14] This — day = This was his principal meal. Form
a comp. n. according to S. 36, N. 7, A.
[15] when (wo) he complained of
(über) want (Mangel, m.) of (an) appetite.
[17] To
sit a long while over one’s wine, lange beim Wein sitzen.
[18] chatting = and
chatted (plaudern); to some friend or other = to (mit) this or that friend.
[19]bei sich;
after — parts = to (= in order to) read to him their parts (Rollen)
after dinner (nach Tische, which place after the conj. um and the dat. of the
persn. pron.). To read, vor´lesen.
[20] To take instructions, Anweisungen
entge´gennehmen.
Section 131. GOETHE’S DAILY LIFE AT WEIMAR. III.
He was fond of wine (S. 3, N. 2) and drank daily his two or three
bottles. Lest[1] this statement should convey a false impression, I hasten
to[2] recall to the reader’s recollection the very different habits of our
fathers in respect to drinking. It was no[3] unusual thing to be called
“a three-bottle-man” in those days in England, when[4] the three bottles
were of port or Burgundy; and Goethe, a[5] Rhinelander, accustomed
from boyhood to wine, drank a wine which his English contemporaries
would have called water. The[6] amount he drank never did more than
exhilarate him, and never made him unfit for work or for society. Over[7]
his wine, then, he sat some hours; no such thing as dessert was seen
upon his table in those days; not even the customary coffee after dinner.
His mode[8]
of living was extremely simple; and even when persons[9]
of very moderate circumstances burned wax[10],
two[11] poor tallow candles
were all that could be seen in his rooms. In the evening he often went
to the theatre, and there[12] his customary glass of punch was brought (S. 4, N. 4,
man) at six o’clock (App. § 9). If (S. 27, N. 7) not at the theatre,
he received friends at[13] home. Between eight and nine a frugal supper
was laid[14], but[15]
he never took anything except a little salad or preserves.
By[16] ten o’clock he was usually in bed.—G. H. Lewes,
“Life of
Goethe.”
[1] Lest — impression = In order that (Damit) this observation may (Present
Subj. of mögen; read App. §§ 33 and 34) not make a false impression.—For the
position of the verbs see App. § 18.
[2] to — drinking = to remind the
reader of (an) the very different (ganz andern) habits of our fathers in respect
of drinking.—To transl. ‘drinking’ form a noun of the infinitive of the verb
‘to drink’, and use it with the def. art., according to S. 3, N. 2, and S. 11, N. 7.
[3] no — thing, nichts Ungewöhnliches;
in those days, damals, which place
with ‘in England’ after ‘was’.
[4] ‘when’, here wo. Notice that: The
relative conjunction ‘wo’ is often used in reference to time as a
translation of ‘when’ in the sense of ‘at (inorduring) which time’;
as—Es geschah zu einer Zeit, wo (zu or in welcher)
Sie abwesend waren, it happened
at a time when you were absent. It is also used relatively, in reference
to place, instead of a relative pronoun preceded by a preposition;
as—Kennst du das Land, wo (in welchem) die Zitronen blühen? (Goethe) Know you
the land where (in which) the citrons bloom? Dies ist das Haus, wo (in dem) er
wohnt, this is the house where (in which) he lives.
[5] a — wine, als
Rheinländer von Jugend auf an Wein gewöhnt.
[6] The — him = What he
drank had never any (= an) other effect than (als) to exhilarate him; to
exhilarate, angenehm an´regen.
[7] So he sat for hours (stundenlang) over his
(beim) wine.
Section 132. THE [1] PROGRESS IN THE ART OF PRINTING.
(Conclusion[2] of a speech
delivered at the Caxton Celebration, June 30, 1877, in London.)
I now call[3] attention, in[4]
a few words, to the progress of this art.
I hold up a volume in my (S. 43, N. 9) hand, to[5] which I beg everyone
to direct his eye, because I think it[6] may be called the climax and consummation
of this art. This[7] volume is bound, as you see, and stamped
with the arms of the University of Oxford. It is a Bible bound[8] in a
manner that commends itself to the reader—I believe[9] in every sense
an excellent piece of workmanship, containing more than one[10] thousand
pages. Well[11],
you will say: “That is very[12] commonplace, why bring it
before us?” I do so[13] in order to tell[14]
you that this book sixteen
hours ago did not exist—it[15] was not bound, it was not folded, it was not
printed. Since the clock struck twelve last night at[16] the University
Press in Oxford, the people (man) there have printed and sent us this
book. They (man) have sent several copies[17]
to[18] be distributed here
in the midst of your festival. That shows what can be done, and that is
what has been done, and[19] it shows the state to which this great art is
now happily arrived. If[20] I began with a humiliating confession as to
the small share we could claim in contributing to the early history of
printing, we may[21] leave off, ladies and gentlemen, in a better spirit,
because I think that such a performance as this is[22] one that will be
admitted to be a credit in any portion of the world. Now I will trouble
you no longer, but (S. 6, N. 10) will ask[23]
you to[24] drink with me to
the memory of this most distinguished name: “To[25]
the memory of[26]
William Caxton, the (S. 53, N. 9) first English printer, and a native[27] of
this our beloved country[28].”—The Right Hon. W. E. Gladstone.
[1]Die Fortschritte in der Buchdruckerkunst.The noun ‘progress’ is generally
rendered by the corresponding plural form in German.
[2]Schluß
einer am 30. Juni 1877 bei Gelegenheit der Caxtonfeier in London gehaltenen Rede.
William Caxton, der erste Buchdrucker Englands, wurde im Jahre 1412 zu Weald
m Kent geboren, wohnte aber später als Bürger und Kaufmann in London, woselbst
er auch im Jahre 1492 starb.
[3] to call a person’s attention to a thing, einen
auf etwas aufmerksam machen. Begin with the adv. ‘now’, and supply the personal
object ‘Sie’.
[5] = which I beg you all to look
at (betrachten, v. tr.).
[6] it — art = we may (dürfen) consider (an´sehen)
it
the climax and consummation (als die höchste Stufe der Vollendung) of (= in) this
art.
[7] Say ‘As you see, this volume (here Einband) is stamped with the
arms’, etc.
[8] bound — reader = the binding of which must commend
(App. § 18) itself at once (sich von selbst) to the reader.
[9] Here insert ‘it
is’; sense = respect, Beziehung, f.; piece of workmanship = ‘work of art’, which
render by forming a comp. n. according to S. 36, N. 7, A.
[10]’One’ or
‘a’ before ‘hundred’ and ‘thousand’ is, as a rule, not translated in
German.
[11] Say ‘But (which place after the copula ‘will’) you will
perhaps say’.
[12]etwas ganz Gewöhnliches, wozu es uns noch zeigen?
[13]The English ‘so’ in connection with a transitive verb is generally
to be rendered by ‘es’. If we want to emphasize the object, however,
we use either of the demonstrative pronouns ‘das’ or ‘dies’, and
place it at the head of the clause; as—Do you think so? Glauben Sie
es? No, I do not, Nein, das glaube ich nicht.
[16] Render ‘at the’ by
the gen. of the def. art.; and place the clause ‘at — Oxford’ after ‘clock’.
Last night, vergangene Nacht.
[17] ‘Copy’ in the signification of ‘specimen’
is rendered by Exemplar, n.; pl. e (= e); Kopie,
f., is the written copy of any
book, document or MS.
[18] Say ‘in order to distribute them here during
this festival’.
[19] and — arrived = and it shows the high degree (Stufe, f.) of
(der) perfection which this great art has reached now-a-days (heutzutage) (App.
§ 17).
[20] If — printing = If I began with the humiliating confession that
we in respect to (auf) our contribution to the (zur) early (früheren) history
of the art of printing can claim (beanspruchen dürfen, which comes last) only
a small (gering) share.
[21] may = can; leave off = conclude; spirit = mood,
Stimmung, f.; performance, Leistung, f.
[22] is — world, überall in der Welt
mit Ehren anerkannt werden wird.
[23] ‘To ask’ in the signification of
‘asking a question’ is rendered by fragen or eine Frage stellen, but in that
of ‘to request’ by bitten.
[24] to — name = to empty your glasses with
me to the (zum) memory (Andenken) of (an) this most (höchst) distinguished
name; (‘your glasses to empty’ must be placed at the end.)
Section 133. ROBERT DICK, THE BAKER, GEOLOGIST, AND BOTANIST.
Not long ago, Sir Roderick Murchinson discovered at Thurso, in the
far north of Scotland, a profound[1] geologist, in the person of a baker
there[2], named Robert Dick. When (S. 4, N. 2) Sir Roderick called
upon him at[3] the bakehouse in which (S. 131, N. 4) he baked and earned
his bread, Robert Dick delineated[4]to him
by[5] means of flour upon a
board, the geographical features[6] and geological phenomena of his
native country, pointing[7]
out its imperfections in[8] the existing maps,
which[9] he had ascertained by travelling over the country in his leisure
hours. On[10]
further inquiry, Sir Roderick ascertained[11]
that the humble[12]
individual before him was not only a capital baker and geologist, but also
a first-rate[13] botanist. “I found,” said the Director-General of the Geographical
Society, “to my great humiliation, that this baker[14] knew infinitely
more of (S. 40, N. 9) botanical science, ay, ten times more, than I did;
and that there were (S. 82, N. 7) only some twenty or thirty specimens[15]
of flowers which he had not collected. Some he had obtained[16] as
presents, some (= others) he had purchased, but the greater portion had
been accumulated[17] by his industry, in his native county of Caithness;
and the specimens[18] were all arranged[19]
in the most beautiful order,
with[20] their scientific names affixed.”—S. Smiles, “Self-Help.”
[14] Here
follow the words ‘of — science’ after which transl. the adv. ‘infinitely’, which
is followed by ‘ay (ja) ten times more’ and the verb ‘knew’.
[20] and the
scientific names everywhere (überall) affixed (hinzu´fügen), sep. comp. w. v.
Section 134. THE GOSPEL OF WORK. I.
Work, hard[1] work, is a blessing to[2]
the soul and the character[3] of
the man who works. Young men[4]
may not think so. They[5] may say:
“What[6] more pleasant than to have[7]
one’s fortune made for one, and[8]
have nothing more before one than to enjoy life? What[6] more pleasant
than to be idle; or, at least, to do only what one likes, and no more
than one likes?” But they would find themselves mistaken. They
would find that idleness makes a man[9] restless, discontented, greedy,
the[10] slave of his own lusts and passions, and see, too late, that no man[9]
is more to be pitied than the man[11] who has nothing to do. Yes,
thank[12] God, every morning, when you get up, that you have something
to do that day which must be done, whether you like it or not. Being[13]
forced to work, and forced to do your best, will breed in[14] you temperance
and self-control, diligence and strength of will, cheerfulness and
content, and a (S. 132, N. 10) hundred virtues which the idle[15] man will
never know.
[3] character = dignity. Turn ‘of — works’ by
‘of him (dessen) who (after which insert the adv. da) works.
[4] men =
people, Leute. When ‘people’ signifies ‘persons’ in the general sense of
the word, it is mostly rendered by Leute. In the signification of
‘nation’ it is rendered by Volk, n., corresponding to the Latin
‘populus’ and the French ‘peuple’. In the first signification, however,
we can often translate it by the indefinite pronoun ‘man’, which also corresponds
to the English ‘they’, ‘we’, ‘you’, used in a general and indefinite
sense.
[12] When the Imperative
of the 2nd pers. is used in a general application, we use it either in
the 2nd pers. sing. or the 2nd pers. pl. Use the 2nd pers. sing. in this case.
[13] Being — best = The compulsion (Zwang,
m.) to work (zur Arbeit) and the
necessity to do your (= thy) best.
[14] Place ‘in you’ (= thee) after
‘virtues’, immediately before the infinitive ‘breed’ (= awaken, erwecken).
The monks in olden times found it so[1]. When (S. 18, N. 6) they
shut[2]
themselves up from the world to worship God in[3] prayers and
hymns, they found that [here follows the subject “they”], without working[4],
without[5]
hard work either of head or of hands, they could not[6] even be
good men (S. 134, N. 9). The[7] devil came and[8]
tempted them, they
said, as often as they were[9] idle. An idle monk’s soul was lost, they
used (S. 129, N. 6) to say, and they spoke truly. Though they gave[10]
up a large portion of[11]
every day, and of every night also, to[12] prayer
and worship, (S. 27, N. 8) yet[13] they found [that] they could not pray
aright without work.
And “working (S. 11, N. 7) is praying,” said one of the holiest of
them that[14]
ever lived; and he spoke truth (S. 3, N. 2); if[15] a man will
but do his work for the sake of duty, which is for the sake of God.—Charles
Kingsley.
[1] Turn ‘it so’ by ‘das’, which place at the head of the sentence, using the
inverted construction and inserting the adv. ‘auch’ after the verb.
[2] to
shut oneself up, sich ab´schließen, sep. comp. str. v. refl.
[14] who ever (je) has lived.
How must the verbs be placed?
[15] Begin a new period here, and say:
‘When a man (S. 134, N. 9) does his work for the sake of (um ... willen,
which governs the Gen.) his duty, (S. 27, N. 8) he does it (to agree with
‘duty’) for God’s sake’.
Section 136. DO NOT BE ASHAMED OF YOUR ORIGIN [1] . I.
General Bau, a German (S. 101, N. 1) officer in[1] the service of Russia,
who had contributed much to the elevation of the great Catherine[2],
had[3]
orders to march to Holstein with a body of troops of which he had the
command. He was a soldier of fortune, and no one knew either his
family or his native place. One day (S. 19, N. 2), as he was encamped
near[4] Husum, he invited the principal[5]
officers to dinner. As they were
sitting down to the table, they[6] saw a plain miller and his wife brought
into the tent, whom[7] the general had sent his aide-de-camp to seek.
The poor miller and his wife approached, trembling (S. 53, N. 12) with[8]
apprehension. The general reconciled them to[9] their situation, and
made[10]
them sit down beside him to dinner, during which he asked[11]
them a number of questions about their family.
[1] Origin, Herkunft,
f.; in the service of Russia, in russischen Diensten.
[2]Katharina
I., Kaiserin von Rußland, wurde am 15. April 1684 geboren und
war die Tochter eines lithauischen Bauers, namens Samuel Skawronski. Im Jahre
1701 wurde sie die Gattin eines schwedischen Dragoners, fiel dann bei der Einnahme
Marienburgs durch die Russen (1702) in die Hände des russischen Generals Scheremetjew,
durch den sie zum Fürsten Menschikow und endlich zum Kaiser Peter dem Großen kam,
der sich in sie verliebte und sich im Jahre 1707 heimlich mit ihr vermählen ließ. Ihr
eigentlicher Taufname war Martha, beim Übertritt zur griechisch katholischen Kirche
erhielt sie jedoch die Namen Katharina Alexiewna. Im Jahre 1711 gelang es ihr, indem
sie sich die Gunst des Großveziers zu gewinnen wußte, am Pruth das russische Heer durch
List aus gefährlicher Lage zu befreien, worauf sie im Jahre 1712 von Peter dem Großen
öffentlich als seine rechtmäßige Gemahlin anerkannt wurde. Sie wurde endlich im Jahre
1724 als Kaiserin feierlich gekrönt, als sie jedoch nach Peters des Großen Tode im Jahre
1725 auf Betrieb des Fürsten Menschikow als regierende Kaiserin ausgerufen wurde, überließ
sie sich einer zügellosen Lebensweise und starb am 17. Mai 1727. Sie ward Mutter dreier
Töchter, Katharina, Anna (Mutter Peters III.) und Elisabeth, der nachmaligen Kaiserin.
[3] Say ‘had the order’; render ‘to march — command,’ liter. = with an under
his command standing body of troops (Truppencorps, n.) to (S. 72, N. 4) Holstein
to march.
[10] made them
sit down, ließ (or hieß, bade) sie ... platz´nehmen; beside him = on his side; to
dinner, beim Essen.
[11] to ask a person numerous questions, einem viele
Fragen vor´legen; about, über.
Section 137. DO NOT BE ASHAMED OF YOUR ORIGIN. II.
The good man told him that he was (App. § 28) the eldest son of a
miller, and that he had two brothers in[1] a mercantile line and a sister.
“But,” said the general, “had you[2] not another brother besides the two
whom you have mentioned?” The miller told him he had another[3]
brother, but[4]
he went to the wars very young, and as[5] they had never
heard of him, they supposed he was dead. The[6] general, reading
(S. 16, N. 4) in the eyes of the officers that they were surprised at his entertaining
himself so long with questioning the poor man, turned to them
and said: “Gentlemen, you have always been curious to know from
what family I sprung[7]; I now tell[8]
you that I am not ashamed of my
origin; that I am the brother of this honest miller; he has given you the
history[9]
of my family.” The general, after spending[10] (S. 55, N. 1) the
day with his relations, in[11] the festivity of which his officers heartily
joined, took measures to better their fortune[12].—Anecdotes.
[2] Translate ‘you’ by Ihr in this
address, and use the verb in the 2nd pers. pl., which at that time was the
common address for people of the lower rank of society. Say ‘had you
(Ihr) besides (außer) the two already mentioned brothers not yet another’?
[6] Say ‘The general who read in the eyes of the officers
their surprise (insert darüber), that he occupied himself so long with the
questioning (Ausfragen, n.) of the poor man’.
There[1] is a popular report in the Brandenburg district, where Bismarck’s
family has been so many centuries at home, which attributes to
the Bismarcks, as the characteristic saying of the house, the phrase:
“Noch lange nicht genug”—(Not near enough yet), and which expresses[2],
we[3] suppose, the popular[4]
conception of[5]
their tenacity of purpose—that[6]
they were not tired out of any plan they had formed by a reiterated
failure or a pertinacious opposition which would have disheartened most
of their compeers. There[7] is a somewhat extravagant illustration of
this characteristic in Bismarck’s wild, youthful days, if his biographer may
be trusted. When studying[8] law at Berlin, he had been more than once
disappointed[9] by a bootmaker who[10]
did not send home his boots when
they were promised. Accordingly[11] when this next happened, a servant
of the young jurist appeared at the bootmaker’s at six in the morning
(App. § 9) with the simple question: “Are Herr[12] von Bismarck’s boots
ready?” When he was told they were not[13],
he departed[14], but at ten
minutes past six another servant appeared, asking[15] the same question,
and[16]
so at precise intervals of ten minutes it went on all day, till by[17]
the evening the boots were finished and[18] sent home.—Earle, “The
Philology of the English Tongue.”
[1] Say ‘In the province of Brandenburg, where the family Bismarck for
(seit) several centuries is at home (‘to be at home,’ here ansässig sein) there is
(existiert) a popular (volkstümlich) report (Sage, f.) which, as a characteristic
saying (Wahlspruch, m.) attributes (zu´schreiben, with the dat.) to the Bismarcks
the phrase (Motto, n.)’.
[6] that they even (auch) through
repeated failure (Fehlschlagen) or pertinacious (hartnäckig) opposition (Widerstand,
m.), which would have discouraged (entmutigt hätte, which place at the end of
this clause) most of their compeers (Standesgenossen), were not tired out of any
plan they had formed (sich nicht von ihrem einmal gefaßten Plane abbringen ließen).
[7] A somewhat eccentric illustration (Belag, m.) of (für)
this characteristic
quality we find in Bismarck’s wild (stürmisch) youth, if we can trust his biographer.
[10] Say
‘who had not (App. § 10) sent back his boots at the appointed (verabredet) time’.
[11]
When (S. 4, N. 2) it therefore happened again (wieder geschehen).
[12]Fürst
Otto von Bismarck wurde am 1. April 1815 zu Schönhausen, dem Stammgute der
Familie Bismarck, in der Provinz Brandenburg im Königreiche Preußen geboren. Er
entstammt der alten preußischen adeligen Familie von Bismarck, welche auch von Bismarck-Schönhausen
genannt wird, um dieselbe von der ihr verwandten Familie von Bismarck-Bohlen
zu unterscheiden. Von Bismarck trat zuerst öffentlich auf dem Landtage von 1847
als Führer der äußersten Rechten (extreme Conservatives) und dann als Mitglied der
im Jahre 1848 tagenden zweiten preußischen Kammer (the Prussian House of
Commons) als entschiedener Gegner des Repräsentationssystems (Representative
Government) und der Reichsverfassung hervor. Sein entschiedenes Talent für die
diplomatische Laufbahn bestimmte die Regierung, ihn im Jahre 1851 zum Legationssekretär
bei der preußischen Bundestagsgesandschaft in Frankfurt a/M. zu ernennen. Drei
Monate später wurde er jedoch schon zum Bundestagsgesandten erhoben, in welcher Eigenschaft
er vergeblich Preußens Gleichstellung mit Östreich beim Bundestage erstrebte.
Nachdem er seit dem 1. April 1859 preußischer Gesandter in Petersburg und seit dem
Frühjahr 1862 Botschafter in Paris gewesen, trat er am 24. September desselben Jahres
als Minister des Auswärtigen an die Spitze des neu ernannten Kabinetts. Es würde zu
weit führen, hier auf die Einzelheiten seiner großartigen Erfolge als Ministerpräsident
einzugehen, genüge es zu bemerken, daß sein Hauptstreben darauf gerichtet war, Preußen
zur herrschenden Macht in Deutschland zu machen, Östreich daraus zu verdrängen,
und schließlich durch Auflösung des deutschen Staatenbundes ein einiges Deutschland unter
dem Zepter Preußens zu schaffen. Wie ihm diese Aufgabe gelang, ist allgemein bekannt.
Die schon lange zwischen Preußen und Östreich bestandene Eifersucht brach
endlich im Jahre 1866 durch den Krieg in lichten Flammen aus. Preußen ging glänzend
aus demselben als Sieger hervor. Durch den Prager Friedensvertrag entsagte Östreich
nicht allein seinen Ansprüchen als Präsidialmacht im deutschen Staatenbunde, sondern
schied gänzlich aus demselben aus und erkannte den unter Preußens Führung zu stiftenden
Norddeutschen Bund an. In Anerkennung seiner großen Erfolge wurde Bismarck nach
beendigtem Kriege in den Grafenstand erhoben und zugleich zum Kanzler des Norddeutschen
Bundes ernannt, dessen Angelegenheiten er mit so bedeutendem Geschick leitete, daß
bei der im Jahre 1870 von Frankreich an Preußen erfolgten Kriegserklärung auch die
Südstaaten sich dem Norddeutschen Bunde anschlossen und das ganze Deutschland vereinigt
gegen den Feind in den Kampf ziehen konnte, aus dem es mit Lorbeeren gekrönt siegreich
hervorging. Schon am 18. Januar 1871 ward König Wilhelm I. von Preußen unter
Zustimmung aller deutschen Staaten im Schlosse zu Versailles als deutscher Kaiser
proklamiert. Das große Ziel Bismarcks war erreicht. Die Einheit des bisher zerstückelten
Vaterlandes war wiederhergestellt, ein mächtiges deutsches Reich unter der Führung Preußens
gegründet, und die demselben drohenden Feinde waren besiegt und geschlagen. Am
20. Mai 1871 wurde von dem Fürsten und Reichskanzler Bismarck zu Frankfurt a/M.
der Friede mit Frankreich unterzeichnet, durch welchen die früher von dem deutschen
Reiche getrennten Herzogtümer Lothringen und Elsaß demselben wieder einverleibt
wurden und Frankreich sich verpflichtete, an Deutschland eine Kriegsentschädigung von
fünf Milliarden Franken zu zahlen. Die Eröffnung des deutschen Reichstages in Berlin,
am 21. März 1871, gehört vielleicht zu den größten Triumphen dieses höchst seltsamen
bewunderungswürdigen Mannes.
[13] Supply ‘ready’, and use the Present
Subjunctive.
Mr. Thomas Carlyle had lent the Manuscript of the first volume of
his “French Revolution” to a neighbour to peruse. By[1] some mischance
or other, it[2]
had been left lying on the parlour-floor, and[3] become
forgotten. Weeks ran on[4],
when at last the historian sent for[5] his
manuscript, the[6]
printers being loud for copy. Inquiries[7] were made,
and[8]
then it was found that the maid-of-all-work, finding[9] what she conceived
to be a bundle of waste paper on the floor, had[10] used it to light
the kitchen and parlour fires with[11].
Such[12] was the answer returned[13]
to Mr. Carlyle, and his consternation and despair may be imagined
(S. 4, N. 4). There[14] was, however, no help for him but to set himself
resolutely to work to re-write his book; and[15] he turned to and did it.
He had no draft[16], and[17]
was compelled to rake up from his memory facts,
ideas, and expressions, which had long since been dismissed. The
composition[18] of the book in the first instance had been a work of real
pleasure; the[19] re-writing of it, a second time, was one of pain and
anguish almost beyond belief. That[20] he persevered and finished the
volume under such circumstances affords[21] an instance of determination
of purpose which has seldom been exceeded.—S. Smiles, “Self-Help.”
[1] By — other = Through a mischance (Mißgeschick, n.).
[17] and — dismissed = and had to
(= must) torture (abmartern) his memory in order to find again the from (von)
him long forgotten facts, ideas, and expressions.
[18] composition = work;
in the first instance = at first. Supply ‘for him’ after ‘pleasure’.
[19] Say
‘to write it for the (zum) second time was a painful and almost incredibly
anxious (angstvoll) work.
[21] = is; determination
of purpose = strength of will, Willenskraft, f.; exceeded, übertroffen.
Section 140. HERO WORSHIP [1] . I.
Do[2] not think it a mean thing to look up to (zu) those who are superior
to yourselves[3].
On the contrary, you will find in practice[4], that
it is only the meanest hearts, the shallowest and the basest (S. 128, N. 11)
who feel no admiration, but (S. 6, N. 10) only envy for those who
are better than themselves, who delight in[5] finding fault with them,
blackening (S. 1, N. 3) their character, and showing that they are not
after all so much superior to other[6]
people; while[7]it is the noblest-hearted,
the very men who are most worthy to be admired themselves,
who feel[8] most the pleasure, the joy, and the strength of reverence
(S. 3, N. 2); of[9] having some one whom they can look up to and admire;
some one in whose company they can forget[10] themselves, their own
interest, their own pleasure, their own honour and[11] glory, and cry:
“Him I must hear; him I must follow; to him I must cling, whatever[12]
may betide!”
[7] while —
men, während die hochherzigsten Menschen, gerade diejenigen.
[8] ‘to feel’, here
empfinden; ‘most’ here = deepest, am tiefsten; pleasure, Genuß, m.
[9] In
order to connect this sentence more closely with the preceding, I propose to
say: ‘the pleasure (Genuß, m.) of having (S. 34, N. 10) some one to (zu) whom
they can look up, and whom they can admire’. The auxiliary ‘can’ must be
omitted in the first instance.
[10] Where must you place the two verbs,
and in what order?
[11] It is a matter of course that the words ‘their
own’ must be repeated here in German. Why?
Blessed[1] and ennobling is the feeling which gathers round a wise
teacher or[2] a great statesman all the more earnest, high-minded, pious
youths of his generation[3]; the[4]
feeling which makes[5] soldiers follow the
general whom they trust, they know not why or whither, through danger[6],
hunger, fatigue, and[7] death itself; the[4] feeling which, in its highest
perfection, made[8]
the Apostles forsake all and follow Christ[9], saying
(S. 111, N. 6): “Lord, to[10] whom shall we go? Thou hast the words of eternal
life,” and which made them[11]
ready to work[12] and to die for Him whom
the world called the Son of the carpenter, but whom they, through[13] the
Spirit of God bearing witness with their own pure and noble spirits,
knew[14] to be the Son of the Living God.—Charles Kingsley, “The
Water of Life.”
[8] ‘to make’, here again heißen
(to bid), str. v. tr.; which place after ‘follow’
according to App. § 19.
[9]Jesus Christ has retained its Latin declension,
thus: N. Jesus Christus; G. Jesu Christi; D. Jesu Christo; Acc. Jesum Christum.
Use the dat. Christo, since folgen governs the dat.
[10] ‘to whom’, here wohin
(whither), which appears in the German text of the Bible.
[11] ‘to
make ready’, here = to enable, befähigen.
[12]wirken is more appropriate
here than arbeiten, considering the elevated style of the whole speech.
[13]
through — spirits, kraft des göttlichen Geistes, der in ihren reinen, edlen Herzen
Zeugnis ablegte.
[14] knew to be, als
(followed by the Acc.) ... erkannten.
Section 142. JAMES WATT AND THE STEAM-ENGINE. I.
James Watt was the great Improver of the steam-engine; but, in
truth[1], as to all that is admirable in its structure, or vast in its utility, he
should rather be described as its Inventor. It was by his inventions that
its action[2] was so regulated as[3]
to make it capable of being applied to
the finest and most delicate manufactures, and its power so increased as
to set weight and solidity at defiance. By his admirable contrivances[4] it
has become a thing stupendous alike for its force and flexibility, for the
prodigious power which it can exert, and the ease, precision, and ductility
with which this power can be varied, distributed, and applied. The
trunk of an elephant, that can pick up a pin or rend[5] an oak, is as
nothing to it. It can engrave a seal, and crush masses of obdurate
metal before it, draw out without[6] breaking a thread as fine as gossamer,
and lift a ship of war like a bubble in the air. It can embroider[7] muslin
and forge anchors, cut steel into ribbons[8],
and impel[9] loaded vessels
against the fury of the winds and waves.
[1] ‘in truth’ is better not translated here. Say ‘but in regard to (in
Rücksicht auf) all that (S. 3, N. 7) refers (sich beziehen) to (auf) the excellence of
its construction and (wie) to (auf) the variety (Mannigfaltigkeit, f.) of its
application (Nutzanwendung, f.), should he rather (eigentlich) be called the
Inventor of the same’.
[2]Wirkung, f.; in what voice is the verb? Insert
the adv. erst after the auxiliary.
[3] as — defiance = as (um) to be able to
employ it in (bei) the making (Anfertigung, f.) of the finest and most delicate
(zart) manufactures (Fabrikate), and its power so increased as (um) to be able to
render resistance (Widerstand leisten) to every weight (Last, f.) and every solidity
(Festigkeit, f.). Translate ‘to be able’ by können, which need be expressed but
once, and must be placed at the very end of the whole period, which, along
with the following, is perhaps the most difficult to translate that has yet been
given.
[4]Einrichtungen; it = the machine; thing, Werkzeug,
n., after which
place the verb ‘become’; alike for, und zwar dies sowohl wegen ... wie auch.
[9] to impel against, entge´gentreiben, governing the dat.
Section 143. JAMES WATT AND THE STEAM-ENGINE. II.
It would be difficult to estimate the value of the benefits which these
inventions have conferred upon this country. There is no branch of
industry that has not been indebted[1]
to them; and[2], in all the most
material, they have not only widened most magnificently the field of its
exertions, but[3] multiplied a thousand-fold the amount of its productions.
It was our improved steam-engine, in short[4], that fought the battles of
Europe and sustained and exalted, through[5] the late tremendous contest,
the political greatness of our land. It is the same great power which
now enables us to pay the interest of our debt, and to maintain[6] the
arduous struggle in which we are still engaged (1819) with the skill[7] and
capital of countries (S. 16, N. 10) less oppressed with (von) taxation.
But these are poor[8] and narrow views of its importance. It has increased
indefinitely the mass of[9]
human comforts and enjoyments, and[10]
rendered cheap and accessible, all over the world, the materials of wealth
and prosperity.
[1] I am greatly indebted to you, ich habe Ihnen vieles zu verdanken.
[2] Say
‘and in the principal branches’; most magnificently, auf das großartigste.
[10]und
die Stoffe, welche sonst nur dem Reichtum und dem Wohlstand zugänglich waren, für die
ganze Welt billig und erreichbar gemacht.
Section 144. JAMES WATT AND THE STEAM-ENGINE. III.
It has armed the feeble hand of (S. 3, N. 2) man, in short[1], with a
power to which no limits can be assigned[2];
completed[3] the dominion of
mind over the most refractory qualities of matter[4], and laid a sure foundation
for[5]
all those future miracles of mechanic power which[6] are to
aid and reward the labours of after generations. It[7] is to the genius of
one man, too, that all this is mainly owing! And certainly no man ever
bestowed such a gift on his kind[8]. The blessing is not only universal,
but[9] unbounded; and the fabled[10]
inventors of the plough and the
loom, who were deified by their rude[11] contemporaries, conferred less
important benefits (App. § 5) on mankind than the inventor of our
present steam-engine.
This will be the fame of Watt with[12]
future generations, and it[13] is
sufficient for his race and his country.—Lord Jeffrey.
The principal branches of[2]
the industrial pursuits are the manufactures[3]
of cotton, woollen[4], and worsted goods, iron and hardware,
earthenware[5],
hosiery, mining[6], and shipbuilding. The geographical
distribution of the manufacturing[7] population is dependent partly on
natural, partly on accidental circumstances. The proximity of a coal-field[8]
decides the point[9] in many instances[10];
for, even where the raw
material is bulky[11],
it is generally more practicable to bring[12] it to the
coal (Kohlen), than the coal to it, an[13] instance of which is furnished
by the copper-ore of Cornwall being taken to Swansea to be smelted.
The iron manufacture is carried on[14]
generally at[15] the coal-fields,
the[16] chief seats being south Wales, Staffordshire, and Derbyshire. The
cotton manufacture has[17] been located in Lancashire and Cheshire for
the last three centuries; but[18] it has attained its present dimensions very
much through those counties being readily furnished with the raw material
from America, as[19] well as from the abundance of coal outside those
counties; Manchester, Bolton, Oldham, Stockport, and Macclesfield are
the chief seats of the manufacture.—Bevan, “The Student’s Manual Of
Modern Geography.”
[12]hin´schaffen; than — it = than the
reverse, als umgekehrt.
[13] It is well to begin a new period here, thus:
‘An example of this (dazu) furnishes the copper-ore of Cornwall, which is
taken (befördern) to (S. 72, N. 4), S.’, etc.
[16] the — being = which are
mainly situated (belegen) in.
[17] has been located, ist ansässig. The Present
is often used in German where the English use the Perfect to
express the duration of an action up to the time of speaking; as—Unsere
Familie wohnt seit zwanzig Jahren (or schon zwanzig Jahre) in Manchester,
our family has been living in Manchester for these last twenty years.
[18] but — America. This clause containing a Gerund (being) preceded by the
preposition ‘through’, must be construed according to S. 1, N. 3, and
S. 87, N. 6 in the following way: ‘but it (sie) has received its present dimension
especially thereby (dadurch, read S. 87, N. 6), that these counties can easily be
(S. 2, N. 1) supplied with the raw material from America’. The three verbs
must, of course, be placed at the end, and in such a way that the governing
verb (can) stands last, and the auxiliary of tense in the middle.
[19] as —
counties = as also (wie auch noch) thereby, that the coal is [use the pl. in German]
to be got (zu haben sein) in abundance in the neighbouring counties.
Section 146. MR. H. M. STANLEY’S APPEAL [1] FOR SUPPLIES. I.
I have arrived at[5] this place from Zanzibar with 115 souls,
(S. 53, N. 9) men, women, and children. We are now in[6] a state of imminent
starvation. We can buy[7]
nothing from the natives, for they laugh at[8]
our kinds of cloth[9],
beads, and wire. There[10] are no provisions in the
country that may be purchased, except on market days, and starving
people cannot afford to wait for these markets. I[11], therefore, have made
bold to despatch three of my young men[12],
natives[13] of Zanzibar, with
(nebst) a boy named Feruzi, of the English mission at Zanzibar, with
this letter.
I do not know you, but[14] I am told there (S. 104, N. 19) is an Englishman
at (in) Embomma, and as you are a Christian and a gentleman, I
beg you not to disregard my request. The boy Robert will be better able
to describe our lone condition than I[15] can tell you in this letter. We are
in a state of the greatest distress; but if your supplies[16]
arrive in time, I[17]
may be able to reach Embomma within four days.
[2] The village of N’sanda is three
days’ journey from Embomma, or Boma, which is a small town on the
Congo or Livingstone River at a distance of sixty-five English miles from the
Atlantic, and, with regard to Stanley’s position, may be considered the van of
civilisation in Africa, being the first place inhabited by Europeans.—For the
full understanding of this letter, it may be useful to observe that it was
written at the critical period when, at their journey home from the sources
of the Nile, and almost at the end of all their troubles, the heroic travellers
of more than 7000 miles through Equatorial Africa found themselves
face to face with the grimmest of all enemies—starvation. Nearly forty
men filled the sick list with dysentery, ulcers, and scurvy, and the number
of victims of the latter disease was steadily increasing. For a considerable
time the people had had no other food but a few ground-nuts and bananas,
and were scarcely more than skin and bone. In this extremity Mr. Stanley
determined to despatch four of his strongest and swiftest men with this
letter to Embomma, where he was told there was one Englishman, one
Frenchman, and three Portuguese. He then intended to follow these men
as quickly as possible with the rest of his people, and to meet them and
the expected supplies on the road to Boma, thus gaining at least one or two
days, which might turn out to be of the greatest importance to his starving
followers.
[3] Use the attributive construction, as explained in S. 48, N. 6.
[10] Say ‘Except on (Außer an) market
days there are (sind) in the (auf dem) country no provisions to be got (zu haben)
that we can buy, and if one hungers, one cannot possibly wait for (auf, with
Acc.) these markets.
[11] Say ‘I venture (after which use the grammatical
object, as explained in S. 51, N. 13) therefore to send (ab´senden), etc.
Section 147. MR. H. M. STANLEY’S APPEAL FOR SUPPLIES. II.
I want 300 cloths[1],
each four yards long, of[2] such quality as you trade
with, which is very different from that we have; but[3] better than all would
be ten or fifteen man-loads of rice or grain to fill the pinched[4]
bellies
immediately, as[5] even with the cloths it would require time to purchase
food, and starving people[6] cannot wait. The supplies must arrive within
two days, or[7] I may have a fearful time of it among the dying. Of course
I hold myself responsible for any[8]
expense (S. 16, N. 10) you[9] may
incur in the business. What is wanted is immediate relief, and I pray
you to[10] use your utmost energies to forward it at once. If (App. § 21)
you have such little luxuries[11] as tea, coffee, sugar, and biscuits by you,
such[12]
as one man can easily carry, I beg you on[13] my own behalf that
you will send a small supply[14] and[15]
add to the great debt of gratitude due
to you upon the timely arrival of the supplies for my people. Until[16] that
time I beg you to believe me,
Yours sincerely,
H. M. Stanley,
Commanding[17] the Anglo-American Expedition for[18] the Exploration of Africa.
P.S. You[19]
may not know me by name, I therefore add, I[20] am the
person that discovered[21] Livingstone in 1871. H. M. S.—H. M. Stanley,
“Through the Dark Continent.”
[5] as — food = as (after
which place the subject ‘we’), even in the possession of the cloths, we should
yet want time to exchange provisions for them (S. 4, N. 5, B).
[7] or — dying, Liter. = if (after which place the subject ‘I’) among the
dying I shall (soll) not experience (durchle´ben) a dreadful time (App. § 18).
[15] and — people = and
thereby still to increase (vergrößern) the great debt of (S. 3, N. 2) gratitude, to
which I shall be in duty bound to you (einem verpflichtet sein) after the timely
(rechtzeitig) arrival of the supplies (Warensendung).
[16]Bis dahin empfehle
ich mich Ihnen hochachtend und ergebenst.
Your welcome letter came[2] to hand yesterday, at 7 P.M.
As[3] soon as
its contents were understood, we arranged to despatch to you such articles
as you requested, as much as our stock on hand would permit, and other
things that we deemed would be suitable in that locality. You will see
that we send fifty pieces of cloth, each twenty-four yards long, and some
sacks containing sundries for yourself; several[4] sacks of rice, potatoes, a
few bundles of fish, a bundle of tobacco, and one demijohn[5]of rum. The
carriers are all paid, so that you need not trouble yourself about them.
That[6] is all we need say about business. We are exceedingly sorry to
hear that you have arrived there in such (so) piteous[7] condition, but we
send our warmest congratulations to you, and hope that you will soon
arrive in Boma. (This[8]
place is called Boma by us, though on the map it[9]
is Embomma.) Again[10] hoping that you will soon arrive, and that you
are not suffering in health,
[1]auf, with Acc.; A.M.morgens; P.M.abends.—This letter and the accompanying
supplies were received by Mr. Stanley in the morning of the 6th of
August, two days after he despatched his letter to Boma. Messrs. A. Da
Motta Veiga and J. W. Harrison were the managers of a factory belonging
to Messrs. Hatton & Cookson of Liverpool.
[3] As — locality = As soon as we had understood
the contents of the same (to agree with letter), we (App. § 14) made
arrangements (Anstalten treffen) to send you the asked for (erbeten) articles, as
far as (so weit) our stock (Warenlager, n., or Warenvorrat, m.) would permit
us (S. 51, N. 13), and add (supply noch) some other things of which we thought
they might (= could) be useful to you there.
[10] Say ‘Again (noch einmal) expressing (S. 111, N. 6), the hope’.
[11]zeichnen wir in aufrichtiger Freundschaft ergebenst.
Section 149. MR. STANLEY’S ACKNOWLEDGMENT [1] OF THE PRECEDING LETTER AND THE SUPPLIES. I.
Banza M’Buko, August 6, 1877.
Messrs. A. Da Motta Veiga and J. W. Harrison,
Embomma, Congo River.
Gentlemen,
I (S. 115, N. 1) have received your welcome letter, but better
than all, and[2] more welcome, are your supplies. I am unable to express
just at present how grateful I feel. At the sight of (von) the stores exposed[3]
to our hungry eyes—at the sight of (von) the rice, the fish, and
the rum, and[4] for me—wheaten bread, butter, sardines, jam, peaches,
grapes, beer (ye[5]
gods! just think of it—three bottles pale ale[6]!), besides
tea and sugar, we (App. § 14) are all so over-joyed and confused that
we cannot restrain[7]
ourselves from falling to and[8] enjoying this sudden
bounteous store. I beg you will charge[9]
our apparent want of (an)
thankfulness to our greediness. If we do not thank you sufficiently in
words, rest assured we[10] feel what volumes could not describe.
For the next twenty-four hours we shall be too busy eating and
drinking to think of anything else much; but I may say that the people[11]
will cry out joyfully, while[12] their mouths are full of rice and fish:
“Verily, our master has found the sea and his brothers, but we did not
believe him until[13] he showed us the rice and the pambe (rum). We
did not believe there[14] was any end to the great river; but God be
praised for ever, for we shall see white people[15] to-morrow, and our
wars[16]
and troubles will be over!”[17]
[1]Anzeige von dem Empfange;
‘supplies’, here Warensendung, f.
[17] This letter, on the morning of the 7th of August, was
despatched to Boma, the caravan following slowly, and reaching Boma on
the 9th of August 1877, the 999th day from the date of their departure from
Zanzibar. The expedition then embarked on board a steamer at Boma,
and, on the 11th, descended the river Congo. After steaming northward from
the mouth of the Congo for a few hours, the vessel entered the fine bay of
Kabinda, on the southern shores of which the native town of that name
in the county of Nyoyo is situate. The Expedition, after a stay of eight days
at Kabinda, was kindly taken on board the Portuguese gunboat ‘Tamega’ to
San Paulo de Loanda. Here they were treated with the utmost hospitality
by the Portuguese and the officers of the English navy, who offered the
Expedition a passage to Cape Town in H.M.S. ‘Industry’, Commander R. C.
Dyer. The Cape of Good Hope was reached on the 21st of October. Here
a telegram from the Lords of the British Admiralty was received, authorising
the Commodore Francis William Sullivan to prepare H.M.S. ‘Industry’ for
the reception of the Expedition and to convey them to Zanzibar, the end
of their journey. On the 6th of November H.M.S. ‘Industry’ was equipped
and ready for her voyage to Zanzibar, which was reached on the 20th of the
same month. By this time the sick had, all but one, recovered, and had
improved so much in appearance that few persons ignorant of what they
had been, could have supposed that these were the living skeletons that had
reeled from sheer weakness through Boma.
Section 150. MR. STANLEY’S LETTER (continued). II.
Dear Sirs,
Though[1]
strangers, I feel we shall be great friends, and[2] I shall
always remember my feelings of gratefulness, when I first caught sight
of your supplies, and my poor, faithful, and brave people cried out:
“Master, we are saved!—food[3] is coming!” The old and the young—the
men, the women, and the children—lifted their wearied and worn-out[4]
frames[5], and began to chant lustily
an[6] extemporaneous song, in[7]
honour of the white people by (an) the great salt sea (the (S. 53, N. 9)
Atlantic) who had listened to their prayers. I had[8] to rush to my
tent to hide the tears that would issue[9], despite all my attempts to
composure[10].
Gentlemen, that the blessing of God may attend your footsteps
whithersoever[11]
you go, is the very earnest[12] prayer of
When (S. 4, N. 2) the country near[2] Albany was newly settled, a
starving Indian came to the inn at Lichfield and asked for a night’s
shelter and some supper, at[3]
the same time confessing that, from[4]
failure in hunting, he had nothing[5] to pay. The hostess drove him
away with reproachful[6] epithets, and as the Indian was about (S. 6, N. 4)
scornfully to retire,—there being (S. 30, N. 4) no other inn for[7] many
a weary mile,—a[8] man, who was sitting by, directed the hostess to
supply[9]
his wants, and promised to pay her. As[10] soon as the Indian’s
supper was ended, he thanked his benefactor, and said he would some
day return his kindness. Several years thereafter[11] the settler was taken
a prisoner by a hostile tribe, and carried off to (S. 72, N. 4) Canada. His
life was spared[12],
but he was detained in[13]
slavery. One[14] day, however,
an Indian came to him, and bade the captive follow him. The Indian
never told where they were going, nor[15] what was his object; but day
after[16] day the captive followed his mysterious guide, till one afternoon
they came suddenly on[17] a beautiful expanse of cultivated fields, with
many houses rising amongst them. “Do you know that place?” asked
the Indian. “Ah, yes—it is Lichfield!” and whilst the astonished exile[18]
had not yet recovered from his surprise and (S. 10, N. 9) amazement,
the Indian exclaimed: “And I am the starving Indian, on whom, at
this very place, you took[19]
pity. And now that[20] I have repaid you,
I pray you go home!”—Dr. Dwight.
[8] ‘a man’, here = a guest. The
verb ‘directed’ (heißen, str. v.) must be placed before the subject, since the
subordinate clause precedes the principal one.
[9] to supply a person’s
wants, für die Bedürfnisse eines Menschen sorgen.
[10] Say ‘As soon as the
Indian had eaten (verzehren) his supper’.
[13] in slavery = as a
slave; ‘to detain’, here gefangen halten.
[14] Say
‘One day, however, came an Indian to the prisoner with the intimation
(Weisung, f.) to follow him’. This construction is necessary to avoid the
repetition of the pronoun ‘ihm’.
[19] to take pity on a person, sich eines Menschen erbarmen; supply
the adverb einmal (one day) before the verb.
[20] that = since, da; to repay
a person, einem seine Schuld ab´tragen.
Section 152. NEW YEAR’S EVE [1] . I.
It was dreadfully cold; it snowed, and was beginning to grow dark;
it was the last evening of the year,—New-year’s Eve. In this cold, a
poor little girl was wandering about the streets with[2] bare head and
bare feet. She had slippers on when she left home (Haus, with the
def. art.), but what was the good of them? They (Es) were the large,
old slippers of her mother’s—so large that they fell off the little girl’s
feet as she hurried across the street to[3]
escape a carriage, which came[4]
galloping along at a great rate. The one slipper was not to be found,
and a boy ran off with the other.
So the little girl wandered about barefooted, with a quantity[5] of
matches in an old apron, whilst she held a box[6] of them in her
(S. 43, N. 9, A) hand. No one had bought any matches of her through[7]
the whole livelong day—no one had given her a single farthing[8].
Hungry, and pinched[9]
with cold, the poor little girl crept[10] along, the
large flakes of snow covering (S. 55, N. 1; use während) her yellow
hair, which[11] curled round her face.
In[12] a corner between two houses, one projecting beyond the other,
she sought shelter. Huddling[13] herself up, she drew her poor little
feet, which were red and blue with cold, under her (sich) as well as she
could, but she[14]
was colder than ever, and[15] dared not go home
(S. 63, N. 8), for, as she had sold no matches, her cruel[16] father would
beat her. Besides[17], it was cold at home (S. 63, N. 8), for they lived
just[18] under the roof, and[19]
the wind blew in, though straw and rags
had been stuffed in the large cracks. Her little hands were quite
benumbed with cold. Oh[20], how much good one match would do,
if she dared but (nur)
take it out of the box and draw[21] it across the
wall to warm her fingers in the flames!
[19] Say ‘through which the wind blew,
although the large cracks (Spalte, f.) were stuffed (verstopfen, insep. comp. w. v.)
with straw and rags’.
[20] Say, ‘Oh (Ach), how nice (schön)
must (Imperf.
Subj.) a match be’.
[21]Ein Zündhölzchen an der Mauer an´reiben, to draw
a match across the wall.
Section 153. NEW-YEAR’S EVE. II.
She drew one out—“Ritsh!” how it sputtered[1] and burned! It
burned with a warm, bright flame, like a candle, and she bent her hand
round it (S. 4, N. 5, B), it was a wonderful light! It appeared to the
little girl as if she were sitting[2] before a large iron stove, in which the
fire burned brightly, and[3] gave out such comfort and such warmth. She
stretched out her feet to warm them, too—but the flame went[4] out, the
stove disappeared, and there she sat, still holding[5] a little bit of the
burnt-out[4] match in her (S. 43, N. 9, A) hand.
Another was[6]
lighted; it burned, and, where[7] the light fell upon the
wall, that[8] became transparent, so that she could see into the room.
There the table was covered with a cloth of dazzling white, and with
fine china; and a roast goose was smoking most[9] temptingly upon it.
But what was still more delightful, the goose sprang down from the
table, and[10], with a knife and (S. 10, N. 9) fork sticking
in its[11] back,
waddled towards the little girl. Then[12] the match went out[4], and she
saw nothing but the thick, cold wall.
She lighted a third one (S. 67, N. 3); and now she was sitting under
the most splendid Christmas-tree. It was larger and more beautifully
decorated[13]
than the one (S. 16, N. 10) she had seen at Christmas[14]
through the window at[15]
the rich merchant’s. Hundreds of[16] tapers
were burning amongst the green branches, and painted[17]
pictures, such[18]
as she had seen in the shop-windows, looked down upon her. She
stretched out[19] both her hands, when the match was burnt[4] out,—
[19] Supply the
pronominal adverb ‘danach’ before the particle aus, which stands at the end.
Section 154. NEW-YEAR’S EVE. III.
The countless lights rose higher and higher, and she now saw that
they (es) were the stars, one of which fell[1], leaving a long line of light
in the sky.
Some[2] one has (S. 29, N. 3) died just now, the girl said; for her
old grandmother, who alone[3] had loved her, but who was now dead,
had told her that[4] when a star fell, a soul took (App. §§ 28 and 30) its
flight up to heaven.
She drew another match across the wall, and in the light it threw[5]
around stood her old grandmother, so bright[6], so mild, and so loving.
“Grandmother,” the little girl cried, “oh, take me with you! I know
that you will disappear as soon as the match is burnt out, just like the
warm stove, the delicious roast goose, and the Christmas-tree!” And
hastily she lighted the[7] rest of the matches that remained in the box,
for she wished to keep[8] her grandmother with her as long as possible;
and the matches burnt so brightly, that it was lighter than day. Never
before[9] had she seen her grandmother so beautiful and so tall, and
behold, she[10]
now took the little girl in her arms, and[11], in radiance
and joy, flew high, high up with her into the heaven, where she felt
neither (kein) cold, nor (kein) hunger, nor (und kein)
fear any more[12],—for
she was with God.
But, in the corner between the two houses, in the cold morning air,
lay the little girl with pale cheeks and smiling lips. She was frozen[13]
to death during the last night of the Old Year. The first light of the
New Year shone upon the dead body of the little girl with the matches,
one[14] box of which was nearly consumed. “She must have tried to
warm herself,” the people said; but no one knew of (von) the visions[15]
she had had, or of the splendour that (S. 48, N. 6) surrounded her when
she entered with her grandmother into the joys of a New Year.—After
Hans Andersen, “Fairy Tales.”
[1] Say ‘fell down and left (zurück´lassen)
a long line of light (Lichtstreifen, m.)
in (an) the sky’.
[2] This sentence is best introduced by the grammatical
subject ‘es’, see S. 104, N. 19.
[10] It will
be best to begin this clause with the adv. ‘now’, and to turn the personal
pronoun ‘she’ into the demonstrative pronoun ‘the same’, to agree with
‘grandmother’. This will commend itself in order to avoid ambiguity.
[11] Here follows the verb ‘flew’; in radiance and joy, freudestrahlend,
adv.;
high — heavens, mit ihr zum Himmel empor.
[12] any more, mehr, before the
verb; ‘with’, here bei.
[13]erfrieren, insep. comp. str. v., to freeze to
death.
[14] Liter. ‘of which nearly a whole box was burnt up’.
Section 155. PROVIDENCE [1] VINDICATING THE INNOCENT.
It is (S. 2, N. 1) recorded in history that a beautiful maiden named
Blanche, the serf of[2]
an ancient nobleman, was wooed[3] by her master’s
son. Not[4]
admiring his character, she scorned[5] his suit. Upon this
his course of love turned[6]
to bitter hatred. Just[7] then a precious string
of pearls confided (S. 7, N. 3, B) to the maiden’s care was[8] lost. Her
pseudo-lover[9]
charged her with the theft, and, in[10] accordance with the
customs of that rude age, she was doomed to die. On the day of the
execution, as the innocent girl knelt to offer[11]
her dying prayer, a[12] flash
of lightning struck a statue of Justice, which adorned the market-place,
to the dust. From[13] a destroyed bird’s nest, built (S. 7, N. 3, A, and S. 48, N. 6)
in a crevice of the image[14],
dropped the lost[15] pearls, thus[16]
declaring the maiden’s innocence. In a moment the exultant crowd
rushed to the scaffold, demanding her release. There she knelt beside
the block, pale and beautiful, and with a smile of peace upon her lips.
They (S. 134, N. 4) spoke[17]—she answered not. They touched her—she
was dead! To preserve her memory they raised a statue there[18];
and to[19] this day, when[20]
men gaze upon her image, they condemn her
oppressor; they praise her for the purity of her character; they recognise
the justice of Him whose[21] lightning testified her innocence.—W.
Smith.
[1] Say, ‘Providence (S. 3, N. 2) protects innocence.’
[2] of — nobleman
= of a nobleman of an old family (Geschlecht, n.).
[20] Construe thus: ‘those who look
at her image (Bildnis, n.) condemn her oppressor’, and consider App.
§ 14.
[21] In order to avoid a repetition of the same form of pronoun,
turn the last clause into: ‘who with his lightning testified her innocence’.
Section 156. NAPOLEON BONAPARTE [1] . I.
Napoleon understood his business[2]. He was a man who in each
moment and[3] emergency knew what[4]
to do next. This[5] is an immense
comfort and refreshment to the spirits, not only of (S. 3, N. 2) kings,
but[6] of citizens. Few[7]
men have any next; they live from hand to
mouth, without plan, are[8] ever at the end of their line, and,
(S. 102, N. 30) after each action, wait for[9] an impulse from abroad. Napoleon
would have been the first man of the world, if[10] his ends had been
purely public. As[11] he is, he inspires confidence and vigour by the
extraordinary unity of his action.
He is firm[12], sure, and self-denying; he sacrifices everything to his
aim[13]—money,
troops, generals, his own safety even, and is not misled[14],
like common adventurers, by[15] the splendour of his own means. “Incidents
ought not to govern policy,” he said, “but[16] policy incidents.”
“To[17]
be hurried away by every event, is[18] to have no political system
at all.” His victories were only so many doors[19],
and[20] he never for a
moment lost sight of his way onward in the dazzle and uproar of the
present circumstances. He knew what to do, and he flew to his mark.
He[21] would shorten a straight line to come at his object. Horrible
anecdotes may no doubt be collected (S. 4, N. 4) from his history, of[22]
the price at which he bought his successes; but he must not, therefore,
be set[23] down as cruel, but only as one[24]
who knew no impediment to
his will: not[25]
bloodthirsty, not cruel; but woe to[26] what person stood
in his way! “Sire, General Clarke cannot combine with General Junot
for the dreadful fire of the Austrian battery.” “Let[27] him carry the battery.”
“Sire, every regiment that approaches the heavy artillery is
sacrificed[28]. Sire[29],
what orders?” “Forward! Forward!”
[1]Napoleon I.,
Kaiser der Franzosen, geboren den 15. Aug. 1769 zu Ajaccio
auf Korsika war der zweite Sohn des Patriziers Carlo Bonaparte und der Maria Lätitia
Ramolini. Nachdem er seit 1779 die Kriegsschulen zu Brienne und Paris besucht hatte,
trat er am 1. Sept. 1785 als Lieutenant der Artillerie in die Armee ein. Im Jahre 1793
wurde er als Artilleriehauptmann seitens der Republik gegen die Aufständischen in Korsika
verwandt, welche ihn ächteten, da er als Landsmann gegen sie kämpfte. Seit dem 12. Sept.
1793 Oberbefehlshaber des Belagerungsgeschützes von Toulon, welches sich in den Händen
der Engländer befand, zwang er den Platz am 19. Dez. zur Kapitulation, worauf er zum
Brigadegeneral der Artillerie befördert ward und in der Armee von Italien im Kriege
gegen Östreich diente. Nachdem er sich vielfach ausgezeichnet hatte, wurde er im Februar
1796 zum Oberbefehlshaber der Armee von Italien ernannt, reorganisierte dieselbe, eroberte
in kurzem die Lombardei, schlug die Östreicher in mehreren großen Schlachten, zwang
Mantua zur Kapitulation, drang in Istrien, Kärnthen und Steiermark ein und schloß am
18. April 1797 zu Campo Formio den für Frankreich höchst günstigen Frieden mit
Östreich ab. Seit dem 9. März 1796 mit der verwitweten Generalin Josephine Beauharnais
vermählt, ward er am 7. Febr. 1800 neben Cambacérès und Lebrun, welche ihm
beratend zur Seite standen, auf zehn Jahre zum ersten Konsul ernannt. Nach mehreren
siegreichen Kriegen mit Östreich, Preußen, Rußland, England u. a., ward er im
Mai 1802 durch Senatsbeschluß auf weitere zehn Jahre und am 2. Aug. desselben
Jahres auf Lebenszeit zum Konsul ernannt. Am 8. Mai 1804 wurde er jedoch schon als
Napoleon I. zum erblichen Kaiser der Franzosen erklärt. Nun folgte eine fast ununterbrochene
Reihe von Kriegen mit fast allen europäischen Mächten, und als er im Jahre
1809 den Höhepunkt seiner Macht erreicht hatte, ließ er sich, seiner kinderlosen Ehe wegen,
von seiner ebenso klugen wie liebenswürdigen Gemahlin scheiden und vermählte sich am 2.
April 1810 mit Marie Luise, der Tochter Franz I. von Östreich. Als er jedoch 1812
Rußland den Krieg erklärte, mit der großen Armee in Rußland einzog, alles hinter sich
her verbrannte und zerstörte, dann aber durch die weltbekannte, stets denkwürdige Einäscherung
der großen Hauptstadt Moskau seitens der heldenmütigen, verzweifelnden Einwohner
gezwungen wurde, den Rückzug anzutreten, auf dem fast die ganze große Armee von
der fürchterlichen Kälte und die durch die Verödung des Landes verursachte Hungersnot vernichtet
wurde—schien das Glück ihn verlassen zu haben. Von dieser Zeit an folgte eine
Niederlage nach der andern, von denen die große Völkerschlacht bei Leipzig (18. Okt. 1813),
in welcher der unglückliche Kaiser den vereinigten Heeren der Preußen, Östreicher und
Russen gegenüber stand, die entscheidende war. Napoleon wurde in derselben gänzlich
geschlagen und die fliehende Armee von den Verbündeten unter Blüchers Führung verfolgt.
Nach der Einnahme von Paris seitens der Alliirten am 31. März 1814 erfolgte
dann die durch den Senat erzwungene Abdankung des Kaisers und dessen Verbannung
nach der Insel Elba, von wo er jedoch schon anfangs März des Jahres 1815 zurückkehrte.
Sein bloßes Erscheinen war genügend, das französische Volk aufs neue für ihn zu begeistern.
Überall wurde er mit Jubel begrüßt, sein Vordringen war unwiderstehlich, die Armee ging
freudig zu ihm über, und schon am 14. März war der König Ludwig XVIII. gezwungen,
den jüngst bestiegenen Thron zu verlassen und sich durch die Flucht ins Ausland zu
retten.—Napoleons zweite Regierung war indessen nur von kurzer Dauer (100 Tage).
Der langersehnte Friede konnte nur durch seinen Untergang herbeigeführt werden, weshalb
die Großmächte Östreich, Rußland, Preußen und England am 25. März einen Allianzvertrag
abschlossen, durch den sie sich verbanden, Napoleon gemeinschaftlich zu bekämpfen
und der Herrschaft desselben auf immer ein Ende zu machen. Dies gelang ihnen
auch bald, denn am 18. Juni 1815 wurden die noch übrigen, schnell von Napoleon
zusammengerafften Streitkräfte Frankreichs in der großen Schlacht bei Waterloo unter
Wellingtons und Blüchers Führung gänzlich vernichtet. Napoleon wollte am 21. Juni
zu Blois zu gunsten seines noch unmündigen Sohnes abdanken, seine Abdankung wurde
aber nicht angenommen, und als er sich am 3. Juli in Rochefort nach Amerika einschiffen
wollte, fand er den dortigen Hafen durch englische Kriegsschiffe gesperrt, worauf er sich unter
den Schutz Englands stellte und sich auf das Linienschiff Bellerophon begab. Auf
Beschluß der verbündeten Mächte wurde er nun als ‘General Bonaparte’ nach der
entlegenen Insel St. Helena transportiert, wo er am 16. Okt. 1815 anlangte und, in
Longwood wohnend, am 5. Mai 1821 in den Armen einiger ihm noch treu verbliebenen
Freunde eines natürlichen Todes starb.
[10] Say ‘had his ends (= aims) been solely directed to (auf)
the public welfare’.
Carefully study App. §§ 36 and 37.
[11] This passage requires an altogether
different setting; let us say: ‘But notwithstanding (Trotzdem aber) he
inspires (erfüllen) us through the extraordinary unity (Einheit, f.) of (in) his
actions with confidence in (auf) his strength’.
[12] firm = unshakable;
sure, unfehlbar = never failing.
[17] to be hurried away, sich ...
hin und her treiben lassen.
[18] is = signifies (heißen); ‘to have’, here = to
follow, befolgen.
[19] doors = gates (Pforten),
through which he tried (suchen)
to attain his aims (App. § 19). This addition seems to be necessary to complete
the underlying idea.
[20] and — circumstances = and in (bei) the dazzle
(Verblendung) and the confusion, which ruled (beherrschen) his time, he never lost
sight of these aims. To lose sight of a thing, etwas aus dem Auge verlieren.
[21] Say ‘He would have liked (Impf. Subj. of gern haben in connection with
the Past Participle of the verb) to shorten (abkürzen) a straight line, in order
to attain his purpose’.
[22] of — successes, welche alle Zeugnis davon ablegen,
wie teuer er seine Erfolge erkaufte.
[23] to set a person down as cruel,
einen für grausam halten.
[28] ‘to be sacrificed’, here dahin´gerafft
werden.
[29]Was befehlen Ew. (abbreviation of Eure)
Majestät?
Section 157. NAPOLEON BONAPARTE. II.
In the plenitude of his resources every obstacle seemed to vanish.
“There[1]
shall be no Alps,” he said; and he built his perfect roads[2],
climbing[3]
by graded galleries their steepest precipices, until Italy was[4]
as open to Paris as any town[5] in France. Having (S. 55, N. 1) decided
what was to be done, he did that with[6]
might and main. He[7] put out
all his strength. He risked everything, and spared[8] nothing; neither
ammunition, nor money, nor[9]
troops, nor generals, nor[10] himself. If
fighting[11]
be the best mode of adjusting national differences (as[12] large
majorities of men seem to agree), certainly Bonaparte was right in
making it thorough[13].
He fought[14] sixty battles. He had never enough. Each victory was
a new weapon. “My power would fall[15], were I not to support it by
new achievements. Conquest has[16] made me what I am, and conquest
must maintain me.”
Before[17]
he fought a battle, Bonaparte thought[18] little about what he
should do in[18] case of success, but a great deal about what he should
do in case of a reverse of fortune. The same prudence and good sense
marked[19] all his behaviour[20].
His instructions[21] to his secretary at the
palace are worth[22] remembering. He said: “During the night enter
my chamber as seldom as possible. Do not awake me when you have
any good news to communicate[23]; with[24]
that there is no hurry; but
when you have bad news, rouse me instantly, for then there is not a
moment to be lost.” His[25]
achievement of business was immense, and[26]
enlarges the known power of man. There have been (S. 82, N. 7) many
working kings, from Ulysses to[27]
William of Orange[28], but[29]
none who
accomplished a tithe of this man’s performance.—Emerson.
[3] Say
‘through which he by means of winding, (sich schlängeln) and gradually rising
passes climbed the steepest precipices (Abhang, m.) of the Alps’.
[4] was = stood; to Paris = to the Parisians. The suffix er
is used to form names
of male persons and of the inhabitants of countries and places; as—der
Italiener, the Italian, from Italien; der Hamburger, the inhabitants of Hamburgh.
[28]Oranien. Commence this period with: ‘From Ulysses’.
[29]doch keinen, der auch nur ein zehntel von den Thaten dieses Mannes vollbracht hätte
(App. § 33).
Section 158. THE WARLIKE CHARACTER OF THE GERMANS.
The Germans fight as a nation. Whatever[1]
their birth[2] or (S. 10, N. 9)
profession, all are trained[3] soldiers. The nation is the army; the
army is the nation. Hence[4] they cannot be moved save at the bidding
of some grand principle, and the stirring[5]
of some soul-penetrating[6]and
elevating sentiment; and yet they are as sensible[7] as any nation that
they abandon comfort[8],
domestic ease, monetary independence, everything[9]
which (S. 3, N. 7) men (= man) love and live for, in[10] order to
identify the nation and the army. But they are willing to pay the price.
They count[11]
hardihood of body and trained[12] courage of heart the
noblest riches of a nation. They reckon[11]that national independence
and national greatness are a thousand times more precious than gold
and silver, and[13] that to die on the field of battle is better and happier
than to rot[14]
and crumble away in sybaritic ease. They[15] hold, too,
that[16] the cause of liberty, and the free noble spirit engendered by the
brotherhood of a nationality which affirms its oneness by noble acts[17], is
blessed by God, and that He will give[18] victory to the armies who go
forth to battle in (S. 3, N. 2) trust in[19]
His name. No wonder[20] they
fight and triumph[21].—Admiral Garbett.
[16] Construe thus: ‘that God will bless the cause (Sache,
f.) of liberty’, and use the
attributive constr. for the transl. of ‘and the — nationality’. Any other
constr. would be much too clumsy.
A London (S. 157, N. 4) merchant, having[2] a dispute with a Quaker
concerning a business account, determined[3] to institute a law-suit against
him. Desirous of amicably settling[4] the matter, the Quaker called at
the house of the merchant, when[5] the latter became so enraged that he
vehemently[6] declared to his servant that he would (App. §§ 28 and 30)
not see his opponent. “Well, friend,” said the Quaker quietly, “may[7]
God put thee in a better mind.” The merchant was[8] subdued by the
kindness of the reply, and, after careful consideration, became convinced
that[9] he was wrong. He sent[10]
for the Quaker, and[11] after making a
humble apology, he asked: “How were you able to bear my abuse[11]
with so much patience?” “Friend,” replied the Quaker, “I was naturally[12]
as hot[13] and violent as thou art,
but I knew that[14] to indulge my
temper was sinful, and also very foolish. I observed that men in a
passion always spoke very loud, and I thought that[15], if I could control
my voice, I should keep down my passion. I therefore made[16] it a rule
never to let it rise above a certain key; and by a careful observance of
this rule I have, with the blessing of God[17],
entirely mastered my[18] natural
temper.”—Alcott.
[2] Change ‘having’ into ‘had’;
the object is best placed after ‘account’.
[3] Supply ‘and’ before ‘determined’;
to institute a law-suit against a person, einen gerichtlich belangen.
[4] to settle a matter amicably, eine Sache auf gütliche Weise ordnen.
Comp. S. 30, N. 4, and note that the Present Participle ‘being’ is understood at the commencement
of this period.
[8] to
be subdued, sich besiegt fühlen; by, durch.
[9] ‘that — wrong’ may be briefly
turned by ‘of his wrong’.
[10] to send for a person, einen zu sich rufen lassen.
[11] ‘and — asked’. This passage, literally translated, would be inelegant in
German, say: ‘humbly begged his pardon, and asked then’. Abuse, Beleidigung,
f.
[14] = that it was
sinful, etc.; to indulge one’s temper, seinem Zorn freien Lauf lassen.
[15] = that
I could (App. § 33) conquer my anger through mastering my voice (durch
Beherrschung meiner Stimme).
[16] We make it a rule never to let our
voices rise beyond a certain key, wir machen es uns zur Regel, unsere Stimmen nie
über eine gewisse Tonstärke hinaus zu erheben.
[18] = my
natural inclination to (zu) anger (S. 3, N. 2).
Section 160. OPINIONS [1] AS TO ENGLISH EDUCATION. I.
This[2] energy of individual life and example acting throughout society
constitute[3] the best practical education of Englishmen. Schools, academies,
and colleges[4]
give but the[5] merest beginning of culture in comparison
with it (S. 4, N. 5). Far higher[6]
and more practical is[7] the life-education
daily given in our homes, in[8] the streets, behind (S. 3, N. 2)
counters[9], in workshops, at the loom and behind the plough, in counting-houses
and manufactories, and[10] in all the busy haunts of men. This
is the education that[11] fits Englishmen for doing the work and acting
the part of free men. This[12] is that final instruction as members of
society, which Schiller designated “the education of the human race,”
consisting[13] in action, conduct[14],
self-culture, self-control—all[15] that
tends to discipline a man truly, and fit him for the proper performance
of the duties of life—a kind of education not to be learnt (S. 7, N. 3B)
from (aus) books. Lord Bacon observes that[16] “Studies teach not
their own use, but that there is (S. 82, N. 7) a wisdom without them
and above them, won (S. 7, N. 3B, and S. 2, N. 1) by (durch) observation,
a remark that holds[17] true of[18]
actual life, as well as of[19] the cultivation
of the intellect itself. For all observation serves[20] to illustrate
and enforce the lesson, that a man perfects himself by work much more
than by reading[21],—that[22]
it is life[23]
rather than literature[21], action[24]
rather than study, and character[25]
rather than biography[26], which[27]
tend
perpetually to renovate mankind.”
[2] This — society. A good German rendering of
the thought underlying this line is so difficult, that the author thinks it best
to give at once his own translation, which he hopes will find acceptance:
Diese im mehr selbständigen Leben sich entwickelnde Energie und das dadurch gegebene, auf
die ganze Gesellschaft wirkende Beispiel.
[10]und in den vielen andern Geschäftsstätten der Menschen.
[11] Say ‘that enables Englishmen as free men to do their work and their
duty.
[12] This — designated = This education gives also to human society
that instruction (Unterweisung, f.), which Schiller calls, etc. Johann Christoph
Friedrich von Schiller, geboren am 10. Nov. 1759 zu Marbach, gestorben am 9. Mai
1805 zu Weimar, ist nächst Göthe (SieheS. 110, N. 1) unstreitig die bedeutendste Erscheinung
in der deutschen Litteratur. Als Dichter zeichnete er sich sowohl durch seine ideale,
subjektive Richtung, wie auch durch hinreißenden Schwung echt poetischer Begeisterung
aus, welche im Drama ihren Höhepunkt erreichte. Aber auch als Geschichtschreiber und als
philosophischer Schriftsteller hat er sich bei seiner Nation einen unsterblichen Namen
erworben.
[15] = and in all that (here follows the verb ‘consists’,
since this is the end of the relative clause introduced in Note 13), which (S. 3, N. 7)
educates (bilden) man truly (wahrhaft) and fits (befähigen) him for (zu) the
proper performance (= fulfilment) of his duties in life.
[16] = that ‘Studies
do not teach us the application of the same, but’, etc.
[25] The English word ‘character’
is so varied in its application that it requires always the greatest discrimination
to decide upon its translation, and in this case more than ever. After
careful consideration it is thought to be equivalent here to: ‘the personal
dignity of a man’.
[27]welche dazu
dienen, die Menschheit stets von neuem zu beleben.
Section 161. OPINIONS AS TO ENGLISH EDUCATION. II.
Goethe (S. 5, N. 2), in one of his conversations with Eckermann at
Weimar, once[1] observed: “It is very[2]
strange, and I know not whether[3]
it lies in race, in climate, in[4]
soil, or in their healthy[5]
education, but[6]
certainly Englishmen seem to have a great advantage over most other
men. We see here in Weimar only a[7]
minimum of them, and[8] those,
probably, by no means the best specimens, and yet what splendid fellows
they are! And although they come here as seventeen-year-old[9] youths,
yet they by no means feel strange in this strange land; on the contrary,
their entrance[10] and bearing[11]
in society is so confident[12] and quiet,
that one would[13] think they were everywhere the masters, and the whole
world belonged to them[14].”
“I should not like to affirm, for all that[15],”
replied Eckermann[16],
“that the English gentlemen in Weimar are cleverer, better educated,
and better hearted than our young men.”
“That is not the point[17],” said Goethe; “their superiority does not
lie in such things; neither[18]
does it lie in their birth and fortune[19]; it
lies precisely[20] in their having[21]
the courage to be what nature made
them. There[22] is no halfness about[23]
them. They are complete[24]
men. Sometimes complete fools also, that I heartily[25] admit, but even
that is something, and has its weight.”
Thus (App. § 14), in[26] Goethe’s eyes, the Englishmen fulfilled, to a
great extent, the injunction[27]
given by Lessing[28] to those who would
be men:
“Think wrongly, if you please, but think for yourselves!”—S. Smiles,
“Self-Help.”
[13] Render ‘would’ by the Impf. Subj. of mögen, since the
sentence is equivalent to ‘that one would be inclined to think’. The
following verbs must be constructed according to App. §§ 29 and 30.
[15] for all that, aber doch, to be placed
before ‘not’.
[16]Johann Peter Eckermann, geboren 1792 zu Winsen
in der preußischen Provinz Hannover, gestorben den 3. Dez. 1854 zu Weimar, war viele
Jahre als Göthes Privatsekretär thätig und ist der Welt am bekanntesten durch die von
ihm nach Göthes Tode veröffentlichten ‘Gespräche mit Göthe’. Er war auch der
Herausgeber (editor) von Göthes ‘Nachgelassenen Werken’.
[21]The English Gerund preceded by a possessive adjective and a
preposition, must be translated by a regular subordinate clause with
a conjunction and a finite verb; as—
His superiority lies in his having the courage to be
what nature made him.
Seine Überlegenheit besteht
darin (S. 87, N. 6),
daß er
den Mut hat, das zu
sein, was er von Natur aus ist.
[27] = advice; by, von; to,
an; those = all such; who, die da.
[28]Gotth. Ephraim Lessing, geboren den
22. Jan. 1729 zu Kamenz (Oberlausitz), gestorben den 15. Febr. 1781 in Braunschweig,
hat sich durch seine ästhetisch-kritischen Werke, wie auch durch seine Dramen, deren Form,
Sprache, Methode und Inhalt fast unerreichte Muster sind, einen unsterblichen Namen in
der deutschen Litteraturgeschichte erworben. Sein Wirken als genialer Kritiker, Forscher
und Dichter war von unermeßlichem Einfluß auf die nächste Entwickelung unserer Litteratur,
die mit ihm und durch ihn ihrer Glanzperiode entgegenschritt.
Section 162. A ROYAL JUDGMENT.
A man and his wife named Lambrun had been many years in the
service of the unfortunate Queen Mary Stuart, and were sincerely attached
to her. The tragical death of that princess had such an effect on the
husband that he did not long survive her, and the[1] widow, Margaret
Lambrun, resolved to revenge, upon[2]
Queen Elizabeth, the[3] death of
two persons so dear to her. She (S. 5, N. 2) therefore disguised[4]
herself in man’s clothes, bought (S. 58, N. 8) a brace[5]of pistols, and
went[6]
to (S. 72, N. 4) London. Soon after, when the queen[7] appeared
in[8] public, Margaret endeavoured to[9]
make her way through the crowd
in order to shoot her[10];
but one of the pistols fell[11], and she was
immediately apprehended.
The[12]
queen, being informed of the circumstance[13],
ordered[14] the
man to be brought before her, and said to him: “Well, Sir, who are
you[15]? and why do you seek[16]
to kill me?”—“Madam,” replied Margaret,
“I am a woman; I was a long time in the service of Queen
Mary Stuart, whom you put[17]
to death unjustly; her execution caused[18]
the death of my dear husband, who was sincerely attached to her; and
my affection for both of them has excited[19] me to revenge.”—“And how do
you think I ought to deal[20] with you?” asked Elizabeth.—“Do you speak
as a queen or as a judge?” returned Margaret.—“As a queen.”—“Then
you ought to pardon[21]
me,” was the answer.—“And what security[22]
can you give me that you will not attempt[16] my life again?”—“Madam,
a[23]
pardon granted upon conditions ceases to be a favour[24].”—“Well
then,” said the queen, “I pardon you, and trust to your gratitude for[25]
my safety.”—P. Sadler.
[15] Use the 2nd pers. pl.
(Ihr) here and in the following passages, since that was the pronoun generally
used in addressing persons in olden times.
[16] to seek to kill a person (or
to attempt a person’s life), einem nach dem Leben trachten.
[17] to put a person
to death unjustly, einen ungerechterweise hinrichten lassen.
[18] This caused
the death of our child, dies kostete unserem Kinde das Leben. The insertion of
the adv. auch after the verb ‘caused’ would considerably improve the German
rendering.
[19] to excite a person to revenge, einen zur Rache antreiben.
Use the Impf.
[25]hinsichtlich,
followed by the Gen. The words ‘to (auf) your gratitude’ are best
placed at the end.
Section 163. TACITUS.
I am glad to find[1], by your (= thy) letter just received, that you are
reading Tacitus[2] with some
relish. His style is rather quaint[3] and
enigmatical, which (S. 3, N. 7) makes[4] it difficult to the student; but
then[5] his pages[6]
are filled with such admirable apothegms and maxims
of political wisdom, as[7] infer the deepest knowledge of human nature;
and it is particularly necessary that any one intending to become a public
speaker should[8] be master of his works, as[9]
there is neither an ancient
nor a modern author who affords such a selection of admirable quotations.
You should exercise yourself frequently in[10] trying to make
translations of the[11]
passages which most strike[12]
you, trying[13] to invest[14]
the sense of (S. 25, N. 5) Tacitus in as good English as you can. This
will answer[15] the double purpose of making yourself familiar with the
Latin author, and giving you the command of[16] your own language,
which no person will ever have[17] who[18]
does not study composition in
early life.—Sir Walter Scott, “Letters To His Son.”
[18]welcher sich nicht schon in der Jugend in schriftlichen Aufsätzen übt.
Section 164. HUMILITY.
I believe the first[1] test of a truly great man is his humility. I do not
mean by[2] humility, doubt of[3]
his own power, or hesitation[4]
in speaking[5]
his opinions, but a right understanding of the relation between[6] what
he can do and say, and[7] the rest of the world’s sayings and doings.
All great men not only know[8] their business[9],
but usually know[10] that[11]
they know it; they are not only right in their main opinions[12], but they
usually know that they are right in them (S. 4, N. 5, B); only they
do not think much of themselves on[13]
that account. Arnolfo[14] knows
he can build a good[15]
dome at Florence; Albert[16]
Dürer writes calmly[17]
to one who had found fault with his work: “It cannot be better done;”
Sir Isaac Newton knows that he has worked[18] out a problem or two
that would have puzzled anybody[19]
else:—only they do not expect their[20]
fellow-men therefore to fall down and worship them; they[21] have a curious
under-sense of powerlessness, feeling (S. 30, N. 4) that the greatness is[22]
not in them, but through them; that they could (App. § 33) not do or
be anything else than[23] what God made them. They see something
divine and God-made[24]
in every other man, and are endlessly, nay[25] incredibly
merciful[26].—Anonymous.
[13] on that account, deswegen,
which place after the Subj.; to think much of oneself, eine große Meinung von
sich haben.
[14]Arnolfo di Cambio,
berühmter Baumeister und Bildhauer zu
Florenz (1232-1300), baute den Dom St. Maria del fiore zu Florenz und das Tabernakel
zu St. Paolo in Rom.
[16]Albrecht Dürer, geboren
den 20. Mai 1471 zu Nürnberg, gestorben den 6. April 1528 ebendaselbst, muß zu den
hervorragendsten und vielseitigsten Künstlern gezählt werden, die je gelebt. Er war nicht
allein ausgezeichneter Maler, sondern auch zugleich Kupferstecher (engraver on copper),
Formschneider (moulder), Bildhauer (sculptor), Architekt und Schriftsteller (author)
über die Kunst. Er war der Erfinder der Ätzkunst, erfand das Mittel, die Holzschnitte
mit zwei Farben zu drucken, und vervollkommnete die Schriftgießerei (type-foundry),
denn von ihm stammt die Form der deutschen Lettern.
[20] = that their fellow-men therefore (deshalb)
must (sollen) fall down before them and worship (an´beten) them. The auxiliary
sollen must be placed last, accord. to App. § 18.
[21] they — powerlessness.
This clause cannot be rendered in a literal way, but may be expressed thus:
‘they recognise that they are, after all, only powerless’; after all, only, doch
nur, which place after the Subj.
[22] is not = manifests itself not (sich
offenbaren).
Section 165. RUSSIAN POLITICAL PRISONERS IN BANISHMENT. I.
In the cheerless regions of[1] Arkangel, of which the aborigines say:
“God made Russia, but the devil made Arkangel,” there are
(S. 82, N. 7) more than two hundred of those banished ones—men and women,
all young, all (= and) poor, most[2]
of them sent without trial, few[3]
amongst them knowing even of what they are accused. Victor Ivanovitch[4]
dines with his friend B., for instance, and[5]
after a stroll along[6] the
boulevards they separate. B. is arrested that[7] very evening, and when
Victor, astonished and horror-stricken[8],
hastens[9] to inquire the cause,
he finds everybody[10], even B.’s own
father, as[11] much in the dark as he
is himself; all questions and petitions on[12]
the subject receive[13] vague
administrative answers; all friends and relatives are systematically discouraged
and silenced; eagerly they wait for[14] the numerous political
trials that[15]
come on without intermission, hoping[16] to see the missing
one’s (S. 67, N. 3) name on[17]
the list of criminals, or to see[18] his face once
more, let[19] it be even in[20]
the prisoner’s dock; but as[21]
they wait and[22]
watch, the prisoner[23] is, without any trial, en route for Arkangel.
Arrived[24]
there, the routine (App. § 15) is the same for all; whatever[25]
the crime alleged, the age or sex, the[26]
prisoner is taken to the police-ward,—a[27]
dreary log-building, containing two sections, one for men, the
other for women. The solitary table and chair in the room, the four
walls, and even the ceiling, are covered[28]
with the names of[29] youthful
predecessors, whose pencilled[30]
jests and clever caricatures bear[31] witness
to the strength of confidence in themselves with which they began[32]
their life in exile.
[29] of — predecessors = of
the former (früher, adj.) youthful inhabitants of the same (to agree with room).
[30] pencilled, mit Bleistift gezeichnet, which use attributively.
[31] bear —
themselves = prove the intensity (Größe, f.) of the confidence in themselves
(Selbstvertrauen, n.).
[32] ‘to begin’, here an´treten, sep. comp. str. v. tr.;
life in exile = banishment.
Section 166. RUSSIAN POLITICAL PRISONERS IN BANISHMENT. II.
In this dreary abode[1]
a week or ten days is spent, when[2] the governor
of Arkangel, after due reflection, marks out[3] for this dangerous personage
some final place of exile (S. 76, N. 22, B), some[4]
miserable little
district town[5],
such as Holmogor, Shenkoursk, Pinega, or Mexen. The[6]
prisoner is then told his “documents” are ready, and a gendarme enters,
saying[7] it is time to start[8].
The exile jumps into the jolting post-waggon,
two gendarmes jump in after him, the bell above[9] the horse’s
neck begins to ring—and rings on for[10]
days and weeks—through wood[11],
and swamp, and plain, along[12] roads inconceivably drear and lonely,
until the[13] weary convoy at length arrives at his destination. The little
town is desolate and black[14], and consists of log-huts, two unpaved
streets, and a wooden church painted green, and the[15] live-stock consists
of ten or twelve raw-boned[16]
horses, a small herd of sickly[17] cows, and
thirty or forty reindeer. The population rarely (S. 102, N. 30) exceeds
one (S. 132, N. 10) thousand[18],
and consists of the Ispravnik[19],
ten subaltern[20]
officers, the Arbiter[21]
of the Peace, the[22] Crown Forester, a priest,
a few shopkeepers, thirty or forty exiles, a[23] chain-gang of Russian
felons, and a crowd[24] of Finnish beggars. On his arrival, the prisoner
is driven straight to (S. 72, N. 4) the police-ward, where he is inspected[25]
by (S. 106, N. 23) the Ispravnik, a (S. 53, N. 9) police officer, who is
absolute lord and master of the district. This representative of the
Government requires[26]
of him to answer the following questions: His[27]
name? How old? Married or single? Where from? The address
of[28]
parents, relations, or friends? Answers[29] to all of which are entered
in the books.
[1]Aufenthaltsort, m.; a — spent = spends (verbringen)
the prisoner eight or
ten days.
[3] to mark out, bezeichnen; for this =
to this (Dat.); personage = character; some final = his definite (definitiv).
The Dat. should be placed immediately after ‘Arkangel’.
[6] Construe this passage accord. to
the following model: I am told the documents are destroyed, Es
(S. 104, N. 19) wird mir mitgeteilt, daß die Papiere vernichtet sind.
[29] Say ‘and
the answers to (auf, with Acc.) these questions are all entered (ein´tragen) in
the books’.
Section 167. RUSSIAN POLITICAL PRISONERS IN BANISHMENT. III.
A[1] solemn promise is then exacted of him that he will not give lessons
of[2] any kind, or[3]
try to teach[4] anyone; that every letter (S. 48, N. 6)
he writes will go through the Ispravnik’s hands, and[5]
that he will follow
no occupation except shoemaking, carpentering, or field labour. He is
then[6] told he (App. § 28) is free, but[7]
at the same time is solemnly
warned that[8] should he attempt to pass the limits of the town, he would
be shot down like a dog rather than be allowed to escape; and[9], should
he be taken alive, would be sent off to Eastern Siberia without further
formality than that of the Ispravnik’s personal order.
The poor fellow takes up his little bundle, and[10], fully realising that
he has now bidden[11]
farewell to the culture and material[12] comfort of
his past[13] life, he walks[14]
out into the cheerless street. A group of
exiles, all pale and emaciated, are (S. 107, N. 13) there[15] to (S. 19, N. 7)
greet him, take[16] him to some of their miserable lodgings, and feverishly
demand[17] news from home. The new comer gazes on them as one in
a dream; some are melancholy, and almost mad, others nervously
irritable, and the remainder have evidently tried to find solace in[18] drink.
They live (S. 116, N. 17) in[19] communities of twos and threes, have food,
a scanty provision of clothes, money[20],
and books in common, and consider[21]
it their sacred duty to help each other in every emergency,
without[22] distinction of (S. 3, N. 2, and S. 10, N. 9) sex, rank, or age.
The noble by[23]
birth get sixteen shillings[24] a month from Government
for their maintenance, and[25] commoners only ten, although many of
them are married, and[26]
sent into exile with young families[27].
[1] Say ‘Hereupon one demands (verlangen) of him the solemn promise’.
[2] not of any kind, keinerlei, adj. (indeclinable).
[3] or try = and not try.
The auxiliary verb of mood ‘will’ need be expressed but once, and stands, of
course?
[5] Say ‘and that he
besides (außer) shoemaking (Schuhmacherei, f., with def. art.), carpentering and
field-labour, will carry on (treiben) no (keinerlei) occupation’.
[6] ‘then’,
here Endlich, with which begin the clause, and construe accord. to S. 4, N. 4
(man).
[7] but — warned, aber zugleich kündigt man ihm an.
[8] that —
escape. This passage requires an altogether different construction in German;
say ‘they (man) would upon (bei) an attempt, to go beyond (überschreiten, insep.
comp. str. v. tr.) the limits of the town, not allow him to escape, but rather
(vielmehr) shoot him down like a dog’ (liter.—but him rather like a dog shoot
down, nie´derschießen)’.
[9] Say ‘should he however be caught (ein´fangen) alive,
(so) they (man) would send him without further formality (Formalität, f.), upon
the simple order of the Ispravnik to the East of Siberia’.
[10] and —
realising = and well knowing (pres. p.).
[20] Supply
‘as also’ before ‘money’; in common, gemeinschaftlich.
[21] My parents
consider it their duty to help their neighbours in every emergency, meine
Eltern halten es für ihre Pflicht, ihren Nachbarn in jeder Not und Gefahr beizustehen.
[22] Insert ‘und zwar’ before ‘without’, which will improve the rendering
very much.
Section 168. RUSSIAN POLITICAL PRISONERS IN BANISHMENT. IV.
Daily a gendarme visits[1]
their lodgings, inspects[2] the premises when
and how he pleases[3], and now[4]
and then makes some mysterious entry
in his note book. Should[5] any of their number carry a warm dinner, a
pair of newly-mended boots, or a change of linen to some passing exile
lodged for the moment in the police-ward, it is just as likely as not
marked against him as a crime. It is a crime to[6] come and see a friend
off, or accompany[7]
him a little on the way. In[8] fact, should the Ispravnik
feel[9] out of sorts—the effect of cards[10]
and drink—he[11] vents
his bad temper on the exiles; and as[12] cards and drink are the only
amusements in these dreary regions, crimes[13] are often marked down
against the exiles in astonishing numbers, and[14] a report of them sent
to the Governor of the province.
Winter lasts eight months, a[15]
period during which the surrounding[16]
country presents the appearance of a noiseless[17], lifeless, frozen marsh.
No roads, no communication with the outer world, no means of[18] escape.
In course of time almost every exile is attacked[19] by nervous convulsions,
soon[20] followed by prolonged apathy and complete prostration.
Some of them contrive[21]
to forge passports, and by a miracle, as[22] it
were, make their escape; but the great majority of these victims of the
Third Section[23]
either go mad, commit suicide, or die of[24] delirium
tremens.—James Allen.
[3] Do as you please, thun Sie, wie es Ihnen beliebt.
[4] now and then, dann und
wann, or von Zeit zu Zeit, after which insert the adverbs auch wohl; some = a;
to make an entry in a book, eine Bemerkung in ein Buch eintragen.
[5] Arrange
this period in the following manner: ‘Should one of them to a for the moment
in the police-ward lodged (untergebracht) and passing (durchreisend) exile ever (je)
a warm dinner, a pair of newly-soled boots, or some clean linen (Wäsche, f.)
bring, then (so) is (Passive) to him this very (S. 161, N. 2) likely as a crime
ascribed (zur Last geschrieben)’.
[6] He came and saw his friend off, er sagte
seinem abreisenden Freunde Lebewohl.
[7] Will you accompany me a little on
my way? Wollen Sie mich auf meinem Wege eine kleine Strecke begleiten?
[20] = upon which soon follows a state (Zustand, m.) of
prolonged (dauernd) apathy (Stumpfsinn, m.) and complete (gänzlich) prostration
(Hinfälligkeit der Lebenskräfte).
[21] He contrived to forge a passport, es gelang
ihm, einen falschen Paß herzustellen.
[22] as it were, gleichsam, which place
after ‘and’; by = through, durch; to make one’s escape, entkommen, insep. comp.
str. v. intr.
[23]‘Die dritte Abteilung’ nennt man in Rußland das gefürchtete
Departement des Polizeiministeriums, welches mit der geheimen Polizei betraut ist.
At[2]
daylight Tahiti, an island which must for ever remain[3] classical
to the voyager in the South Sea, was in view. At a distance the appearance[4]
was not attractive. The[5]
luxuriant vegetation of the lower[6] part
could not yet be seen; and as the clouds rolled[7]
past, only the wildest[8]
and most precipitous peaks showed themselves[9]
towards[10] the centre of
the island. As soon as we anchored in[11]
Matavai Bay we[12] were surrounded
by canoes. After dinner we landed and enjoyed the delights[13]
always[14] produced by the first impressions of a fine country. A crowd
of men, women, and children was collected on the shore, ready to
(S. 19, N. 7) receive us with laughing, merry faces. They[15] marshalled us towards
the house of (S. 10, N. 2) Mr. Wilson, the[16] missionary of the district,
who met[17] us on the road, and gave[18]
us a very fine reception. After
sitting[19]
a short time in his house, we separated from our host to[20] walk
about, and[21] returned in the evening.
The[22] land capable of cultivation is[23]
scarcely in any part more than
a fringe of low alluvial soil, accumulated round[24] the base of the mountains,
and[25] protected from the waves of the sea by a coral reef, which
encircles the entire line of coast. Within the reef there[26] is an expanse
of smooth water, like that of a lake, where[27] the canoes of the natives
can ply with safety, and where[28]
ships anchor. The low land, which[29]
comes down to the beach of coral sand, is covered[30] by the most beautiful
productions of[31]
the intertropical regions. In the midst of bananas[32],
orange, cocoa-nut, and bread-fruit trees, spots[33]
are cleared where yams[34],
potatoes, the sugar-cane, and pine-apples are cultivated[35].
[1]Tahiti ist die größte der Gesellschaftsinseln
(Society Islands) im stillen Meere
oder der Südsee (Pacific Ocean) und besitzt ungefähr 9200 Einwohner, welche seit 1813
durch englische Missionäre zum Christentum bekehrt sind. Die Bibel ist in die Sprache
der Eingebornen übersetzt, und auch in den Kirchen und Schulen wird in der Landessprache
gepredigt und gelehrt.
[2] = At the break of day (Beim Tagesanbruch) we saw
Tahiti.
[3] = appear, erscheinen. The words ‘to — Sea’ must be placed
after the rel. pron., and are followed by ‘for ever’ (stets).
[26] there is = finds itself (sich befinden);
an expanse of water, eine ausgedehnte Wasserfläche; ‘smooth’, here fast spiegelglatt.
[27] The literal rendering of this passage would not read well, say ‘which (to
agree with Wasserfläche) affords (App. § 5) perfect (völlig) safety to the canoes of
the natives’.
Even the brush-wood is[1] an imported fruit-tree, namely
the guava[2],
which grows in abundance here. In Brazil I have often admired the
varied[3] beauty of the bananas (S. 71, N. 2), palms, and orange-trees
contrasted[4]
together; and here we also have the bread-fruit[5],
conspicuous[6]
from its large, glossy, and deeply digitated leaves. It is
admirable[7]
to behold groves of a tree, sending[8] forth its branches with
the vigour of an English oak, loaded[9] with large and most nutritious
fruit[10].
However[11] seldom the usefulness of an object can account for the
pleasure of beholding it, in the case of these beautiful woods, the knowledge
of their high productiveness, no doubt, enters largely into the feeling
of admiration. The[12] little winding paths, cool from the surrounding
shade, led to the scattered[13] houses, the owners of which everywhere
gave[14] us a cheerful[15]and
most hospitable reception.
I[16]
was pleased with nothing so much as with the inhabitants. There[17]
is a mildness in the expression of their countenances which at once
banishes the idea of[18]
a savage, and an intelligence[19] which shows that
they are[20] advancing in civilisation. The common people, when working,
keep[21]
the upper part of their bodies quite naked; and[22] it is then that
the Tahitians are seen to advantage. They are very tall, broad-shouldered,
athletic, and well proportioned. It (S. 4, N. 4, man) has been remarked
that[23] it requires little habit to make a dark skin more pleasing and
natural to the eye of a European than his own colour.
[11] Arrange this period thus: ‘Although the usefulness
of an object perhaps only seldom explains to us the pleasure, which we
experience at the sight of the same, yet (so ... doch) our admiration at the
sight of these splendid groves (Wälder) is no doubt considerably influenced by
(= through) our knowledge of (von) their great fertility.
[12] The — shade =
The narrow, winding (sich schlängelnd), shady and cool foot-paths.
[15]freundlich, but here wohlwollend, in
order to avoid a repetition of the same term, since ‘hospitable’ must be turned
by gastfreundlich; reception, Aufnahme, f.
[16] Say ‘Nothing gave (machen)
me greater joy than just (gerade) the inhabitants’.
[17] Say ‘The expression
of their faces (Ihr Gesichtsausdruck) bears a mildness (Sanftmut, f.), which’, etc.
[21] = they have. It is a matter of course that the conj. ‘when’ must
commence the period.
[22] = and just then one sees the Tahitians (die
Tahitianer) to advantage (= in the best light).
[23] = that after a short
time a dark skin appears to the eye of a European more pleasing and more
natural than his own.
Section 171. TAHITI. III.
A white man bathing (S. 16, N. 4) by the side of a Tahitian was[1]
like a plant bleached (S. 7, N. 3, attrib.) by the gardener’s art compared[2]
with a fine dark-green one growing vigorously[3] in the field. Most of
the men are tatooed, and the ornaments follow the curvature[4] of the
body so[5] gracefully, that they[6]
have a very elegant effect. The most
common pattern, varying[7] in its details, is somewhat like[16] the crown of
a palm-tree. It springs[8] from the central line of the back, and gracefully
curls[9] round both sides. The simile may[10]
be a fanciful one, but
I[11]
thought the body of a man thus ornamented[12] was (App. §§ 29
and 30) like[13]
the trunk of a noble tree embraced[14] by a delicate creeper.
Many of the elder people[15] had their feet covered with small figures,
so[16] placed as to resemble a sock. This fashion, however, is partly
gone[17] by, and has been succeeded[18]
by others. Here[19], although
fashion is far from immutable, every one must abide[20] by that prevailing
at his youth. An old man has thus[21] his age for ever stamped on his
body, and he cannot assume[22] the airs of a young dandy. The women
are tatooed in the same manner as the men, and[23] very commonly on
their fingers.
In[24]
returning to the boat, we witnessed[25] a very pretty scene.
Numbers[26] of children were playing on the beach, and had lighted
bonfires, which illuminated the placid sea and[27] surrounding trees;
others, in[28] circles, were singing Tahitian verses. We seated ourselves
on the sand, and[29]
joined their party. The songs were impromptu[30],
and[31]
I believe related to our arrival. One little girl sang a line[32],
which[33]
the rest took up in parts, forming[34] a very pretty chorus. The
whole scene made[35]
us unequivocally aware that[36] we were seated on
the shore of an island in the far-famed[37] South Sea.—Charles Darwin.
Section 172. AUDUBON [1] , THE AMERICAN ORNITHOLOGIST, RELATES HOW NEARLY [2] A THOUSAND OF HIS ORIGINAL DRAWINGS WERE DESTROYED.
I left the village of Henderson, in Kentucky, situated[3] on the banks
of the Ohio, where I[4]
resided for several years, to proceed[5] to Philadelphia
on business. I (S. 115, N. 1) looked[6] to my drawings before
my departure, placed them carefully in a wooden box, and gave[7] them
in charge of a relative, with[8] injunctions to see that no injury should
happen to them. My absence was of (= lasted) several months; and
when I returned, after[9] having enjoyed the pleasures of home for a few
days, I inquired[10] after my box, and[11]
what I was pleased to call my
treasure. The box was produced[12]
and opened; but[13], reader, feel for
me—a pair of Norway rats had taken possession of the whole, and
reared a young family among the gnawed[14]
bits of paper, which, but[15]
a month previous, had represented nearly a thousand inhabitants of[16]
the air! The burning heat which[17] instantly rushed through my brain
was too great without[18] affecting my whole nervous system. I slept
for (S. 166, N. 10) several nights, and the days passed like[19] days of
oblivion—until[20] the animal powers being recalled into action, through
the strength of my constitution, I[21] took up my gun, my note-book and
my pencils, and went forth to the woods as gaily as if nothing had
happened. I[22] felt pleased that I might now make better drawings
than before; and, ere a period not exceeding three years had elapsed,
my portfolio was again filled.—John Audubon.
[1]John James Audubon,
der berühmte amerikanische Ornithologe (oder Vogelkundige),
geboren den 4. Mai 1780 in Louisiana, gestorben den 27. Januar 1851 zu
New-York, befuhr die Ströme und Flüsse des Westens, um die Vögel zu beobachten und zu
zeichnen.
[17] = which instantly
took possession of my brain (Gehirn, n.). To take possession of a thing, sich
einer Sache bemächtigen.
[18]um nicht auch mein ganzes Nervensystem zu erschüttern.
[19] like — oblivion, im gänzlichen Vergessen alles Geschehenen.
[20] = till my
vital powers (Lebenskräfte) were reanimated (wieder angeregt waren, App. § 17)
through the strength of my constitution (Natur, f.).
[21] Say ‘and I was
able (imstande sein) to take up (ergreifen) my gun (Büchse, f.), my sketch-book
and my pencils to (S. 19, N. 7) go therewith again as (so) cheerfully into the
woods as if nothing had happened (als ob nichts vorgefallen wäre)’.
[22] Say
‘It gave me pleasure to think that I would now perhaps produce better
drawings than ever (je) before; and even before (noch ehe) three years had
passed away, my portfolio was again filled with drawings.
Section 173. THE BATTLE OF [1] KASSASSIN. I.
Mahsamah, Monday, August 28, 1882.
At[2] seven this morning, guns were heard in the direction of Kassassin,
which is[3]
four miles to our front. The troops were called[4] under arms,
the Cavalry, consisting of the Household Cavalry[5] and 7th Dragoon
Guards, saddled up, and the Infantry fell[6]
in in readiness to[7] march to
the assistance of the force there under General Graham. That officer,
however, sent a[8] message saying that the firing was in the enemy’s camp,
and[9] was inexplicable, except upon the supposition that the Egyptians
were fighting[10] among themselves.
At[11] eleven o’clock, however, the flags of the signallers at Kassassin
were in motion, and (S. 104, N. 19) the news came that the enemy
were approaching[12].
The Cavalry again turned out[13] and rode off to
Kassassin. As the enemy approached, General Graham opened fire
with his two guns, and[14] the Egyptian artillery replied. The 19th
Hussars[15] came on[16]
to the place from Mahuta, where General Willis
has his headquarters.
The enemy made no attack, but halted at[17] a considerable distance
from the camp, and kept[18] up a continued shell-fire, but at a distance
altogether[19]
out of range. Their conduct[20] was, indeed, altogether
inexplicable. The Cavalry remained out all day, and the Infantry here
were kept in readiness to march at[21] a moment’s notice, but as the enemy
made[22] no movement in advance, they were not called forward to the
front.
The heat was terrific[23] all day, the[24]
sun beating down with almost
insupportable force upon the wide sand waste. It[25] had been hard
work for horses and men. No shade was obtainable[26], and the hot
wind raised[27]
great dust storms, which penetrated[28] everywhere and made
breathing difficult. The brigade of Guards (S. 36, N. 7, A) fell in
under arms[29] ready[30]
to march, but the Cavalry returned and reported
that the enemy had fallen back[31], after[32]
keeping the troops the whole
day out in the full force of the sun.
[1]bei. The very graphic account of the Battle of Kassassin given in
Sections 173-177 was written by the correspondent of the London ‘Standard’,
who was with the cavalry at Mahsamah. Kassassin (also called Kassassin Lock)
is four miles west from Mahsamah Station, which, only a few days previous to
this action, was captured from the Egyptians by General Drury Lowe. The
Egyptians had established a camp at that place, and, after the capture, the
Household Cavalry and the Dragoon Guards were stationed there, under the
command of General Drury Lowe, as a reserve to the small force that held
Kassassin Lock, an important fortified position occupied by General Graham.
The enemy, under the rebel-leader Arabi, held the strongly fortified camp of
Tel-el-Kebir, about twelve miles west from Kassassin. Arabi’s stronghold
(Tel-el-Kebir) was stormed and captured by the English under their skilful
Commander-in-chief Sir Garnet Wolseley (now Lord Wolseley of Cairo), on
Wednesday, September 13, when the rebel-army was totally beaten, and the
Egyptian war brought to a successful issue.
[2] Say ‘This (Heute) morning at
7 o’clock we (man) heard the thunder of cannons (comp. n.)’, etc.
[30]
= and held itself ready to march (sich zum Abmarsch bereit halten).
[31] to fall back,
sich zurück´ziehen. See App. §§ 28 and 22. The auxiliary in this clause is best
omitted to avoid its repetition, the next sentence containing the same.
[32] = after he (i.e. the enemy) had kept (zurückhalten,
App. § 30) the troops
the whole day at (bei) the great heat of the sun (comp. n. S. 76, N. 22; use n
as a connecting link, since fem. nouns ending in e in olden times used to take
n as an inflection for the Gen., Dat., and Acc. Sing., as well as for the Pl.) in
the field.
Section 174. THE BATTLE OF KASSASSIN. II.
Ismailia[1], Tuesday, August 29,
3 o’clock in the morning.
Scarcely had the Cavalry unsaddled, and[2] horses and men begun to
eat, when the[3] sound of artillery was heard (S. 4, N. 4, man) again at
Kassassin, and by[4] the heavy and
continuous roar[5] it was evident[6] that
this time the attack was[7] in earnest. Again the wearied men saddled
their no less weary horses and[8]
prepared to advance. The[9] sun was still
beating down fiercely even at that late hour, and the hot withering[10] wind
was raising[11] the sand clouds so high that it was impossible to see what
was going[12]
on, but through the dust and haze numerous[13] jets of smoke
from the guns were visible.
The cannonade increased[14]
in violence, and the Cavalry moved[15] away
to the right, the[16]
Artillery following them, and pressed[17] round towards
the flank of the enemy’s Infantry. With[18] the movement of such masses
of men and horses the dust rose over the whole scene thicker than ever,
and it was impossible to obtain[19] more than a general idea of what was
going on; while the sun set in[20] a red glare over the sandy plain.
The Cavalry pushed[21]
still further to the right until[22] hidden from the
enemy by some low sand hills, and[23] then goaded their weary horses into
as fast a trot as the heavy sand and their weary condition would permit.
It was evident that it was the General’s intention to repeat the tactics
of the previous fight, and that he meant[24] to get round the enemy’s rear.
It was a striking proof of his confidence in[25] his troops that
(S. 66, N. 15), with[26] tired horses and night approaching, he should attempt this
manœuvre against an enemy of unknown strength and with[27] fresh horses.
Against any other enemy it would have been rash[28], but the result proved
that General Drury Lowe did not over-estimate the fighting powers[29] of
his men.
[1] Ismailia, then the head quarters of Sir Garnet Wolseley, is 21 miles east of
Kassassin, on the Suez Canal. In the morning, morgens.
[2] and = and
scarcely had; ‘men’, here Reiter; to begin to eat, mit dem Essen an´fangen.
[29] fighting
powers, Stärke, f.; ‘men’, here = troops.
Section 175. THE BATTLE OF KASSASSIN. III.
Soon[1]
darkness came down rapidly upon us. The rattle and roar of[2]
combat on[3] our left never ceased, and it was evident that the two thousand
Infantry[4]
at Kassassin were hard pressed. Presently[5] the moonlight
streamed palely over the grey sand, but the clouds of dust obscured[6] the
advancing horsemen, who sometimes trotted, sometimes[7] walked.
By about seven o’clock we had got in the rear of the firing[8],
and[9]
wheeled in that direction, advancing[10]
very slowly to[11] allow the Artillery
to[12]
come up. We could see the flashes of[13] the enemy’s artillery gleam
on the horizon like the flicker of incessant summer lightning[14].
We slowly drew[15]
nearer to the scene of conflict. It was almost dark[16],
but, unfortunately, we showed up[17] a black mass against the bright
moonlit sky and ground[18], and[19]
the sudden rush of shell through the
air, followed[20] by an explosion far in our rear, showed that the enemy
had at last discovered us. They[21]
were about fifteen hundred yards[22]
away, and[23] we saw nine flashes, one after another, at short intervals,
spurt out, no[24] longer like sheet lightning, but in angry jets of flame.
Almost simultaneously the sky above us seemed to[24] be torn in pieces as
by (= through) a mighty hurricane. Shells screamed[25]
and burst[26], and
shrapnel bullets[27] tore up the sand on either side of us.
The brigade now moved[28]
to the right to[29] disconcert their aim, and
the next salvo of shell missed us. We moved quickly forward, and the
gunners again saw us, and the shells burst over and around. Yet,
strangely[30],
but few were hit, though it seemed as if the storm[31] would
mow men and horses down by squadrons[32].
[1] = Soon after (darauf) the darkness (Dunkel,
n.) of the night descended
(hernie´dersteigen) rapidly upon us.
[23] Arrange this sentence literally thus: and now saw we nine at (in) short
intervals one another (einander) following cannon-shots (Kanonenschüsse) spurt out
(hervor´blitzen).
[24]welche nicht mehr dem Wetterleuchten, sondern verzehrenden
Feuerströmen glichen; to — pieces, zu zerreißen.
[32] men and horses by squadrons = whole squadrons of (von)
men (Menschen)
and horses.—To mow down, hernie´dermähen.
Section 176. THE BATTLE OF KASSASSIN. IV.
Now[1] tiny flashes, with the sharp ping of bullets, told that the enemy’s
Infantry were also at work, whilst[2]
a horse here and a man there dropped[3]
in the ranks.
The battery having (S. 30, N. 4) by this time come up, the Cavalry
moved[4] to the right, in order to[5]
allow them to come into action, and in
a few seconds, after taking up their ground, our guns spoke[6] out their
answer to the enemy’s fire.
The Cavalry now advanced[7]
from the left, the[8] 7th Dragoons leading.
Under[9]
cover of these the Life Guards formed for a charge, and[10] by
word of command the Dragoons opened[11] right and left to allow them to
pass. Already Herbert Stewart, General Drury Lowe’s brigade-major,
had passed[12] down the line the word: “The Cavalry are to charge the
guns!” Sir Baker Russell was in front (= at the head), and shouted:
“Now we have them. Charge!”
Away[13]
went the long line, disappearing[14] almost instantly in the darkness
and dust, and away behind them went[15]
the 7th Dragoons, keeping[16]
(S. 16, N. 4) on either flank of the Guards.
We[17], remaining in the rear, had the full benefit of the storm and shot
which was to greet the advancing horsemen (Reiterei, f.) and of whom
from (S. 102, N. 4) this moment we saw no more till the battle was over;
and only (S. 109, N. 5) then we learned[18] what they had done.
Led by Baker Russell, they charged[19]
straight at the guns, sabring[20]
the gunners as they passed, and[21] dashing into and cutting down the
flying Infantry beyond them. Russell’s horse was shot under him, but
he seized another and kept with[22] his men.
The battle was ended[23] at a stroke, and a scene of wild confusion
ensued[24]; some guns were[25]
still firing, bodies[26] of Infantry still kept up
a fusillade, and numerous bodies[27] of horses and men dotted the moonlit
plain.
Being now separated altogether from the Cavalry, with[28] the enemy
intervening between us, myself and two companions endeavoured to find
our[29] way round to Kassassin. It was an adventurous ride, for several
shells burst near us, but before we reached the camp, the conflict was
at an end.
[1] = At (In)
this moment (App. § 14) flashes of lightning (kleine Blitze) and
the sharp ping (Knallen, n.) of bullets betrayed that also the hostile Infantry
were (= was) engaged in the attack (beim Angriff beteiligt sein).
[2] Place
‘here’ after ‘whilst’, and ‘there’ after ‘and’.
[19] to charge straight at the guns,
die feindliche Artillerie sogleich an´greifen.
[20] = sabred down; as they passed,
auf ihrem Zuge.
[21] = and dashed (sprengen) into the ranks of the flying
Infantry behind the same, which they (sie, f. Sing. to agree with die Reiterei) cut
down (nie´dermetzeln).
[27] bodies — plain = and numerous
bodies (Haufen) of Cavalry were still here and there upon the moonlit plain
visible.
[28] = and the enemy stood between us. (The verb must stand
last, since also this clause is a depending one, co-ordinated to the preceding
clause by the conjunction ‘and’.)
The Infantry there[1]
had indeed had a hot time of it[2]. Hundreds of shells
had (S. 29, N. 3) burst in the confined[3]
space, and the shelter trenches[4]
afforded but an insufficient protection. On the left of the position[5], next
to the Canal, were[6]
the Marine Artillery, then came the 46th, and next[7]
to them the 84th[8], the[9]
slight earthworks sweeping round again in a
semi-circle almost to the Canal. The Mounted[10] Infantry were in front
under Captain Pigott, who[11] has received a wound, having been shot
through the thigh.
The Egyptians came on with great bravery, and in spite of the[12] heavy
like of our men[13], were rapidly gaining ground, and would soon have
rushed[14]
into the entrenchments, when the roar of our guns on[15] their left
rear, followed[16]
by the rush of our Cavalry, proved[17] too much for them,
and from (S. 102, N. 4) that moment they thought only of flight.
Our casualties are surprisingly[18]
small considering[19] the fire to which
our men were exposed. Lieutenant Edwards, of the Mounted Infantry,
was[20] shot in the arm, Surgeon-Major[21]
Shaw, of the 46th, was[22] killed,
and some ten or a dozen men, but, fortunately, the Remington bullet
wounds rather than kills; the hospital was crowded[23] with wounded men.
About 10 o’clock the Cavalry came in[24] in high spirits over their brilliant
achievement. Many, of course, are missing in the darkness, but
will, no doubt, turn up[25]
in the morning. Upon their[26] return from the
pursuit they[27] were unable to find the guns over which they had charged,
but these[28] will doubtless be discovered at sunrise. After learning from
them[29] the events[30]
of the charge, I[31]
started to ride here to get off[32] my
despatches,—a[33] distance of twenty-four miles. This solitary ride over
the dismal desert by moonlight was not[34] the least exciting part of an
exciting day.
Late[35] as it was, I found at (auf)
the different posts the men[36] busy at
work entrenching, and met troops also on[37] their march to reinforce
those at the front.
The enemy’s force[38]engaged was estimated at 13,000. The Egyptians
fought well until our Cavalry and guns took[39] them in the rear, and,
had[40]
it not been for the gallantry of the defenders of Kassassin, would[41]
have carried the position before our reinforcements came upon the scene.
At[42]
the time I left, the losses were unknown, but were[43] supposed to
be about twenty killed and a hundred wounded.
As[44]
I am writing, Sir Garnet Wolseley and[45] the entire army are marching
to the front.—The Correspondent of the London “Standard.”
[1] there, dortig, which is an attributive adj., to be placed before the noun
‘Infantry’.
[2] to have a hot time of it, einen schweren Stand haben.
[9] = whilst the
insignificant entrenchments (Verschanzungen) swept round in a semi-circle almost
to (bis zu) the canal. ‘To sweep round,’ here sich hin´schlängeln, of which the
pron. sich must be placed immediately after the subject, and the verb?
[13] = troops;
were rapidly gaining ground = advanced rapidly (schnell vor´wärtsrücken), sep. comp.
w. v. intr. Where must you place the verb? and where the separable particle?
[14] to rush into the entrenchments, in die Schanzwerke dringen
(str. v.).
[22] was —
kills = and ten or a dozen (zehn bis zwölf) men (= privates, Gemeine) are killed,
but fortunately the Remington bullet (Kugel, f.) is but (nur) rarely fatal (ist ...
von tödlicher Wirkung).
[23] = quite full of. The wounded man, der
Verwundete.
Section 178. HOW THE DUKE OF WELLINGTON WAS DECEIVED.
“I (S. 115, N. 1) got famously taken in[1] on that occasion,” said the
Duke of Wellington once. “The troops had[2] taken to plundering a
good deal. It was necessary to[3]
stop it, and I issued an order announcing[4]
that the[5] first man taken in the act should be hanged upon the spot.
One day, just as we were sitting[6]
down to dinner, three men[7] were
brought to the door of the tent by the provost. They had been taken
in[8]
the act of plundering, and I had nothing for it[9] but to command that
they (S. 4, N. 4, man) should be taken away and hanged in some place
where they might be seen by the whole column in its march next day.
I had a good many guests with[10] me on that day, and among the rest, I
think, Lord Nugent. They[11] seemed dreadfully shocked, and could not
eat their dinner. I did not eat myself, but, as I told them, I could not
indulge my feelings[12];
I must do my duty. Well[13], the dinner went off
rather gravely; and next morning, sure enough[14], three men in uniform
were seen hanging (S. 78, N. 14, B) from the branches of a tree close to
the high road. It was a terrible example, which produced[15] the desired
effect, for there was no more plundering. Some months afterwards I
learned that one of my staff[16] had taken counsel with Dr. Hume, and as
three men had (S. 29, N. 3) just died in the hospital, they had hung
them[17] up and let the three culprits return to their regiments.”
“Well[19],
I suppose I was at first; but[20] as I had no wish to take the
poor fellows’ lives and only wanted the example, and as the example had
the desired effect (S. 27, N. 8), my anger soon died out[21], and I confess
to you that[22] I am very glad now that the three lives were spared.”—Historical
Anecdotes.
[1] to be famously taken in, gehörig angeführt werden;
once, eines Tages.
[9] He has nothing for it, es bleibt ihm
nichts anderes übrig; but, als; in, an; might = could, Impf. Subj.; column =
army; in its march, vorbeimarschierend, adj. qualifying ‘army’.
[10]bei; place
‘I think’ after ‘and’; among the rest = among others.
[11] = These
seemed to be very much shocked (ergriffen) at (von) the occurrence.
[12] to
indulge one’s feelings, seinen Gefühlen freien Lauf lassen.
[13]Gut; went —
gravely, ging ein wenig ernsthaft vonstatten.
[14]auch wirklich, which place after
the subject, and construe the sentence in the Active Voice with the pron.
man; men = soldiers.
[15] = had. There was no more talking, es wurde
nicht mehr gesprochen.
[16] = one of my staff-officers (Stabsoffiziere); to take
counsel in a matter with a friend, eine Sache mit einem Freunde besprechen.
[20] = however (aber), since I did not wish (wollen)
the death of
the poor fellows, but (sondern) only the example (Here follows the verb).
[21] ‘to
die out’, here ersterben, insep. comp. str. v.
[22] To avoid a repetition of
subordinate clauses, say: ‘that I am very glad (froh) now at (über) the preservation
(Rettung) of the 3 men (Leute).
Section 179. A LETTER FROM DR. HENRY DANSON TO [1] MR. JOHN FORSTER, ON [2] CHARLES DICKENS’S [3] SCHOOL-LIFE. I.
My impression is[4] that I was a schoolfellow of Dickens for nearly two
years. He left[5] before me, I think about fifteen years of age. The school,
called (S. 7, N. 3, B) the Wellington Academy, was in the Hampstead
Road at the north-east corner of Granby Street. The school-house was
afterwards taken down[6] on account of the London and North-Western
Railway. It was considered at the time[7] a very superior sort of school,
one of the best indeed[8] in that part of London; but it was most shamefully
mismanaged[9], and the boys[10]
made but very little progress. The
proprietor, Mr. Jones, was a Welshman[11];
a most[12] ignorant fellow, and
a mere tyrant, whose chief employment was[13] to scourge the boys. Dickens
has[14] given a very lively account of this place in his paper entitled “Our
School,” but it is very mythical in many respects, and[15] more especially
in the compliment he pays in it to himself. I do not remember
that Dickens distinguished himself in any way[16], or carried off any prizes.
My belief is[17] that he did not learn Greek or Latin there, and you will
remember[18] there is no allusion to the classics in any of his writings. He
was a handsome, curly-headed lad[19], full of animation and animal spirits,
and[20] probably was connected with every mischievous prank in the school.
[3]Charles Dickens, geboren den 7. Febr. 1812 zu
Portsmouth, gestorben den 9. Juni 1870 auf seinem Landsitze bei London, begann seine
schriftstellerische Thätigkeit unter dem angenommenen Namen Boz, welcher ihn schnell
berühmt machte. Er begründete seinen Ruf als englischer Humorist durch die ‘Sketches
of London’ (1836), und namentlich durch die ‘Pickwick Papers’ (1837), welches
unstreitig das beliebteste, aber auch vielleicht das beste seiner zahlreichen Werke ist. Er
gründete 1845 die Zeitung ‘Daily News’, sowie 1850 die Zeitschrift ‘Household
Words’, welche seit 1860 den Titel ‘All the year round’ führt. Er besuchte zweimal,
im Jahre 1842 und 1868, die Vereinigten Staaten von Nord Amerika, von wo er das
zweite Mal durch seine vielbesuchten Vorlesungen aus seinen eigenen Werken eine reiche
Ernte heimführte. Von seinen späteren Werken sind ‘Oliver Twist’, ‘Nicholas
Nickleby’, ‘David Copperfield’, ‘Dombey and Son’, ‘Martin Chuzzlewit’,
und ‘A Christmas Carol’ die bekanntesten und besten. Es mag interessant sein, hier
zu bemerken, daß seit dem Tode des berühmten und höchst beliebten Verfassers (d. h. in 16
Jahren) von seinen Werken 4,539,000 Bände verkauft worden sind.
[4] = I remember
still, that, etc. Place the advl. circumstance of time ‘for — years’
before ‘a — Dickens’.
[5] Supply ‘the school’ here; before me = earlier
than I; I think = and as I think.
[12] most = highly, höchst; ‘fellow’, here = man; ‘mere’,
here = real, wahr.
[13]darin bestand (comp. S. 87, N. 6); to scourge = to
chastise, züchtigen.
[14] Insert ‘to us’ after the auxiliary; of, über; place =
institution; ‘paper’, here Schrift, f. Place ‘in — School’ after ‘to us’.
[15]und zwar besonders in Bezug auf die Schmeicheleien, die er sich selbst darin zollt.
[16] in any way = ever, je;
to carry off prizes, Schulpreise erhalten. Use the verbs
in the Pluperfect Subjunctive, accord. to App. § 33; the auxiliary, however,
must be used but once, and this at the very end.
[18] = and you know. Is there no allusion to
the classics? bezieht er sich nie auf die klassische Litteratur?
[19] = He was a
handsome boy with curly hair. Full — spirits = voller Leben und Lebenskraft.
[20]
= who; to be connected with an action, bei einer Handlung beteiligt sein;
a mischievous prank, ein mutwilliger Possenstreich.
Section 180. A LETTER FROM DR. HENRY DANSON TO MR. JOHN FORSTER, ON CHARLES DICKENS’S SCHOOL-LIFE. II.
I do not think (S. 64, N. 11) he[1] came in for any of Mr. Jones’s
scourging propensity; in fact, together with myself, he was only a day-pupil,
and[2] with these there was a wholesome fear of tales being carried
home to the parents. His personal appearance at that time[3] is vividly
brought home to me in the portrait of him taken a few years later by
Mr. Lawrence. He resided (S. 116, N. 17) with[4] his friends, in a very
small house in a street leading out of Seymour Street, north of Mr.
Judkin’s chapel.
Depend on it, he was quite a self-made man, and his wonderful knowledge
and command (Beherrschung, f.) of the English language must[5]
have been acquired by long and patient study after leaving his last
school.
I have no recollection of the boy you name[6].
Dickens’s chief[7] associates
were, I think[8], Tobin, Mr. Thomas, Bray, and myself. The first
named[9] was his chief ally, and his acquaintance with him appears to
have continued many[10] years afterwards.
About that time[11] the Penny
and Saturday magazines (S. 71, N. 2) were published weekly, and were
greedily read by (S. 106, N. 23) us. We kept bees, white mice, and
other living things, clandestinely[12], in our desks, and the mechanical
arts were a good deal cultivated, in[13] the shape of coach-building, and
making pumps and boats, the motive power of which was the white
mice.
I think at that time Dickens took to writing[14] small tales, and we had
a sort of club for[15] lending and circulating them. Dickens was also very
strong[16]
in using a sort of lingo, which made us[17] quite unintelligible to
bystanders.
[1] = that he had to suffer from the scourging propensity (Prügelmanie, f.) of
his teacher, for, like myself, etc.
[2]und diesen gegenüber war stets zu befürchten,
daß sie bei den Eltern zu Hause aus der Schule plaudern würden.
[3]Sein
damaliges Aussehen; is vividly brought home to me = is again vividly brought
(führen) before my (S. 43, N. 9, A and B) eyes; in — Lawrence (Liter.) = ‘through
the some years later by (von) Mr. L. painted picture of him’, which place
immediately after the copula (wird) and the dative of the personal pronoun
indicating the possessor.
[4]bei; in — Street = in a side-street (comp. n.
S. 76, N. 22, B [n]), not far from Seymour Street.
[5] must — acquired =
he must have acquired. To acquire, sich erwerben, insep. comp. str. v. refl.;
by, durch; ‘long’, here langjährig; after — school = after his school-time.
[6] = I cannot remember (sich einer Sache erinnern) the boy whose name you
mention (an´führen).
[15] for — them, Liter. = among (unter) the members
of which the same (to agree with ‘tales’) circulated (zirkulieren).
[16] = great;
in — lingo, im Gebrauch einer gewissen kauderwälschen Geheimsprache.
[17] made
us = was; to bystanders = to the uninitiated, den Uneingeweihten.
Section 181. A LETTER FROM DR. HENRY DANSON TO MR. JOHN FORSTER, ON CHARLES DICKENS’S SCHOOL-LIFE. III.
We were very strong, too, in theatricals[1].
We mounted[2] small
theatres, and got up very gorgeous scenery to[3] illustrate “The Miller
and his Men,” and other pieces. I remember the[4] present Mr. Beverley,
the scene painter, assisted us in this (S. 4, N. 5). Dickens was always
the leader[5] at these plays, which were occasionally presented with much
solemnity before an audience[6] of boys, and in the presence of the
ushers. My brother, assisted by Dickens, got up[7] “The Miller and his
Men” in a very gorgeous form. Master[8] Beverley constructed the mill
for us, in such a way[9] that it could tumble to pieces with the assistance
of crackers. At one representation, the fireworks in the last scene, ending
with the destruction of the mill, were so very real[10] that the police interfered,
and knocked violently at the door. Dickens’s after-taste for
theatricals might have had[11] its origin in these small affairs.
I quite[12] remember Dickens[13]
one day heading us in Drummond
Street in pretending to be poor boys, and asking the passers-by for
charity, especially old ladies, one of whom told[14] us she had no money
for beggar-boys.
On these adventures, and especially when the old ladies were quite
staggered[15] by the impudence of the demand, Dickens would explode
with laughter and then take to his heels.
I met him one Sunday morning shortly after he had left the school,
and[16] we very piously attended the morning service at Seymour Street
chapel. I am sorry to say[17]
Master[18] Dickens did not attend in the slightest
degree to the service, but (S. 6, N. 10) incited me to laughter by declaring
(S. 111, N. 6) his dinner was ready, and the potatoes would be spoiled[19].
In fact, he behaved in such a manner[20] that it was lucky for us we were not
ejected from the chapel.—From J. Forster’s “Life of Charles Dickens.”
[7] to get up, in Scene setzen, of which the part ‘in
Scene’ is to be treated like the separable particle of a comp. sep. verb. Place
the verb immediately after ‘brother’, and supply ‘the piece’ before ‘The —
Men’; In — form = very (ganz) gorgeously.
[13] = that Dickens led (an´leiten) us one day in
Drummond Street to pretend to be (sich gebärden ... als) poor boys and to ask
the passers-by for (um) alms (milde Gaben).
[15] ‘to be quite staggered’, here ganz verblüfft da´stehen;
by — demand = through
the impudent demand; to explode with laughter, vor Lachen fast bersten; to take
to one’s heels, schnell davon laufen; and — heels = and ran then quickly away.
[16] = and we went very (ganz)
piously to church in Seymour St., to attend the
morning service (um dem Morgengottesdienste beizuwohnen).
[20] = He behaved really so. That — us = that
we must (Impf.) esteem (schätzen) ourselves lucky, not to be ejected from
church.—He was ejected from church, er wurde aus der Kirche geworfen.
Section 182. SIR JOSEPH PAXTON [1] .
Sir Joseph Paxton was acting as gardener to[2] the Duke of Devonshire
when the Committee of the Exhibition of 1851 advertised for plans of a
building. The architects and engineers seem to have been very much at
fault[3] when Paxton submitted his design, and its novelty and remarkable
suitability for the purposes intended, at once secured its adoption[4]. The
first sketch was made upon a piece of blotting-paper in the rooms of the
Midland Railway Company[5]
at Derby; and the first rough[6]
sketch indicated[7]
the principal features of the building as accurately as the most
finished drawings which were afterwards prepared. The great[8] idea of
the Crystal Palace was as palpable[9] on the blotting-paper as if it had
been set forth in all the glory of water-colour and gold-framing[10].
Was it a sudden idea,—an inspiration of genius[11],—flashing upon the
mind of one[12]
who, though no architect, must at least[13] have been something
like a poet?—Not at all[14]. The architect of the Crystal Palace was
simply a man who cultivated opportunities[15],—a
laborious, painstaking[16]
man, whose life had been a life of labour, of diligent self-improvement, of
assiduous cultivation of knowledge[17].
As[18] Sir Joseph Paxton himself
has shown, in a lecture before the Society of Arts, the idea was slowly and
patiently elaborated by experiments extending over many years[19]. The
Exhibition of 1851 merely afforded him the opportunity of putting
forward his idea[20]—the right thing at the right time—and the result was
what we have seen.—S. Smiles, “Self-help.”
[1]Joseph Paxton,
geb. den 3. Aug. 1803, gest. den 8. Juni 1865, wurde zunächst
Kunstgärtner beim Herzog von Devonshire, zeichnete sich jedoch bald durch seine genialen
Schöpfungen so sehr aus, daß der Herzog ihn zum Gartendirektor und Verwalter seiner
großartigen Besitzung in Chatsworth ernannte. Die wundervollen Gartenanlagen und
Gewächshäuser daselbst legen noch heute Zeugnis ab von seiner Genialität. Das große
Gewächshaus, welches aus Eisen und Glas erbaut und 300 Fuß lang und 140 Fuß breit ist,
diente ihm später als Grundlage des von ihm eingereichten Entwurfes für das Ausstellungsgebäude
von 1851 im Hyde Park zu London und des später von ihm in Sydenham errichteten
Krystalpalastes. Seine Verdienste um die große Weltindustrieausstellung von 1851 wurden
von der Königin dadurch anerkannt, daß sie ihm die Ritterwürde verlieh. Sir Joseph
Paxton wurde im Jahre 1854 zum Parlamentsmitgliede für Coventry gewählt und hat
sich um die Baukunst und das Eisenbahnwesen manche Verdienste erworben. Er ist auch
der Verfasser vieler Zeitschriften und Werke über die Gartenkunst.
[2] to act as
gardener to a person, bei einem als Kunstgärtner angestellt sein; advertised —
building, öffentlich zur Einsendung von Plänen für ein Ausstellungsgebäude aufforderte.
I propose to commence the period with the subordinate clause ‘when —
building’.
[3] to be very much at fault, in großer Verlegenheit sein; to submit
a design (of a building), einen Entwurf ein´reichen.
[4] and — adoption = and
as the same (agreeing with Entwurf) was quite new and remarkably suitable
to its purpose (zweckentsprechend), it was at once accepted.
[5] in — company
= in the waiting-rooms of the railway station.
[17] of — knowledge, und unverdrossenen Strebens nach Kenntnissen.
[18] = Like, wie;
has shown = declared; in — Arts, in einem vor dem
Kunstvereine gehaltenen Vortrage, which place immediately after the subject.
[19] ‘by — years’ may be briefly rendered by durch langjährige Versuche or
Experimente, which place after ‘idea’; slowly = gradually; patiently, beharrlich;
to elaborate, aus´arbeiten.
[20] of — idea = to bring his idea before (vor)
the public (Öffentlichkeit, f.); the right thing, das Rechte; at, zu, contracted with
the def. art.
Section 183. REBECCA DESCRIBES THE SIEGE OF TORQUILSTONE ( App. § 5 ) TO THE WOUNDED IVANHOE [1] . I.
“And I must lie here like a bed-ridden[2] monk,” exclaimed Ivanhoe,
“while the game[3] that gives me[4]
freedom or death is played out by the
hands of others! Look from the window[5] once again, kind maiden, but
beware that you are not marked by the archers[6]. Look out once more,
and tell me if[7] they yet advance[8]
to the storm.”
With patient[9] courage, strengthened by the interval which she had
employed in mental devotion[10],
Rebecca again took post[11] at the lattice,
sheltering herself[12], however, by means of a large and
ancient shield so as
not to be visible from beneath[13].
“What dost thou see, Rebecca?” again demanded the wounded
knight.
“Nothing but the[14] cloud of arrows flying so thick as to dazzle mine
eyes[15], and to hide the bowmen who shoot them.”
“That cannot endure[16],”
said Ivanhoe; “if they press not right on[17]
to carry the castle by pure force of arms (S. 27, N. 8), the archery may[18]
avail but little against stone walls and bulwarks. Look for[19] the Black
Knight, fair Rebecca, and see how he bears himself[20]; for as the leader
is, so will his followers be[21].”
“I see him not,” said Rebecca.
“Foul craven[22]!”
exclaimed Ivanhoe; “does he blench[23] from the
helm when the wind blows highest[24]?”
[1]Ivanhoe, a novel by Sir Walter Scott, is the most brilliant and splendid
of romances in the English language. Rebecca, the Jewess, was Scott’s
favourite character. The Scene is laid in England in the reign of Richard I.,
who assumes the name of the ‘Black Knight’ in this story, and we are introduced
to Robin Hood in Sherwood Forest, banquets in Saxon halls, tournaments, and all
the pomp of ancient chivalry. Sir Wilfred Ivanhoe is the favourite of Richard I.
and disinherited son of the Saxon Cedric of Rotherwood. Having distinguished
himself as a crusader, he returns to England and, disguised as a palmer, goes to
Rotherwood, where he meets Rowéna, his father’s ward, with whom he is in love;
but, through his separation from his true love, we see him more as the friend of
Rebecca and her father, Isaac of York, to both of whom he shows repeated acts
of kindness, and completely wins the affections of the beautiful Jewess, who, by
her gentle, meek, yet noble and high-toned disposition, quite throws into the
shade her more successful rival Rowéna. In the grand tournament at Ashby
Ivanhoe appears as the ‘Disinherited Knight’, and overthrows all comers.
He is, however, wounded, and carried from the crowded lists by Rebecca’s
servants. After having attended to his wounds, Rebecca and her father are
about to transport their friend in a litter to Doncaster, when they are surprised
by a number of armed men, headed by the Templar Brian de Bois-Guilbert,
who take them prisoners and bring them, along with Cedric and Rowéna, who
likewise have been made captives, to Torquilstone, the Castle of Front-de-Bœuf,
Ivanhoe’s enemy. During their imprisonment the castle is besieged by
the Black Knight, who, in his adventurous spirit, having joined a band of
yeomen and outlaws, demands the deliverance of the prisoners. The castle
falls into the hands of the besiegers, Front-de-Bœuf perishing in the flames of
the burning castle; Ring Richard pleads for Ivanhoe to Cedric, reconciles the
father to his son, and the young knight marries Rowéna.
[23] = to give way, zurückweichen,
sep. comp. str. v.; helm = rudder, Steuerruder, n.
[24] highest =
strongest. The relative superlative of adverbs is formed by placing am
before the superlative of the adjective, and giving it the dative termination
en, like the predicative form of adjectives. Comp. S. 120, N. 14.
Section 184. REBECCA DESCRIBES THE SIEGE OF TORQUILSTONE TO THE WOUNDED IVANHOE. II.
“He blenches not! he blenches not!” said Rebecca, “I see him now;
he leads a body of men[1]
close under the outer barrier[2] of the barbican.
They pull down the piles and palisades; they hew down the barriers
with axes.—His high black plume floats abroad over the throng[3], like a
raven over the field of the slain[4].—They have made a breach in the
barriers—they rush in—they are thrust back! Front-de-Bœuf heads the
defenders; I see his gigantic form above the press[5].
They throng[6]
again to (S. 72, N. 4) the breach, and the pass is disputed hand to hand
and man to man[7]. God of Jacob! it is the meeting of two fierce tides—the
conflict of two oceans moved by adverse winds[8]!”
She turned her head from the lattice, as if (S. 27, N. 7) unable longer
to endure a sight so terrible (S. 128, N. 11).
“Look forth again, Rebecca,” said Ivanhoe, mistaking[9] the cause of
her retiring; “the archery must in some degree[10] have ceased, since they
are now fighting hand to hand.—Look again, there is[11] now less danger.”
Rebecca again looked forth, and almost immediately exclaimed:
“Help, O prophets of the law! Front-de-Bœuf and the Black Knight
fight hand to hand on[12]
the breach, amid[13]
the roar of their followers[14],
who watch[15]
the progress of the strife.—Heaven strike[16] (App. § 34)
with the cause (Sache, f.) of the oppressed and the captive!”
She then[17]
uttered a loud shriek, and exclaimed: “He is down[18]!—He
is down!”
[2] ‘barrier’ may here be rendered by Befestigungen,
Schanzpfähle, or Verschanzungen. Every Gothic castle and city had,
beyond the outer walls, a fortification composed of palisades, called the
barriers, which were often the scene of severe skirmishes, as these had necessarily
to be carried before the walls themselves could be approached. The
‘barbacan’ or ‘barbican’ was the outer wall of an ancient castle or town,
and may be rendered by ‘Zwingmauer, f.’
[3]flattert hoch über der Menge in der
Luft umher.
[6] to throng =
to press forward, sich vorwärts drängen, sep. comp. w. v. refl.
[7] and — man =
they fight for (um) the pass (Durchgang, m.) and struggle (kämpfen) man against
man.
[8] it — winds = it is like the meeting (Aneinanderstoßen) of two fierce
tides (Sturmflut, f.), like the conflict (Zusammenfließen, n.) of two oceans
(Weltmeer, n.) which are moved (fort´treiben, sep. comp. str. v.) by adverse
(entgegengesetzt) winds.
[9]unrichtig deuten. Construe accord. to S. 16, N. 4;
of her retiring = of this movement.
Section 185. REBECCA DESCRIBES THE SIEGE OF TORQUILSTONE TO THE WOUNDED IVANHOE. III.
“Who is down?” cried Ivanhoe; “for[1] our dear Lady’s sake, tell me
who has fallen?”
“The Black Knight,” answered Rebecca faintly[2]; then instantly again
shouted with joyful eagerness[3]: “But[4]
no—but no!—the name of the
Lord of hosts be blessed[5]!—he is on foot[6]
again, and fights as if there
were twenty men’s strength in his single arm[7].—His sword is broken—he
snatches[8] an axe from a yeoman—he presses[9]
Front-de-Bœuf with
blow on blow.—The giant stoops and totters like an oak under the steel
of the woodman[10]—he falls—he falls!”
“Front-de-Bœuf?” exclaimed Ivanhoe.
“Front-de-Bœuf!” answered the Jewess; “his men[11] rush to the
rescue[12], headed (S. 102, N. 3) by (von)
the haughty Templar[13]—their
united force compels the champion[14] to pause.—They drag Front-de-Bœuf
within the walls[15].”
“The assailants have won[16] the barriers, have they not?” said
Ivanhoe.
“They have—they have[17]!”
exclaimed Rebecca—“and they press[18]
the besieged hard upon the outer wall; some plant ladders[19], some swarm
like bees (S. 3, N. 2) and endeavour to ascend upon the shoulders of
each other[20]—down go[21]
stones, beams, and trunks of trees upon their
heads, and as fast as they bear the wounded to the rear[22],
fresh men[23]
supply their places in the assault.—Great God, hast thou given men thine
own image[24],
that (S. 183, N. 6) it should be thus cruelly defaced[25]
by[26]
the hands of their brethren?”
[1] = for the sake of (um ... willen) the holy Virgin.
[7] as — arm = as if (als ob) his arm possessed (Impf. Subj.
App. § 33) the strength of 20 men.
[8] to snatch a thing from a person,
einem etwas entrei´ßen, insep. comp. str. v. tr.; a yeoman, ein Freisasse, m. Comp.
App. § 5; ‘axe’, here = battle-axe, Streitaxt, f.
[9] ‘to press’, here weiter
zurück´drängen, sep. comp. w. v. tr.; with blow on blow, mit jedem Schlage.
[22] and — rear = and as soon as (so wie) the wounded are carried
away (hinweg´tragen). Comp. S. 2, N. 1.
[23] = other combatants (Streiter).
He supplied my place in the assault of the castle, er nahm meine Stelle bei der
Erstürmung des Schlosses wieder ein.
[24] Say ‘hast thou created men (S. 134, N. 9)
after thy own image (Bild, n.)’.
[25]entstellen, insep. comp. w. v.;
Use the Pres. Subj. of the Passive voice, and comp. App. §§ 29 and 35.
Section 186. REBECCA DESCRIBES THE SIEGE OF TORQUILSTONE TO THE WOUNDED IVANHOE. IV.
“Think not of that (S. 4, N. 5, B),” said Ivanhoe; “this is[1] no time
for such thoughts. Who yield? Who push their way[2]?”
“The ladders are thrown down,” replied Rebecca shuddering; “the
soldiers lie grovelling[3] under them like crushed reptiles. The besieged
have the better[4].”
“Saint George, strike[5] for us!” exclaimed the Knight; “do the false
yeomen give way[6]?”
“No!” exclaimed Rebecca, “they bear[7] themselves right yeomanly—the
Black Knight approaches the postern with his huge axe—the thundering
blows which he deals[8] you may[9]
hear them above all the din[10] and
shouts of the battle.—Stones and beams are hailed down[11] on the bold
champion—he regards them no more than if they were[12]
thistle-down[13] or
feathers!”
“By Saint George,” said Ivanhoe, raising (S. 111, N. 6) himself joyfully
on his couch, “methought[14] there was (S. 82, N. 7, and App. § 33) but
one man in England that[15] might do such a deed!”
“The postern gate shakes[16],” continued Rebecca; “it crashes—it is
splintered by[17]
his blows—they rush in—the outwork is won[18].—O God,
they hurl the defenders from the battlements—they throw them into the
moat.—O men, if ye[19] be indeed men, spare them that can resist no
longer!”
“The bridge—the bridge which communicates with the castle—have
they won[20] that pass?” exclaimed Ivanhoe.
“No,” replied Rebecca, “the Templar has destroyed the plank on
which they crossed[21]—few[22]
of the defenders escaped with him into the
castle—the shrieks and cries[23] which you hear tell the fate of the
others.—Alas! I see it is still more difficult to look upon[24] victory
(S. 3, N. 2) than upon battle.”—Sir Walter Scott, “Ivanhoe.”
[18] = taken,
ein´nehmen, sep. comp. irreg. v. tr.
[19]ihr; to spare a man, eines
Menschen schonen;
render ‘them’ by the Gen. of the demonstr. pron.; that — longer = who can
defend themselves no longer.
[21] to cross on a plank, über eine Planke schreiten.
[22] = only few; escaped =
have escaped (entkom´men, insep. comp. irreg. v., S. 29, N. 3).
[23]das laute
Schreien und Klagen; you = thou; tell, verrät.
[24] ‘to look upon a
thing’, here etwas mit an´sehen, v. tr.
Section 187. THE FAVOURITE HARES [1] . I.
In the year 1774, being (S. 55, N. 1) much indisposed both in mind
and body[2],
incapable of diverting myself either[3] with company or books,
and yet in a condition[4]
that made some diversion necessary[5], I was glad
of anything that would engage my attention[6], without fatiguing it.
The children of a neighbour of mine had a leveret given them for a
play-thing[7]; it was at that time about three months old. Understanding
better how to tease the poor creature than to feed it, and soon becoming
weary of their charge[8],
they readily consented[9] that their father, who
saw it pining[10]
and growing leaner every day, should offer[11] it to my
acceptance. I was willing enough to take the prisoner under my protection,
perceiving that (S. 66, N. 15), in the management[12] of such an
animal, and in the attempt to tame it, I should find just that sort of
employment which my case required[13]. It was soon known among the
neighbours that I was pleased[14] with the present, and the consequence
of it was, that[15] in a short time I had as many leverets offered to
me as would have stocked a paddock[16].
I undertook the care[17] of
three, which it is necessary that I should here distinguish by the names I
gave them[18]: Puss, Tiny, and Bess. Notwithstanding the two feminine
appellatives, I must inform[19] you they were all males.
[1]Die in dieser und den drei darauf folgenden Abschnitten gegebene interessante Erzählung
ist den Schriften des wohlbekannten englischen Dichters und Schriftstellers William
Cowper entnommen, welcher am 26. November 1731 im Pfarrhause von Great Berkhampstead
in Hertfordshire geboren wurde und am 25. April 1780 starb. Seine beste Schöpfung
ist unstreitig die von ihm mit dem Titel: ‘The Task’ benannte Dichtung, durch welche
er seinen Ruf als Dichter begründete, und welche von keinem seiner späteren Werke übertroffen
wurde.
[2] to be much indisposed both in mind and body, sowohl
geistig als auch körperlich zerrüttet sein.
[3] incapable — either = and could
neither divert myself (sich zerstreuen); with, durch, which repeat before books;
or = nor.
[13] I hope he will
find just that sort of employment which his case requires, ich hoffe, er wird gerade
die für seinen Zustand passende Beschäftigung finden.
[14] My father will be
greatly pleased with the picture, das Bild wird meinem Vater große Freude machen.
[15] Read App. § 21. In order to avoid a repetition of the conjunction daß,
it is advisable to construe the clause ‘that — me’ = there were (es wurden,
S. 104, N. 19) offered to me in a short time so many leverets. ‘To offer’, here zum
Geschenk anbieten.
[16] as — paddock, daß ich einen Wildpark damit hätte
ausrüsten können.
[18] which — them = the names of which
I must mention (an´führen) here, in order to distinguish them from one another;
I called them.
[19]bemerken; you = to the reader; they = the little animals
(for which use the diminutive).
Section 188. THE FAVOURITE HARES. II.
Immediately commencing carpenter, I built[1] them houses to sleep in.
Each leveret had a separate apartment, so contrived[2] that it could be
kept perfectly sweet and clean[3].
In the daytime[4] the animals had the
range[5] of the hall, and at night[6]
retired each to his own bed, never
intruding into that of another[7].
Puss grew presently familiar, would leap[8]
into my lap, raise himself[9]
upon his hinder feet, and bite the hair from my temples. He would
suffer[10] me to take him up, and to carry him about in my arms, and has
more than once fallen fast asleep upon my knees. He was ill three days,
during which time I nursed him, kept him apart from his fellows, that[11]
they might not molest him (for, like many other wild animals, they persecute[12]
one of their own species that is sick), and by constant care[13],
and with a variety of herbs, restored him to perfect health[14]. No creature
could be more grateful than (S. 104, N. 19) my patient after his
recovery, a sentiment which he most significantly expressed by licking[15]
my hand, first the back of it[16], then the palm, then every finger
separately[17], then[18]
between all the fingers, as if (S. 27, N. 7) anxious to
leave no part of it unsaluted; a ceremony[19] which he never performed
but once again[20] upon a similar occasion.
Finding him extremely tractable, I made it my[1] custom to carry him
always after breakfast into the garden, where he hid himself generally
under the leaves of a vine, sleeping[2] or chewing the cud till evening; in
the leaves also of that vine he found a favourite repast[3]. I had not long
habituated him to this taste of liberty, before[4] he began to be impatient
for the return of the time[5]
when he might enjoy it[6]. He would invite me
to the garden[7] by drumming (S. 111, N. 6) upon my knee, and by
(S. 185, N. 26) a look of such expression[8] as it was not possible to misinterpret.
If the[9] rhetoric did not immediately succeed, he would take the skirt of
my coat (S. 36, N. 7, A) between his teeth, and pull it with all his force[10].
Thus Puss might be said to be perfectly tamed[11]; the shyness of his nature
was done away[12], and, on the whole[13],
it was visible by many symptoms,
which I have not room to enumerate[14], that he was happier in human
society than when (S. 27, N. 7) shut up with[15] his natural companions.
Not so Tiny; upon him the kindest[16] treatment had not the least
effect. He too was sick, and in his sickness had an equal share of my
attention[17]; but when, after his recovery, I took the liberty to stroke him,
he would grunt, strike with his fore feet, spring forward, and bite[18]. He
was, however[19], entertaining in his way; even his surliness was matter of
mirth[20],
and in his play he preserved such an air of gravity[21], and performed
his feats with such solemnity of manner[22], that in (an) him too I
had an agreeable companion.
Bess, who died soon after he was full grown[1], and whose death was
occasioned by his being turned (S. 161, N. 21, and S. 87, N. 6) into his
box, which had been washed, while it was yet damp[2], was a hare of great
humour and drollery[3]. Puss was tamed by gentle usage; Tiny was not
to be tamed at all; and Bess had a[4] courage and confidence that made
him tame from the beginning[5]. I always admitted them into the parlour
after supper, when (S. 131, N. 4), the[6] carpet affording their feet a firm
hold, they would frisk, and bound, and play a thousand gambols, in[7]
which Bess, being remarkably strong and fearless, was always superior to
the rest. One evening, the cat being in the room, it had the hardiness
to pat Bess upon the cheek, an indignity which[8] he resented by drumming
upon her (S. 43, N. 9, B) back with such violence that the cat was
happy to escape from under his paws, and[9] hide herself.
I describe the animals as having had each a character of his own[10].
Such they were in fact[11], and their countenances were so expressive of
that character, that, when I looked only on the face of either, I immediately
knew which it was[12].—William Cowper, “The Gentleman’s
Magazine, 1784.”
[10] as — own = as if each of the same had
had (Pluperf. Subj.) his own character.
[11] = That was however (aber auch)
really the case.
[12] that — was = that from (aus) the face of each I could
at once distinguish (erkennen) who it (= he) was.
Section 191. PRINCE BISMARCK’S HOME [1] .
After crossing the threshold I found myself in a small, plain apartment—the
reception-room—in the centre of which stands a simple little
polished table with four legs. This is a relic of historical significance. A
brass plate let into the square top[2] bears the following inscription: “At
this table the preliminaries of peace between Germany and France were
signed, February 26th, 1871, at Versailles, No. 14 Rue de Provence.” In
the centre of the table is[3] a round piece of green cloth, and on it are
visible a number of spots[4]
caused by (S. 185, N. 26) the drippings[5] from
the candles used on the momentous occasion of the negotiations between
the Chancellor and Jules Favre[6]. The table was the property of the
lady in whose house the Chancellor was quartered[7], and of whom he
bought it. In the same room stands a gigantic wardrobe richly sculptured[8],
and a second wardrobe (S. 5, N. 2), according to Castellan
(S. 10, N. 2) Hackmack’s explanation, was made from[9] the wood of a linden tree,
in the shade of which Prince Bismarck, when a[10] merry student at Göttingen,
had frequently reposed. The adjoining room is the Prince’s
study. A bookcase contains a small library[11] for immediate use and for
reference, among its books being a French account of[12] the peace negotiations
of 1871. The writing-desk occupies the centre of the room. A
polished fire-screen, highly[13] ornamented and of Asiatic origin, is a
present from the Chinese Embassy in Berlin. On the mantel-piece
stands a bronze statuette, about three feet high, representing the Grand
Elector—a present from the Emperor. A slip of paper attached to the
Marshal’s baton in the Elector’s outstretched hand, bears the Imperial
autograph[14]: “To[15]
Prince Bismarck—Christmas, 1880,—W.” On the
wall, behind the statuette, hangs, in a richly gilt frame, a painting by[16]
Hünten, representing the attack of dragoons of the guard on French
infantry at Mars-la-Tour; the Chancellor’s two sons, Herbert and
William, being[17] in the midst of the fight.—The Correspondent of the
London “Daily News.”
[4] and — spots =
and upon the same one sees still some spots.
[5]das Lecken; render
‘from the’ by the Gen. of the def. art., and turn ‘used — negotiations’ by
‘during the momentous negotiations’.
[6]Jules Favre, geboren den 21.
März 1809 zu Lyon, machte sich zuerst als Redner und gewandter Advokat einen Namen,
beschäftigte sich jedoch später auch mit der Politik, wo er stets zur demokratischen Partei
gehörte. Nach der Februarrevolution von 1848 wurde er Generalsekretär im Ministerium
des Innern, dann Mitglied der Nationalversammlung, in der er als Gegner des zum
Präsidenten gewählten Prinzen Ludwig Napoleon auftrat. Im Jahre 1858 in den
gesetzgebenden Körper gewählt, wurde er nach dem Sturze des Kaiserreichs und der
Erklärung der Republik Mitglied der Regierung der Nationalverteidigung und Minister
des Äußern, als welcher er im Jahre 1871 zu Versailles und Frankfurt a/M mit dem
Fürsten Bismarck über den Frieden unterhandelte. Am 2. August 1871 zog er sich jedoch
vom politischen Leben zurück und starb am 19. Januar 1880.
Frederick the Great, King of Prussia[1],
once rang the bell[2] of his
cabinet; but as nobody answered[3], he opened the door of the ante-chamber,
and there found his page fast asleep[4]
upon a chair[5]. He went
up to awake him, but, coming nearer, he observed a paper in his pocket,
upon which something was written[6]. This excited his curiosity. He
pulled it out, and found that it was a letter from the page’s mother, the
contents of which were nearly as follows[7]: “She returned her son many
thanks[8] for the money he had saved out of his salary and sent to
her, which had proved a very timely assistance[9]. God would certainly
reward him for it, and if he continued to serve God and his king faithfully
and conscientiously, he could not fail of success[10] and prosperity in
this world[11].” Upon reading (S. 55, N. 1) this, the king stepped softly into
his closet, fetched a rouleau[12]of
ducats, and put it with the letter into the
page’s pocket (S. 43, N. 9, B). He then rang again till the page awoke
and came into his closet. “You have[13] been asleep, I suppose?” said the
king. The page could not deny it, stammered out an excuse[14], put, in
his embarrassment, his hand into his pocket, and felt the rouleau of
ducats. He immediately pulled it out, turned[15] pale, and looked at the
king with tears in his eyes. “What is the matter with you?” said the
king. “Oh!” replied the page, “somebody has contrived[16] my ruin: I
know nothing of this money.” “What God bestows[17],” resumed the
king, “He bestows in sleep. Send the money to your mother (App. § 5),
give my respects to her[18],
and inform her that I will take care[19] of both
her and you.”—W. Buck.
[1]Friedrich der Große, König von Preußen, wurde am 24. Januar 1712 in
Berlin geboren und war der Sohn des Königs Friedrich Wilhelm I, der den den Künsten
und Wissenschaften ergegeben Jüngling oft tyrannisch und hart behandelte und ihn selbst gegen
seine Neigung im Jahre 1733 mit der Prinzessin Elisabeth Christine von Braunschweig-Bevern
vermählte. Nach dem Tode seines Vaters bestieg er am 31. Mai 1740 den
preußischen Thron, auf dem er bald Gelegenheit fand, seine bedeutenden Talente als Staatsmann
und Feldherr zu bethätigen. Die Geschichte nennt ihn wohl mit Recht den größten
Fürsten, Feldherrn und Staatsmann seiner Zeit, und als er am 17. August 1786 auf seinem
Lustschlosse zu Sanssouci starb, hinterließ er seinem Nachfolger ein um 1325 Quadratmeilen
vergrößertes Reich, einen Schatz von über 70 Millionen Thalern, eine Armee von
200,000 Mann und einen kräftig emporblühenden Staat.
[19] to take care of a person, für einen sorgen; of —
you = of both of you. He saw both of us, Er sah uns beide.
Section 193. TELEGRAPHY ( S. 3, N. 2 ) AMONG BIRDS.
I watch[1] a flock[2]of
crows who, by some own correspondent of theirs,
have learned that Farmer Blyth will hold a ploughing match on his
grounds[3],
and have in consequence summoned their brethren[4] to a diet of
worms. How unconcerned they look, as if worms were nothing to
them[5]!
How grave, as if it were an Ecclesiastical Convocation[6], and
they had no thought of earthly things[7]!
Yet point[8] a gun, or anything
like it towards them, and in a moment (App. § 14) the young birds even
whose backs seemed turned to you[9]
will give a flutter[10] of their wings,
which appears an involuntary struggle[11], but in reality is as significant a
danger-signal as a red flag on a railway[12], and is sufficient to clear the
field. Nor [= And yet ... not] are those crows exceptionally wise. All
their feathered brethren[13]
have made a sacred compact[14] that never with
their consent shall salt be put upon their tails. The sparrows are not
so idle that[15] they do not pass the word to each other when crumbs are
falling thick[16] from some rich man’s table. The doves, though they look
so innocent (S. 27, N. 8) do not spend[17] all their time in cooing love-songs
and cradle-lullabies[18], or in pruning their rainbow-feathers. They
have a Telegraphy of their own[19], and[20]
by a mere peck, or a [das] ruffle
of their feathers, can direct each other to the fields where the autumn
wheat[21] is germinating best, or[22]
the garden where the green peas are
fullest and brightest[23].—Professor C. Wilson.
About the end of the twelfth century commerce began to extend towards
the north of Europe. Along the German shores of the Baltic
(S. 36, N. 7, A) sprang up[2] thriving towns, which sent out ships to
(S. 72, N. 4) Russia, Norway, England, and other parts, and exchanged the raw
materials which they thus acquired (S. 48, N. 6) for the merchandise of
Southern Europe and the Levant, which reached them both by land and
sea[3]. Before[4]the
middle of the thirteenth century, this trade had become
so valuable as to excite[5] the rapacity, not only of numerous pirates who
infested[6] the seas, but[7]
of princes (S. 3, N. 2) and nobles, who exacted
arbitrary and excessive tolls.
To defend their interests against these assailants, the chief[8] ports
entered into a league, binding themselves[9] to [zu] afford mutual aid and
protection. Lübeck and Hamburg stood at the head of this association;
Bremen ranked next[10]; and one after another the principal towns gave in
their adhesion, the movement spreading from east to west[11]. The numbers
of the league[12] fluctuated, but at one time it is known (S. 4, N. 4, man)
to have comprised more than ninety different towns. In the fourteenth
century its authority[13]
extended greatly, for[14] it rallied around it the chief
commercial towns of the interior, such as Cologne, Dortmund, Münster,
Brunswick, Magdeburg, etc. The Hanse had for its object the protection
and development of commerce, the maintenance of existing and the
acquisition of new privileges[15]. The association was governed by a
Diet[16], to which each town sent representatives, and which met once in
three years[17] in Lübeck. As the confederation expanded, it became
necessary to divide it into several provinces[18], of which the capitals were
Lübeck, Cologne, Brunswick, and Dantzic.
[15] The —
privileges = The protection and the development of commerce, the maintenance
of existing and the acquisition of new privileges were the object (Zweck,
m.) of the Hanse.
[16] = The business (Angelegenheiten, pl.) of the league
was conducted by (durch) a Diet (here den Hansetag).
In Russia the Hanse found a valuable and most virgin field[1] for its
commercial enterprises. Thence it drew[2] large supplies of timber, flax,
hemp, ropes, skins, furs, wax, and tallow; bestowing in return[3] (for the
trade was only one of barter), salt, herrings, and coarse cloth, for the
mass of the peasants; and[4] brocades, jewels, wines, and other articles of
luxury, for the wealthy boyards and princes. A factory at Novgorod
conducted these transactions. Another factory at Bergen placed the
Hanse in direct contact[5] with Norway and Sweden. This was an establishment
of considerable magnitude, comprising twenty-two courts, and
serving not only as a lodging for the staff of agents and clerks[6], but as
a warehouse[7]for the goods.
The chief exports from this quarter were[8]
timber, resin, sperm oil, and, above all[9], salted fish—a (S. 53, N. 9)
commodity[10] in great demand at a time when Europe was still Catholic
and fasted faithfully on the appointed days. The Hanse had[11] two
other large factories, one in Bruges, employing three hundred agents,
and another in London.
Year by year[12] the Hanse grew more rich and powerful. New
branches of business were opened up, new factories were founded.
Kings and princes were glad[13] to be on good terms with so influential a
body. Ambassadors from the Kings of England, France, Sweden, and
Denmark, and even from the Emperor himself, waited on[14] the Diet, to
ask[15] favours, and to offer trading privileges in return. The original
object of the league—mutual protection—was reasonable and legitimate,
but was gradually expanded into[16] a policy of forcible aggression and
imperious monopoly. Not only were foreigners, in[17] their voyages to
(S. 72, N. 4) the Hanse towns, compelled to employ Hanseatic ships,
but[18] the commerce of the north-east and west of Europe was almost
exclusively in the hands of the league.
[1] and most virgin field = and hitherto quite unused field.
[3] bestowing in return = Liter. which it (sie, to agree
with die Hansa) for (gegen) ... exchanged. The verb stands, of course, after
‘princes’, and the clause ‘for — barter’ is best placed after it.
[18] but ... was, sondern es
befand sich auch; of = in.
Section 196. THE HANSE. III.
There were no bounds to its greed and selfishness[1]. It did its utmost
to crush all growing trade[2], navigation, and even manufactures, which
in the least interfered with its gains[3].
It warned away[4] all strangers[5]
from the Baltic; and when it found them there, it seized and destroyed
their vessels[6].
In order to maintain this monopoly, it[7] was ready to
make[8] the greatest sacrifices, to equip fleets, and sustain long and costly
campaigns. With Denmark it waged a desperate war; and it also came
into collision[9]
with Sweden and Norway. From[10] these contests it came
off victorious, and the whole of Scandinavia was compelled to acknowledge
its commercial supremacy[11]. It[12]
had a rupture also with the
Netherlands, whose flag it banished from the Baltic[13].
These unbounded pretensions naturally excited a great deal of ill
feeling[14]
against the Hanse, and, in the end, proved fatal[15] to it. One
after another[16], the markets which it had been accustomed to regard as
its own private estates, threw off their allegiance, and admitted[17] the
traders of other nations. Then[18]it was that the league began to suffer
in another way from its narrow-minded selfishness. As long as it had
exclusive command of[19] foreign sources of supply, it did not trouble
itself to develop the resources of Germany—indeed it rather endeavoured[20]
to repress them, when it thought that others were likely to profit by them;
but when one by one its monopolies exploded[21], it found reason to repent
that it had neglected to cultivate[22] the productive powers of its own
country.
These causes, combined[23]
with the change[24] of route to India, led to
the gradual decline of this famous confederation[25]; and at the last
general assembly, held at Lübeck in 1630, the deputies from the several
cities appeared merely to declare their secession[26].
In a modified form[27],
however, the Hanse lingered on[28]
till the beginning of the present century—the[29]
shadow of a great name. The Free Cities of Lübeck,
Hamburg, Bremen, and Frankfort-on-the-Maine, are now only nominally
the representatives of the Hanse.—J. H. Fyfe.
[16] Place ‘one — another’
after ‘threw’, and commence the sentence with ‘The markets’; it = the same;
as — estates, als ihre eigenen Gebiete; threw off their allegiance, warfen ... das
ihnen aufgedrungene Joch von sich.
[17] ‘to admit a person’, here einem den
Zutritt gestatten.
[21] but — exploded =
but when its monopolies (Handelsprivilegien) were one after another taken away
(entreißen) from it (ihm, to be placed after ‘monopolies’).
[22] to cultivate
= the cultivation (Pflege, f.); ‘the — country’ may be briefly rendered by
der inländischen Produktionskraft.
One of the most distinguished artists in Paris[2] painted for a lady
occupying a brilliant position in society her portrait[3],
with[4] the intention
of placing it in an exhibition afterwards. The lady, although a long
time celebrated for her beauty[5],
had arrived at that age[6] which is seldom
admitted (fifty years), but[7] endeavoured to conceal it through cosmetics,
and showed herself as beautiful and captivating as in her younger days
[= years]. Paris is full of resources, and ointments are to be obtained
there[8] to heal the wounds of time.
Our heroine had her portrait taken[9] in the most graceful attitude;
splendidly dressed, and leaning on an arm-chair, she looked smiling into
the glass, which should return[10] her the most amiable compliments.
The painter made[11]
a most striking likeness, but this was a great mistake—a
flattering one was expected[12], and the lady
subsequently[13] declared
that she did not recognise herself (App. § 28) in this painting, and
the portrait was left on the painter’s hands[14]. The artist, feeling himself
hurt in his pride, was too good a philosopher to keep a portrait worth
three thousand francs quietly on his hands[15], and an idea of vengeance
presented itself to his mind[16], which he put into execution at once.
A short time before the day fixed for[17] the opening of the art-exhibition
at the Louvre[18], the lady was secretly informed that her portrait was
ornamented with certain accessories rather compromising her[19]. She
went immediately to the artist. There was the portrait! It was the
same striking likeness certainly; but the painter had thinned the hair,
and the lady so faithfully painted[20] held in her hand two large tresses of
false hair. On the toilet table were several small bottles, labelled thus[21]:
“White-Wash,” “Vegetable Red,” “Cosmetic[22], to efface wrinkles,”
“Lotion, to dye the hair in a minute[23].”
“It is abominable,” said the lady, greatly excited.
“Of what do you complain?” coolly replied the artist. “Did you not
declare (S. 48, N. 2, and App. § 28) that it was not your portrait? You
are right, it is a mere fancy sketch[24], and as such I shall send it to the
exhibition.”
“What, Sir, do you intend to exhibit this painting?”
“Certainly[25], Madam; but as a
cabinet picture[26], since the catalogue
will indicate it under the title of ‘The Coquette of Fifty Years.’”
At this the lady fainted, but soon recovered, and then paid at once for
the portrait[27].
The accessories were effaced[28] in her presence, the
portrait was restored to its original state, and the three thousand francs
were transferred[29] to the purse of the painter.—The Young Ladies’
Journal.
Have pity on[1]
the youth who is ashamed to be seen carrying[2] a parcel.
Such a youth will never climb the hill[3]; he will never be honoured and
respected by sensible, respectable[4] men. And yet how many there are
(S. 82, N. 7) who have the failing[5]. Do you know the story of the
young man who came down from a country town of New Hampshire,
and entered the great wholesale establishment of the Lawrences—Abbot
and Amos—in Boston[6]? He was a young merchant who had just
commenced business[7]. He had money enough with which to purchase a
certain quantity of goods, and wished to get as many more on credit[8], if
they (S. 134, N. 4) would trust[9] him.
Mr. Lawrence shook his head. The young man could offer no security,
and the old[10] merchants did not consider it good policy to give
credit to an unknown and untried young man. The youthful customer
did not blame them. He said he should probably do the same himself
by one whom he did not know[11]. “However,” he added, “I hope I
may grow into your confidence one of these days[12].”
Then he paid for the goods he had purchased; and when they had
been done up[13],
he was asked where he would have them sent[14]. “I will
take[15] them myself,” was the answer. “But the parcel is heavy,” said the
clerk. “And I am young and strong,” answered the customer. “No,
I will take the parcel on my shoulder. I cannot earn half a dollar more
easily or more honestly.” And he had taken the parcel on his shoulder,
and had approached the door, when Mr. Lawrence came out of his office,
where[16] he had been a spectator of the scene, and called the youth back.
“You can have all the goods you want, young man[17],” he said. “Make
your own selection, and set your own time for payment[18]. He who is
willing to help himself, will not betray[19] those who are willing to help him.”
And the old merchant was not mistaken. That young man became
one of his most valuable customers, and one of his valued[20] friends.
When Jerome Napoleon Bonaparte, son of (S. 25, N. 5) King Jerome
of Westphalia and nephew of the Emperor Napoleon I., was a student
of[21] Harvard College, in Cambridgeshire, he was one day carrying a
bundle of clothing[22]
from his washer-woman’s to his dormitory[23], when
he was met by a companion[24], who asked him, with much surprise, why
he had not had the bundle sent to his room.
“Why should I do that?” asked the prince. “Why[25],” said his companion
with a little touch of embarrassment, “you know it doesn’t look
well to carry one’s own bundle like a common labourer.”
“Bah[26],” cried Jerome, laughing, “I trust I shall never be ashamed
to be seen bearing[27] anything (S. 3, N. 7) that belongs to a Bonaparte!”—The
New York Herald.
[6] from — Boston = from (aus) a small town
in N. H. to Boston, and there entered the great (großartig) wholesale establishment
(Warenlager) of Messrs. Lawrence—Abbot and Amos?
[7] I have
just commenced business, ich habe mich soeben etabliert.
[8] to get a thing on
credit, etwas auf Kredit entnehmen; as many more, noch einmal so viele.
Section 199. ANECDOTES OF [1] GREAT STATESMEN. — I. Abraham Lincoln [2] . — II. Prince Bismarck ( S. 138, N. 12 ) and Lord Beaconsfield [24] .
The night previous to the meeting of the Convocation[3] of Chicago,
Mr. Lincoln did not get home until[4] eleven o’clock at night. In the
morning[5] Mrs. Lincoln, who possessed a most amiable disposition, remonstrated
with her good husband at breakfast. She kindly, but firmly,
informed him[6] that politics[7]
were leading him into bad habits, especially
(S. 87, N. 6) to keeping late hours[8] and drinking at the rum shops.
She did not like it; she had to sit up[9], and also the children were kept
awake[10].
“And now, Abraham,” she continued, “let me tell you[11] that
to-night I will go to bed at ten o’clock. If you come before that
hour, well and good[12]; if not[13],
I will not get up and let you in[14].” Ten
o’clock came that night, and true to her word, Mrs. Lincoln went to bed
with her children[15].
About an hour later Mr. Lincoln knocked at[16] the
door. He knocked once, twice, and even three times before[17] an upper
window was raised and the nightcap of a female looked out. “Who is
there?” “I.” “You know what I told you, Abraham?” “Yes, but,
wife, I have got something very particular to tell you. Let me in!” “I
don’t want to hear. It is political stuff[18].” “Wife, it is very important.
There is[19] a telegraphic despatch, and I have been nominated for the
Presidency[20].” “Oh, Abraham, this is awful! Now I know you have
been drinking. I only suspected it before, and you may just go and
sleep where you got your liquor[21]!” And down went the window with a
slam[22]. The next day confirmed the truth of the news that the humble
husband had been nominated to rule[23] over millions.—The New York
Herald.
Amongst a number of amusing anecdotes of Lord Beaconsfield is one
of[25] the State banquet given at Berlin at the time of the Congress,
when[26]
he sat next to Prince Bismarck and opposite to the crown Princess
of Germany. Near to him was a trophy of “bonbons,” on the
papers of which were[27] miniature photographs of the German Emperor
and other members of the Prussian royal family. After the feast was
over[28],
the lord was busily engaged (S. 87, N. 6) in securing[29] some of
these sweets to take home as a [zum] remembrance of the occasion[30],
when Prince Bismarck suddenly caught him by the arm and so startled
him that he dropped his spoil and exclaimed: “I see, not only does
Prince Bismarck give nothing away, but (S. 6, N. 10) he does not allow
anybody to help himself.” The German Chancellor, on discovering
(S. 55, N. 1) that he had interrupted Lord Beaconsfield in a feat of annexation[31],
burst into a hearty laugh, and retorted: “It is true that[32] I
give nothing away; but, as you see, I am always ready for an honest
alliance.” So saying, he turned to the table and executed an energetic
raid upon[33] the “bonbons,” part of which he handed over to his British
colleague.—The Correspondent of “The London Daily Telegraph.”
[2]Abraham Lincoln, Präsident der Vereinigten
Staaten von Nord Amerika, war der Sohn eines einfachen Landmannes und wurde am
12. Februar 1809 im Staate Kentucki geboren. Seine Jugenderziehung war nur eine
höchst mangelhafte, denn man sagt, er habe nur ein Jahr die Schule besucht; trotz der ungünstigsten
Verhältnisse gelang es ihm aber dennoch, sich durch beharrliches Selbststudium
zum gewandten Advokaten, tüchtigen Redner und einflußreichen Politiker heranzubilden.
Er wurde Abgeordneter für die Legislatur des Staates Illinois, Mitglied des Kongresses
und des Senats, und ward endlich im Jahre 1860, gerade in dem kritischen Augenblicke,
wo die Südstaaten, welche die Ausdehnung der Sklaverei forderten, sich wegen Verweigerung
dieser Forderung von der Union lossagten, von den Republikanern zum Präsidenten der
Vereinigten Staaten gewählt. Gleich nach seiner Wahl zur Führung des Staatsruders
erfolgte der Ausbruch jenes stets denkwürdigen Bürgerkrieges seitens der Union und der
sich empörenden Südstaaten, welcher fünf Jahre lang mit mörderischer Wut das Land
zerrüttete und endlich mit der gänzlichen Abschaffung der Sklaverei und der Besiegung der
Südstaaten endete. Kaum war er jedoch im März 1865 zum zweiten Male durch ungeheure
Stimmenmehrheit von der Union zum Präsidenten erwählt worden, und kaum
waren die Streitkräfte der Südstaaten auf immer gebrochen und vernichtet, als der gefeierte
Staatsmann am 14. April 1865 bei Gelegenheit einer Theatervorstellung im Ford’schen
Theater zu Washington der ruchlosen Hand eines von der demokratischen Partei angereizten
Mörders, des Schauspielers John Wilkes Booth, zum Opfer fiel. So endete das Leben
eines Mannes, welcher als guter, rechtschaffener Bürger, als einflußreicher Staatsmann und
als edelmütiger Befreier von fünf Millionen Sklaven von seinem Vaterlande stets in
dankbarem Andenken gehalten werden wird.
[5] Say ‘The next morning at (beim) breakfast’, and comp. App.
§ 14. She remonstrated with her good husband, sie machte ihrem guten Manne
einige Vorstellungen über sein langes Ausbleiben. The words ‘einige — Ausbleiben’
must stand at the end of the period.
[6] = She told him a kind, but
(doch) determined tone.
[7]die Politik,
always used in the Sing., into, zu.
[8] to keep late hours, spät nach Hause kommen. App. § 28 and 30. To drink
at the rum shops, die Wirtshäuser besuchen.
[24]Benjamin Disraeli, Lord Beaconsfield,
geboren in London am 21. Dezember
1804, gestorben am 19. April 1881 auf seinem Landsitze Hughenden, ausgezeichneter
Litterat, berühmter Staatsmann, glänzender Redner und langjähriger Führer der konservativen
Partei, steht bei seinen bewundernden Landsleuten jetzt noch in so frischem Andenken,
daß es dem Verfasser der Kürze wegen erlaubt sein möge, auf seine glänzenden Erfolge
weiter nicht einzugehen.
[33] = and made an energetic (tüchtig)
attack upon (auf).
Section 200. THE POWER OF MUSIC.
On one occasion when young Chopin[1] had been travelling for several
days in the slow fashion of German diligences, he was delighted and
surprised, on stopping at a small post-house, to discover a grand pianoforte
in one of the rooms[2],
and still more surprised to find it in tune[3]—thanks,
probably, to the musical taste of the postmaster’s family. He sat
down instantly and began to improvise in[4] his peculiarly happy manner.
One by one the travellers were attracted by the unwonted sweet sounds.
One of them even allowed[5] his beloved pipe to go out in his ecstasy,
and the postmaster, his wife, and his two daughters joined the group of
listeners. Unmindful of his audience, of the journey, the lapse of time[6],
and everything but the music, Chopin continued to play, and his companions[7]
to listen in rapt attention, when they were suddenly roused by
a stentorian[8]
voice, which made the windows rattle, calling out[9]: “The
horses are ready, gentlemen!” The postmaster roared out an anathema[10]
against the disturber—the postillion—and the passengers cast angry
glances at him. Chopin started from his seat, but was instantly surrounded
by his audience, who entreated him to continue. “But we
have been here for some time,” said Chopin, consulting his watch, “and
are due in Posen already[11].” “Stay and play, noble young artist,” cried
the postmaster, “I will find you courier’s horses if you will only remain
a little longer.” “Do be persuaded[12],” added the postmaster’s wife,
almost threatening the artist with an embrace[13]. What could he do but
resume his place at the instrument? When at last he paused, the servant
appeared with wine; the host’s daughter served the artist first, and
then the travellers, upon which the postmaster proposed a cheer for[14] the
musician, in which all joined[15]. The ladies in their gratitude filled the
carriage pockets with the best eatables and wine the house contained;
and when at last the artist rose to go[16], his gigantic host seized him in
his arms and triumphantly bore him to[17]
the carriage! Long[18] years
afterwards Chopin would recall (S. 101, N. 22) this little incident with
pleasure, and declare that the plaudits of the press had never given him
more delight than the homage[19] of these simple music-loving Germans.—Manchester
Tit-Bits.
[1]Fréderic François Chopin,
der berühmte Klaviervirtuose und Komponist, dessen
melodieenreiche Masurkas, Walzer, Notturnos, Balladen, Polonaisen und Etüden seinen
Namen überall bekannt gemacht haben, wurde im Jahre 1810 zu Zelazowawola bei Warschau
geboren, und starb am 17. Oktober 1849 in Paris, wo er sich seit dem Jahre 1831
niedergelassen hatte. On one occasion, einst.
[2] he — rooms = and was
stopping at (vor) a small post-house, he was delighted and surprised to discover
a grand pianoforte (Flügel, m.) in one of the rooms.
Robert.—I thought[6] it very dull, sir; I scarcely met with a single
person. I would much rather have gone[7] along the turnpike-road.
Tutor.—To be sure, if seeing men and horses is your object[8], you
are, indeed, better entertained on the high-road. But did you not see
William (S. 48, N. 2)?
Robert.—We set out together[9]; but he lagged behind in the lane,
and so[10] I walked on and left him.
Tutor.—That was a pity. He would have been company for you.
Robert.—Oh, he is so tedious, always stopping to look at this thing
or that! I would rather walk alone[11]. I dare say he is not come
yet.
Tutor.—Here he comes. Well, William, where have you been?
William.—Oh, the pleasantest walk[12]! I went all over Millthorp-Heath,
and so up to the mill at the top of the hill, and then down among
the green meadows by the side of the river home again.
Tutor.—Why, that is just the round Robert has been taking, and he
complains of its dulness and prefers the high-road.
William.—I wonder at that. I am sure I hardly took a step that did
not delight me; and I have brought home my handkerchief full of
curiosities[13].
Tutor.—Suppose[14], then, you give us an account of what amused
you so much. I fancy it will[15] be as new to Robert as to me.
William.—I will do it readily. The lane leading to the heath, you
know, is close[16] and sandy, so I did not mind it much, but made the
best of my way[17].
However, I spied a curious thing enough[18] in the
hedge. It was an old crab-tree, out of which grew a bunch of something
green[19], quite different from the tree itself. Here is a branch
of it.
Tutor.—Ah! this is mistletoe, a plant of great fame[20] for the use
made of it by the Druids of old[21], in their religious rites and incantations.
It bears[22] a very slimy, white berry, of which bird-lime may be made,
whence[23] its Latin name “viscum.” It is one of those plants which do
not grow in the ground by a root of their own[24], but fix themselves upon
other plants; whence[25]
they have been humourously[26] styled “parasitical,”
as being hangers on, or dependents. It was the mistletoe of the
oak that the Druids particularly honoured.
[2] walking, auf deinem Spaziergange. Use the
2nd pers. sing. when the tutor addresses the boy, but the 3rd pers. pl. when
the boy addresses the tutor.
[26]scherzhafterweise; parasitical, Parasiten;
as — dependents, das heißt Schmarotzer oder Abhänglinge.
Section 202. THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES. II.
William.—A little further on I saw a green woodpecker[1] fly to a tree,
and run up the trunk like a cat.
Tutor.—That was[2] to seek for insects which live in the bark of trees.
For that purpose the woodpeckers bore holes into the bark with their
strong bills, whereby they do[3] a great deal of damage to the trees.
Tutor.—Yes; the woodpecker has, from its colour and size, been
called the English parrot (S. 4, N. 4, man).
William.—When I got upon the heath, how charming it was[5]! The
air was so fresh, and the prospect on every side[6] so free and unbounded!
The heath was all covered with gay flowers, many of which I had never
observed before. There were[7] at least three different kinds (S. 36, N. 7, A)
of heath (I have them in my handkerchief here) and gorse, and
broom, and bell-flowers; and many others of all colours, of which I will
beg you presently to tell me the names[8].
Tutor.—That I will do readily.
William.—I saw, too, several birds that were new to me. There was
a pretty grayish one, of the size of a lark, that was hopping about some
great stones; and when he flew he showed a great deal of white above
his tail[9].
Tutor.—That was a wheat-ear[10]. They are reckoned very delicious
birds to eat[11], and frequent the open
downs in[12] Sussex, and some other
counties, in great number.
William.—There was a flock of lapwings upon a marshy part of the
heath[13] that amused me much. As I came near them, some of them
kept flying round and round[14], just over my head, and crying, “Pewit,”
“Pewit,” so distinctly, one might almost fancy they spoke[15]. I thought
I should have caught[16] one of them, for he flew as if one of his wings
was broken (App. § 33), and often tumbled close to the ground; but as
I came near, he always contrived[17] to get away.
Tutor.—Ha, ha! you were finely taken in, then[18]! This was all an
artifice of the bird’s, to entice you away from its nest, for the lapwings
build upon the bare ground, and their nests would easily be observed,
did they not draw off[19] the attention of intruders, by their loud cries and
counterfeit lameness.
William.—I wish I had known that[20], for the bird led me a long
chase[21], often over shoes in water. However, this was the cause [davon,
S. 161, N. 21] of my falling in with[22] an old man and a boy, who were
cutting[23] and piling up turf for fuel. I had a great deal of talk with
them about the manner of preparing the turf, and the price it sells at[24].
They gave me, too, a creature I never saw before—a young viper, which
they had just killed. I have seen several common snakes, but this is
thicker in proportion, and of a darker colour than they are.
[24] about — at,
über die Zubereitungsweise und die Verkaufspreise des Torfes.
Section 203. THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES. III.
Tutor.—True. Vipers frequent[1]
those turfy, boggy grounds[2] pretty
much, and I have known several turf-cutters bitten by them.
William.—They are very venomous, are they not?
Tutor.—Enough so[3] to make their wounds painful and dangerous,
though they seldom prove fatal.
William.—Well, I then took my course[4] up to the windmill on the
mount. I climbed up the steps of the mill, in order to get a better view
of the country round[5]. What an extensive prospect! I counted fifteen
church steeples; I saw several gentlemen’s houses[6] peeping out from
the midst of green woods and plantations[7];
and I could trace the windings[8]
of the river all along the low grounds, till it was lost behind a ridge
of hills[9].
But I will tell you what I mean to do[10], if you will give
me leave.
William.—I will go again and take with me Carey’s county map[12],
by which I shall probably be able to make out most of the places.
Tutor.—You shall have it; and I will go with you, and take my
pocket spying-glass.
William.—I shall be very glad of that. Well, a thought struck me,
that, as the hill is called Camp-Mount, there might probably be some
remains of ditches and mounds[13] with which I have read that camps
were surrounded. And I really believe I discovered something of that
sort[14] running one side of the mount.
Tutor.—Very likely you might[15]. I know antiquaries have described
such remains as existing there, which some suppose to be Roman, others
Danish[16]. We will examine them when we go.
William.—From the hill I went straight down to the meadows below,
and walked on the side of a brook that runs[17]
into the river. It[18] was
all bordered with reeds and tall flowering-plants (S. 16, N. 10), quite
different from those I had seen on the heath. As I was getting down[19]
the bank to reach one of them, I heard something plunge into the water
near me. It was a large water-rat, and I saw it swim over to the other
side, and go[20]
into its hole. There were[21] a great many large dragon-flies
all about the stream. I caught one of the finest, and have him here
in a leaf. But how I longed to catch a bird that I saw hovering[22] over
the water, and every now and then darting into it! It was all over a
mixture of the most beautiful green and blue, with some orange colour[23].
It was somewhat less than a thrush, and had a large head and bill, and
a short tail.
[12]Bezirkskarte; by which = by (mit)
the help of which; ‘to make out’, here bestimmen,
w. v. tr.; places, Ortschaften.
[13] Well — mounds. This passage may be
construed thus: ‘Now, since (Da nun) the hill is called Camp-Mount, a thought
struck me that there are (sich befinden) probably some remains of ditches and
mounds (Erdwall, m.)’. I have read = as I have read.
[14]etwas derartiges;
running one side = on the one side.
[21]Es waren dort,
after which place the words ‘all — stream’, am Bache.
[22]umherfliegen; every — then, dann und wann;
‘to dart’, here hinunterschießen;
into it = into the same.
[23] It — colour = His plumage (Gefieder) consisted
of (aus) a mixture of the finest green and blue with a small addition
(Zusatz, m.) of orange colour (Orangengelb).
Section 204. THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES. IV.
Tutor.—I can tell you what that bird was—a kingfisher, the celebrated
halcyon of the ancients, about which so many tales are told. It
lives on[1] fish, which it catches in the manner you saw. It builds in holes
on the banks, and is a shy, retired[2] bird, never to be seen far from the
stream it inhabits.
William.—I must try to get another sight of him, for I never saw
(S. 48, N. 2) a bird that pleased me so much. Well, I followed this little
brook till it entered[3]
the river, and then took[4] the path that runs along
the bank. On the opposite side, I observed several little birds running
along the bank, and making a piping noise[5].
They were[6] brown and
white, and about as big as a snipe.
Tutor.—I suppose they [es] were sand-pipers[7];
one of the numerous
family of birds (S. 36, N. 7, A) that get their living[8] by wading among
the shallows and picking up worms and insects.
William.—There were a great many swallows, too, sporting[9] above
the surface of the water, that entertained me with their motions. Sometimes[10]
they dashed down into the stream[11]; sometimes they pursued
one another so quickly, that the eye could scarcely follow them. In one
place, where a steep sand-bank rose high above the river, I observed
many of them go in and out of holes with which the bank was bored
full[12].
Tutor.—Those [Das] were sand-martins[13],
the smallest of our species
of swallows. They are of a mouse-colour above, and white beneath.
They[14] make their nests, and bring up their young, in these holes, which
run a great depth, and by their situation are secure from all plunderers.
William.—A little further I saw a man in a boat, who was catching
eels in an odd way[15].
He had a long pole with broad iron prongs[16] at
the end; just like Neptune’s trident[17], only there were five prongs instead
of three. This he pushed straight down into the mud, in the deepest
parts of the river, and fetched up the eels sticking between the prongs.
Tutor.—I know the method. It is called the spearing of eels[18].
William.—While I was looking at him, a heron came flying over my
head, with his large flagging wings. He alighted[19] at the next turn of
the river, and I crept softly behind the bank to watch his motions. He
had waded into the water as far as his long legs would allow him[20] and
was standing there motionless with his neck drawn in, looking[21] intently
on the stream. Presently he darted his long bill as quick as lightning
into the water, and drew out a fish, which he swallowed. I saw him
catch another in the same manner. He then took alarm[22] at some noise I
made, and flew away slowly to a wood at some distance, where he
settled.
[1]von;
in — saw, auf die von dir beobachtete Weise.
[2]die Einsamkeit liebend;
never — inhabits = which goes never far away (sich entfernen) from the stream
(Gewässer, n.) where it has its nest.
[8] ‘to get one’s living’, here sich seine
Nahrung verschaffen. Read S. 87, N. 6; among the shallows, an den seichten Stellen;
to wade, umher´waten; and picking up = in order to pick up.
[9] ‘to sport’,
here sein Spiel treiben; that = and.
[12] I —
full = I observed that many of them crept into the holes that were in great
number (Menge, f.) bored (hinein´bohren) into the bank, but then (dann aber)
came out again.
[20] Insert the grammatical object es before ‘him’.
[21] = and looked intently
(mit gespannter Aufmerksamkeit) down upon the water (auf ... hernieder).
[22]
to take alarm at something, durch etwas in Furcht gesetzt werden.
Section 205. THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES. V.
Tutor.—Probably his nest was there, for herons build upon the loftiest
tree they can find, and sometimes in society together, like rooks. Formerly,
when these birds were valued for the amusement of hawking[1], many
gentlemen had their heronries[2], and a few are still remaining.
William.—I think (S. 64, N. 11) they are the largest wild birds
we have.
Tutor.—They are of great length and spread of wing[3], but their
bodies are comparatively small.
William.—I then turned homeward, across the meadows, where I
stopped awhile, to look at[4] a large flock of starlings, which kept flying
about at no great distance. I could not tell at first what to make of
them[5], for they rose altogether from the ground as thick as a swarm of
bees, and formed themselves into a kind[6] of black cloud, hovering over
the field. After taking a short round[7], they settled again, but presently
rose in the same manner. I dare say[8] there were hundreds of them.
Tutor.—Perhaps so[9]; for in the fenny counties their flocks are so
numerous[10]
as to break down whole acres of reeds, by settling on them[11].
This disposition[12]
of starlings to fly in close swarms was remarked even
by Homer, who compares the foe (S. 48, N. 6) flying from one of his
heroes to a cloud of starlings retiring dismayed at the approach of
the hawk.
William.—After I had left the meadows, I crossed[13] the corn-fields
in the way to our house, and passed close by a deep marl-pit. Looking
into it, I saw, on one of the sides, a cluster of what[14] I took to be shells;
and upon going down, I picked up a clod of marl[15], which was quite
full of them; but how sea-shells can get there, I cannot imagine.
Tutor.—I do not wonder at your surprise, since many philosophers
have been much perplexed to account for the same appearance[16]. It is
not uncommon to find[17] great quantities of shells and relics of marine
animals, even in the bowels of high mountains, very remote from
the sea.
William.—I got[18] to the high field next to our house just as the sun
was setting, and I stood looking at it till it was quite lost[19]. What a
glorious sight! The clouds were tinged with purple, crimson, and
yellow of all shades and hues, and the clear sky varied from blue to a
fine green at the horizon. But how large the sun appears just as it sets!
I think it seems twice as big as when it is over-head.
[1] for — hawking = on account of the amusement which they afforded
through hawking (die Falkenjagd).
[19] = till it had
entirely disappeared at the (am) horizon.
Section 206. THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES. VI.
Tutor.—It does so[1]; and you may probably have observed the same
apparent enlargement of the moon at its rising[2].
William.—I have[3]; but pray what is the reason of this?
Tutor.—It is an optical deception, depending upon principles which I
cannot well explain to you, till you know more of that branch of science.
But what a number of new ideas this afternoon’s walk has afforded you.
I do not wonder that you found it amusing[4], and it has been very instructive
too. Did you see (S. 48, N. 2) nothing of all these sights,
Robert?
Robert.—I saw some of them, but I did not take particular notice
of them.
Tutor.—Why not?
Robert.—I do not know. I did not care about them; and I made
the best of my way home[5].
Tutor.—That would have been (App. § 33) right, if you had been
sent on a message[6];
but as you only walked for amusement[7], it would
have been wiser to have sought out as many sources of it as possible[8].
But as it is[9]: one man walks through the world with the eyes open, and
another with them shut, and[10]
upon this difference depends all the[11] superiority
the one acquires above the other. I have known sailors[12] who
have been in all the quarters of the world, and could tell you nothing
but[13]
the signs of the tippling houses they frequented[14] in different
ports, and the price and quality of the liquor. On the other
hand[15], a Franklin could not even cross the Channel without making
some observation useful to mankind[16]. While many a vacant, thoughtless
youth is whirled throughout Europe[17],
without gaining[18] a single
idea worth crossing a street for[19], the observing eye and inquiring mind
find matter of improvement and delight[20] in every ramble in town or
country. Do you then, William, continue to make use of your eyes; and
you, Robert, learn that eyes were given you to use.—Dr. Aikin.
[19] worth — for = for (wegen)
which it would have been worth while to go over
the street.
[20]zur Belehrung und zum Genusse. The words ‘in every
ramble’ must be placed after ‘mind’.
Section 207. THE KING AND THE MILLER. I.
In the reign[1] of Frederick the Great (see S. 192, N. 1), king of Prussia,
there was[2] a mill near Potsdam which obstructed the view from the
windows of the palace of Sans Souci. Annoyed by this drawback to his
favourite residence[3], the king sent[4]
to the owner of the mill inquiring
the price for which he would sell it. “For no price,” was the reply of
the sturdy Prussian; and in a moment of anger the monarch gave orders[5]
that the mill should be pulled down. “The king may do this,” said the
miller, quietly folding his arms; “but there are (S. 82, N. 7) laws in
Prussia, and he will find them out[6]”. Forthwith he commenced a law-suit
against the monarch, the issue of which was[7], that the court gave a
decision against His Majesty, compelling him[8] to rebuild the mill, and
in addition[9] to pay a large sum of money as a compensation for the
injury he had done[10]. The king felt mortified (S. 87, N. 6) at having
been worsted by one of his subjects, but had the magnanimity to say,
addressing[11] his courtiers: “I am glad to find that there are just laws
and upright judges in my kingdom who are bold enough to decide
against me when they think I am in the wrong.” Many years afterwards
(App. § 14), a descendant of the honest miller, who had in due
course of time succeeded to the hereditary possession of the property[12],
found himself involved in pecuniary difficulties that had become
insurmountable.
[12] Liter. = who in course of time and through
inheritance had come into the possession of the mill.
Section 208. THE KING AND THE MILLER. II.
In his distress he wrote to Frederick William IV, who was at that time
king of Prussia, reminding him of the refusal experienced by Frederick the
Great at the hands[1]
of his ancestor the miller, and stating[2]
that[3] if His
Majesty now wished to obtain possession of the property, he would, in
his present embarrassed circumstances, most willingly dispose of the mill.
The king immediately wrote, with his own hand[4], the following reply:
“My Dear Neighbour,
I cannot allow you to sell the mill. It must remain in the possession
of your family as long as one of your descendants survives[5], for
the building belongs[6]
to the history of Prussia, and is a standing[7] memorial
of the integrity of our judges and the impartiality of our laws. I am
sorry, however, to hear that you are in straitened circumstances, and
therefore send you six thousand dollars[8] to pay off your debts, and hope
the sum will be sufficient for the purpose. Consider me[9] always
The mill still stands, and is occupied by the[11] descendants of the resolute
miller who had the fortitude to thwart the despotic monarch in his
desire[12] to improve the prospect from the windows of his palace.—Chambers’s
“Short Stories.”
[1] reminding — hands = reminded him of the refusal (abschlägige Antwort)
which Fred. the Gr. had received at the hands (seitens).
[3] = that he would in his present embarrassed circumstances most willingly
sell the mill, if, etc. ‘To obtain possession of the property’, here das Besitzthum
käuflich erwerben.
[4] with — hand, eigenhändig, adj., which use after
‘following’.
[12] to thwart — desire = to
oppose (sich einer Sache widersetzen) the desire of the despotic king.
Section 209. A FRIEND IN NEED ( S. 3, N. 2 ). I.
One wet wintry night, when a gentleman was hurrying along[1] one of the
crowded thoroughfares of London, his attention was arrested by a lean,
hungry-looking dog which rushed past him. He observed that it had a
collar[2] round its neck, to which a basket was attached. If it was (App.
§ 36) a dog that ran on errands[3], he thought that surely its owner would
feed it better, and its ribs would not look so spare. Thinking that there
was some mystery connected with the animal[4],
he resolved to follow it[5].
After a[6] time it turned up a narrow lane into a stable-yard, where some
coachmen and hostlers were loitering about. It then got up on its hind-legs,
and began walking about in circles[7]. The bystanders, surprised
at this strange proceeding, formed round in a ring and looked on. It
walked five times round, standing[8] erect, and looking fixedly before it
like a soldier on duty[9],
evidently doing its utmost[10] to make the company
laugh. After taking a short rest, it began its performance[11] again, but
this time on its fore-feet, pretending to stand[12] on its (S. 43, N. 9) head.
Tiring of this[13], it lay down in the middle of the ring, feigning to be
dead[14], and going through all the convulsions of a dying dog, breathing
heavily, panting, suffering the lower jaw to fall[15], and then turning over
motionless. It did this so well, that a woman in the crowd exclaimed:
“Poor beast!” and drew her hand across her eyes[16]. Having lain still
a minute, with its eyes closed, it got up and shook itself, to show that
the performance[17] was over. It then went round begging on its hind-legs,
standing[18] a little while before each of the spectators, and earnestly
watching[19] to see whether they put their hands into their pockets or not.
The basket round its neck had a slit in the lid, into which the coppers
might be dropped.
[1] to hurry along, durchei´len, insep. comp. w. v. Place ‘one — night’ after
‘gentleman’; wet = rainy; thoroughfares = streets.
[19] = and watched
(beobachten) them quite earnestly (ernsthaft).
Section 210. A FRIEND IN NEED. II.
The gentleman put in a shilling, and stooped down to read a crumpled
piece of paper which hung loosely from the collar. It bore these words,
written in a[1] shaky hand: “This is the dog of a poor man who is bed-ridden.
It earns bread for its master. Good people, do not prevent it
from returning to its home.” On receiving (S. 55, N. 1) any money,
the poor creature returned thanks by a wag of its tail. Almost every one
of the spectators gave the dog something, and when it had finished collecting
the money, it barked once or twice, as if to say good-bye, and
then scampered off. On entering the principal street, it quickened its
pace[2],
and the gentleman finding it impossible to keep up with it[3],
hailed[4]
a cab, and, much to the driver’s amazement[5], cried: “Follow that dog.”
After a time the dog bolted up a narrow alley[6], through which the cab
could not pass[7]. The gentleman alighted, and followed the dog through
a dark close up[8] to the garret of a rickety dwelling. Pulling the string
attached to the latch, the dog opened the door, and the stranger followed.
Its master lay dying[9]
on a wretched bed, supported[10] by the earnings of
the faithful creature, who practised[11] the same tricks alone as it used to
do under its master’s superintendence. Death soon ended[12] the poor
man’s sufferings, and the dog followed the coffin to the grave. The
gentleman took home the dog, but next morning the poor beast howled
impatiently for[13] the basket to go its rounds as usual. It went with the
pennies to the cemetery and laid them on a grave, whining[14] mournfully,
and trying to scratch up the earth. Twice more it went out all day, and
brought back the money for its master; but, on finding the money untouched,
it lay down at full length upon the grave. The next morning
it did not go its rounds, for it was dead.—Chambers’s “Short Stories.”
I well remember[1], when I was very young, possessing for the first time
a guinea. I remember too that this circumstance cost me no little perplexity
and anxiety. As I passed along the streets, the fear of losing my
guinea induced me oftentimes to take it out of my pocket to look at it.
First I put[2] it in one pocket, then I took it out and put it in another;
after a while I took it out of the second pocket and placed[2] it in another,
really perplexed[3] what to do with it (S. 27, N. 7).
At last my attention was arrested by a book-auction. I stepped in
and looked about me. First one lot[4] was put up, and then another, and
sold to the highest bidder[5]. At last I ventured to the table, just as the
auctioneer was putting up “The History of the World,” in two large
folio volumes. I instantly thrust[2] my hand into my (S. 43, N. 9) pocket,
and began turning over[6] my guinea, considering whether I should have
money enough to buy this lot. The bidding proceeded[7], and at last I
ventured to bid too. “Halloo! my little man!” said the auctioneer,
“what! (S. 27, N. 7) not content with less than the world?” This
remark greatly confused me, and drew the attention of the whole company[8]
toward me, who[9],
seeing (S. 30, N. 4) me anxious[10] to possess
the books, refrained from bidding against me; and so, “The World”
was knocked down[11] to me at a very moderate price.
How to get[12]
these huge books home was the next consideration[13].
The auctioneer offered to send them, but I, not knowing what sort of
creatures auctioneers were[14],
determined to take them myself; so, after[15]
the assistant had tied them up, I marched out of the room with these
huge books upon my shoulder, like Samson with the gates of Gaza, amid
the smiles of all present.
When I reached my home, after the servant had opened the door, the
first person I met was my sainted mother.
“My dear boy,” she said, “what have you got there? I thought you
would not keep your guinea long.”
“Do not be angry, mother,” said I, throwing the books down upon
the table. “I have bought ‘The World’ for nine shillings.”
This was on a Saturday, and I well remember sitting up[16] till it was
well-nigh midnight, turning over[17] this “History of the World.” The
books became my delight, and were carefully read through and through.
When I grew older, I became at length a Christian, and my love of
books[18],
among other things, led me to desire to be a Christian minister[19].
To the possession of these books I attribute, in a great measure, any honours
that have been added to my name in connection with literature. I have
not mentioned this anecdote to gratify any foolish feeling[20], but to encourage
in all whom I see before me that[21] love of literature which has
afforded me such unspeakable pleasure—pleasure[22] which I would not
have been without for all the riches of the Indies[23].—The Rev. Dr.
Vaughan.
[1] Supply ‘the time’ here; to remember, sich erinnern, governs the Gen.;
possessing = and possessed.
[8] = of all the persons
present (die Anwesenden); toward, auf.
[9] Finish first the clause ‘who
refrained from bidding against me’, and then commence the other, and use
this construction in all cases where it can possibly be employed.
[10]
We are anxious to buy the property, wir möchten das Besitztum gerne kaufen.
[11]
to knock down an article to the last bidder, einen Artikel dem zuletzt Bietenden
zu´schlagen.
We were fortunate in seeing the Green Vaults or “Das grüne Gewölbe,”
a collection of jewels and costly articles[1], unsurpassed in Europe (S. 7, N. 3, A).
Admittance is only granted to six persons at a time, who pay
a fee[2] of two thalers. The customary way is to employ a “valet de
place[3],” who goes round from one hotel to another, until he has collected
the required number, when[4] he brings them together and conducts
them to the keeper who has charge of the treasures. The first hall into
which we were ushered contained works in bronze[5]. They were all
small, and chosen with regard to their artistical value. The next room
contained statues, and vases ornamented with reliefs, in ivory. The
most remarkable work was the fall of Lucifer and his angels, containing
ninety-two figures in all[6], carved out of a single piece of ivory sixteen
inches high! It was the work of an Italian monk, and cost him many
years of hard labour[7].
However costly the contents of these halls (S. 27, N. 7), they were
only an introduction to those which followed. Each one exceeded the
other in splendour and costliness. The walls were covered to the ceiling
with rows of goblets, vases, etc., of polished jasper, agate, and lapis
lazuli. We saw two goblets, each prized at six thousand thalers, made
of gold and precious stones; also the great pearl called the Spanish
Dwarf, nearly as large as a pullet’s egg; globes and vases cut entirely
out of the mountain crystal; magnificent Nuremberg watches and clocks,
and a great number of figures made ingeniously of rough[8] pearls and
diamonds. The seventh hall contains the coronation robes of Augustus II,
king of Poland, and many costly specimens of carving in wood[9]. A
cherry-stone is shown in a glass case, which has one hundred and twenty-five
faces, all perfectly finished, carved upon it[10]. The next room we
entered sent back a glare of splendour[11] that perfectly dazzled us. It
was all gold, diamond, ruby, and sapphire. Every case sent out a glow
and a glitter that it seemed like a cage of imprisoned lightnings[12].
Wherever the eye turned it was met by a blaze of broken rainbows.
They were there by hundreds[13], and every gem was a fortune. We here
saw the largest known onyx, nearly seven inches long, and four inches
broad! One of the most remarkable works is the throne and court of
Aurungzebe, the Indian king, by Dinglinger, a celebrated goldsmith of
the last century. It contains one hundred and thirty-two figures, all
of enamelled gold, and each one most perfectly and elaborately finished.
It was purchased by Prince Augustus for fifty-eight thousand thalers,
which was not an exorbitant sum, considering that the making of it occupied
Dinglinger and thirteen workmen for seven years!
It is almost impossible to estimate the value of the treasures these
halls contain. That of gold and jewels alone must be many millions of
dollars, and the amount of labour expended on these toys of royalty is
incredible.—Bayard Taylor, “Views Afoot.”
[10] which — it = upon which are carved 125 faces,
which are all perfectly finished (ausgebildet).
[11]wiederstrahlte von einem
herrlichen Glanze; ‘perfectly’, here förmlich.
[12]Aus jedem Kasten erstrahlte
so viel Glanz und Licht, daß es schien, es entströmten ihm tausend Blitze.
[13] = There
were (Es waren dort) hundreds of gems.
Section 213. THE DEATH OF LITTLE NELL.
She was dead. No sleep (S. 27, N. 7) so beautiful and calm, so free
from trace[1]
of pain, so fair to look upon. She seemed[2] a creature fresh
from the hand of God, and waiting for the breath of life; not one who
had lived and suffered death. Her couch was dressed with here and
there some winterberries and green leaves, gathered in a spot she had
been used to favour. “When I die, put near me something[3] that has
loved the light, and had the sky above it always.” These were her
words.
She was dead. Dear (S. 10, N. 2), gentle, patient, noble Nell was
dead. Her little bird—a poor, slight thing[4], the pressure of the finger
would have crushed—was stirring nimbly in its cage; and the strong
heart of its child-mistress[5] was mute and motionless for ever! Where
were the traces of her early cares, her sufferings and fatigues? All gone[6].
Sorrow was dead, indeed in her[7]; but peace and perfect happiness were
born—imaged in her tranquil beauty and (S. 10, N. 9) profound
repose.
And still her former self lay there, unaltered in this change[8]. Yes, the
old fireside[9] had smiled upon that same sweet face; it had passed like
a dream through haunts of misery and care—at the door of the poor
schoolmaster on the summer evening, before the furnace-fire upon the
cold wet night, at the still bedside of the dying boy[10], there had been
the same mild and loving look. So shall we know the angels in their
majesty after death.—Charles Dickens, “The Old Curiosity Shop.”
[2] = seemed to be a creature (Kreatur, f.). Fresh —
God, erst soeben aus der Hand Gottes hervorgegangen, which use attributively before
‘creature’; breath, Odem, m.
[7]war in ihr erstorben;
were born, waren dafür wieder in ihr erstanden; imaged in,
wie es ... bezeugte; her tranquil beauty = her tranquil beautiful face (Antlitz,
n.).
[8] Liter. = And still (dennoch)
lay her former self in this change (Verwandlung)
unaltered there.
[9]der häusliche Herd; ‘to smile upon’, here auf
etwas hernie´derlächeln.
Some lineaments of the character of the man were early discerned in
the child. There remain[2] letters written by his relations when he was in
his seventh year; and from[3] these letters it appears that, even at that
early age, his strong will and his fiery passions, sustained by a constitutional
intrepidity[4], had begun to cause great uneasiness to his family.
“Fighting,” says one of his uncles, “to which he is out of measure
addicted, gives his temper such a fierceness and imperiousness, that he
flies out on every occasion[5].” The old people of the neighbourhood
still remember to have heard from their parents how Bob Clive climbed
to the top of the lofty steeple of Market Drayton, and with what terror
the inhabitants saw (S. 78, N. 14, B) him seated on a stone spout near
the summit. They also relate how he formed all the idle lads of the
town into a kind of predatory army[6], and compelled the shop-keepers
to submit to a tribute of apples and halfpence, in consideration of which[7]
he guaranteed the security of their windows. He was sent from school
to school, making very little progress in his learning[8], and gaining for
himself everywhere the character of an exceedingly naughty boy. One
of his masters, it is said, was sagacious enough to prophesy that the idle
lad would make a great figure in the world[9].—Lord Macaulay, “Lord
Clive.”
[1]Robert Lord Clive, geboren den 29. September 1725, gestorben den 22. November
1774, war der Begründer des brittischen Reiches in Indien.
[9] to make
a great figure in the world, eine große Rolle in der Welt spielen.
Section 215. AN ADVENTURE WITH A LION. I.
It is well[1] known that if one of a troop of lions is killed, the others
take the hint[2],
and leave that part of the country. So[3] the next time the
herds were attacked, I went with the people, in order to encourage them
to rid themselves of the annoyance by destroying[4] one of the marauders.
We found the lions on a small hill about a quarter of a mile in length[5],
which was covered with trees. A circle of men was formed round it, and
they gradually closed up[6], ascending pretty near to each other. Being
down below on the plain with a native schoolmaster, named Mebalwe, a
most excellent man (S. 53, N. 9), I saw one of the lions sitting
(S. 78, N. 14, B) on a piece of rock within the now-closed circle of men. Mebalwe
fired at him before I could[7], and the ball struck the rock on which the
animal was sitting. He bit at the spot struck, as a dog does at a stick
or stone thrown at him; then leaping away[8], broke through the opening
circle, and escaped unhurt. The men were afraid to attack him on
account of their belief in [an] witchcraft. When the circle was re-formed,
we saw two other lions in it; but were afraid[9] to fire lest we should strike
the men, and they allowed the beasts to burst through also. If (App.
§ 36) the Bakatta had acted according to the custom of the country, they
would have speared the lions in their attempt to get out. Seeing we
could not get[10]
them to kill one of the lions, we bent our footsteps[11]
towards the village; in going round the end of the hill, however, I saw
one of the beasts sitting on a piece of rock as before, but this time he had
a little bush in front. Being about thirty yards[12] off, I took a good aim
at his body through the bush, and fired both barrels into it. The men
then called out: “He is shot! he is shot!” Others cried: “He has
been shot by another man, too; let us go to him!” I did not see any
one else shoot at him, but I saw the lion’s tail[13] erected in anger behind
the bush, and turning to the people, said: “Stop a little till I load[14]
again.”
When (S. 27, N. 7) in the act[1] of ramming down the bullets, I heard
a shout. Starting, and looking half round, I saw the lion just in the act of
springing[2] upon me. I was upon a little height; he caught my shoulder
as he sprang[3], and we both came to the ground below together. Growling
(S. 55, N. 1, während) horribly close to my ear, he shook me as a
terrier dog does a rat. The shock produced a stupor similar to that
which seems to be felt by a mouse after the first shake of the cat. It
caused a sort of dreaminess, in which there was[4] no sense of pain nor
feeling of terror, though I was quite conscious of all that was happening.
It was like what[5] patients, particularly under the influence of chloroform,
describe, who see all the operation, but do not feel the knife. This singular
condition was not the result of any mental process. The shake
annihilated fear, and allowed no sense of horror[6] in looking round at the
beast. This peculiar state is probably produced in all animals killed by
the carnivora[7];
and, if so[8], is a merciful provision by our benevolent
creator for lessening the pain of death (S. 76, N. 22, B, 1). Turning
round to relieve myself of the weight, as he had one paw on the back of
my head[9], I saw his eyes directed to Mebalwe, who was trying to shoot
him at a distance of ten or fifteen yards. His gun, a flint one[10], missed
fire in both barrels; the lion immediately left me, and attacking Mebalwe,
bit[11] his thigh. Another man, whose life I had saved before, after he
had been tossed[12] by a buffalo, attempted to spear the lion while he was
biting Mebalwe. He left Mebalwe, and caught this man by the shoulder;
but, at that moment, the bullets he had received took effect[13], and he fell
down dead. The whole was the work of a few moments, and must have
been his paroxysm of dying rage. In order to take out the charm from
him, the Bakatta on the following day made a huge bonfire over his
carcass, which was declared to be that of the largest lion they had ever
seen. Besides crunching the bone into splinters, he left[14] eleven teeth
wounds on the upper part of my arm.—Dr. Livingstone.
[1] ‘to be in the act of doing anything’, here bei etwas beschäftigt sein. Read
S. 87, N. 6, which rule applies in this case likewise.
[2] ‘in the act of
springing’, here = about (im Begriff) to spring.
[3] as he sprang, im Sprunge,
with which commence the clause.
Section 217. THE BURNING OF MOSCOW. (Comp. S. 156, N. 1 .) I.
On the 14th of September, 1812, while the rear-guard of the Russians
were in the act (S. 216, N. 1) of evacuating Moscow, Napoleon reached
the hill called the Mount of Salvation[1], because it is there where the
natives kneel and cross themselves at first sight of the Holy City.
Moscow seemed as lordly and striking[2] as ever, with the steeples of its
thirty churches, and its copper domes glittering in the sun; its palaces of
Eastern architecture mingled with trees, and surrounded with gardens[3]; and
its Kremlin[4],
a huge triangular mass of towers,[5] something between a
palace and a castle, which rose like a citadel out of the general[6] mass of
groves and buildings. But not a chimney sent up smoke[7], not a man
appeared on the battlements, or at the gates. Napoleon gazed[8] every
moment expecting to see a train of bearded boyards arriving to
(S. 19, N. 7) fling themselves at his feet, and place their wealth at his disposal.
His first exclamation was: “Behold at last that celebrated city!” His
next: “It was full[9] time!” His army, less regardful of the past or the
future[10], fixed their eyes on the goal of their wishes, and a shout of
“Moscow! Moscow!” passed from rank to rank.
Bonaparte, as if unwilling to encounter the sight of the empty streets,
stopped immediately on entering the first suburb. His troops were
quartered in the desolate city. During the first few hours after their
arrival[11],
an obscure rumour, which could not be traced[12], but one of
those which are sometimes found to get abroad before the approach of
some awful certainty[13], announced that the city would be endangered by
fire in the course of the night[14].
[5]einem ungeheuren, dreieckigen, mit vielen Türmen verzierten Gebäude;
something —
castle, welches zwischen einem Palaste und einem Schlosse die Mitte hielt; which = and.
[14] = that the town during the night would be exposed to a great conflagration.
Section 218. THE BURNING OF MOSCOW. II.
The report seemed to arise from[1] those evident circumstances
which rendered the event probable, but no one took any notice of it,
until[2] at midnight, when the soldiers were startled from their quarters
by the report that the town was in flames (App. § 28). The memorable
conflagration began amongst[3] the coachmakers’ warehouses and workshops
in the Bazaar, which was the richest district of the city. It was
imputed to accident, and the progress of the flames was subdued by the
exertions of the French soldiers. Napoleon, who had been roused by
the tumult, hurried to the spot[4];
and when the alarm seemed at an end[5],
he retired, not to his former quarters in the suburbs, but to the Kremlin,
the hereditary palace of the only sovereign whom he had ever treated as
an equal[6], and over whom his successful arms had now attained such an
apparently[7] immense superiority. Yet he did not suffer himself to be
dazzled by the advantages he had attained, but availed himself of the
light of the blazing Bazaar, to write to the Emperor proposals of peace
with his own hand[8]. They were despatched by a Russian officer of rank,
who had been disabled by indisposition from following the army. But
no answer was ever returned[9].
Next day the flames had disappeared, and the French officers
luxuriously[10] employed themselves (S. 87, N. 6) in selecting out of the
deserted palaces of Moscow, that which best pleased the fancy of each
for his residence. At night the flames again arose in the north and
west quarters of the city. As the greater part of the houses were built
of wood, the conflagration spread with the most dreadful rapidity.
[1] = to have arisen from (entstehen (aus),
conjugated with sein).
[2] Supply
‘at last’ here and omit the comma and the conj. ‘when’. To be startled
from one’s quarters, von seinem Nachtlager aufgeschreckt werden.
[7] apparently, wie es schien, which
place after the adv. ‘now’.
[8] Say ‘to write to the Emperor with his
own hands (eigenhändig, adj. used attributively) a letter, in which he offered him
proposals of peace (S. 76, N. 22, B).
[9] = The same (to agree with ‘proposals
of peace’) remained however unanswered.
[10]prachtliebend, which
use as adj. before ‘French officers’.
Section 219. THE BURNING OF MOSCOW. III.
This was at first imputed to the blazing brands [= pieces of wood]
and sparkles which were carried by the wind; but at length it was
observed, that, as often as the wind changed[1],—and it changed three
times in that terrible night,—new flames broke always forth in that
direction, where[2]
the existing gale was calculated to direct them on[3]
the Kremlin. These horrors were[4]
increased by the chance[5] of explosion.
There was, though as yet unknown to the French, a magazine of powder
in the Kremlin; besides that, a park of artillery, with its ammunition,
was drawn up[6] under the Emperor’s window. Morning (S. 3, N. 2)
came, and with it a dreadful scene. During the whole night, the
metropolis had glared[7] with a thick and suffocating atmosphere, of
almost palpable smoke. The flames defied the efforts of the French
soldiery, and it is said that the fountains of the city had been rendered
inaccessible, the water-pipes cut, and the fire-engines destroyed or
carried off.
Then came the reports of fire-balls having been found burning in
deserted houses; of men and women, that, like demons, had been seen
openly spreading the flames, and who were said to be[8] furnished with
combustibles for rendering their dreadful work more secure. Several
wretches against[9] whom such acts had been charged, were seized (S. 2, N. 1)
upon, and, probably without much inquiry, were shot on the spot. While
it was almost impossible to keep the roof of the Kremlin free of the
burning brands which the wind showered down[10], Napoleon watched
from the windows the course of the fire which devoured his fair conquest,
and the exclamation burst from him[11]: “These are indeed Scythians!”
[1] as — changed, bei jedem Windeswechsel; it = the wind.
[2] where = which
through (durch); to calculate, berechnen (auf); read S. 87, N. 6.
[8] The Emperor is said
to be dead, der Kaiser soll tot sein.
[9] against — charged = who were (waren)
accused (beschuldigen) of such a deed.
[10] = which were carried away by
(S. 106, N. 23) the wind in great number (Menge, f.).
[11] = and he exclaimed
involuntarily (unwillkürlich).
Section 220. THE BURNING OF MOSCOW. IV.
The equinoctial gales rose higher and higher[1] upon the third night,
and extended the flames, with which there was no longer any human
power of contending[2].
At the dead[3] hour of midnight, the Kremlin
itself was found to be on fire. A soldier of the Russian police, charged
with being incendiary[4], was turned over[5]
to the summary[6] vengeance of
the Imperial Guard. Bonaparte was then, at length, persuaded, by the
entreaties of all around him, to relinquish his quarters in the Kremlin, to
which, as the visible mark of his conquest, he had seemed to cling with
the tenacity of a lion holding a fragment of his prey. He encountered both
difficulty and danger in retiring from the palace, and, before he could gain
the city gate, he had to traverse with his suite streets arched with fire[7], and
in which the very air they breathed was suffocating. At length he gained
the open country, and took up his abode in a palace of the Czar’s called
Petrowsky, about a French league from the city. As he looked back on
the fire, which, under the influence of the autumnal wind, swelled and
surged round the Kremlin, like an infernal ocean around a sable Pandemonium[8],
he could not suppress the ominous expression: “This bodes
us great misfortune!”
The fire continued to triumph unopposed, and consumed in a few days
what it had cost centuries to raise. “Palaces and temples,” says a
Russian author, “monuments of art, and miracles of luxury, the remains
of ages which had passed away, and those which had been the creation of
yesterday; the tombs of ancestors, and the nursery-cradles[9] of the present
generation, were indiscriminately destroyed. Nothing was left of Moscow
save the remembrance of the city, and the deep resolution to avenge
its fall.”
The fire raged till the 19th of September with unabated violence, and
then began to slacken for want of fuel. It is said four-fifths of this great
city were laid in ruins.—Sir Walter Scott.
[1]immer stärker werden;
upon = during, with which commence the period.
[2] there was no longer ... of contending = could no longer contend.
We have lately[1] witnessed the most beautiful and interesting of all
German festivals—Christmas—which is celebrated in a style truly
characteristic of the[2] people. About the commencement of December,
the Christmarkt, or fair, was opened in the Römerberg[3], and has
continued to the present time. The booths, decorated with green
boughs, were filled with toys of various kinds, among which, during
the first days, the figure of St. Nicholas was conspicuous. There were[4]
bunches of wax candles to illuminate[5] the Christmas tree, gingerbread
with printed mottoes in poetry[6], beautiful little earthenware, basket-work,
and a wilderness[7]of
playthings. The sixth of December, being Nicholas
day[14], the booths were lighted up, and the square was filled with boys,
running from one stand to another, all shouting and talking together in
the most joyous confusion[8]. Nurses were going around, carrying the
smaller children in their arms, and parents bought presents decorated
with sprigs of pine and carried them away.
Many of the tables had bundles of rods with gilded bands, which were
to be used that evening by the persons who represented St. Nicholas.
In the family with whom we reside, one of our German friends dressed
himself[9] very grotesquely with a mask, fur robe, and long tapering cap.
He came in with a bunch of rods, a sack, and a broom for[10] sceptre.
After we all had received our share of the beating, he threw the contents
of his bag on the table, and while we were scrambling for the nuts and
apples, gave us many smart raps over the fingers. In many families
the children are made to say[11]:
“I thank you[12], Herr Nicholas,” and the
rods are hung up in the room until Christmas, to keep them in good
behaviour[13]. This[14]
was only a forerunner of the “Christkindchen’s”
coming. The Nicholas is the punishing spirit, and the “Christkindchen”
the rewarding one.
When this time was over, we all began preparing secretly our presents
for Christmas. Every day there was[1] a consultation about the things
which should be obtained[2]. It was so arranged that we should interchange
presents, but nobody must[3] know beforehand what he would
receive. What pleasure there was in all these secret purchases and preparations!
Scarcely anything was thought or spoken of but Christmas,
and every day the consultations became more numerous and secret. The
trees were bought some time before-hand, but as we Americans were to
witness the festival for the first time, we were not allowed to see them
prepared, in order that the effect might be as great as possible. The
market in the Römerberg Square grew constantly larger and more brilliant.
Every night it was illuminated with lamps and thronged with
people. Quite a forest sprang up in the street before our door. The old
stone house opposite, with the traces of so many centuries on its dark
face, seemed to stand in the midst of a garden. It was a pleasure to go
out every evening and see the children rushing to and fro, shouting and
selecting toys from the booths and talking all the time of the Christmas
that was so near (S. 48, N. 6). The poor people went with[4] their little
presents hid under their cloaks, lest their children might see them; every
heart was glad, and every countenance wore a smile of secret pleasure.
Finally, the day before Christmas arrived. The streets were so full,
I[5] could scarcely make my way through[6],
and the sale of trees went on[7]
more rapidly than ever. These were[8] usually branches of pine or fir,
set upright[9] in a little miniature garden of moss. When the lamps were
lighted at night, our street had the appearance of an illuminated garden.
We were prohibited from entering the rooms upstairs in which the grand
ceremony was to take place, being obliged[10] to take our seats in those
arranged for the guests, and to await with impatience the hour when the
“Christkindchen” should call us.
Several relatives of the family came (S. 104, N. 19), and, what was more
agreeable, they brought with them five or six children. I was anxious to
see how they would view the ceremony[1]. Finally, in the midst of an
interesting conversation, we heard the bell ringing at the head of[2] the
stairs. We all started up, and made for[3] the door. I ran up the steps
with the children at my heels, and at the top met[4] a blaze of dazzling
light, coming from the open door. In each room stood a great table, on
which presents were arranged, amid flowers and wreaths. From[5] the
centre rose the beautiful Christmas tree, covered with wax tapers to the
very top, which made the room nearly as light as day[6], while every bough
was hung with sweetmeats and gilded nuts. The children ran shouting
around the table, hunting[7] their presents, while the older persons had
theirs pointed out to them. I had a little library of German authors as
my share; and many of the others received quite valuable gifts.
But how beautiful was the heartfelt joy that shone on every countenance!
As each one discovered his presents, he embraced the givers, and
it was a scene of unmingled joy[8]. It is a glorious feast, this Christmas
time! What a chorus from happy hearts went up on that evening to
Heaven! Full of poetry and feeling, and glad associations, it is here
anticipated with delight, and leaves a pleasant memory behind it. We
may laugh at such simple festivals at home, and prefer to shake ourselves
loose from every shackle[9] that bears the rust of the past, but we
should certainly be happier if some of these beautiful old customs were
better honoured. They renew the bond of feeling[10] between families and
friends, and strengthen their kindly sympathy; even life-long associates
require occasions of this kind to freshen the tie that binds them together.—Bayard
Taylor, “Views Afoot.”
[9] Use this noun in the pl., Fesseln; bears = bear.
[10]
= love; to — together, um das sie verbindende Band fester zu schürzen.
Section 224. NEW-YEAR’S EVE ( S. 152, N. 1 ) IN GERMANY.
New-Year’s Eve is also favoured with a peculiar celebration[1] in Germany.
Everybody remains up and makes himself merry until midnight.
The Christmas trees are again lighted, and while the tapers are burning
out, the family play for[2] articles which they have purchased and hung on
the boughs. It is so arranged that each one shall win as much as he
gives, and the change[3] of articles creates much amusement. One of
the ladies rejoiced in the possession of a red silk handkerchief and a
cake of soap, while a cup and saucer and a pair of scissors fell to my lot.
As midnight drew near, the noise became louder in the streets, and companies
of people, some of them[4] singing in chorus, passed by on their
way to the Zeil[5]. Finally, it struck a quarter to twelve, the windows
were opened, and every one waited anxiously for the clock to strike
twelve. At the first sound, such a cry arose as one may imagine when
thirty or forty thousand persons all set their lungs going[6] at once.
Everybody in the house, in the street, over the whole city, shouted:
“Prost Neujahr[7]!”
In families, all the members embrace each other, with wishes of happiness
for the new year. Then the windows are thrown open, and they
cry to their neighbours or those passing by.
After we had exchanged congratulations, three of us set out for the
Zeil. The streets were full of people, shouting to one another and
to those standing at the open windows. We failed not to cry: “Prost
Neujahr!” wherever we saw a damsel at the window, and the words
came back to us more musically than we sent them. Along the Zeil
the spectacle was most singular. The great wide street was filled with
companies of men, marching up and down, while from the mass rang up
one deafening, unending shout, that seemed to pierce the black sky
above. The whole scene looked stranger and wilder in the flickering
light of the swinging lamps[8], and I could not help thinking it must resemble
a night in Paris, during the French Revolution.—Bayard Taylor,
“Views Afoot.”
[1] is — celebration = is celebrated in (auf) a peculiar way.
[7] Properly: Prosit Neujahr! A happy New-Year to
you!
[8] Before the introduction of gas, the lamps hung in the middle
of the street on ropes which were attached to the houses on both sides of the
street.
Section 225. THE TWO ROBBERS. I.
We often condemn in others what we practise ourselves.
(Alexander the Great in his tent. A man with a fierce countenance,
chained and fettered, brought before him.)
Alexander.—What, art thou the Thracian robber, of whose exploits I
have heard so much?
Robber.—I am a Thracian, and a soldier.
Alexander.—A soldier?—a thief, a plunderer, an assassin! the pest
of the country! I could honour thy courage, but I must detest and
punish thy crimes.
Robber.—What have I done of which you can complain[1]?
Alexander.—Hast thou not set at defiance my authority, violated the
public peace, and passed thy life[2]
in injuring the persons[3] and properties
of thy fellow-subjects[4]?
Robber.—Alexander! I am your captive. I must hear what you
please to say, and endure what you please to inflict. But my soul is
unconquered; and if I reply at all[5] to your reproaches, I will reply like
a free man.
Alexander.—Speak freely. Far be it from me to take[6] the advantage
of my power, to silence those with whom I deign to converse!
Robber.—I must then answer your question by another. How have
you passed your life?
Alexander.—Like a hero. Ask Fame[7], and she will tell you. Among
the brave, I have been the bravest; among sovereigns, the noblest;
among conquerors, the mightiest.
[1]sich über etwas beklagen.
Use the 2nd person Plural when the robber addresses
Alexander.
[7] ‘Fame,’ here Fama, die Göttin des Ruhmes.
Fame, or Fama, was a poetical
deity, represented as having wings and blowing a trumpet. A temple was
dedicated to her by the Romans.
Section 226. THE TWO ROBBERS. II.
Robber.—And does not Fame speak of me too? Was there
(S. 82, N. 7) ever a bolder captain of a more valiant band? Was there ever—but
I scorn to boast. You yourself know that I have not been easily
subdued.
Alexander.—Still, what are you but a robber, a base, dishonest
robber?
Robber.—And what is a conqueror? Have not you, too, gone about
the earth[1] like an evil genius, blasting[2]
the fair fruits of peace and industry,
plundering, ravaging, killing[3] without law, without justice, merely
to gratify an insatiable lust for dominion? All that I have done to a
single district with a hundred followers, you have done to whole nations
with a hundred thousand. If I have stripped individuals[4], you (S. 27, N. 8)
have ruined kings and princes. If I have burned a few hamlets,
you have desolated the most flourishing kingdoms and cities of the earth.
What is then the difference[5], but that, as you were born a king, and I a
private man[6], you have been able to become a mightier robber than I?
Alexander.—But if I have taken like a king, I have given like a king.
If I have subverted empires, I have founded greater. I have cherished[7]
arts, commerce, and philosophy.
Robber.—I, too, have freely given to the poor, what I took from the
rich. I have established order and discipline among the most ferocious
of mankind[8], and have stretched out my protecting arm over the oppressed.
I know, indeed, little of the philosophy you talk of; but I believe neither
you nor I will ever atone to the world for the mischiefs we have done.
Alexander.—Leave me!—Take off his chains, and use him well.
Are we, then, so much like?—Alexander and a Robber?—Let me reflect[9].—Dr.
Aikin.
[1] ‘to go about the earth’ here über die Erde her´ziehen,
conjugated with sein.
Two weeks ago[1] on board an English steamer, a little ragged boy,
aged nine years, was discovered on the fourth day of the voyage out
from Liverpool to New York, and carried before the first mate, whose
duty it was to deal with such cases. When questioned as to his object
in being stowed away[2], and who brought him on board, the boy, who had
a beautiful sunny face, and eyes that looked like the very mirrors of truth,
replied that his stepfather did it, because he could not afford[3] to keep
him, nor to pay his passage out to Halifax, where he had an aunt who[4]
was well off, and to whose house he was going. The mate did not
believe the story, in spite of the winning face and truthful[5] accents of
the boy. He had seen too much of stow-aways[6] to be easily deceived
by them, he said; and it was his firm conviction that the boy had been
brought on board and provided with food by the sailors. The little
fellow was very roughly handled in consequence. Day by day he was
questioned and re-questioned, but always with the same result. He did
not know a sailor on board, and his father alone had secreted him, and
given him the food which he ate. At[7] last the mate, wearied by the
boy’s persistence in the same story, and perhaps a little anxious to
inculpate the sailors, seized him one day by the collar, and dragging
him to the fore[8], told him that (S. 211, N. 9) unless he would tell
the truth in ten minutes from that time, he would hang him from the
yard-arm.
[1]Vor vierzehn Tagen,
after which place predicate and subject [one discovered],
since, as a rule, only one part of the adjuncts to the predicate
should be placed before it.
[6] ‘the stow-away’ may perhaps be rendered
by der Eingeschmuggelte.
[7] It will easily be seen that, on account of the
length of this period and of the many dependent clauses contained therein,
it requires an altogether different form of construction in German. The
author will, however, refrain from indicating the form to be used, the student
being by this time expected to have attained sufficient skill and practice for
dealing with such cases.
He then made him sit down under it on the deck. All around him
were the passengers and sailors of the watch, and in front of him stood
the inexorable mate, with his chronometer in his hand, and the other
officers of the ship by his side. It was the finest sight, said our informant[1],
that he ever beheld—to see the pale, proud, sorrowful face of that noble
boy, his head erect, his beautiful eyes bright through the tears that
suffused them. When eight minutes had fled[2], the mate told him he
had but two minutes to live, and advised him to speak the truth and save
his life; but he replied with the utmost simplicity and sincerity by asking
(S. 111, N. 6) the mate if he might pray. The mate said nothing, but
nodded his head, turned as pale as a ghost[3], and shook with trembling
like a reed with[4] the wind. And there, all eyes turned on him, the brave
and noble little fellow, this poor waif, whom society owned not, and
whose own stepfather could not care for him—there he knelt, with
clasped hands, and eyes turned up to heaven, while he repeated[5] audibly
the Lord’s Prayer, and prayed the Lord Jesus to take him to heaven.
There then occurred (S. 104, N. 19) a scene as at Pentecost. Sobs
broke[6] from the strong hard hearts, as the mate sprang forward to
the boy, and kissed and blessed him, and told him how sincerely he
believed his story, and how glad he was that he had been willing
enough to face death[7] and to sacrifice his life for the truth of his
word.—Rev. E. Davies.
[1] Place ‘said — informant (here Gewährsmann,
m.)’ after ‘that — beheld’.
[6]Ein Schluchzen entrang sich, followed by the Dat.
[7] to
face death, dem Tode ins Antlitz schauen, or dem Tode trotz´bieten.
Section 229. AN ORATION ON THE POWER OF HABIT. I.
I will now speak of a habit which I believe[1] is, more than any other,
debasing, degrading, and embruting to man[2],
both[3] physically, intellectually,
and morally. I am not going to give you an address[4]full of my
favourite theme [temperance], but I must speak of it[5]. I must speak of
it before this assembly, for I shall never see you again till we meet on
that day when we shall see things as they are[6]. Let me then speak of
one habit which, in its power, and[7]
influence, and[8] fascination, seems to
rear its head like a Goliath or Saul above all its kindred agencies of
demoralization; I allude to[9] the habit of using intoxicating liquors as a
beverage, until that habit becomes a fascination[10]. You will allow me
to give[11] my opinions upon these points freely. I consider drunkenness
not merely to be a moral evil, but also a physical evil, and[12] it depends a
great deal more upon the temperament, and the constitution, and disposition
of the young man, whether if he falls into the drinking usages of
society, it becomes a habit or not, than it does upon his strength of mind
or firmness of purpose[13].
Take a young man, and he shall be full of fire[14] and poetry. He
shall be[15] of a nervous temperament and generous heart; fond of society,
and open and manly in everything he does. Every one loves him.
That is the man most liable to become intemperate.
[4] to give an address to a person, einem eine Rede halten; of,
über.
[5]ich muß dasselbe aber wenigstens berühren (allude to).
[6] Render
‘for — are’ Liter. = for we shall see one another only (S. 109, N. 5) on that
day, when (wo) we shall see (schauen) the things in their true form (Gestalt, f.).
[15] The student will
do well to omit the words ‘He shall be’ and join this period to the preceding
one.
Section 230. AN ORATION ON THE POWER OF HABIT. II.
He enters[1] into the outer circle of the whirlpool, and throws care to
the winds[2]. There he thinks to stay, but he gets nearer and nearer
to the fatal gulf, until he is swept into the vortex before he dreamed of
danger. This thing, habit[3], comes gradually. Many a man who has
acquired[4]
a habit of drinking, but does not exactly proceed to excess[5],
is rescued simply by possessing certain physical qualities which his poor
unfortunate friend had not. You say: “I am not so foolish as to become
a drunkard!” So He thought once. You say: “I can leave it off[6] when
I like,” as if He at first had not had (App. § 33) the power to leave it off
when he liked. You say: “I have too sound an intellect to become
a drunkard,” as if He were born without an intellect. You say: “I have
too much pride in myself, too much self-respect,” as if He were not once
as proud as you. The way men acquire this habit, is by looking on
those[7] who proceed to excess as naturally inferior to themselves. The
difference between you and the drunkard is just this, that you could leave
off[8] the habit, but won’t; he would[9]
with all his heart and soul, but
cannot. I tell you, young men[10], that while the power of a bad habit
is stripping you of nerve [pl.], and (S. 10, N. 9) energy, and freshness of
feeling[11], it does not destroy your responsibility. You are accountable
to God for every power, and talent, and influence with which you have
been endowed.
Section 231. AN ORATION ON THE POWER OF HABIT. III.
If you say: “Should I find the practice by experience to be injurious,
I will give it up,” surely that is not common sense[1]. You might as well
say: “I will put my hand into the nest of the rattlesnake, and when I
find out that he has stuck his fangs into me[2], I will draw it out and get
cured.”
I remember riding from[3] Buffalo to the Niagara Falls, and said to a
gentleman: “What river is that, Sir?” “That,” he said, “is Niagara
River[4].” “Well, it is a beautiful stream,” said I, “bright, and fair, and
glossy; how far off are the rapids[5]?” “Only a mile or two,” was the
reply. “Is it possible that (S. 66, N. 15) only a mile or two from us we
shall find the water in the turbulence which it must show when near the
falls?” “You will find it so, Sir.” And so I did find it; and that first
sight of the Niagara I shall never forget. Now, launch your boat on
that Niagara river; it is bright, smooth, beautiful, and glossy. There
is a ripple at the bow[6],
and the silvery wake[7] you leave behind adds to
your enjoyment. Down the stream you glide; oars, sails, and helm
are in proper trim, and you set out[8]
on your pleasure excursion[9].
Suddenly some one cries out from the bank: “Young men, ahoy[10]!”
“What is it[11]!”—“The
rapids are below you[12]!”—“Ha, ha! we have
heard of the rapids, but we are not so foolish as to get there[13]. If we
go [= If it goes] too fast, then up with the helm[14], then set the mast in
the socket[15],
hoist the sail, and speed to land[16].
Then on[17], boys;
don’t be alarmed—there’s no danger!”
Section 232. AN ORATION ON THE POWER OF HABIT. IV.
“Young men, ahoy, there!”—“What is it?”—“The rapids are below
you!”—“Ha, ha! we will laugh and quaff; all things delight us. What
care we for the future? No man ever saw it. ‘Sufficient for the day is
the evil thereof[1].’
We will enjoy life while we may[2]; we will catch
pleasure as it flies. This is enjoyment; time enough[3] to steer out of
danger when we are driving swiftly with the current.”—“Young men,
ahoy!”—“What is it?”—“Beware! Beware! The rapids are below
you!”—Now you see water foaming[4] all around you.—See how fast you
pass that point!—Up with the helm!—Now turn[5]!—Pull
hard[6]—quick!—quick!—pull
for your lives!—pull till[7] the blood starts from the
nostrils, and the veins stand like whipcord upon the brow! Set the mast
in the socket! hoist the sail! Ah, ah!—it is too late! Shrieking,
cursing, howling, blaspheming, over you go[8]!—Thousands go over the
rapids of Intemperance[9] every year, through the power of evil habit,
crying out all the while[10]: “When I find out that it is injuring me, I
will give it up!” The power of evil habit, I repeat, is fascinating[11], is
deceptive; and man may go on arguing and coming to conclusions
while on the way down to destruction[12].—J. B. Gough.
[1]Es ist genug, daß ein jeglicher Tag seine eigene Plage habe!
[12] and — destruction = and often we are
still occupied with arguing a matter (eine Sache gründlich zu erörtern) in order
to come (gelangen) to a definite conclusion, when we are (sich befinden) already
on the way to destruction (Verderben, n.).
Section 233. A CURIOUS STORY [1] . I.
We heard a curious story at Tristan[2] about two Germans who had
settled nearly two years before on Inaccessible Island[3]. Once a year,
about the month of December, the Tristan men go[4]
to the two outlying
islands to pick up the few seals which are still to be found there. On
two of these occasions they had seen the Germans, and within a few
months smoke had risen from the island, which they attributed[5] to their
having fired (S. 161, N. 21) some of the brushwood; but as they had
seen or heard nothing of them since, they thought the probability was
that they had perished. Captain Nares[6] wished to visit the other islands,
and to ascertain the fate of the two men was an additional object in
doing so[7].
Next morning we were close under Inaccessible Island, the second in
size of the little group of three. The ship was surrounded by multitudes
of penguins[8], and as few of us had any previous personal acquaintance
with this eccentric form of life[9], we followed their movements with great
interest. The penguin as a rule swims under water, rising now and then
and resting on the surface, like one of the ordinary water-birds, but more
frequently with its body entirely covered, and only lifting its head from
time to time to breathe.
The structure of Inaccessible Island is very much the same as Tristan,
only the pre-eminent feature[10] of the latter, the snowy cone, is wanting.
A wall of volcanic rocks, about the same height as the cliff at Tristan,
and which one is inclined to believe to have been at one time continuous
with it, entirely surrounds Inaccessible Island, falling for the
most part sheer[11] into the sea, and it seems that it slopes sufficiently
to allow a tolerably easy ascent to the plateau on the top at one point
only.
[1] This story is taken from Mr. W. J. J. Spry’s most interesting account
of ‘The Cruise of the Challenger’. The Tristan d’Acunha group of islands
(die Erfrischungsinseln), so named from the Portuguese navigator who discovered
it early in the 16th century, lies in mid-ocean, about 1300 miles south of
St. Helena and 1500 miles west of the Cape of Good Hope, nearly on a line
between the Cape of Good Hope and Cape Horn; it is thus probably the
most isolated and remote of all the abodes of men. The group consists of
the larger Island of Tristan and two smaller islands—Inaccessible Island, about
18 miles south-west from Tristan, and Nightingale Island, twenty miles south
of the main island. Tristan only is permanently inhabited, the other two are
visited from time to time by sealers. In the year 1829 Tristan was inhabited
by 27 families; in 1836 it possessed a population of 42; in 1852 the population
had risen to 85, and in 1867 this number was only exceeded by one.
[2]Auf
der Insel Tristan, which place at the head of the period; about, über, with Acc.
[3] The author finds that the best German maps use the English name of ‘Inaccessible
Island’ unaltered. This is also the case with ‘Nightingale Island’.
[4]fahren; ‘to go’, when used in the sense of ‘travelling, riding (in a
carriage), driving, sailing, etc.’, is mostly rendered by reisen (generally
used for greater distances) or by fahren. When used in the
sense of ‘riding on horseback,’ it is rendered by reiten.
[6] Captain Nares was the commander
of ‘The Challenger’ at that time.
[7] and — so = and as he was anxious
(begierig) to ascertain (erforschen) the fate of the two men, the voyage [there,
dahin] was at once determined upon.
There is a shallow bay in which the ship anchored in fifteen fathoms
on the east side of the island; and there, as in Tristan, a narrow belt of
low ground, extending for about a mile along the shore, is interposed
between the cliff and the sea. A pretty waterfall tossed itself down,
about the middle of the bay, over the cliff from the plateau above. A
little way down it was nearly lost in spray, like the Staubbach of
Schaffhausen, and collected itself again into a rivulet[1], where it regained
the rock at the lower level. A hut built of stones and clay, and roofed
with spars and thatch, lay in a little hollow[2] near the waterfall, and the
two Germans, in excellent health and spirits, but enraptured at the sight
of the ship and longing for a passage anywhere out of the island, were[3]
down on the beach, waiting for the first boat. Their story is a curious
one[4], and as Captain Nares agreed[5]
to take them to the Cape, we had
ample time to get an account of their adventures, and to supplement
from their experience such crude notions of the nature of the place as we
could gather during our short stay[6].
Frederick and Gustav Stoltenhoff are sons of a dyer in Aix-la-Chapelle
(Aachen). Frederick, the elder, was employed in a merchant’s office in
Aix-la-Chapelle at the time of the Franco-German war (1870). He was
called on to serve in the German army, where he attained the rank of a
lieutenant, and took part in the siege of Metz and Thionville. At the
end of the campaign he was discharged, and returned home to find his
old situation filled up.
[1]gestaltete sich jedoch wieder zu einem kleinen Bache.
[6] Let the student endeavour to construe this passage
by means of the attributive construction, which will prove excellent
practice.
Section 235. A CURIOUS STORY. III.
In the meantime, his younger brother, Gustav, who was a sailor and
had already made several trips, had joined[1] on the 1st of August, 1870,
at Greenock, as an ordinary seaman, the English ship “Beacon Light,”
bound for Rangoon. On the way out[2], the cargo, which consisted of
coal, caught fire[3] when they were from[4]
six to seven hundred miles
north-west of Tristan d’Acunha, and for (S. 166, N. 10) three days all
hands[5] were doing their utmost to extinguish the fire. On the third day,
the hatches, which had been battened down, to exclude the air, blew up[6],
the main hatch carrying overboard[7] the second mate who had been
standing on it at the time of the explosion. The boats had been provisioned
beforehand, ready to leave the ship. Two of the crew were
drowned through one of the boats being swamped[8], and the survivors, to
the number of sixteen, were stowed in the long-boat. Up to this time
the ship had been nearing Tristan with a fair wind at the rate of[9] six
knots an hour[10], so that they had now only about three hundred miles
to go. They abandoned the ship on Friday; on Saturday afternoon they
sighted Tristan, and on the following day a boat came off to their assistance
and towed them ashore.
The shipwrecked crew remained for eighteen days at Tristan d’Acunha,
during which time they were treated with all kindness and hospitality.
They were relieved by the ill-fated “Northfleet,” bound for Aden with
coal, and Gustav Stoltenhoff found his way back to Aix-la-Chapelle.
[9] ‘at the rate of’, referring to the
rapidity of motion, is rendered by ‘mit einer Schnelligkeit von’, but when
referring to price, is generally rendered by ‘zum Preise von’.
[10]an
hour, in der Stunde, per Stunde, or die Stunde. He receives 20 marks
a week, er erhält 20 Mark die Woche (or wöchentlich).
Section 236. A CURIOUS STORY. IV.
During his stay at Tristan he heard that a large number of seals were
to be had among the islands[1], and he seems to have been greatly pleased
with the Tristaners and to have formed a project of returning there.
When he got home, his brother had just got back from the war and
was unemployed; he infected him with his notion[2],
and the two agreed[3]
to join in a venture to Tristan to see what they could (App. § 33) make[4]
by seal-hunting and barter.
They accordingly sailed for[5] St. Helena in August 1871, and on the
6th of November left St. Helena for Tristan in an American whaler
bound on a cruise[6] in the South Atlantic. The captain of the whaler,
who had been often at Tristan d’Acunha, had some doubt of the reception
which the young men would get[7] if they went as permanent
settlers[8] there, and he spoke so strongly of the advantages of Inaccessible
Island, on account of the greater productiveness of the soil, and of its
being the centre[9] of the seal-fishing, that they changed their plans and
were landed on the west side of Inaccessible Island on the 27th of
November 1871,—early in summer. A quarter of an hour after, the
whaler departed, leaving them the only inhabitants of one of the most
remote spots on the face of the earth. They do not seem, however, to
have been in the least depressed by their isolation.
The same day the younger brother clambered up to the plateau with
the help of the tussock grass[10], in search of goats or pigs, and remained
there all night, and on the following day the two set to work to build
themselves a hut for shelter. They had reached the end of their voyage
by no means unprovided, and the inventory of their belongings[11] is
curious.
They had an old whale-boat[1] which they had bought at St. Helena,
with mast, sails, and oars, three spars for a roof, a door, and a glazed
window; a wheel-barrow, two spades and a shovel, two pickaxes, a saw,
a hammer, two chisels, two or three gimlets, and some nails; a kettle,
a frying-pan, two sauce-pans, knives and forks, and some crockery; two
blankets each, and empty covers[2] which they afterwards filled with sea-birds’
down. They had a lamp, a bottle of oil, and six dozen boxes of
Bryant and May’s matches.
For internal use[3] they had two hundred pounds of flour, two hundred
pounds of rice, one hundred pounds of biscuits, twenty pounds of coffee,
ten pounds of tea, thirty pounds of sugar, three pounds of table-salt, a
little pepper, eight pounds of tobacco, five bottles of gin, six bottles
of Cape wine[4], six bottles of vinegar, and some Epsom salts. A barrel
of coarse salt was provided for curing seal-skins, and forty empty casks
were intended for oil. Their arms and ammunition consisted of a short
English rifle, an old German fowling-piece, two and a half pounds of
powder, two hundred bullets, and four sheath-knives[5]. The captain of
the whaler gave them some seed potatoes, and they had a collection of
the ordinary garden seeds.
When they had been four days on the island, they had a visit from
a party of men from Tristan, who had come on their annual sealing
excursion. They were ten days on Inaccessible, and were very friendly
in their intercourse with the new comers.
[1] the whale-boat, das beim Wallfischfang gebräuchliche Boot. We have not
a compound noun to render the English term. Say ‘They had an old boat,
which had been used (benutzt) for whale-fishing and which they had bought in
(S. 46, N. 6) the Island of St. Helena.
They told them that the north side of the island was better suited for
a settlement, and transported all their goods (S. 236, N. 11) thither in
one of their boats. Being familiar with the place, they showed them
generally their way about and the different passes by which the plateau
might be reached, and they taught them how to build[1] to withstand the
violent winds, and how to thatch with tussock-grass. Immediately after
they left, the brothers set about building a house and clearing some
ground[2] for potatoes and other vegetables. They killed nineteen seals,
and prepared the skins, but they were unable to make any[3] quantity of oil.
Towards the end of the sealing season their boat got damaged in the
surf, and they were obliged to cut it in two[4], patch up the best half of it,
and use it as best they could[5] in smooth weather, close to shore.
They went from time to time to the upper plateau and shot goats and
pigs. When they first arrived, they counted a flock of twenty-three goats;
three of these were killed during the summer of 1871-1872 by the
Tristan people (S. 157, N. 4), and six by themselves; the remaining
fourteen remained over the winter of 1872. The flesh of the goats they
found extremely delicate. Pigs were much more numerous, but their
flesh was not so palatable, from their feeding[6] principally on sea-birds;
that of the boars was especially rank. They found the pigs very valuable,
however, in yielding an abundant supply of lard[7], which they used for
frying their potatoes.
[7] in — lard = on account of their
lard (Schmalz, n.).
Section 239. A CURIOUS STORY. VII.
In the month of April 1872, a singular misfortune befell them. While
burning some of the brushwood below to make a clearing, the tussock-grass
in the gully[1],
by which they had been in the habit[2] of ascending
the cliff, caught fire, and as it had been only by its assistance that they
had been able to scramble up to the plateau, their only hunting-ground was
now inaccessible from the strip of beach on which their hut and garden
stood, which was closed in on either side by a headland jutting into the
sea. While their half-boat remained seaworthy, they were able to paddle
round in fine weather to the west side of the island, where there was an
access to the top; but the “sea-cart,” as they called it, was washed off
the beach and broken up in June, and after that the only way they had
of reaching the plateau was by swimming round the headland—a risky
feat, even in the finest weather, in these wild regions.
In winter it was found to be impossible to reach the terrace, and as
their supply of food was low, they experienced considerable privations
during their first winter. Their daily allowance of food was reduced to
a quantity just sufficient to maintain life, and in August they were little
better than skeletons[3].
Help was, however, near. Early in August a multitude of penguins
landed[4] hard by their hut,—stupid[5]
animals, which will scarcely get out
of one’s way, and are easily knocked down with a stick[6], and with fleshy
breasts, wholesome enough, though with a rather fishy taste; and in the
end of August the females began to lay large blue eggs, sufficiently delicate
in flavour.
[5] Begin a new period
here and say: ‘These are stupid animals’, etc.
[6] and — stick, sich leicht
mit einem Stock niederschlagen lassen; and with — taste = and have a fleshy breast,
which (supply zwar here) yields (bieten) a wholesome food, but (jedoch) possesses
a rather (etwas) fishy taste.—The whole period is difficult to translate
into good German; the author considers it therefore necessary to assist the
student.
Section 240. A CURIOUS STORY. VIII.
A French barque hove-to off the beach[1] in the middle of September,
and in her they shipped their seal-skins, and bartered penguins’ eggs with
her for biscuits and tobacco. Had the bark arrived a week earlier, the
brothers would have left the island; but the eggs had set them up again[2],
and they determined to remain a little longer. In October, a schooner,
which proved[3] to be “The Themis,” a whaler from the cape of Good
Hope, was seen standing towards the island. A gale of wind blew[4] her
off for a couple of days, but she returned and landed some men from
Tristan, who had crossed[5]
to see what the hermits were about[6]. Their
guests remained a day and a half, and then returned to Tristan.
Early in November, that is, early in the second summer, the brothers
thus swam round the eastern headland:—Frederick with their blankets,
the rifle, and a spare suit of clothes[7]—Gustav with powder, matches, and
the kettle in an oil-cask. They mounted by the help of the tussock-grass
to the top of the cliff, went over to the west side of the plateau, and there
built a small hut, where they remained a month, living on goats’ flesh
and fresh pork.
On the 10th of December they returned home, mended their thatch,
dug[8] the early potatoes, and put the garden in order.
On the 19th of December the Tristan men made their second sealing
expedition. They remained nine days on the island, and killed forty
seals, one sea-elephant, and eight of the remaining[9] twelve goats. They
left some flour in exchange for an oil-cask, and this was the last communication
between the brothers and the outer world until the “Challenger”
called eight months later.
In January Frederick swam round the point[1] again, and mounted the
cliff. He shot four pigs, ran[2] the fat into buckets, and threw the hams
down to his brother on the beach below. He saw the four last goats,
but spared[3] them to increase their number. In February a boat came
to the west side from Tristan, and its crew killed the four goats, and
departed without communicating with the Stoltenhoffs[4].
The relations between the Tristan people and the brothers does not
appear to have been so cordial latterly as it was at first, and the Stoltenhoffs
believe that[5] the intention of their neighbours in killing the
goats, and in delaying from time to time to bring them some live stock,
which they had promised them, was to force them to leave the island.
It may have been so, for the Tristan men had been in the habit of
making a yearly sealing expedition to Inaccessible Island, and no doubt
the presence of the energetic strangers lessened their chance of success.
In March the brothers once more swam round the point, and
ascended the cliff. After staying on the plateau together for a few
days, it was settled that Frederick should remain above to procure
(S. 58, N. 8) a stock of lard for the winter, Gustav returning to the hut and
storing it[6]. When a pig was killed, the hide, with the fat in it, was
rolled up, secured with thongs of skin, and thrown over the cliff, where
Gustav then ran the lard into a cask.
During the second winter, the privations of the brothers do not seem
to have been great. They were getting accustomed to their mode of
life, and had always sufficient food, such as it was[1]. They were remarkably
well educated. Both could speak and read English fluently, and
the elder had a good knowledge of French. Their library consisted of
eight volumes: Schoedler’s Natural History, a German Atlas, Charles
O’Malley, Captain Morrell’s Voyages, two old volumes of a monthly
magazine[2], Hamlet and Coriolanus with French notes, and Schiller’s
poems. These books they came to know almost by heart[3], but they
had considerable resources in themselves, in the intelligent interest they
took in the ever-changing appearances of nature.
When the “Challenger” arrived, they were preparing for another summer;
but the peculiar food, and the want of variety in it, were beginning to tell
upon them, for all their original stores were exhausted, with the exception
of the Epsom salts, which were untouched, neither of them having had an
hour’s illness during their sojourn; and they were heartily glad of a
passage to the Cape.
Frederick came to the ship before we left for the South in December.
He was then comfortably settled in a situation in a merchant’s office in
Cape Town, and Gustav was on his way home to see his people[4] before
resuming the thread of his roving sailor’s life.—W. J. J. Spry, “The
Cruise of the Challenger.”
[1] and — was = and the food at their disposal (und die ihnen zu Gebote stehende
Nahrung) was at least always sufficient (ausreichend).
Section 243. HOW THE BANK OF ENGLAND WAS HUMBLED. I.
Once, many years ago, a bill of exchange for a large amount was
drawn[1] by Anselm Rothschild, of Frankfort, on Nathan Rothschild, of
London. When the gentleman who held it arrived in London, Nathan
was away, and he took the bit of paper to the Bank of England and
asked them to discount it.
The managers were very stiff. With haughty assurance they informed
the holder that they discounted only their own bills; they said they had
nothing to do with the bills of private persons. They did not stop to
reflect with whom they had to deal. Those shrewd old gentlemen in
charge of the bank of the realm should have known and remembered
that that bit of paper bore the signature of a man more powerful than
they—more powerful, because independent of a thousand-and-one hampers
that rested upon them. “Umph,” exclaimed Nathan Rothschild,
when the answer of the Bank was repeated to him. “Private persons!
I will let these important gentlemen know with what sort of private persons
they have to deal.”
And then Nathan Rothschild went to work. He had an object in
view[2]—to
humble the Bank of England—and he meant to do it[3]. He
sent agents to the Continent and through the United Kingdom, and
three weeks were spent in gathering up notes of the smaller denominations
of the Bank’s own issue[4].
One morning, bright and early, Nathan Rothschild presented himself
at the Bank, and drew forth from his pocket-book a five-pound note,
which he desired to have cashed. Five sovereigns were counted out to
him, the officers looking with astonishment upon seeing Baron Rothschild
troubling himself personally about so trivial a matter. The
baron examined the coins one by one, and, having satisfied himself of
their good quality, slipped them into a canvas bag, and then drew out
and presented another five-pound note. The same operation was repeated,
save that the baron took the trouble to take a small pair of
scales from his pocket to weigh one of the pieces, for the law gave him
that right.
[1] to draw a bill of exchange, einen Wechsel ziehen.
[3]und er wollte alles daran setzen, dies Ziel zu erreichen.
[4] in
gathering — issue, die auf kleinere Summen lautenden, von der englischen Bank in
Umlauf gesetzten Banknoten aufzukaufen.
Section 244. HOW THE BANK OF ENGLAND WAS HUMBLED. II.
Two—three—ten—twenty—a hundred—five hundred five-pound notes
were presented and cashed. When one pocket-book was emptied,
another was brought forth; and when a canvas bag had been filled with
gold, it was passed to a servant who was in waiting. And so he went on
until the hour arrived for closing the Bank; at the same time he had
nine of the employés of his house engaged in the same work. So it
resulted that ten men of the house of Rothschild had kept every teller[1] of
the Bank busy for seven hours, and exchanged somewhere about £22,000.
Not another customer had been able to get his wants attended to. The
English like oddity. Let a man do anything original, and they will
generally applaud. So the people of the Bank contrived to smile[2] at
the eccentricity of Baron Rothschild, and when the time came for closing
the Bank, they were not a tenth part so much annoyed as were[3] the customers
from abroad[4] whose business had not been attended to. The
bank officials smiled that evening, but—
On the following morning, when the bank opened[5], Nathan Rothschild
appeared again, accompanied by his nine faithful helpers, this time
bringing with him, as far as the street entrance, four heavy two-horse
drays, for the purpose of carting away the gold, for to-day the baron had
bills of a larger amount. Ah! the officers of the Bank smiled no more,
and a trembling seized them when the banker monarch said, with stern
simplicity and directness:
“Ah! these gentlemen refuse to take my bills! Be it so. I am resolved
that I will not keep one of theirs. It is the House of Rothschild
against the Bank of England[6].” The Bank of England opened its eyes
very wide. Within a week, the House of Rothschild could be demanding
gold which it did not possess. The gentlemen at the head of affairs
saw very plainly that in a determined tilt[7]
the Bank must go to the wall[8].
There was but one way out of the dilemma, and they took it. Notice
was at once publicly given[9] that thenceforth the Bank of England would
cash the bills of Rothschild the same as its own.—Tit-Bits.
Morgan, the gay and handsome son of a low Irish farmer, tired of
home, went to take the chances of the world, and seek his fortune. By
what means he traversed England, or made his way to France, is not
told. But he at length crossed France, and, probably without much
knowledge or much care whether he was moving to the north or the south
pole, found himself in the Prussian territory. This was in the day of
Frederick William I. (1713-1740), famous for his tall regiment of guards.
He had but one ambition, that of inspecting twice a day a regiment of a
thousand grenadiers, not one of whom was less than six feet and a half
high. Morgan was an Irish giant, and was instantly seized by the Prussian
recruiting sergeants, who forced him to “volunteer” into the tall
battalion. This turn of fate was totally out of the Irishman’s calculation;
and the prospect of carrying a musket till his dying day on the Potsdam
parade[2], after having made up his mind to live by his wits and rove the
world, more than once tempted him to think of leaving his musket and
honour behind him, and fairly trying his chance for escape. But the
attempt was always found impracticable; the frontier was too closely
watched, and Morgan still marched up and down the Potsdam parade
with a disconsolate heart, when one evening a Turkish recruit was
brought in; for the king looked to nothing but the thews and sinews of
a man, and the Turk was full seven feet high.
“How much did his majesty give for catching that heathen?” said
Morgan to his corporal. “Four hundred dollars[3],” was the answer.
Morgan burst out into an exclamation of astonishment at this waste of royal
treasure upon a Turk. “Why, they cannot be got for less,” replied the
corporal. “What a pity my five brothers cannot hear of it!” said Morgan,
“I am a dwarf to any one of them, and the sound of half the
money would bring them all over immediately.” As the discovery of a
tall recruit was the well-known road to favoritism, five were worth at
least a pair of colours to the corporal[4]. The conversation was immediately
carried to the sergeant, and from him, through the gradation of officers, to
the colonel, who took the first opportunity of mentioning it to the king.
The colonel was instantly ordered to question Morgan; but he at once
lost all recollection of the subject. “He had no brothers; he had made
the regiment his father, and mother, and relations, and there he hoped to
live and die.” But he was urged still more strongly, and at length confessed
that he had brothers, even above the regimental standard, but
that nothing on earth could stir them from their spades.
[4]
five — corporal, so würden fünf derselben dem Korporal wenigstens eine Fähnrichsstelle
eintragen.
Section 246. MORGAN PRUSSIA. II.
After some time the king inquired for the five recruits, and was indignant
when he was told of the impossibility of enlisting them. “Send the
fellow himself,” he exclaimed, “and let him bring them back.” The
order was given; but Morgan was broken-hearted “at the idea of so
long an absence from the regiment.” He applied to the colonel to have
the order revoked, or at least given to some one else. But this was out
of the question, for the king’s word was always irrevocable; and Morgan,
with a disconsolate face, prepared to set out upon his mission. But
a new difficulty struck him. “How was he to make his brothers come,
unless he showed them the recruiting money?” This objection was at
last obviated by the advance of a sum equal to about three hundred
pounds sterling, as a first instalment for the purchase of his family. Like
a loyal grenadier the Irishman was now ready to attempt anything for
his colonel or his king, and Morgan began his journey. But, as he was
stepping out of the gates of Potsdam, another difficulty occurred; and
he returned to tell the colonel that of all people existing the Irish were
the most apt to doubt a traveller’s story, they being in the habit of a
good deal of exercise in that style themselves[1]; and that when he should
go back to his own country, and tell them of the capital treatment and
sure promotion that a soldier met with in the guards, the probability was,
that they would laugh in his face. As to the money, “there were some
who would not scruple to say that he stole it, or tricked some one out of
it. But, undoubtedly, when they saw him walking back only as a
common soldier, he was sure they would not believe a syllable, let him
say what he would about rising in the service.”
The objection was intelligible enough, and the colonel represented it
to the king, who, doubly outrageous at the delay, swore a grenadier’s
oath, ordered Morgan to be made a sub-lieutenant, and, with sword and
epaulets, sent him instantly across the Rhine to convince his five brothers
of the rapidity of Prussian promotion. Morgan flew to his home
in the county of Carlow, delighted the firesides for many a mile round with
his having outwitted a king and a whole battalion of grenadiers, laid out
his recruiting money on land, and became a man of estate at the expense
of the Prussian treasury.
One ceremony remains to be recorded. Once a year, on the anniversary
of the day on which he left Potsdam and its giants behind, he
climbed a hill within a short distance of his house, turned himself in the
direction of Prussia, and, with the most contemptuous gesture which he
could contrive, bade good-bye to his majesty. The ruse was long a
great source of amusement, and its hero, like other heroes, bore through
life the name earned by his exploit—Morgan Prussia.—King George
The Fourth.
[1] they being — themselves, da auch sie im Erzählen von dergleichen Geschichten
eine große Fertigkeit besäßen.
Section 247. THE TERRIBLE WINTER OF 1784.
About the middle of the month of April, in the year 1784, three
hundred thousand miserable beings, dying from cold and hunger, groaned
in Paris alone—in that Paris where, in spite of the boast that scarcely
another city contained so many rich people, nothing had been prepared
to prevent the poor from perishing of cold and wretchedness.
For the last four months, the same leaden sky had driven the poor
from the villages into the town, as it sent the wolves from the woods
into the villages.
No more bread. No more wood.
No more bread for those who felt this cold—and no more wood to bake
it. All the provisions which had been collected, Paris had devoured in
a month. The Provost, short-sighted and incapable, did not know how
to procure for Paris, which was under his care, the wood which might
have been collected in the neighbourhood. When it froze, he said the
frost prevented the horses from bringing it; when it thawed, he pleaded want
of horses and conveyances. Louis XVI., ever good and humane, always
ready to attend to the physical wants of his people, although he overlooked
their social ones, began by contributing a sum of 200,000 francs
for horses and carts, and insisting on their immediate use. Still the
demand continued greater than the supply.
At first no one was allowed to carry away from the public timber-yard
more than a cart-load of wood; then that was limited to half the
quantity. Soon long strings of people might be seen waiting outside the
timber-yards, as they were afterwards seen at the bakers’ shops. The
king gave away the whole of his private income in charity. He procured
3,000,000 francs by a grant and applied it to the relief of the sufferers,
declaring that every other need must give way before that of cold and
famine. The queen, on her part, gave 500 louis from her purse. The
convents, the hospitals, and the public buildings were thrown open as
places of asylum for the poor, who came in crowds for the sake of the
fires that were kept there.
They kept hoping for a thaw, but heaven seemed inflexible. Every
evening the same copper-coloured sky disappointed their hopes; and
the stars shone bright and clear as funeral torches through the long,
cold nights, which hardened again and again the snow that fell during
the day. All day long, thousands of workmen, with spades and shovels,
cleared away the snow from before the houses, so that on each side
of the streets, already too narrow for the traffic, rose a high, thick wall,
blocking up the way. Soon these masses of snow and ice became so
large that the shops were obscured by them, and they were obliged to
allow it to remain where it fell.
Paris could do no more. She gave in, and allowed the winter to
do its worst. December, January, February, and March passed thus,
although now and then a few days’ thaw changed the streets, whose
sewers were blocked up, into running streams. Horses were drowned,
and carriages destroyed, in the streets, some of which could only be
traversed in boats. People went to the markets to see the fisherwomen
serving their customers with immense leathern boots on, inside which
their trousers were pushed, and with their petticoats tucked round their
waists, all laughing, gesticulating, and splashing each other as they stood
in the water.
These thaws, however, were but transitory; the frost returned, harder
and more obstinate than ever, and recourse was had to sledges, pushed
along by skaters, or drawn by roughshod horses along the causeways,
which were like polished mirrors. The Seine, frozen many feet deep, had
become the place of rendezvous for all idlers, who assembled there to skate
or slide, until, warmed by exercise, they ran to the nearest fire, lest the
perspiration should freeze upon them. All trembled for the time when,
the water communications being stopped, and the roads impassable,
provisions could no longer be sent in, and began to fear that Paris would
perish from want.
The king, in this extremity, called a council. They decided to implore
all bishops, abbés, and monks to leave Paris and retire to their dioceses
or convents; and all those magistrates and officials who, preferring the
opera to their duties, had crowded to Paris, to return to their homes;
for all these people used large quantities of wood in their hotels, and
consumed no small amount of food. There were still the country
gentlemen, who were also to be entreated to leave. But M. Lenoir,
lieutenant of police, observed to the king that, as none of these people
were criminals, and could not therefore be compelled to leave Paris in
a day, they would probably be so long thinking about it, that the thaw
would come before their departure, which would then be more hurtful
than useful.
All this care and pity of the king and queen, however, excited the
ingenious gratitude of the people, who raised monuments to them, as
ephemeral as the feelings which prompted them. Obelisks and pillars
of snow and ice, engraved with their names, were to be seen all over
Paris.
At the end of March the thaw began, but by fits and starts, constant
returns of frost prolonging the miseries of the people. Indeed, in the
beginning of April it appeared to set in harder than ever, and the half-thawed
streets, frozen again, became so slippery and dangerous, that
nothing was seen but broken limbs and accidents of all kinds. The
snow prevented the carriages from being heard, and the police had
enough to do, through the reckless driving of the aristocracy, to preserve
from the wheels those who were spared by cold and hunger.—After
Alexander Dumas, “The Queen’s Necklace.”
Section 248. A STORY WORTH READING. I.
Soon after the promulgation of Methodism[1] in England it spread with
great rapidity over the counties of Devon and Cornwall, and especially
among the miners and lower orders. For a long period after its introduction
the clergy and higher classes of society in the west of England
manifested a dislike to the new doctrines which can scarcely be imagined
in these days of modern toleration. It was thought by many young
gentlemen good sport to break the windows and nail up the doors of a
Methodist chapel[2].
The robbery of a Wesleyan preacher[3], as a spree,
by two young gentlemen, became the subject of an investigation, and the
frolicsome young men had to pay very dearly for their practical joke.
Among the uninstructed local preachers was one known by the name
of “The Old Gardener.” This old man was no common character—indeed
he was quite original, and by far the most popular preacher
among the disciples of John Wesley in the vicinity.
He kept a small nursery garden about two miles from the town of
St. A——, working hard at his occupation of gardener by day, and
praying and preaching to his fellow-sinners, as he called them, in the
evening. He lived in the poorest manner, giving away all the surplus of
his earnings in charity, distributing Bibles, and promoting to the utmost
of his ability the extension of Methodism. His complexion was a sort
of dirty, dark, iron grey, and his whole appearance lean and grotesque.
Although extremely ignorant, he possessed no small degree of cunning;
of this the following incident affords ample evidence:—
“The Old Gardener” was once subjected to a burglary and attempt at
robbery. He lived with his wife in a small and somewhat dilapidated
cottage, not far from the high road. Three young “squires,” who all
despised and hated Methodism, having heard that the old man had been
recently making a collection to build a Methodist chapel, thought it
would be a good frolic to rob him temporarily of the proceeds of this
collection. The result of the frolic is best related in the words of one
of the actors:—
“We set out,” said he, “upon our expedition with blackened faces,
upon a dark night, a little before twelve o’clock. We had dined late,
and all of us had Dutch as well as Cornish courage; yet I confess, when
it came to the point[4], I felt myself a coward. I began to reflect that it
was but a dastardly frolic to frighten the poor old man and his wife in
the dead of night.”
“The clock struck twelve. ‘Now comes the watching time of the
night,’ exclaimed Tom.”
“‘Don’t let us frighten the poor couple out of their wits,’ said I.”
“‘No,’ said Ryder, ‘we will be gentle robbers—gentle as Robin
Hood and Little John.’”
“I said that I would rather return than proceed. ‘Recollect,’ said I,
‘the old fellow is an old soldier, as well as a saint, and fears nothing
human.’”
“‘Nonsense,’ exclaimed Ryder, ‘here goes[5].’ He pressed the feeble
door of the cottage in which the old man resided; it immediately gave
way and flew open. We entered and found ourselves in a sort of
kitchen. To our great surprise there was a light shining from an inner
room. This made us all hesitate.”
“‘Who is out there at this time of the night?’ exclaimed a hoarse voice
from within. I knew it to be the unmistakable voice of ‘The Old
Gardener.’”
“‘Give us your money, and no harm shall befal you,’ said Tom, ‘but
we must have your money.’”
“‘The Lord will be my defence,’ rejoined ‘The Old Gardener.’
‘You shall have no money from me; all in the house is the Lord’s—take
it if you dare.’”
“‘We must and will have it,’ said we, as we entered the inner room,
after taking the precaution of fastening the chamber-door as we
entered.”
“We soon wished we had suffered it to remain open, as you will see.”
“Now, consider us face to face with ‘The Old Gardener,’ and a pretty
sight was presented. Three ruffians (ourselves) with white waggoners’
frocks and blackened faces; before us ‘The Old Gardener,’ sitting on
the side of his bed. He wore a red worsted nightcap, a checked shirt,
and a flannel jacket; his iron grey face, fringed with a grizzly beard,
looking as cool and undismayed as if he had been in the pulpit
preaching.”
“A table was by the side of the bed, and immediately in front of him,
on a large deal table, was an open Bible, close to which we observed, to
our horror, a heap of gunpowder, large enough to blow up a castle. A
candle was burning on the table, and the old fellow had a steel in one
hand and a large flint in the other. We were all three paralysed. The
wild, iron-faced, determined look of ‘The Old Gardener,’ the candle,
flint and steel, and the great heap of powder, absolutely froze our blood,
and made cowards of us all. The gardener saw the impression he had
made.”
“‘What! do you want to rob and murder?’ exclaimed he; ‘I think you
had better join with me in prayer, miserable sinners that you all are!
Repent, and you may be saved. You will soon be in another world.’”
“Ryder first recovered his speech.”
“‘Please to hear me, Mr. Gardener. I feel that we have been wrong,
and if we may depart we will make reparation, and give you all the
money we have in our pockets.’”
“We laid our purses on the table before him.”
“‘The Lord has delivered you into my hands. It was so revealed to
me in a dream. We shall all soon be in another world. Pray, let us pray.’”
“And down he fell upon his knees, close to the table, with the candle
burning, and the ugly flint and steel in his hand. He prayed and prayed.
At last he appeared exhausted. He stopped and eyed the purses, and
then emptied one of them out on the table. He appeared surprised,
and, I thought, gratified at the largeness of its contents.”
“We now thought we should have leave to retire; but, to our dismay,
‘The Old Gardener’ said:
“‘Now, we will praise God by singing the 100th Psalm.’”
“This was agony to us all. After the Psalm, the old man took up the
second purse, and while he was examining its contents, Ryder, who was
close behind Tom and myself, whispered softly:
“‘I have unfastened the door, and when you hear me move, make a
rush.’”
“‘The Old Gardener,’ then, pouring out the contents of the second
purse, exclaimed:
“‘Why, there is almost enough to build our new house of God. Let
me see what the third contains.’”
“He took up the third purse.”
“‘Now,’ whispered Ryder, ‘make a rush.’”
“We did so; and at the same moment heard the old fellow hammering
away at his flint and steel. We expected to be instantly blown
into fragments. The front door, however, flew open before us: and the
next moment we found ourselves in the garden. The night was pitchy
dark. We rushed blindly through brambles and prickly shrubs, ran our
heads against trees, and then forced our way through a thick hedge. At
last, with scratched faces, torn hands, and tattered clothes, we tumbled
over a bank into the high road.
Section 250. A STORY WORTH READING. III.
“Our horses we soon found, and we galloped to Ryder’s residence.
Lights were produced, and we sat down. We were black, ragged, and
dirty. We looked at each other, and, in spite of our miserable adventure,
roared with laughter.”
“‘We may laugh,’ exclaimed Tom, ‘but if this adventure becomes
known, and we are found out, Cornwall will be too hot for us the next
seven years. We have made a pretty night of it. We have lost our
money, been obliged to pretend to pray for two long hours, before a
great heap of gunpowder, while that grim-faced, ugly, red-capped brute
threatened us with an immediate passage into eternity. And our money
forsooth must go to build a meeting-house! Bah! It is truly horrible.
The old fellow has played the old soldier on us with a vengeance, and we
shall be the laughing-stock of the whole country.’”
“The affair was not yet ended. Reports were spread that three men
disguised as black demons, with horns and tails, had entered the cottage
of ‘The Old Gardener,’ who had not only terrified them, but had
frightened them out of a good sum of money, which he intended to devote
to the building of a new Methodist meeting-house. It was given
out that on the following Sunday ‘The Old Gardener’ intended to
preach a sermon, and afterwards solicit subscriptions for the meeting-house,
when he would relate the remarkable manner in which he had
been providentially assisted with funds for the building. Our mortification
was complete. Tom, whose hatred of Methodism was intense, declared
he would blow up the meeting-house as soon as it was built.
Our curiosity, however, was excited, and we all three determined to hear
our adventure of the night related by ‘The Old Gardener,’ if we could
contrive to be present without being suspected.”
“Sunday evening arrived. The meeting-house was crammed to suffocation;
and with the dull lights then burning in the chapel, we had no
difficulty in concealing ourselves. The sermon was short, but the statement
of our adventure was related most minutely and circumstantially in
the old man’s quaint, homely, and humorous phraseology. This evening
he seemed to excel himself, and was exultingly humorous.”
“‘I never,’ said he, ‘saw black faces pray with greater devotion.
I have some doubt, however,’ he slily observed, ‘if their prayers were
quite heavenward. They sometimes turned their faces towards the door,
but a lifting of the flint and steel kept them quiet.’”
“He then added, with a shake of the head and an exulting laugh:
‘But they had not smelt powder like the old soldier they came to rob.
No, no; it was a large heap—ay, large enough to frighten old General
Clive himself. The candle was lighted, the flint and steel were ready.
You may ask, my friends, if I myself was not afraid. No, no, my dear
friends,’ shouted he, ‘this large stock of apparent gunpowder was—it
was my whole year’s stock of leek (onion) seed!’”
“The whole congregation somewhat irreverently laughed; even the
saints almost shouted; many clapped their hands. I was for a moment
stupefied by the announcement, but at last could hardly suppress my
own laughter.”
“We subscribed to the fund to avoid suspicion, and left the meeting.
After the sermon we joined each other, but could not speak. We could
hardly chuckle ‘leek-seed,’ and then roared with laughter.”
“It was a good joke, though not exactly to our taste. It has, however,
more than once served for subsequent amusement.”
“The chapel was built with the money collected by the gardener.
Time and circumstances now induce me to think that there has been no
detriment to morality or religion by the erection of the meeting-house,
which was afterwards known as ‘The Leek-seed Chapel.’”—St. James’s
Magazine.
APPENDIX. — A. ESSENTIALS OF CONSTRUCTION. — I. PRINCIPAL AND CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES. — II. INVERTED CONSTRUCTION. — III. SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. — B. THE INDICATIVE MOOD. — C. THE SUBJUNCTIVE (OR CONJUNCTIVE) MOOD. — D. THE CONDITIONAL MOOD.
§ 1. Infinitives, Participles, and that form of the Infinitive preceded
by zu which is called Supine, stand at the end of the clause;
as—
Er war ärmlich, aber doch sauber
gekleidet.
He was poorly, but yet neatly dressed.
Sein zürnender Oheim hatte ihn zu sich
gerufen.
His angry uncle had bid him come to him.
Seine Tante wird morgen zu uns
kommen.
His aunt will come to us to-morrow.
Sie hat uns versprochen,
morgen zu kommen.
She has promised us to come to-morrow.
§ 2. In a clause containing both an infinitive and a participle, the infinitive
stands last; as—
Der Diener würde es nicht
gethan haben, wenn er ihn nicht freundlich darum gebeten hätte.
The servant would not have done it, if he had not kindly asked him
to do it.
Der Brief muß gut geschrieben
werden, denn er enthält wichtige Mitteilungen.
The letter must be well written, for it contains important communications.
§ 3. In a clause containing two infinitives, the one governing the
other stands last; as—
Er mag mit einem solchen Menschen nichts
zu thun haben.
He does not like to have anything to do with such a man.
§ 4. Separable prefixes of compound verbs are placed at the end of
the clause when the verb is used in a simple tense; as—
Der König ging jeden
Morgen um elf Uhr aus und kam
gegen zwölf Uhr zurück.
The king went out every morning at eleven o’clock and returned
towards twelve o’clock.
§ 5. In a clause containing two objects, both expressed by nouns, that
of the person stands before that of the thing; as—
Am nächsten Abend gab er dem
Manne das Geld zurück.
The next evening he returned the money to the man.
§ 6. When both objects represent persons, the accusative generally stands
first; as—
Man hat den Verbrecher
dem Richter überliefert.
They have delivered the criminal to the judge.
§ 7. In clauses containing two objects, one being a personal pronoun and the
other a noun, the pronoun stands first; as—
Der fremde Herr gab mir
einige Äpfel und Birnen.
The stranger gave me some apples and pears.
§ 8. When both objects are personal pronouns, the accusativegenerally
standsfirst; as—
Sie hat es mir
gesagt.
She has said it to me.
Man hat sie ihm
genommen.
They have taken her away from him.
§ 9. A. Adverbial expressions of time generally stand before the object
(except it is a pronoun) and always before adverbial expressions of manner
and place; as—
Wir haben gestern drei
Briefe erhalten.
Yesterday we received three letters.
Er ist heute plötzlich
nach London abgereist.
He has suddenly left for London to-day.
But we must say—
Wir haben Sie heute
mit Ungeduld erwartet.
(Sie pers. pron.)
We have been expecting you to-day with impatience.
B. Adverbial expressions of manner and place generally stand before the
Infinitive or Participle when the verb is in a compound tense, but take the last
place in the clause when the verb is in a simple tense; as—
Die Schüler haben ihre Aufgaben
sehr gut gemacht.
The pupils have done their lessons very well.
Sie machen ihre Aufgaben
immer sehr gut.
They do their lessons always very well.
Sind Sie gestern im
Theater gewesen?
Were you at the theatre yesterday?
Ich gehe nie ins Theater.
I never go to the theatre.
When the subject, which may be preceded by its attributes, occupies
the first place in a principal clause, either the copula or the verb must
follow immediately.
§ 10. The negation nicht stands after the accusative; as—
Er schreibt den Brief nicht,
sondern sein Bruder.
He is not writing the letter, but his brother is.
Er hat den Brief nicht
geschrieben.
He has not written the letter.
§ 11. In questions nicht sometimes stands before the accusative; as—
Haben Sie nicht meinen
Brief erhalten?
Have you not received my letter?
§ 12. In general the negation nicht stands before that part of the sentence
which it affects; as—
Ich bin nicht krank
gewesen.
I have not been ill.
Wir sprechen nicht
von ihm, sondern von seinem Vetter.
We do not speak of him, but of his cousin.
Die Natur hatte sie nicht
mit Schönheit ausgestattet.
Nature had not endowed her with beauty.
§ 13. The ordinary way of arranging the words is to place the subject and
its adjuncts first, and the predicate with its adjuncts after; as—
Der gute Vater (subj.) ist
heute Morgen mit seinen drei Töchtern nach London abgereist
(predicate with adjuncts).
The good father has left this morning for London with his three
daughters.
But this construction is sometimes inverted, so as to place the
predicate, or a part of the predicate, before the subject. This is
the case:
(a) In interrogative clauses; as—
Kommt der Mann heute?
Does the man come to-day?
Ist der Vater nach
London abgereist?
Has the father left for London?
Hat er kein Geld bei
sich?
Has he no money about him?
(b) In imperative clauses; as—
Senden Sie diesen Brief zur Post!
Send this letter to the post-office!
(c) In exclamatory clauses; as—
Hätte er auf mich
gehört!
Would he had listened to me!
(d) In subordinate clauses beginning with an adverbial conjunction.
(See § 124 of Lange’s German Grammar.)
§ 14. The ordinary way of arranging the words is often departed from for
the sake of emphasizing a part of the predicate. In this case the part to
be emphasized is placed at the beginning of the sentence, and the construction
must be inverted, that is to say the subject must be placed after the
verb; as—
Die letzten Worte hatte
der junge Mensch mit gehobener Stimme gesprochen.
The last words the young man had spoken with an elevated tone of voice.
Heute kann er nicht
abreisen, sondern morgen.
He cannot depart to-day, but to-morrow.
Mit dem zwölf Uhr Zuge
kann er nicht mehr fahren, denn es ist zu spät.
He cannot go by the twelve o’clock train, for it is too late.
These sentences would read in the ordinary construction: Der junge Mensch
hatte die letzten Worte mit gehobener Stimme gesprochen. Er kann nicht heute abreisen,
sondern morgen. Er kann nicht mehr mit dem zwölf Uhr Zuge fahren, denn es ist zu spät.
The words »Die letzten Worte,« »heute,« »mit dem zwölf Uhr Zuge,« have been made
emphatic by being placed at the beginning of the sentence, which required the
verb and the subject to interchange places.
§ 15. Sometimes a subordinate clause (that is to say a clause dependent
on another clause, without which it would not be understood) is made emphatic
by being placed before the principal clause. Then also the
subject of the principal clause must be placed after the verb; as—
Als er in die Stube kam, fand
er mich am Schreibtische.
When he came into the room, he found me at the desk.
In this example the principal clause is »er fand mich am Schreibtische,« and the
subordinate clause is contained in the words »Als er in die Stube kam;« this
latter clause has been emphasized by being placed before the principal clause,
but it required the principal clause to be inverted, so as to place the subject (er)
after the verb (fand).
Here are some more examples of the same class:
Weil er ein guter Junge ist,
will ich ihm seine Bitte gewähren.
Because he is a good fellow, I will grant his request.
Nachdem er gegessen und getrunken hatte,
ging er nach Hause.
§ 16. In subordinate clauses beginning with a relative pronoun, a relative
conjunction, or a subordinative conjunction, the verb stands at the end; as—
Man zeigte mir ein Buch, das
viele schöne Bilder enthielt.
They showed me a book which contained many beautiful pictures.
Wir waren im Zimmer, als
er eintrat.
We were in the room when he entered.
§ 17. When the verb is in a compound tense, the auxiliary verb stands
last; as—
Nachdem sie ihn begrüßt
hatte, kam sie schnell auf mich zu.
After she had welcomed him, she approached me quickly.
§ 18. When there are two verbs, one of which is a verb of mood, the verb
of mood stands last; as—
Er sagte, daß er nicht kommen
könne.
He said that he could not come.
§ 19. When there are two verbs, the one being an infinitive, and the other
an inflected verb, the inflected verb stands last; as—
Der Sohn starb gerade zu der Stunde, in welcher
sein Vater ihn wiederzusehen hoffte.
The son died the very hour his father hoped to see him again.
§ 20. When there are two infinitives and an auxiliary verb, the auxiliary
verb has the first place, whilst the governing infinitive stands last; as—
Er überlegte, wie er es werde
vermeiden können. (können is the
governing verb.)
He considered how he might be able to avoid it.
Er sagte, daß er es nicht habe
thun mögen. (mögen is the governing
verb.)
He said that he did not like to do it.
§ 21. Sometimes the conjunction, which generally connects the subordinate
clause with the principal clause, isomittedand understood. In this
case the construction is like that of a principal clause; as—
Er fürchtete, ich könne
mich erkälten. (Er fürchtete, daß ich mich
erkälten könne.)
He was afraid I might catch cold.
§ 22. Sometimes the auxiliary verb is omittedand understood; as—
Daß er mir genommen
(wurde), ist mein größtes Leid.
That he was taken from me is my greatest sorrow.
§ 23. In subordinate clauses the prefixes of separable compound
verbs are not separated from the verb; as—
Er war so beschäftigt, daß er in vierzehn
Tagen nicht ausging.
He was so busy that he did not go out for a fortnight.
§ 24. A. The co-ordinative conjunctions—aber, allein,
denn, nämlich,
oder, sondern, sowohl — als,
and und—serve to connect two or more
independent statements with each other, which have either one common
subject or predicate, or have each a subject and predicate of their own
(co-ordinate clauses). Co-ordinative conjunctions do not affect the
regular order of construction explained in§§ 1-12, and generally stand
at the beginning of the co-ordinate clauses which they introduce; but aber
and nämlich are often placed after the verb, and sometimes even stand in
the middle of the clause; as—
Die Frau war dem Manne früh gestorben; dieser ließ dem hinterlassenen Kinde
aber jede mögliche Sorgfalt angedeihen.
A subordinate clause, i.e. a clause dependent on another clause, without
which it would not be understood, is joined to a principal clause by means of
a relative pronoun, or a conjunction, which latter may be either a relative, a
subordinative, or an adverbial conjunction. (See § 124 of Lange’s German
Grammar.) The effect produced upon the construction by relative pronouns,
relative conjunctions, and subordinative conjunctions has been explained in
§§ 16-23.
B.Adverbial conjunctions, like all other adverbial expressions
commencing a clause, require the verb to stand before the subject,
as has been pointed out in § 124 of Lange’s German Grammar.
§ 25. The Indicative Mood is the Mood of Actuality, whilst the Subjunctive
Mood is the Mood of Possibility. The nature of the Indicative may
be said to be objective, because it is used to express positive facts. The nature
of the Subjunctive may be said to be subjective, because it represents the statement
made as a mere subjective supposition, or as resting on the mere hearsay
evidence of other persons.
The Indicative Mood denotes Positiveness and Certainty.
Conjunctions never determine the mood in which a verb is to be
used. The mood is always determined by the nature of the statement we
wish to make. So one and the same verb may be followed, in the dependent
clause, either by the Indicative or the Subjunctive Mood.
Examples.
Der Gefangene ist tot;
er ist heute Morgen gestorben. (Positive
statement.)
The prisoner is dead; he died this morning.
Ich bin überzeugt, daß er es
gesagt hat. (Certainty.)
I am convinced that he has said it.
Der Mensch ist
sterblich. (A fact.)
Man is mortal.
Ich habe gehört, daß er zum Minister
ernannt ist.
I have heard that he has been appointed a minister, (and I do not
doubt it).
(Here the Indicative Mood is used, because I wish to imply that I have no
doubt about the accuracy of the statement.)
Ich habe gehört, daß er zum Minister
ernannt sei (see § 30).
I have heard that he has been appointed a minister, (but I rather
doubt it).
(Here the Subjunctive Mood is used because I wish to express a doubt about
the accuracy of the statement, which is expressed in English by the words
‘but I rather doubt it.’)
§ 26. Since, in the best modern works of English Literature, we frequently
find the Indicative employed instead of the Subjunctive in clauses of uncertainty
and supposition, and since, with the exception of the verb to be, it is
evidently the tendency of the English language to reject the distinction of the
Subjunctive Mood, the student will encounter no small difficulty in learning
the right use of the German Subjunctive, which is most extensively used, and
gives often great power, conciseness, and elegance to the mode of speaking.
The Subjunctive Mood is used both in principal and subordinate clauses,
and denotes Uncertainty and Supposition.
Examples.
Man sagt er sei
gestorben (see § 29). (Uncertainty.)
People say (i.e. it is rumoured) he is dead.
Plato glaubte, daß nur ein
Gott sei. (Supposition.)
Plato thought that there was only one God, (but that it
was a matter of doubt).
§ 27. The Subjunctive expresses Command, Wish, and Concession.
Examples.
Er nehme seine
Weite, wie’s Brauch ist! (Schiller.) (Command.)
Let him take his distance as it is customary!
Gott sei mit
dir! (Wish.)
God be with you!
Er gehe, wohin
er Lust hat. (Concession.)
He may go wherever he pleases.
§ 28. The Subjunctive is used in Indirect Speech (oratio obliqua),
i.e. when words which have been actually spoken are quoted not as they were
spoken, but in substance only; it stands especially after the verbs sagen, to say;
erzählen, to relate; melden,
to report; berichten, to relate, to report; hören,
to hear; as—
Er sagte ihm, er sei
ein Verschwender.
He told him he was a spendthrift.
Sie behauptete, sie habe
den Brief nicht erhalten.
She asserted that she had not got the letter.
Sein Freund meldete, daß er nicht kommen
könne, mich zu besuchen.
His friend reported that he could not come to see me.
§ 29. The Subjunctive is used when the statement made in the
subordinate clause is intended to be represented not as a fact, but
as a mere idea, as a mere conception of the person speaking. We
find it, therefore, especially after verbs denoting a request, a wish, a hope, an
apprehension, a permission, an advice, and a command; as—
meinen, to mean.
glauben, to believe.
vermuten, to presume.
zweifeln, to doubt.
scheinen, to seem.
hoffen, to hope.
fürchten, to fear.
wollen, to be willing.
bitten, to ask.
befehlen, to command.
verlangen, to demand.
ermahnen, to admonish.
raten, to advise.
bestehen, to insist upon,
And others of a like meaning.
Examples.
Lassen Sie uns hoffen,
daß unser Streben von Erfolg sein werde.
Let us hope that our endeavours may be successful.
Ich bat ihn, daß er mir helfen
möge.
I asked him to help me.
Ich fürchtete, daß
er ein Bein gebrochen habe.
I was afraid that he had broken a leg.
Wir bitten, daß
der Gefangene frei gelassen werde.
We request that the prisoner be released.
Er zweifelt daran,
daß man ihn für unschuldig erklären werde.
He doubts if he will be declared innocent.
Wir werden stets verlangen,
daß man uns unsere Rechte gewähre.
We shall always demand that our rights be given to us.
Ich rate dir, daß
du fleißiger werdest.
I advise you to become more industrious.
Ich bestehe darauf,
daß sich der Lord entferne. (Schiller.)
I insist upon the Lord’s retiring.
§ 30. With regard to the Tense in which the Subjunctive ought to stand in
subordinate clauses of the character mentioned above, the general rule is,
that—
We use the same tense of the Subjunctive Mood which, in
direct speech, or in a principal clause, would be used in
the Indicative Mood,
except that
the Perfect of the Subjunctive is used instead of the Imperfect
of the Indicative, and that the Pluperfect of the Indicative
is changed into the Perfect of the Subjunctive, with the
help of one of the conjunctions ehe, bevor, and nachdem.
The following table will make this clear:—
Direct Speech.
Indirect Speech.
Er sagte: »Ich lese.« (Present.)
Er sagte, er lese. (Present Subj.)
Er sagte: »Ich habe gelesen.« (Perfect.)
Er sagte, er habe gelesen. (Perfect Subj.)
Er sagte: »Ich werde lesen.« (First
Future.)
Er sagte, er werde lesen. (First Future
Subjunctive.)
Er sagte: »Ich werde gelesen haben
(Second Future), wenn mein Freund mich abholen
wird.« (First Future.)
Er sagte, er werde gelesen haben (Second
Future Subj.), wenn sein Freund
ihn abholen werde (First Future Subjunctive).
But—
But—
Er sagte: »Ich las, als sein Freund
schrieb.« (Imperfect.)
Er sagte, er habe gelesen, als sein
Freund geschrieben habe. (Perfect Subjunctive.)
Er sagte: »Ich hatte gelesen (Pluperfect),
als mein Freund schrieb.« (Imperfect.)
Er sagte, er habe gelesen (Perfect
Subjunctive), ehe sein Freund
geschrieben habe. (Perfect Subjunctive.)
It will be seen, therefore, that the verb in the subordinate clause stands
either in the Present, in the Perfect, or in the Future.
Examples.
Der Diener antwortete, er
sei nicht imstande die Arbeit zu thun,
denn er sei zu schwach. (Present Subj.)
The servant answered that he was unable to do the work, for he
was too weak.
Er erzählte mir, er habe
ein Unglück gehabt. (Perfect Subj.)
He told me he had met with a misfortune.
Sie behauptete, daß sie nie in ihrem Leben
krank gewesen sei. (Perfect Subj.)
She affirmed that she had never been ill in all her life.
Er sagte, daß er sich um eine Stelle
bewerben werde. (First Future.)
He said that he was going to apply for a situation.
§ 31. The Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, however, must
be used instead of the Present and Perfect Subjunctive, and the
Conditional instead of the Future Subjunctive, when any ambiguity
might arise as to the mood employed, that is to say in cases where the form of
the Present, of the Perfect, or of the Future is identical both in the Indicative
and the Subjunctive Mood. For example, in the sentence—
»Sie sagte mir, ihre Töchter
gingen niemals auf Bälle;«
‘She said to me that her daughters never went to balls;’
the verb gingen stands in the Imperfect Subjunctive and not in the Present,
because the third person plural of the Present Indicative and the corresponding
person of the Present Subjunctive are identical in the conjugation
of this verb. Both are »sie gehen,« the verb, therefore, must be put in the
Imperfect Subjunctive to show clearly the mood employed.
§ 32. The Subjunctive is employed in adverbial clauses of purpose
and of manner, when the subordinate clause generally begins with the
conjunctions daß, auf daß, damit,
and als ob; as—
Du sollst deinen Vater und deine Mutter
ehren, auf daß dir’s
wohlgehe und du lange
lebest auf Erden.
Thou shalt honour thy father and thy mother, that thou mayest prosper
and thy days be long on earth.
Ist es nicht, als ob
dies Volk mich zum Gott mache? (Schiller.)
Does it not seem as if the people meant to make a God of me?
§ 33. The Imperfect Subjunctive and the Pluperfect Subjunctive
are used to express something possible, or something capable of being done,
also to denote a mere supposition on the part of the speaker, or for the purpose
of stating an opinion with caution or modesty; as—
Es könnte sein,
daß er nicht zu Hause wäre.
Literally: It might be possible that he were not at home, i.e. He may
possibly not be at home.
Ich hätte wohl
Lust, ihm einen Besuch zu machen.
I should like indeed to pay him a visit.
Ich wüßte wohl,
was zu thun wäre.
I fancy I know what ought to be done.
Es wäre vielleicht
besser, das Unternehmen aufzugeben.
Perhaps it would be better to give up the undertaking.
§ 34. To express a wish we use the Present Subjunctive, when we believe
in the fulfilment of the wish, but the Imperfect Subjunctive, when we want to
indicate that the fulfilment of the wish is unlikely, and even impossible; as—
Gott sei mit dir!
God be with you!
Möge er bald gesund
werden!
May he soon recover his health!
Lang lebe der König!
Long live the king!
Gott helfe
mir! (Luther.)
May God help me!
But with the Imperfect Subjunctive:
Möchte er bald
gesund werden!
Would he might soon recover his health!
Wenn er doch noch
lebte!
I would he were still alive!
Möchte er bald kommen!
Would he might soon come!
§ 35. It must always be remembered that both moods (the Indicative and
the Subjunctive) may stand in Principal Clauses as well as in Subordinate
Clauses, since their use depends alone on the nature of the statement we wish to
make (see § 25). Nor has the notion connected with the verb standing in the
principal clause an absolute influence on the mood to be used in the subordinate
clause. The Indicative stands in subordinate clauses not merely
after verbs expressing Certainty, but also after such as denote Belief, Supposition,
and Doubt, when the statement contained in the subordinate clause
is represented objectively, i.e. as being based upon a fact, or as being, in the
speaker’s opinion, not open to any doubt. So we say—
Ich glaube, daß er in der Schlacht geblieben
ist (not sei).
I believe that he was killed in battle.
Ich weiß nicht, ob er lebt,
oder ob er tot ist.
I do not know whether he is alive, or whether he is dead.
Ich zweifle, daß der Kranke
genesen wird.
I doubt if the patient will recover.
Ich hoffe, daß er sich wohl
befindet.
I hope that he is well.
But when the statement contained in the subordinate clause is represented
subjectively, i.e. as being based upon a mere idea or belief, the correctness of
which is still open to doubt, the Subjunctive must be used; as—
Man glaubt, man sagt, etc.,
er sei in der
Schlacht geblieben.
People believe, people say, etc., that he was killed in battle,
(but it is still doubtful).
Er fürchtet, daß man ihn verraten
habe.
He is afraid that they have betrayed him, (yet he does not know).
§ 36. The Conditional is the mood for representing a state or an event as
dependent on another, which other, however, is not based upon a real fact,
but is a mere hypothesis or supposition. As such we use not only the First
and Second Conditional (ich würde, etc.), as given in the tables of verbs, but
also the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. The latter two, in fact, may
be called the simple forms of the Conditional Mood, and the former (ich
würde, etc.) the compound forms. Every true conditional statement consists
of two clauses: (a) the hypothetical clause, which contains the supposition,
(b) the conditioning clause, which contains the inference drawn from that
supposition; as—
If I had money (hypothetical clause),
I should like to travel (conditioning clause).
The Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive may be used in both clauses, but
the First and Second Conditional (ich würde, etc.—see the tables of verbs) can
only be used in conditioning clauses.
The conditioning clause is often introduced by »so.«
Examples.
Wenn ich Geld hätte,
ginge ich gern auf Reisen (or
würde ich gern
auf Reisen gehen).
If I had money, I should like to travel.
Wenn es heute schönes Wetter
gewesen wäre, so würden
wir ausgegangen sein.
If the weather had been fine to-day, we should have gone out.
Dieser Mann könnte
glücklicher sein, wenn er das Spiel nicht zu
sehr liebte.
This man might be happier, if he were not too fond of gambling.
Er würde gesund
sein (or er
wäre gesund), wenn
er mäßiger lebte.
He would be healthy, if he were more temperate.
§ 37. The Conditional is sometimes used elliptically; as—
Ja, ich würde gekommen sein!
Yes, I should have come! (i.e. if I had been able to do so,
understood).
Unter den Umständen hätte ich es gewiß gethan.
I am sure, under the circumstances I should have done it (i.e. if I had
been placed in the same situation).
Wäre ich reich,
würde ich Sie sofort bezahlen.
Were I rich, I should pay you directly.
SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES WHICH THE GERMAN SPELLING HAS UNDERGONE THROUGH THE GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS OF 1880. — A. Vokale. (Vowels.) — B. Konsonanten. (Consonants.) — C. Allgemeine Bemerkungen über die Schreibung der Fremdwörter. — D. Kleinschreibung und Zusammenziehung. — E. Zerlegung der Wörter in Silben. — F. Der Apostroph. (The Apostrophe.)
1. Regeln und Wörterverzeichnis für die deutsche Rechtschreibung zum Gebrauch in
den preußischen Schulen. Berlin, Weidmansche Buchhandlung. 2. Regeln und Wörterverzeichnis
für die deutsche Rechtschreibung zum Gebrauch in den bayerischen Schulen.
München, Expedition des Kgl. Zentral-Schulbücher-Verlags.
Write.
Ä, Ö, Ü
(instead of Ae,
Oe, Ue)
in: die Äpfel (apples);
die Öfen (ovens, stoves);
der Überrock (overcoat), etc. In
foreign words ä,
ü (for Greek and French ai
and French u) in: der Pädagog
(pedagogue); der Kapitän
(captain); die Lektüre
(reading), etc.
ay
(instead of ai)
in: Bayern (Bavaria);
der Bayer (the Bavarian);
bayerisch, adj.
(Bavarian), and derivatives.
ei
(instead of ai)
in: der Heide (heathen);
die Heide (heath);
das Getreide (grain);
der Weizen (wheat),
etc.—But: die Bai
(bay); der Hai (shark);
der Hain (grove);
der Kaiser (emperor);
der Laib (loaf);
der Laich (spawn
[of fish]); das Laichen
(spawning); die Laichzeit
(spawning-time); der Laie
(layman); der Mai (May);
die Maid (maid, maiden);
der Mais (maize);
maischen (to mash [in brewing]);
die Saite (string);
der Waid (dyer’s woad);
derordie
Waise (orphan [boy or girl]), and derivatives.
Nouns terminating in -eeand-ie—
take in the plural en,
which inflection forms a separate syllable, as: die
Armee´ (army), pl.die
Armee´en (armies); derordie See´ (lake or sea),
pl.die See´en (lakes or
seas); die Melodie´ (melody),
pl.die Melodie´en (melodies);
die Theorie´ (theory), pl.die Theorie´en (theories), etc.
But: das Komitee´ (committee),
pl.die Komitee´s (committees);
das Knie´ (knee), pl.die Knie´e.
eu
1. (instead of äu)
in: deuchten (to appear,
to seem); mir deucht (it
seems to me, methinks); ihm
deuchte (he thought); (durch)-bleuen
(to give [one] a hearty drubbing, to beat [one] black
and blue); [but: (durch)-bläuen
(to make or dye blue)]; der Greuel
(horror); leugnen (to deny);
verleumden (to slander), etc.
2. in the termination eur
(sounded as in French), in: der Commandeur
(commander); der Redacteur
(editor), etc.
i
(instead of y) in:
der Gips (plaster of Paris);
die Silbe (syllable);
der Sirup (syrup);
der Vampir (vampire), etc.
[Comp. ay.]
ie
(instead of i) in
the verbal termination ie´ren,
as in: studie´ren (to study);
spazie´ren (to go for a walk);
marschie´ren (to march);
probie´ren (to try, to
test); hantie´ren (to handle,
to manage), etc.—and in their derivatives, as in:
die Hantie´rung (management,
business, profession), etc.; also in:
gieb (give), and derivatives.
ou
(pronounced as in French, instead of
u) in words coming from the French,
as die Fourage (forage);
der Fourier (quarter master);
der Fournier (veneer), etc.
Only one Vowel (instead of two)—
in: bar
(bare, destitute of; [of money]: in cash);
die Barschaft (ready money,
cash in hand); das Maß
(measure); das Schaf (sheep);
die Schar (troop, herd);
der Star (starling; [in
medicine]: cataract); die Wage
(scales); die Ware (goods);
der Herd (hearth);
die Herde (herd, flock);
das Kamel (camel);
das Los (lot, fate);
losen (to cast lots);
die Losung (the casting or drawing
of lots); der Schoß (lap,
middle; [of dress]: skirt, or tail); etc.
d
(instead of dt)
in: der Tod (death);
todkrank (sick unto death);
todmüde (tired to death);
die Todsünde (deadly or
mortal sin); tödlich
(deadly, mortal, fatal), etc.—Comp.
letter t (instead of
dt).
f
(instead of ph)
in: Adolf (Adolphus);
der Elefant (elephant);
der Fasan (pheasant);
Rudolf (Ralph);
Westfalen (Westphalia),
etc.—But: der Epheu
(ivy) from the old German word Ebheu.
h
1. h remains
as a sign of lengthening a syllable:—
(a) In syllables beginning with a t-sound and
containing a long vowel, but not a diphthong or a double vowel,
as in: die That (deed);
die Thräne (tear);
der Thron (throne);
der Thor (fool);
das Thor (gate);
thun (to do);
that (did);
gethan (done),
etc. [Comp. h, 2 (a).]
(b) before l,
m, n,
and r, as in:
allmählich (gradually);
befehlen (to command);
nehmen (to take);
wohnen (to live, to
reside); lehren (to
teach), etc. Exceptions: die
Feme (an old secret criminal court in Westphalia)
and derivatives, as: der Femrichter
(a judge of that court), and derivatives.
(c) in: die Fehde
(feud, quarrel); die Mahd
(mowing), from mähen (to mow);
der Draht (wire) from
drehen (to turn);
die Naht (seam), from
nähen (to sew), and other
words derived from verbs containing an aspirated
h.
(d) in a few proper names, as in:
Bertha, Günther,
Martha, Mathilde,
Theobald, Theodor,
etc.
(e) in many nouns originally Greek, as:
die Kathedra´le (cathedral);
das Thema (theme);
die Theologie´; die
Theorie´; das Thermome´ter;
der Pa´nther, etc.
2. his not
retained aftert:—
(a) in syllables beginning with a t-sound and
containing a diphthong or a double vowel, as in:
der Tau (dew);
das Tau (rope);
der
Teer (tar);
teeren (to tar);
derordas
Teil (part, or share); teuer
(dear); das Tier (animal);
verteidigen (to defend), etc.,
and derivatives.—Exception: der Thee
(tea), and derivatives.
(b) in the suffixes tum
and tüm (formerly
thum and thüm),
as in: das Eigentum (property);
das Königtum (kingdom);
das Ungetüm (monster), etc.
(c) at the end of syllables, and at the beginning
of syllables before a short vowel, as in:—die
Armut (poverty); der Atem
(breath); atmen (to breathe);
die Blüte (blossom);
die Flut (flood);
das Gerät (tools);
die Glut (glow);
der Kot (dirt);
das Lot (a weight of half an
ounce, now obsolete); der Met
(mead); die Miete (rent;
a corn or hay-stack; mite); der
Mut (courage); die Not
(need); nötigen (to urge;
to invite; to compel); derordie Pate (god-father or
god-mother); der Rat
(advice); raten (to advise;
to guess); das Rätsel
(riddle); rot (red);
die Röte (redness);
die Rute (rod);
der Turm (tower);
der Wert (value);
wert (worth, dear);
der Wirt (host, landlord);
die Wut (rage), and derivatives,
as: ratlos (without advice or means:
helpless); wertvoll (valuable,
precious); das Wirtshaus (inn),
etc.
Mark well: hurra! (hurra!).
1. (instead of c) in many words
originally Greek, as in: die Akademie´,
(academy); pra´ktisch
(practical); die Arithmeti´k
(arithmetic); die Physi´k
(natural philosophy), etc.—But: der
Chara´kter; die Melancholie´.
2. (instead of c and
qu) in many words originally
Latin or French, but which have become quite germanised,
and are now looked upon as altogether German words, as:
der Advoka´t (lawyer);
das Boske´tt (thicket)
from the French: le bosquet; das Loka´l
(locality); das Pu´blikum
(public); vaka´nt (vacant);
der Vulka´n (volcano), etc.—More
especially in words terminating in ...kel,
as in: der Arti´kel;
die Parti´kel;
die Flo´skel (flourish), pl.
die Flo´skeln (fine words, frequently
made use of with a deceptive purpose).
3. (instead of c) in
words with the prefixes Ko-,
Kol-,
Kom-,
Kon-,
Kor-, and also in syllables
containing a k-sound followed
by t
(...kt),
as in: die Kopie´ (copy);
die Kolonie´ (colony);
der Kommanda´nt (commander);
der Ko´nstabler (constable);
das Konze´rt (concert);
die Korresponde´nz (correspondence),
etc.; die Didakti´k (didactics);
das Edi´kt (edict),
etc.—But: das Di´ctum, because
not germanised, etc.—
Mark well: der Kaffee´
(coffee), but: das Café
(a fine restaurant where mostly coffee is served).
NOTE. In foreign words which have preserved a foreign
pronunciation, or certain foreign forms of spelling or inflection,
do not use k, but
c, as in: die
Campagne (campaign); der Commi´s
(clerk); das Flaco´n
(smelling-bottle); der
Redakteu´r (editor); die
Adjecti´va (adjectives), etc.
Doubtful Orthography. We find:
Konze´rtandConce´rt, n.;
Ka´rzer (prison in schools and
universities) andCa´rcer,
m.; Komitee´andComite´, n.;
Kompanie´andCompagnie´, f.;
conze´ntrisch (concentric)
andconce´ntrisch;
Konzessio´nandConcessio´n, f.;
Konzi´l (council) andConci´l, n.;
klassifizie´ren (to classify)
andclassificie´ren;
Ku´rsus (course of study)
andCu´rsus, m.;
korre´ktandcorre´ct;
Konjunktio´nandConjunctio´n, etc., etc.
From these examples it will be seen that the mode of spelling
is fluctuating between k and
c, and
c and
z, in many words which
originally contained the letter c. The first way is to
be preferred, and strongly recommended, in all the words given
above, and many others in common use that contain akor az-sound and are quite
germanised in spelling and inflection. (Comp. C. 3.)
Use also k instead of
c in words of Greek origin
which have preserved the k-sound,
as:—Anekdo´te,
katho´lisch,
Komö´die,
Diale´kt, etc.—[Comp.
B, letter k, 1.]—And
write c and
cq, as before, in:
A´cce´nt,
A´ccusati´v,
A´cquisitio´n, etc.—
-nis
(instead of niß) as
a suffix of nouns, as in: das Ereignis
(event); das Begräbnis (burial);
das Verhältnis (relation);
das Vermä´chtnis (bequest), etc.—
The prefixmiß...,
however, remains unchanged, as in: das
Mi´ßverständnis (misunderstanding), pl.
die Mi´ßverständnisse.
s
(instead of ß) in
deshalb (therefore);
deswegen (therefore, for
this reason); indes (meanwhile,
whilst; however); unterdes
(meanwhile, whilst); weshalb
(why); weswegen (why), etc.—
sſ
(instead of ſſ) in:
dasſelbe (the same);
desſelben (of the same);
diesſeits (on this side), etc.
st
(instead of ſt) in:
Dienstag (Tuesday);
Geburtstag (birthday);
Frühlingstag (spring-day), and
other compound nouns in which s occurs
as a sign of the Genitive and is followed by a
t.
ſſ
between two vowels, the first one of which is
short, as in laſſen (to let,
to leave); die Taſſe
(cup); trotz deſſen (in
spite of that); weſſen
(whose), etc.—
ß
1. between two vowels, the first one of which
is long, as in: bü´ßen (to atone
for); schießen (to shoot), etc.
2. before t, and
at the end of words, as in: er läßt
(he leaves); ihr laßt (you
leave); gebüßt (atoned for);
laß (let); der
Kuß (kiss), etc.—
t
(instead of dt) in:
der Tote (a dead man or
person); tot (dead);
töten (to kill);
der Totschlag (manslaughter);
der Totengräber (gravedigger),
etc.—Comp. letter d (instead
of dt.)
t
(instead of d)
in: das Brot (bread).
t
(and never z) in
the accented and original Latin combinations:—tia´, tie´, tio´,
as in martia´lisch,
Patie´nt, m.,
Natio´n, f.,
Traditio´n, f.,
Motio´n, etc.
But write: Gra´zie,
Ingredie´nzien, etc., e being
unaccented.
z
1. (instead of tz)
after a long vowel, as in: die Bre´zel
(biscuit in the shape of a twisted ring, cracknel);
du´zen (to call a person thou),
etc.
2. (instead of Cz
and Sc) in: der
Zar (czar); das Zepter
(sceptre), etc.
3. (instead of ce)
regularly at the end of foreign words with German pronunciation
and terminating in French in ce, and in Latin in tia,
tius, tium, cius, cium, as in:
das Benefi´z, die
Justi´z, das Hospi´z,
die Mili´z, die
Noti´z; die Differe´nz,
die Sente´nz, die
Vaka´nz; die Fina´nzen,
die Novi´ze, die
Allia´nz, die
Dista´nz, etc.—(But with foreign pronunciation:
Alliance, Distance,
etc.)
4. also in words quite germanised, as:
der Bezi´rk (district,
circuit); die La´nze
(lance); die Polizei´
(police); der Polizi´st
(policeman); das Terzero´l
(pocket-pistol); das Terze´tt
(trio), etc.—But write: Cä´sar,
die Cäsu´r (cesure, cesura);
die Ce´der, die
Celebritä´t, die Censu´r
(censorship), censie´ren
(to censure, to review), der
Ce´ntime´ter, die Cerea´lien
(cereals), das Cöliba´t,
der Ci´rkumfle´x,
das Lyce´um, etc.
5. (instead of c)
in verbs terminating in ...ie´ren,
as: fabrizie´ren (to manufacture);
musizie´ren (to make music);
publizie´ren (to publish), etc.
Note. In many words which originally contained the letter
c, the mode of spelling is
unsettled and fluctuating between c
and z, as in:
Medizi´nandMedici´n, f.; das
RezeptandRecept, n.
(prescription, recipe); Prinzi´pandPrinci´p, n. (principle);
Proze´ntandProce´nt, n. (per cent.);
Proze´ßandProce´ß, m., etc.—[Read carefully
B, Note to letter k, also
letter t of B, and General
Observations on the Spelling of Foreign Words, where additional
examples are given.]
(General Observations on the Spelling of Foreign Words.)
1. With foreign words containing sounds and combinations of sounds
not originally German, THE GENERAL PRINCIPLE regarding their
orthography is that, their foreign pronunciation being preserved, also
the foreign garb of their orthography is retained.
So, for example, we use:—
oi (sounded as in French) in: die Memoi´ren (memoirs); die Toile´tte
(toilet).
g and j (sounded as in French) in: die Baga´ge (luggage);
das Logi´s
(lodgings); der Genda´rm (a police-officer on horseback); das Genie´
(genius; a man of great talent); der Ingenieu´r (engineer); das Journa´l
(journal, magazine); rangie´ren (to arrange), etc.—But with German
pronunciation: der Genera´l (general); genia´l (highly gifted); die
Genialitä´t (geniality, originality), etc.—
gn (sounded as in French) in: der Champa´gner (champaign); die
Lorgne´tte (lorgnette, eye-glass), etc.
ll (sounded like English l followed by y) in: das Bataillo´n (battalion);
das Bi´llard (billiards); das Bille´t (ticket; note); der Postillo´n
(postillion), etc.
n (sounded as in French, but not quite so nasal) in: die Nua´nce (gradation
of colours); das Bassi´n (reservoir); der Refrai´n (refrain); der
Rayo´n (ray of light; [of a fortification]: radius); das Violonce´ll
(violoncello), etc.
2. Many foreign words, on the other hand, composed of German
sounds, which might be indicated by German letters, have as yet
preserved their original orthography. So we find:—
ai (for the sound of ä) in: die Chai´se (chaise), from the French;
auandeau (for the sound of o) in: die Sau´ce (sauce);
das Bureau (office),
from the French;
ch (for the sound of sch) in: die Chaussee´ (turnpike-road), from the
French;
ch (for the Greek k-sound) in: derordas Chor (choir
or chorus), from the
Greek;
ph (for the sound of f) in: der Philoso´ph (philosopher), from the Greek;
th (for the sound of t) in: der Thron (throne), from the Greek; and
v (for the German w-sound) in: viole´tt (violet-blue, adj.), from the
French.
3. Again we find foreign words which, being in common use
and composed of German sounds, have become entirely germanised,
and wear a German garb; as: die Tru´ppe (troop, company), French: la
troupe; die Gru´ppe (group), French: la groupe; der Disku´rs (discourse), French:
le discours; der Sekretä´r (secretary), French: le secrétaire.
It follows from the three preceding paragraphs:—that it is impossible
to reduce the spelling of foreign words to any fixed principles,
and that there exists at present much uncertainty and inconsistency
respecting the spelling of such words. [Comp. B, Consonants, Note to
letter k, also B, letter z, where additional examples are given.]
(Small Initials [instead of Capitals] and Contractions.)
USE SMALL INITIALS:—
1. With Nouns used as Prepositions, Conjunctions, Indefinite
Numerals, and Adverbs, as in: angesichts (in the face of); infolge (in consequence
of); behufs (on behalf of);—falls (in case of);—ein bißchen (a bit, a
little); ein paar (a few, some, some few);—anfangs (in the beginning); teils
(partly); einesteils (on the one part or hand); andernteils (on the other part or
hand); meinerseits (on my part); morgens (in the morning); abends (in the
evening); vormittags (in the fore-noon) [but: des Morgens, des Abends,
heute
Nachmittag, etc., Sonntags, Montags, etc.]; überhaupt (in general, altogether,
moreover); unterwegs (on the way); heutzutage (now-a-days); beizeiten (in time,
betimes); bisweilen (at times); einmal (once); zweimal (twice);
bergauf (uphill);
kopfüber (head over heels), etc.
2. With Nouns used in Verbal-Combinations, in which, by the by,
they are strongly accented, and treated as separable particles, i.e. are separated
from the verb and placed at the end of the clause when used in a principal
sentence and in a simple tense. Such Verbal-Combinations are:—re´cht haben
(to be right); u´nrecht haben (to be wrong); lei´d thun (to be sorry);
we´h thun (to
hurt);—schu´ld habenorsein (to be in fault);—fei´nd sein (to be hostile);
mir ist
a´ngst, wo´hl (I am afraid, well); mir ist no´t (it is necessary to me, I require);
mir ist we´he (I am grieved); das ist scha´de (that is a pity); ich bin wi´llens (I have
a mind, I intend);—sta´ttfinden, sta´tthaben (to take place); wa´hrnehmen
(to perceive);
tei´lnehmen (to take part in, to sympathise with); ü´berhandnehmen (to
increase); hau´shalten (to keep house, to manage); a´chtgeben (to pay attention);
prei´sgeben (to abandon, to expose); bra´chliegen (to lie fallow); zusta´tten kommen (to
be of use, to come in usefully); insta´nd setzen (to repair, to restore); zusta´nde
kommen (to accomplish); imsti´ch lassen (to leave in the lurch), etc.—Er hält haus;
es ist mir zustatten gekommen; es hat überhandgenommen; es ist mir zuteil geworden.
But: Er hat keinen Teil an mir, etc.
3. With Pronouns and Numerals, as:—jemand, niemand, jeder, keiner,
einer, der eine, der andere, man;—etliche (some),
einige, einzelne, manche, viele, alle,
alles,
etwas, nichts, beide;—die (alle)
andern, das (alles) andre, die
(alle) übrigen, das (alles)
übrige, das meiste, der (das) nämliche,
der erste, der letzte, der zweite, der nächste, der
erste beste, ein jeglicher, etc.
But:—Use Capital Initials (as before):—
(a) with Ordinal Numerals and Adjectives preceded by the definite
article and used in apposition to a proper noun, as: Friedrich
der Zweite; Karl der Große, etc.
(b) With Pronouns and Adjectives in titles, as:—Se. Majestät der
König; das Kaiserliche Zollamt (the Imperial Custom-House); der
Wirkliche Geheimrat von Humboldt (the Privy Councillor von Humboldt).
(c) With Pronouns used in addressing persons, more especially
in letters, as:—Sie genießen mein volles Vertrauen; wir glauben Ihnen
alles; das Haus Ihrer Eltern war mir stets geöffnet; ich will Dir bald mehr
davon erzählen; stets bleibe ich Dein Dich liebender Sohn Heinrich, etc.
4. In Adjectival and Adverbial Clauses, as:—groß und klein (grown up
people and children); arm und reich (poor and rich people); alt und jung, durch dick
und dünn;—am besten, fürs erste, bei weitem (by far); aufs deutlichste,
im allgemeinen,
im ganzen, im folgenden, im wesentlichen (essentially, in all essential points);
von
neuem, vor kurzem, im voraus (beforehand); von vorne, ohne weiteres,
um ein beträchtliches,
etc.—and also in idiomatic phrases, such as:—Er zieht den kürzern
dabei (he is the loser by it); ich will Ihnen Ihre Unarten zugute halten (I will bear
with your rudeness; I will excuse your incivilities); der Junge hat Sie zum besten
(the boy amuses himself at your expense); ich will es Ihnen zuliebe thun (I will do
it to please you), etc.
(Division of Words into Syllables.)
1. When part of a German word has to be separated from the rest in order
to be carried on to the next line, the division into Syllables is made as we
would naturally deliver them whilst pronouncing the word very slowly and
distinctly. The compound letters: ch, ck, dt,
pf, ph, sch, sp, st,
ß, th,
and tz, should, as a rule, not be separated. [For exceptions see § 2 of this
chapter.] Examples:—ru-hen, die-ser, Son-ne, Mut-ter, Mit-tag,
den-noch, Flüs-se,
Wet-ter-glas, fünf-te, An-ker, Wech-sel, Hoff-nung,
Hoff-nun-gen, Fin-ger, Lang-sam-keit,—Brü-che,
ha-cken, Stä-dte, klo-pfen, Or-tho-gra-phie, lö-schen,
aus-spre-chen, lä-stig,
schie-ßen, Lo-thar, kra-tzen, He-xe.
2. The syllables forming the constituent parts of Compound Words should
not be broken up, and the principal rule, as expressed above, cannot always
be applied to them. Examples: hin-ein, hier-auf, her-ein, dar-um,
war-um, vor-aus,
voll-en-den, In-ter-es-se, Mi-kro-skop, At-mo-sphä-re,
Schiff-fahrt, Schwimmm-mei-ster,
ge-müt-lich, Dis-pens, dis-pu-tie-ren, Dis-po-si-ti-on,
be-ob-ach-ten, auf-er-ste-hen,
Ge-burts-tag, Früh-lings-tag. But write ‘Schiffahrt’ and ‘Schwimmeister’
when no separation takes place.
1. The Apostrophe is more especially used for indicating the suppression of
certain letters in poetry and in the language of every-day life, as in English.
Examples: Ich lieb’ dich; Steh’ auf!Wie geht’s?So ist’s recht;
Geld hab’ ich
nicht.
2. Contractions of prepositions and articles are used without the Apostrophe,
as: am, beim, unterm, ans, ins,
zum.
3. The Apostrophe is abolished before the inflections indicating the
Genitive relation of proper names, as: Ciceros Briefe; Schillers Gedichte;
Homers Ilias; Fritzens Geburtstag; Hamburgs Handel; Sophiens Mutter;
die
Einwohner Breslaus.
4. Family names, however, terminating ins or z, the genitive of
which cannot be formed by addings, require an Apostrophe to be placed
after them for indicating the Genitive relation, as: Demosthenes’ Reden; Voß’
Luise.
INDEX TO THE GRAMMATICAL RULES AND IDIOMATIC RENDERINGS.
A.
a or an preceded by ‘not’, how to render, S. 126, N. 12.
The numeral ‘a’ not translated before hundred or thousand, S. 132, N. 10.
da, adv. in combination with a prep. governing the Dat. or Acc., S. 4, N. 5, B.
Da, conj., denotes logical cause, used for rendering ‘as’ and ‘since’, S. 30, N. 4.
Da,
adv., in connection with a prep., required in the principal clause when verbs and adjectives governing a prep. are followed by a subordinate clause, S. 87, N. 6.
Definite Article, the. When to be repeated, S. 10, N. 9.
Its position in connection with adjectives and adverbs, S. 28, N. 9.
Before nouns representing a whole class, and before abstract nouns, S. 3, N. 2.
Before names of persons preceded by an adj. or a common name, S. 10, N. 2.
Used to mark the Gen., Dat., and Acc. of proper names, S. 25, N. 5.
Used before objects individualised or singled out, S. 40, N. 9.
Used instead of Posses. Adj. Pronouns, S. 43, N. 9, A and B.
Demonstrative Pronoun, followed by a relat. pron., how to render, S. 8, N. 1.
der and die
must be used as relat. pronouns in reference to a personal pron. of the 1st and 2nd pers. sing. and pl., and also in reference to the pers. pron. of the 3rd person pl. (Sie),
S. 78, N. 7.
do, used in sentences of entreaty, rendered by doch, S. 92, N. 9.
doch, adv., = ‘do’ in sentences of entreaty, S. 92, N. 9.
E.
er, suffix, used to form names of male persons from names of countries and places, S. 157, N. 4.
zu, prep. Required with verbs denoting choosing, appointing, etc., S. 27, N. 4, and S. 102, N. 13.
The End.
Clarendon Press Series
LANGE’S GERMAN COURSE
CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING WORKS:—
THIRD EDITION, with the German spelling revised to meet the requirements of
the German Government Regulations of 1880.
THE GERMANS AT HOME; A Practical Introduction to German
Conversation, with an Appendix, containing the Essentials of German
Grammar, and a synopsis of the changes the German spelling has
undergone through the Government Regulations of 1880.
[Price 2s. 6d.
SECOND EDITION, CAREFULLY REVISED.
THE GERMAN MANUAL; A German Grammar, A Reading-book,
and A Handbook of Conversation in German.
[Price 7s. 6d.
‘The German Manual’ is intended to follow ‘The Germans At Home.’ It contains,
besides a complete Grammar, a series of interesting anecdotes, stories, fables,
letters, and conversations arranged in progressive order, and finishes with a German
Play, and Franz Hoffman’s well written and highly interesting story of ‘Beethoven,’
especially adapted for this work. It offers great advantages for self-instruction, and
will be very useful to persons who, having a certain knowledge of German, desire to
obtain fluency in speaking and writing the language.
A GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE, in two Parts.
Part I, Accidence; Part II, Syntax. With an Appendix, comprehending:—
I.
The Declension of German Nouns.
II.
Essentials of Construction.
III.
Essentials of Word-building.
IV.
The Use and signification of the Auxiliary Verbs of Mood.
V.
On Punctuation.
[Price 3s. 6d.
The ‘Grammar’ forms the first part of the ‘German Manual’ and, in this separate
form, is intended for the use of students who wish to make themselves acquainted with
German Grammar chiefly for the purpose of being able to read German books. It is
divided into paragraphs, and will commend itself as a text-book to the notice of
teachers who, in pursuing the study of German Literature with their pupils, require a
Grammar in a concise form for reference and study.
THIRD EDITION, with the German spelling revised to meet the requirements of the
German Government Regulations of 1880.
GERMAN COMPOSITION; A Theoretical and Practical Guide to
the art of Translating English Prose into German; with an Appendix
containing, among other matters, a synopsis of the changes the
German spelling has undergone through the Government Regulations
of 1880.
[Price 4s. 6d.
[A Key to the above, price 5s.]
The book has been arranged so that it may be used with advantage by students
who do not possess the author’s other works.
SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES THE GERMAN SPELLING HAS UNDERGONE
THROUGH THE GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS OF 1880; a
concise and easy Guide for English students of German desirous of adopting the
new official German spelling. Reprinted from ‘German Composition.’
[Price 6d.
[Any one of the preceding books, being complete in itself, may be used
independently of any other book in the series, according to the requirements
of the student.]
EXTRACTS FROM OPINIONS
ON H. LANGE’S GERMAN COURSE.
‘The works bear evidence of remarkable painstaking, great
teaching power, and a thorough understanding of the art of teaching.’—Dr.
Karl Dammann, Lecturer on the German Language and Literature
at the Mason Science College, Queen’s College, and the Midland Institute,
Birmingham.
‘The Germans at Home.’
‘The author is a practical teacher, and we are glad to recommend his
work as likely to reduce, as far as possible, the inevitable difficulties to be
encountered in the first study of a foreign language. Happy boys and girls
of the present day, if they only knew their own blessings!’—Journal of Education.
‘“The Germans at Home” consists of forty conversations, intended to
illustrate one day out of the life of a German family at home, as its name
implies. The result is a decided improvement upon the run of books of
this class. The interest of the student is sustained throughout, and everything
is done in fact, which can be done to create a royal road to a knowledge
of German.’—Manchester Courier.
‘“The Germans at Home” is an excellent book, and is likely to be extensively
used.’—Schoolmaster.
‘The traits called “new” in this Course are thus defined by the author.
“First the Facts, and then the Theory, the Laws and the Inferences.”
“The Germans at Home” (printed in Roman characters) contains forty
conversations, all connected, so as “to illustrate one day out of the life of a
German family at home.” The themes are German, the idioms are modern,
and the “variations” that follow the conversations seem likely to be
useful.’—Athenæum.
‘A Grammar of the German Language.’
‘The author has obviously studied to make as clear as possible the arrangement
of his materials, and the printer has aided that endeavour.’—Athenæum.
‘The Grammar is a good one.’—Schoolmaster.
‘The Germans at Home’ and ‘The German Manual.’
‘Instead of wearying the unhappy student with learning a lot of dry and
elaborate technicalities of accidence and syntax at the outset, Mr. Lange
starts him with conversations—forty in number, each illustrative of one day
out of the life of a German family at home—and very soon lands him “in
medias res” by the aid of interlinear translation, by the means of which he
can gain a knowledge of the idioms and peculiarities of structure of the
language, while he is at the same time acquiring a knowledge of the theory
of the language, i.e. of its accidence and syntax. Thus we get in Mr.
Lange’s system the facts first, and then proceed to the theory, laws, and
inferences—first the life and spirit, then the form and body in which they
are clothed. Only those who have themselves learnt and taught (or tried
to learn and teach) German, can thoroughly appreciate the advantages of
this plan, which avails itself of the two leading principles which underlie all
learning, and ought to form the basis of all teaching, viz. the principles of
imitation and of variation. When we remember the long and weary hours
spent by ourselves in learning German, we envy Mr. Lange’s pupils, and
those who have the chance of using his books.’—Manchester Critic.
‘Mr. Lange’s “German Course” is thoroughly trustworthy and useful.’—Glasgow
News.
‘Herr Lange has worked out his principle most successfully.’—Edinburgh
Daily Review.
‘The German Manual.’
‘This is a very elaborate work. It contains an amount of matter
unusually great, and of unquestionable excellence. If not multum in
parvo, it is at least multum in uno. The bigness of the book is largely due
to the fact that the author has amalgamated with this volume the entire
grammar, which is also published in a separate form. The grammar is
a good one; but the special feature of the “German Manual” consists
in its comprehensiveness, which will be apparent from the following summary
of its contents:—Part I. Accidence. Part II. Syntax. Part III.
Interlinear Translation. Part IV. German for Translation into English.
Part V. Notes and Helpful Hints. Part VI. English Version of Part IV.
for Re-translation. By an ingenious system of adaptation, the six parts
are to be proceeded with simultaneously. Thus every part throwing
light upon the rest, and the student having to deal with the same passages
over and over again, the process of mental assimilation is likely to be
rendered more real and rapid. When we add that the book contains a
humorous comedy and an excellent life of Beethoven, our readers will
acknowledge that Herr Lange has provided that variety which is proverbially
charming. From the conspicuous absence of the namby-pamby
element—unfortunately too common in translation exercises—as well as
from the general excellence of the work, it may be confidently recommended,
especially for the use of adult students.’—Schoolmaster.
‘Herr Lange’s method is excellent for simplicity and clearness.’—Saturday
Review.
‘German Composition.’
‘Having used H. Lange’s Composition for about a couple of years with
my advanced pupils, I am in a position to state that it has more than
answered the very favourable expectations I had formed on a first perusal
of the work. To my mind its chief recommendations are:—
1st. It may safely be put into the hands of learners at an earlier stage
than most works of this class.
2nd. The judicious manner in which the exercises have been graduated,
and the careful elucidation of all grammatical difficulties.
3rd. The admirable rendering of English idioms into their German
equivalents.’—John J. T. Jackson, Lecturer on Modern Languages and
Philology at the Lancashire Independent College, and the Wesleyan College,
Didsbury.
‘After a very careful perusal of “Hermann Lange’s German Composition,”
I have no hesitation to say that it seems to me to be the best book
of that kind,—not only with regard to the choice of good extracts from
modern English authors, but also in respect to the thoroughness and correctness
of the Notes. I shall find it exceedingly useful with my pupils for the
Army and Civil Service Examinations.’—Theodore H. Dittel, London,
Tutor to Students preparing for the Army and Civil Service Examinations.
‘I prefer the book to all others on German Composition.’—Ernest
R. Morgan, London.
‘We begin with simple stories of two or three sentences each, and so
fully annotated that they may be read off into German by a pupil who
knows his first accidence, and ascend by easy gradients to Sir Walter Scott
and Macaulay.
‘It is throughout a careful, accurate, and scholarly piece of
work.’—Journal of Education.
Oxford: AT THE CLARENDON PRESS.
LONDON: HENRY FROWDE, Oxford University Press Warehouse, Amen Corner, E.C.
CLARENDON PRESS BOOKS — HISTORY — Greece, Italy, Egypt, etc — Archaeology — English History: Sources — The Clarendon Press Series of Charters, Statutes, etc. — Calendars, etc. — History of Oxford — Bibliography — Bishop Stubbs’s and Professor Freeman’s Books — Special Periods and Biographies — School Books — Oxford School Histories — History and Geography of America and the British Colonies — Rulers of India — European History — School Geographies. — Geography and Anthropology — LAW — Jurisprudence — Roman Law — English Law — Constitutional Documents — International Law — Colonial and Indian Law — Political Science and Economy — Economic Documents
Clinton’s Fasti Hellenici, from the LVIth to the CXXIIIrd Olympiad.
Third edition. 4to. £1 14s. 6d. net. From the CXXIVth Olympiad to the Death
of Augustus. Second edition. 4to. £1 12s. net. Epitome. 8vo. 6s. 6d. net.
Clinton’s Fasti Romani, from the death of Augustus to the death of
Heraclius. Two volumes. 4to. £2 2s. net. Epitome. 8vo. 7s. net.
A Manual of Greek Historical Inscriptions. By E. L. Hicks.
New edition, revised by G. F. Hill. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
Latin Historical Inscriptions, illustrating the history of the Early
Empire. By G. MᶜN. Rushforth. 8vo. 10s. net.
Sources for Greek History between the Persian and Peloponnesian
Wars. By G. F. Hill. 8vo. Reissue, revised. 10s. 6d. net.
Sources for Roman History,B.C. 133-70. By A. H. J. Greenidge
and A. M. Clay. Crown 8vo. 5s. 6d. net.
A Manual of Ancient History. By G. Rawlinson. 2nd ed. 8vo. 14s.
Finlay’s History of Greece from its Conquest by the Romans (B.C. 146)
to A.D. 1864. A new edition, revised, and in part re-written, with many
additions, by the Author, and edited by H. F. Tozer. 7 vols. 8vo. 63s. net.
The History of Sicily from the earliest times. By E. A. Freeman. 8vo.
Vols. I and II. The Native Nations: The Phoenician and Greek Settlements
to the beginning of Athenian Intervention. £2 2s. net.
Vol. III. The Athenian and Carthaginian Invasions. £1 4s. net.
Vol. IV. From the Tyranny of Dionysios to the Death of Agathoklês.
Edited from posthumous MSS, by A. J. Evans. £1 1s. net.
Italy and her Invaders (A.D. 376-814). With plates and maps. Eight
volumes. 8vo. By T. Hodgkin. Vols. I-IV in the second edition.
I-II. The Visigothic, Hunnish, and Vandal Invasions, and the Herulian
Mutiny. £2 2s.
III-IV. The Ostrogothic Invasion. The Imperial Restoration. £1 16s.
V-VI. The Lombard Invasion, and the Lombard Kingdom. £1 16s.
VII-VIII. Frankish Invasions, and the Frankish Empire. £1 4s.
The Dynasty of Theodosius; or, Seventy Years’ Struggle with the
Barbarians. By the same author. Crown 8vo. 6s.
Aetolia; its Geography, Topography, and Antiquities.
By W. J. Woodhouse. With maps and illustrations. Royal 8vo. £1 1s. net.
The Islands of the Aegean. By H. F. Tozer. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d.
Dalmatia, the Quarnero, and Istria; with Cettigne and Grado.
By T. G. Jackson. Three volumes. With plates and illustrations. 8vo. 31s. 6d. net.
Cramer’s Description of Asia Minor. Two volumes. 8vo. 11s.
Description of Ancient Greece. 3 vols. 8vo. 16s. 6d.
The Cities and Bishoprics of Phrygia. By W. M. Ramsay.
Royal 8vo. Vol. I, Part I. The Lycos Valley and South-Western Phrygia.
18s. net. Vol. I, Par. II. West and West Central Phrygia. £1 1s. net.
Stories of the High Priests of Memphis, the Sethon of
Herodotus, and the Demotic Tales of Khamnas. By F. Ll. Griffith. With
Portfolio containing seven facsimiles. Royal 8vo. £2 7s. 6d. net.
The Arab Conquest of Egypt. By A. J. Butler. With maps and
plans. 8vo. 16s. net.
Baghdad during the Abbasid Caliphate, from contemporary
sources. By G. Le Strange. With eight plans. 8vo. 16s. net.
Ancient Khotan. Detailed report of Archaeological explorations
in Chinese Turkestan carried out and described under the orders of H.M.
Indian Government by M. Aurel Stein. Vol. I. Text, with descriptive list
of antiques, seventy-two illustrations in the text, and appendices. Vol. II.
One hundred and nineteen collotype and other illustrations and a map.
2 vols. 4to. £5 5s. net.
Catalogue of the Coins in the Indian Museum, Calcutta, including
the Cabinet of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (Published for the Trustees of
the Indian Museum.) Royal 8vo, with numerous collotype plates. Vol. I,
by V. A. Smith, 30s. net; or Part I (Early Foreign Dynasties and Guptas),
15s. net, Part II (Ancient Coins of Indian Types), 6s. net, Part III (Persian,
Mediaeval, South Indian, Miscellaneous), 10s. 6d. net. Vol. II, by H. N.
Wright (the first section of Part II by Sir J. Bourdillon), 30s. net (Sultáns
of Delhí, Contemporary Dynasties in India). Vol. III, by H. N. Wright,
40s. net (Mughal Emperors).
Ancient Coptic Churches of Egypt. By A. J. Butler. 2 vols.
8vo. 30s.
A Catalogue of the Cyprus Museum. By J. L. Myres and
Max Ohnefalsch-Richter. 8vo. With eight plates, 7s. 6d. net.
A Catalogue of the Sparta Museum. By M. N. Tod and
A. J. B. Wace. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
Catalogue of the Greek Vases in the Ashmolean
Museum. By P. Gardner. Small folio, linen, with 26 plates. £3 3s. net.
The Cults of the Greek States. By L. R. Farnell. 8vo.
Vols. I and II, with 61 plates and over 100 illustrations. £1 12s. net;
Vols. III and IV, with 86 plates. £1 12s. net.
Classical Archaeology in Schools. By P. Gardner and J. L.
Myres. 8vo. Second edition. Paper covers, 1s. net.
Introduction to Greek Sculpture. By L. E. Upcott. Second
edition. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d.
De Antiquis Marmoribus, Blasii Caryophili. 1828. 7s. 6d.
Fragmenta Herculanensia. A Catalogue of the Oxford copies of the
Herculanean Rolls, with texts of several papyri. By W. Scott. Royal 8vo. £1 1s.
Thirty-six Engravings of Texts and Alphabets from the Herculanean
Fragments. Folio. Small paper, 10s. 6d., large paper, £1 1s.
Herculanensium Voluminum Partes II. 1824. 8vo. 10s.
Baedae Opera Historica, edited by C. Plummer. Two volumes.
Crown 8vo, leather back. £1 1s. net.
Asser’s Life of Alfred, with the Annals of St. Neot,
edited by W. H. Stevenson. Crown 8vo. 12s. net.
The Alfred Jewel, an historical essay. With illustrations and a map,
by J. Earle. Small 4to, buckram. 12s. 6d. net.
Two of the Saxon Chronicles Parallel; with supplementary
extracts from the others. A Revised Text, edited, with introduction, notes,
appendices, and glossary, by C. Plummer and J. Earle. Two volumes.
Crown 8vo, leather back. Vol. I. Text, appendices, and glossary. 10s. 6d.
Vol. II. Introduction, notes, and index. 12s. 6d.
The Saxon Chronicles (787-1001 A.D.). Crown 8vo, stiff covers. 3s.
Handbook to the Land-Charters, and other Saxonic Documents,
by J. Earle. Crown 8vo. 16s.
The Crawford Collection of early Charters and Documents, now in
the Bodleian Library. Edited by A. S. Napier and W. H. Stevenson.
Small 4to, cloth. 12s.
The Chronicle of John of Worcester, 1118-1140. Edited by
J. R. H. Weaver. Crown 4to. 7s. 6d. net.
Dialogus de Scaccario. Edited by A. Hughes, C. G. Crump, and
C. Johnson, with introduction and notes. 8vo. 12s. 6d. net.
Passio et Miracula Beati Olaui. Edited from the Twelfth-century
MS by F. Metcalfe. Small 4to. 6s.
The Song of Lewes. Edited from the MS, with introduction and
notes, by C. L. Kingsford. Extra fcap 8vo. 5s.
Chronicon Galfridi le Baker de Swynebroke, edited by Sir
E. Maunde Thompson, K.C.B. Small 4to, 18s.; cloth, gilt top, £1 1s.
Chronicles of London. Edited, with introduction and notes, by
C. L. Kingsford. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
Gascoigne’s Theological Dictionary (‘Liber Veritatum’): selected
passages, illustrating the condition of Church and State, 1403-1458. With
an introduction by J. E. Thorold Rogers. Small 4to. 10s. 6d.
Fortescue’s Governance of England. A revised text, edited,
with introduction, etc., by C. Plummer. 8vo, leather back. 12s. 6d.
Stow’s Survey of London. Edited by C. L. Kingsford. 8vo, 2 vols.,
with a folding map of London in 1600 (by H. W. Cribb) and other illustrations.
30s. net.
The Protests of the Lords, from 1624 to 1874; with introductions.
By J. E. Thorold Rogers. In three volumes. 8vo. £2 2s.
From the earliest times to 1307. By Bishop Stubbs.
Select Charters and other illustrations of English Constitutional History.
Eighth edition. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d.
From 1558 to 1625.
Select Statutes and other Constitutional Documents of
the Reigns of Elizabeth and James I. Third edition.
Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d.
From 1625 to 1660. By S. R. Gardiner.
The Constitutional Documents of the Puritan Revolution.
Third edition. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d.
Calendar of Charters and Rolls preserved in the Bodleian Library.
8vo. £1 11s. 6d.
Calendar of the Clarendon State Papers preserved in the
Bodleian Library. In three volumes. 1869-76.
Vol. I. From 1523 to January 1649. 8vo. 18s. Vol. II. From 1649 to
1654. 8vo. 16s. Vol. III. From 1655 to 1657. 8vo. 14s.
Hakluyt’s Principal Navigations, being narratives of the Voyages
of the Elizabethan Seamen to America. Selection edited by E. J. Payne.
Crown 8vo, with portraits. Second edition. Two volumes. 5s. each.
Also abridged in one volume, with additional notes, maps, &c., by
C. Raymond Beazley. Crown 8vo, with illustrations. 4s. 6d. Also,
separately, ‘The Voyages of Hawkins, Frobisher, and Drake.’ 2s. 6d.
Aubrey’s ‘Brief Lives,’ set down between the Years 1669 and 1696.
Edited from the Author’s MSS by A. Clark. Two volumes. 8vo. £1 5s.
Whitelock’s Memorials of English Affairs from 1625 to 1660. 4 vols.
8vo. £1 10s.
Ludlow’s Memoirs, 1625-1672. Edited, with Appendices of Letters
and illustrative documents, by C. H. Firth. Two volumes. 8vo. £1 16s.
Luttrell’s Diary. A brief Historical Relation of State Affairs, 1678-1714.
Six volumes. 8vo. £1 10s. net.
Burnet’s History of James II. 8vo. 9s. 6d.
Life of Sir M. Hale, with Fell’s Life of
Dr. Hammond. Small 8vo. 2s. 6d.
Memoirs of James and William, Dukes of
Hamilton. 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Burnet’s History of My Own Time. A new edition based on
that of M. J. Routh. Edited by Osmund Airy. Vol. I. 12s. 6d. net.
Vol. II. (Completing Charles the Second, with Index to Vols. I and II.)
12s. 6d. net.
Supplement, derived from Burnet’s Memoirs, Autobiography, etc, all
hitherto unpublished. Edited by H. C. Foxcroft, 1902. 8vo. 16s. net.
The Whitefoord Papers, 1739 to 1810. Ed. by W. A. S. Hewins.
8vo. 12s. 6d.
A complete list of the Publications of the Oxford Historical Society
can be obtained from Mr. Frowde.
Manuscript Materials relating to the History of Oxford;
contained in the printed catalogues of the Bodleian and College Libraries.
By F. Madan. 8vo. 7s. 6d.
The Early Oxford Press. A Bibliography of Printing and Publishing
at Oxford, ‘1468’-1640. With notes, appendices, and illustrations. By
F. Madan. 8vo. 18s.
Cotton’s Typographical Gazetteer. First Series. 8vo. 12s. 6d.
The Constitutional History of England, in its Origin and
Development. By W. Stubbs. Library edition. Three volumes. Demy
8vo. £2 8s. Also in three volumes, crown 8vo, price 12s. each.
Seventeen Lectures on the Study of Mediaeval and Modern History
and kindred subjects, 1867-1884. By the same. Third edition, revised and
enlarged, 1900. Crown 8vo, half-roan. 8s. 6d.
History of the Norman Conquest of England; its Causes
and Results. By E. A. Freeman. Vols. I, II and V (English edition) are
out of print.
Vols. III and IV. £1 1s. each. Vol. VI (Index). 10s. 6d.
A Short History of the Norman Conquest of England.
Third edition. By the same. Extra fcap 8vo. 2s. 6d.
The Reign of William Rufus and the Accession of Henry the
First. By the same. Two volumes. 8vo. £1 16s.
Ancient Britain and the Invasions of Julius Cæsar. By
T. Rice Holmes. 8vo. 21s. net.
Life and Times of Alfred the Great, being the Ford Lectures
for 1901. By C. Plummer. 8vo. 5s. net.
The Domesday Boroughs. By Adolphus Ballard. 8vo. 6s. 6d. net.
Villainage in England. Essays in English Mediaeval History. By
P. Vinogradoff. 8vo. 16s. net.
English Society in the Eleventh Century. Essays in
English Mediaeval History. By P. Vinogradoff. 8vo. 16s. net.
The Gild Merchant: a contribution to British municipal history. By
C. Gross. Two volumes. 8vo, leather back. £1 4s.
The Welsh Wars of Edward I; a contribution to mediaeval
military history. By J. E. Morris. 8vo. 9s. 6d. net.
The Great Revolt of 1381. By C. Oman. With two maps. 8vo.
8s. 6d. net.
Lancaster and York. (A.D. 1399-1485.) By Sir J. H. Ramsay. Two
volumes. 8vo, with Index. £1 17s. 6d. Index separately, 1s. 6d.
Life and Letters of Thomas Cromwell. By R. B. Merriman.
In two volumes. [Vol. I, Life and Letters, 1523-1535, etc. Vol. II, Letters,
1536-1540, notes, index, etc.] 8vo. 18s. net.
A History of England, principally in the Seventeenth Century. By
L. von Ranke. Translated under the superintendence of G. W. Kitchin
and C. W. Boase. Six volumes. 8vo. £3 3s. net. Index separately, 1s.
Sir Walter Ralegh, a Biography, by W. Stebbing. Post 8vo. 6s. net.
Biographical Memoir of Dr. William Markham. Archbishop
of York, by Sir Clements Markham, K.C.B. 8vo. 5s. net.
The Life and Works of John Arbuthnot. By G. A. Aitken
8vo. cloth extra, with Portrait. 16s.
Life and Letters of Sir Henry Wotton. By L. Pearsall-Smith.
8vo. Two volumes. 25s. net.
Great Britain and Hanover. By A. W. Ward. Crown 8vo. 5s.
History of the Peninsular War. By C. Oman. To be completed
in six volumes, 8vo., with many maps, plans, and portraits.
Already published: Vol. I. 1807-1809, to Corunna. Vol. II. 1809, to
Talavera. Vol. III. 1809-10, to Torres Vedras. 14s. net each.
Anglo-Chinese Commerce and Diplomacy: mainly in the
nineteenth century. By A. J. Sargent. 12s. 6d. net.
Frederick York Powell. A Life and a selection from his Letters
and Occasional Writings. By Oliver Elton. Two volumes. 8vo. With
photogravure portraits, facsimiles, etc. 21s. net.
David Binning Monro: a Short Memoir. By J. Cook Wilson.
8vo, stiff boards, with portrait. 2s. net.
F. W. Maitland. Two lectures by A. L. Smith. 8vo. 2s. 6d. net.
Companion to English History (Middle Ages). Edited by F. P.
Barnard. With 97 illustrations. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d. net.
School History of England to the death of Victoria. With maps,
plans, etc. By O. M. Edwards, R. S. Rait, and others. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d.
Crown 8vo. with many illustrations, each 1s. 6d. net.
Berkshire, by E. A. G. Lamborn.
Oxfordshire, by H. A. Liddell.
Others in preparation.
Also, for junior pupils, illustrated, each 1s.
Stories from the History of Berkshire. By E. A. G.
Lamborn.
Stories from the History of Oxfordshire. By John Irving.
History of the New World called America. By E. J. Payne.
Vol. I. 8vo. 18s. Bk. I. The Discovery. Bk. II, Part I. Aboriginal America.
Vol. II. 8vo. 14s. Bk. II, Part II. Aboriginal America (concluded).
The Canadian War of 1812. By Sir C. P. Lucas, K.C.M.G. 8vo.
With eight maps. 12s. 6d. net.
Historical Geography of the British Colonies. By Sir C. P.
Lucas, K.C.M.G. Crown 8vo.
Introduction. New edition by H. E. Egerton. 1903. (Origin and
growth of the colonies.) With eight maps. 3s. 6d. In cheaper binding,
2s. 6d.
Vol. I. The Mediterranean and Eastern Colonies.
With 13 maps. Second edition, revised and brought up to date, by
R. E. Stubbs. 1906. 5s.
Vol. II. The West Indian Colonies. With twelve
maps. Second edition, revised and brought up to date, by C. Atchley,
I.S.O. 1905. 7s. 6d.
Vol. III. West Africa. Second Edition. Revised to the
end of 1899 by H. E. Egerton. With five maps. 7s. 6d.
Vol. IV. South and East Africa. Historical and Geographical.
With eleven maps. 9s. 6d.
Also Part I. Historical. 1898. 6s. 6d. Part II. 1903. Geographical
3s. 6d.
Vol. V. Canada, Part I. 1901. 6s. Part II, by H. E. Egerton.
4s. 6d. Part III (Geographical) in preparation.
Vol. VI. Australasia. By J. D. Rogers. 1907. With 22 maps.
7s. 6d. Also Part I, Historical, 4s. 6d. Part II, Geographical, 3s. 6d.
History of the Dominion of Canada. By W. P. Greswell. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Geography of the Dominion of Canada and Newfoundland. By the same author.
With ten maps. 1891. Crown 8vo. 6s.
Geography of Africa South of the Zambesi. With maps. 1892. By the same
author. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.
The Claims of the Study of Colonial History upon the
attention of the University of Oxford. An inaugural lecture
delivered on April 28, 1906, by H. E. Egerton. 8vo, paper covers, 1s. net.
Historical Atlas. Europe and her colonies, 27 maps. 35s. net.
Cornewall-Lewis’s Essay on the Government of Dependencies.
Edited by Sir C. P. Lucas, K.C.M.G. 8vo, quarter-bound, 14s.
Edited by Sir W. W. Hunter. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. each.
Asoka. By V. A. Smith.
Bábar. By S. Lane-Poole.
Albuquerque. By H. Morse Stephens.
Akbar. By Colonel Malleson.
Aurangzíb. By S. Lane-Poole.
Dupleix. By Colonel Malleson.
Lord Clive. By Colonel Malleson.
Warren Hastings. By Captain L. J. Trotter.
Mádhava Ráo Sindhia. By H. G. Keene.
The Marquis of Cornwallis. By W. S. Seton-Karr.
Haidar Alí and Tipú Sultán. By L. B. Bowring.
The Marquis Wellesley, K.G. By W. H. Hutton.
Marquess of Hastings. By Major Ross-of-Bladensburg.
Mountstuart Elphinstone. By J. S. Cotton.
Sir Thomas Munro. By J. Bradshaw.
Earl Amherst. By Anne T. Ritchie and R. Evans.
Lord William Bentinck. By D. C. Boulger.
The Earl of Auckland. By Captain L. J. Trotter.
Viscount Hardinge. By his son, Viscount Hardinge.
Ranjit Singh. By Sir L. Griffin.
The Marquess of Dalhousie. By Sir W. W. Hunter.
James Thomason. By Sir R. Temple.
John Russell Colvin. By Sir A. Colvin.
Sir Henry Lawrence, the Pacificator. By Lieut.-General J. J.
MᶜLeod Innes.
Clyde and Strathnairn. By Major-General Sir O. T. Burne.
Earl Canning. By Sir H. S. Cunningham.
Lord Lawrence. By Sir C. Aitchison.
The Earl of Mayo. By Sir W. W. Hunter.
Sketches of Rulers of India. Abridged from the Rulers of India
by G. D. Oswell. (In the press.)
The Imperial Gazetteer of India. New edition. To be completed
in twenty-six volumes. 8vo. Subscription price, cloth, £5 net;
morocco back, £6 6s. net. The four volumes of ‘The Indian Empire’
separately 6s. net each, in cloth, or 7s. 6d. net with morocco back; the
Atlas separately 15s. net in cloth, or 17s. 6d. net with morocco back.
Subscriptions may be sent through any bookseller.
Vol. I. Descriptive.
Vol. II. Historical.
Vol. III. Economic.
Vol. IV. Administrative.
Vol. V-XXIV. Alphabetical Gazetteer.
Vol. XXV. Index. [In the press.
Vol. XXVI. Atlas. [In preparation.
Each volume contains a map of India specially prepared for this Edition.
Reprints from the Imperial Gazetteer.
A sketch of the Flora of British India. By Sir Joseph Hooker. 8vo. Paper
covers. 1s. net.
The Indian Army. A sketch of its History and Organization. 8vo. Paper
covers. 1s. net.
A Brief History of the Indian Peoples. By Sir W. W. Hunter.
Revised up to 1903 by W. H. Hutton. Eighty-ninth thousand. 3s. 6d.
The Government of India, being a digest of the Statute Law relating
thereto; with historical introduction and illustrative documents. By Sir
C. P. Ilbert. Second edition, 1907. 10s. 6d. net.
The Early History of India from 600 B.C. to the Muhammadan
Conquest, including the invasion of Alexander the
Great. By V. A. Smith. 8vo. With maps, plans, and other illustrations.
Second edition, revised and enlarged. 14s. net.
The Oxford Student’s History of India. By V. A. Smith.
Crown 8vo. With 7 maps and 10 other illustrations. 2s. 6d.
The English Factories in India: By W. Foster. 8vo. (Published
under the patronage of His Majesty’s Secretary of State for India in Council.)
Vol. I. 1618-1621. 12s. 6d. n. Vol. II. 1622-1623. 12s. 6d. n.
(The six previous volumes of Letters received by the East India Company
from its Servants in the East (1602-1617) may also be obtained, price
15s. each volume.)
Court Minutes of the East India Company, 1635-1639.
By E. B. Sainsbury. Introduction by W. Foster. 8vo. 12s. 6d. net.
The Court Minutes of the Company previous to 1635 have been calendared
in the Calendars of State Papers, East Indies, published by the Public
Record Office.
Wellesley’s Despatches, Treaties, and other Papers relating to his
Government of India. Selection edited by S. J. Owen. 8vo. £1 4s.
Wellington’s Despatches, Treaties, and other Papers relating to
India. Selection edited by S. J. Owen. 8vo. £1 4s.
Hastings and the Rohilla War. By Sir J. Strachey. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
Historical Atlas of Modern Europe, from the Decline of the
Roman Empire. 90 maps, with letterpress to each: the maps printed by
W. & A. K. Johnston, Ltd., and the whole edited by R. L. Poole.
In one volume, imperial 4to, half-persian, £5 15s. 6d. net; or in selected
sets—British Empire, etc, at various prices from 30s. to 35s. net each;
or in single maps, 1s. 6d. net each. Prospectus on application.
Genealogical Tables illustrative of Modern History. By H. B.
George. Fourth (1904) edition. Oblong 4to, boards. 7s. 6d.
The Life and Times of James the First of Aragon. By
F. D. Swift. 8vo. 12s. 6d.
The Renaissance and the Reformation. A textbook of European
History, 1494-1610. By E. M. Tanner. Crown 8vo, with 8 maps. 3s. 6d.
A History of France, with numerous maps, plans, and tables, by
G. W. Kitchin. Crown 8vo; Vol. I (to 1453), revised by F. F. Urquhart;
Vols. II (1624). III (1795), revised by A. Hassall. 10s. 6d. each volume.
De Tocqueville’s L’Ancien Régime et la Révolution.
Edited, with introductions and notes, by G. W. Headlam. Crown 8vo. 6s.
The Principal Speeches of the Statesmen and Orators
of the French Revolution. 1789-1795. Ed. H. Morse Stephens. Two vols.
Crown 8vo. £1 1s.
Documents of the French Revolution, 1789-1791. By
L. G. Wickham Legg. Crown 8vo. Two volumes. 12s. net.
Napoleonic Statesmanship: Germany. By H. A. L. Fisher.
8vo. with maps. 12s. 6d. net.
Bonapartism. Six lectures by H. A. L. Fisher. 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.
Thiers’ Moscow Expedition, edited by H. B. George. Cr. 8vo,
6 maps. 5s.
Great Britain and Hanover. By A. W. Ward. Crown 8vo. 5s.
History of the Peninsular War. By C. Oman. To be completed
in six volumes, 8vo, with many maps, plans, and portraits.
Already published: Vol. I. 1807-1809, to Corunna. Vol. II. 1809, to
Talavera. Vol. III. 1809-10, to Torres Vedras. 14s. net each.
Relations of Geography and History. By H. B. George.
With two maps. Crown 8vo. Third edition. 4s. 6d.
Geography for Schools, by A. Hughes. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d.
The Oxford Geographies. By A. J. Herbertson. Crown 8vo.
Vol. I. The Preliminary Geography, Ed. 2, 72 maps and diagrams, 1s. 6d.
Vol. II. The Junior Geography, Ed. 2, 166 maps and diagrams, 2s.
Vol. III. The Senior Geography. Ed. 2, 117 maps and diagrams. 2s. 6d.
Practical Geography. By J. F. Unstead. Crown 8vo. Part I.
27 maps and diagrams. 1s. 6d.
The Dawn of Modern Geography. By C. R. Beazley. In three
volumes. £2 10s. Vol. 1 (to A.D. 900). Not sold separately. Vol. II (A.D.
900-1260). 15s. net. Vol. III. 20s. net.
Regions of the World. Geographical Memoirs under the general
editorship of H. J. Mackinder. Large 8vo. Each volume contains maps
and diagrams. 7s. 6d. net per volume.
Britain and the British Seas. Second edition. By H. J. Mackinder.
Central Europe. By John Partsch.
The Nearer East. By D. G. Hogarth.
North America. By J. Russell.
India. By Sir Thomas Holdich.
The Far East. By Archibald Little.
Frontiers: the Romanes Lecture for 1907. By Lord Curzon of Kedleston.
8vo. 2s. net.
The Face of the Earth (Das Antlitz der Erde). By
Eduard Suess. Translated by Hertha Sollas.
Anthropological Essays presented to Edward Burnett Tylor in
honour of his seventy-fifth birthday; H. Balfour, A. E. Crawley,
D. J. Cunningham, L. R. Farnell, J. G. Frazer, A. C. Haddon, E. S.
Hartland, A. Lang, R. R. Marett, C. S. Myers, J. L. Myres, C. H. Read,
Sir J. Rhŷs, W. Ridgeway, W. H. R. Rivers, C. G. Seligmann, T. A. Joyce,
N. W. Thomas, A. Thomson, E. Westermarck; with a bibliography by
Barbara W. Freire-Marreco. Imperial 8vo. 21s. net.
The Evolution of Culture, and other Essays, by the late
Lieut.-Gen. A. Lane-Fox Pitt-Rivers; edited by J. L. Myres, with an
Introduction by H. Balfour. 8vo, with 21 plates, 7s. 6d. net.
Folk-Memory. By Walter Johnson. 8vo. Illustrated.
Celtic Folklore: Welsh and Manx. By J. Rhŷs. 2 vols. 8vo. £1 1s.
Studies in the Arthurian Legend. By J. Rhŷs. 8vo. 12s. 6d.
Iceland and the Faroes. By N. Annandale. With an appendix
on the Celtic Pony, by F. H. A. Marshall. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d. net.
Dubois’ Hindu Manners, Customs, and Ceremonies. Translated
and edited with notes, corrections, and biography, by H. K. Beauchamp.
Third edition. Crown 8vo. 6s. net. On India Paper, 7s. 6d. net.
The Melanesians, studies in their Anthropology and Folk-Lore. By
R. H. Codrington. 8vo. 16s. net.
The Masai, their Language and Folk-lore. By A. C. Hollis.
With introduction by Sir Charles Eliot. 8vo. Illustrated. 14s. net.
The Nandi, their Language and Folk-lore. By A. C. Hollis.
With introduction by Sir Charles Eliot. 8vo. Illustrated. [In the press.
The Ancient Races of the Thebaid: an anthropometrical study.
By Arthur Thomson and D. Randall-MacIver. Imperial 4to, with 6 collotypes,
6 lithographic charts, and many other illustrations. 42s. net.
The Earliest Inhabitants of Abydos. (A craniological study.)
By D. Randall-MacIver. Portfolio. 10s. 6d. net.
Bentham’s Fragment on Government. Edited by F. C.
Montague. 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Bentham’s Introduction to the Principles of Morals and
Legislation. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 6s. 6d.
Studies in History and Jurisprudence. By the Right Hon.
James Bryce. 1901. Two volumes. 8vo. £1 5s. net.
The Elements of Jurisprudence. By T. E. Holland. Tenth
edition. 1906. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
Elements of Law, considered with reference to Principles of General
Jurisprudence. By Sir W. Markby, K.C.I.E. Sixth edition revised. 1905.
8vo. 12s. 6d.
Imperatoris Iustiniani Institutionum Libri Quattuor;
with introductions, commentary, and translation, by J. B. Moyle. Two
volumes. 8vo. Vol. I (fourth edition, 1903). 16s.; Vol. II, Translation
(fourth edition. 1906), 6s.
The Institutes of Justinian, edited as a recension of the Institutes
of Gaius. By T. E. Holland. Second edition. Extra fcap 8vo. 5s.
Select Titles from the Digest of Justinian. By T. E. Holland
and C. L. Shadwell. 8vo. 14s.
Also, sold in parts, in paper covers: Part I. Introductory Titles. 2s. 6d.
Part II. Family Law. 1s. Part III. Property Law. 2s. 6d. Part IV.
Law of Obligations. No. 1. 3s. 6d. No. 2. 4s. 6d.
Gai Institutionum Iuris Civilis Commentarii Quattuor:
with a translation and commentary by the late E. Poste. Fourth edition.
Revised and enlarged by E. A. Whittuck, with an historical introduction
by A. H. J. Greenidge. 8vo. 16s. net.
Institutes of Roman Law, by R. Sohm. Translated by J. C.
Ledlie: with an introductory essay by E. Grueber. Third edition.
8vo. 16s. net.
Infamia; its place in Roman Public and Private Law. By A. H. J.
Greenidge. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
Legal Procedure in Cicero’s Time. By A. H. J. Greenidge.
8vo. 25s. net.
The Roman Law of Damage to Property: being a commentary
on the title of the Digest ‘Ad Legem Aquiliam’ (ix. 2), with an introduction
to the study of the Corpus Iuris Civilis. By E. Grueber. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
Contract of Sale in the Civil Law. By J. B. Moyle. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
The Principles of German Civil Law. By Ernest J. Schuster.
8vo. 12s. 6d. net.
Principles of the English Law of Contract, and of Agency in
its relation to Contract. By Sir W. R. Anson. Eleventh edition. 1906. 8vo.
10s. 6d.
Law and Custom of the Constitution. By the same. In two
volumes. 8vo.
Vol. I. Parliament. (Out of print. New edition in preparation.)
Vol. II. The Crown. Third edition. Part I, 10s. 6d. net. Part II,
8s. 6d. net.
Calendar of Charters and Rolls, containing those preserved in the
Bodleian Library. 8vo. £1 11s. 6d.
Introduction to the History of the Law of Real Property.
By Sir K. E. Digby. Fifth edition. 8vo. 12s. 6d.
Handbook to the Land-Charters, and other Saxonic Documents.
By J. Earle. Crown 8vo. 16s.
Fortescue’s Difference between an Absolute and a Limited
Monarchy. Text revised and edited, with introduction, etc, by C.
Plummer. 8vo, leather back, 12s. 6d.
Legislative Methods and Forms. By Sir C. P. Ilbert, K.C.S.I.
1901. 8vo, leather back, 16s.
Modern Land Law. By E. Jenks. 8vo. 15s.
Essay on Possession in the Common Law. By Sir F.
Pollock and Sir R. S. Wright. 8vo. 8s. 6d.
Outline of the Law of Property. By T. Raleigh. 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Villainage in England. By P. Vinogradoff. 8vo. 16s. net.
Law in Daily Life. By Rud. von Jhering. Translated with Notes
and Additions by H. Goudy. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.
Cases illustrating the Principles of the Law of Torts,
with table of all Cases cited. By F. R. Y. Radcliffe and J. C. Miles. 8vo.
1904. 12s. 6d. net.
The Management of Private Affairs. By Joseph King, F. T. R.
Bigham, M. L. Gwyer, Edwin Cannan, J. S. C. Bridge, A. M. Latter.
Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. net.
Select Charters and other Illustrations of English Constitutional History,
from the earliest times to Edward I. Arranged and edited by W. Stubbs.
Eighth edition. 1900. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d.
Select Statutes and other Constitutional Documents,
illustrative of the reigns of Elizabeth and James I. Edited by G. W.
Prothero. Third edition. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d.
Constitutional Documents of the Puritan Revolution, selected and
edited by S. R. Gardiner. Third edition. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d.
International Law. By W. E. Hall. Fifth edition by J. B. Atlay.
1904. 8vo. £1 1s. net.
Treatise on the Foreign Powers and Jurisdiction of the
British Crown. By W. E. Hall. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
The European Concert in the Eastern Question, a collection
of treatises and other public acts. Edited, with introductions and notes, by
T. E. Holland. 8vo. 12s. 6d.
Studies in International Law. By T. E. Holland. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
The Laws of War on Land. By T. E. Holland. 8vo. 6s. net.
Gentilis Alberici de Iure Belli Libri Tres edidit T. E.
Holland. Small quarto, half-morocco. £1 1s.
The Law of Nations. By Sir T. Twiss. Part I. In time of peace.
New edition, revised and enlarged. 8vo. 15s.
Pacific Blockade. By A. E. Hogan. 8vo. 6s. net.
The Government of India, being a Digest of the Statute Law relating
thereto, with historical introduction and illustrative documents. By Sir C. P.
Ilbert, K.C.S.I. Second edition. 8vo, cloth. 10s. 6d. net.
British Rule and Jurisdiction beyond the Seas. By the late
Sir H. Jenkyns, K.C.B., with a preface by Sir C. P. ILBERT, and a portrait
of the author. 1902. 8vo, leather back, 15s. net.
Cornewall-Lewis’s Essay on the Government of Dependencies.
Edited by Sir C. P. Lucas, K.C.M.G. 8vo, leather back, 14s.
An Introduction to Hindu and Mahommedan Law for
the use of students. 1906. By Sir W. Markby, K.C.I.E. 6s. net.
Land-Revenue and Tenure in British India. By B. H.
Baden-Powell, C.I.E. With map. Second edition, revised by T. W.
Holderness, C.S.I. (1907.) Crown 8vo. 5s. net.
Land-Systems of British India, being a manual of the Land-Tenures,
and of the systems of Land-Revenue administration. By the same.
Three volumes. 8vo, with map. £3 3s.
Anglo-Indian Codes, by Whitley Stokes. 8vo.
Vol. I. Substantive Law. £1 10s. Vol. II. Adjective Law. £1 15s.
1st supplement, 2s. 6d. 2nd supplement, to 1891, 4s. 6d. In one vol., 6s. 6d.
The Indian Evidence Act, with notes by Sir W. Markby, K.C.I.E.
8vo. 3s. 6d. net (published by Mr. Frowde).
Corps de Droit Ottoman: un Recueil des Codes, Lois, Règlements,
Ordonnances et Actes les plus importants du Droit Intérieur, et d’Études
sur le Droit Coutumier de l’Empire Ottoman. Par George Young, Seven
vols. 8vo. Cloth, £4 14s. 6d. net; paper covers, £4 4s. net. Parts I (Vols.
I-III) and II (Vols. IV-VII) can be obtained separately; price per part,
in cloth, £2 17s. 6d. net, in paper covers, £2 12s. 6d. net.
For Bryce’s Studies and other books on general jurisprudence and political
science, see p. 13.
Industrial Organization in the 16th and 17th Centuries.
By G. Unwin, 8vo. 7s. 6d, net.
Relations of the Advanced and Backward Races of
Mankind, the Romanes Lecture for 1902. By J. Bryce. 8vo. 2s. net.
Cornewall-Lewis’s Remarks on the Use and Abuse
of some Political Terms. New edition, with introduction by
T. Raleigh. Crown 8vo. paper, 3s. 6d.; cloth, 4s. 6d.
Adam Smith’s Wealth of Nations. Edited by J. E. Thorold
Rogers. Two volumes. 8vo. £1 1s. net.
Adam Smith’s Lectures on Justice, Police, Revenue and Arms.
Edited with introduction and notes by E. Cannan. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
Bluntschli’s Theory of the State. Translated from the sixth
German edition. Third edition. 1901. Crown 8vo, leather back, 8s. 6d.
Co-operative Production. By B. Jones. With preface by A. H.
Dyke-Acland. Two volumes. Crown 8vo. 15s. net.
A Geometrical Political Economy. Being an elementary
Treatise on the method of explaining some Theories of Pure Economic
Science by diagrams. By H. Cunynghame, C.B. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. net.
The Elements of Railway Economics. By W. M. Acworth.
Crown 8vo. Second impression. 2s. net.
Elementary Political Economy. By E. Cannan. Fourth edition.
Extra fcap 8vo, 1s. net.
Elementary Politics. By Sir T. Raleigh. Sixth edition revised. Extra
fcap 8vo, stiff covers, 1s. net.
The Study of Economic History. By L. L. Price. 1s. net.
Ricardo’s Letters to Malthus (1810-1823). Edited by J. Bonar.
8vo. 7s. 6d.
Letters to Trower and others (1811-1823). Edited
by J. Bonar and J. H. Hollander. 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Lloyd’s Prices of Corn in Oxford, 1583-1830. 8vo. 1s.
The History of Agriculture and Prices in England,A.D. 1259-1793. By J. E. Thorold Rogers.
Vols. I and II (1259-1400). 8vo. 84s. net.
Vols. III and IV (1401-1582). 8vo. 32s. net.
Vols. V and VI (1583-1702). 8vo. 32s. net.
Vol. VII. In two Parts (1702-1793). 8vo. 32s. net.
First Nine Years of the Bank of England. By the same. 8vo.
8s. 6d.
